Home

100 and 180 mm paperless graphic recorders User guide

Contents

1. p a 2 g S a oo wo lt st 5 28 ac 049 80201 we em 2 X o c t S QU QU QU o 3 T o 2 Ej ic o i i a 5 w 5 5 2 CT E Em 1 D DEN ES S c gt m Z o D a o N ec c D las 3 9 2 2 8 8 9 5S ua 9 7 W 5 lt lt G 5 ic
2. Safety Earth lt gt USB 1 USB 2 ma 05 lt L N 4 Port2 Ethernet Mains supply connection a D C 00008 lot 2 Figure 2 2 1 Connector locations small frame units HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 5 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 SIGNAL WIRING Cont USB Ports
3. Contacts shown power off alarm state Four normally open relays Event inputs max 4 option boards Behaviour undefined for 40 8 lt Vin lt 2 V Input 6 shown 2 to 30 V inputs 1 to 5 identical 0 8 to 30 V User Contact closure inputs Voltage inputs Analogue outputs max 4 option boards 2610 Voltage Current outputs outputs Channel Channel Channel Channel 1 2 1 2 Figure 2 2 1d Option wiring sheet 1 User Guide 028910 Page 8 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 SIGNAL WIRING Cont View on solder bucket face of user socket EIA232C EIA485 5 wire EIA485 3 wire Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal NC RxA Link to pin 7 Rx NC NC Tx NC NC DTR N
4. Example 2 Message of exactly 60 characters 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 119 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Message 044 04 02 1 6 31 05 sitoppeld of failurj BTj 1 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 66 20 62 65 74 20 66 61 69 6 75 72 65 20 42 54 30 31 Space hex 20 Null 00 Extension 112 4 5 61718 9 10 11 12 13 14 15116 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 message Space 59 null characters 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
5. INTERNAL WIRING Figure 13 3 2c shows the internal wiring between the portable case connectors and the recorder rear panel for a 6 input option Recorder back panel Line supply Brown 1 100 to 240V N Blue PSU 50 60 Hz E E Chassis ground Green Yellow Earth L safety earth Transmitter PSU Blue Note For the sake of clarity the Serial Red 96 Communications and USB option wiring ors pes are not shown so jR4 log _ g 4 1 59 1 Input Note For the sake of clarity only one 1 2 V input board shown Two and three input board wiring similar 5 Va Con 2 6 V i If fitted input board 2 channels 1 to 6 are 7 7 wired to connectors 7 to 12 respectively 8 V input board 3 channels 1 to 6 wired to cona connectors 13 to 18 respectively 10 e 3 11 sensor 12 T _ 13 V Con 4 14 V 15 n 16 5 _ 17 V 18 1 6 sed ya B Wiring from thermocouple 21 connectors to input terminals 22 is in thermocouple wire 1 Ethernet connector Figure 13 3 2c Internal wiring details 1
6. Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Fi Fi Fi Copy Figure Figure B9c 190 Figure rigure System section 4 6 8 B9b Se Section 4 6 B9i Source Type Channel Copy From 1 Furnace Temp 1 Clock 2 Channel 2 Locale 5 Channel 5 Upgrade Include alarm data Input Adjust Include job data Output adjust Master Comms Diagnostics Ethernet Diagnostics Copy Job Search Section All Sections V section 4 6 9 Job Search Job Category Totaliser Customise Job Action Preset About Customise S earch Now section 4 6 10 About Desktop 54 section 4 6 11 Data Entry Background 55 Selection P7 Instrument Variant 6100A Fixed Text BB Config Revision 310908 Active Text Last Updated 25 May 2007 12 42 21 Disabled Text 49 At Version 4 2 Title Bar Background Created On 6100A Trend Foreground Security Revision 178008 Trend Background 55 Comprising History Foreground 52 Bridge Version 4 2 History Background BENI Product Software Version 4 2 Font set Auto v History File Version 1 10 BootRom Version 1 3 Board Version 2 Fitted Memory BEP History 32 00MB SRAM 256kB DRAM 64MB Support File Figure 9 System key menu structure sheet 2 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug
7. Archi R i I 45E rchive Save Restore Security Network System High Priority interval 0 125 Seconds Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Medium priority interval Seconds B9b B9c Instrument B9k 91 Low priority interval 2 Seconds Store diagnostics Figure B9d Groups Slave 1 Remote Device 1v Channels Enable W Views Online Archive Descriptor Remote Device 1 Master Comms Network Ethernet Y Events Section 4 3 1 6 IP Address 149 121 30 0 Figure B9e 4 Buttons Modbus address 1 Messages Detect This Slave Output Channel Number 1 Output 1 v User Linearisations Enable W Batch TUNIS ES Output Type V Timeout 250 ms Descriptor Output 1 aths 3 Range Low 0 Figure B9f 4 Totalisers Max Block Size 124 Register caco ie E Counters i a Y Offset 0 Timers 14 0 Username Username Figure B9g e cues Em Source span high 10 Data Source Channeli Y Master Comms Apply Discard Detect All Slaves ol On Error Drive Output Channels narod Demand Writes ty Apply Discard Demand Writes Output channels Section 4 3 18 N Section 4 3 17 Emails Write number 1 Write 1 O Figure B9i 4 Reports Output Channel Number 1 Output 1 v Options i Enable lv Demand Type Master Comms y Suistri Sta
8. mode Group 3 Section 5 Group 5 Group 6 CD red Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page lo S Play User Screen 1 User Screen 2 3 Batch Note Alarm summary Message Log Faceplates On Off ChanheliGysling Ott Alarm Summary Messages All History v Enter History 2 1 Water temp 1b 30 0000 23 4531 m i 2 2 Water temp 1b 10 0000 23 4531 ren isto ry Preparing History please wait 3 1 Oil pressure 250 000 PSI 260 3425 mode 4 1 Transfer 15 3678 700 87 487 39 E 235 68 378 99 i 0 49 Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Figure Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure B9b B9c B9d to B9i B9j B9k 91 9 Vertical trend Instead of using the Root menu 1 2 the Up and Down arrow keys can
9. MO snieis 5 J9 S N ed pueueq A SUM IUM 81 uonoes pueweq pueosiq A 1 1ndino AAWOUd ajauueyo 001 0 lajauueyD Z uunJ Je1se A A L jnejeg aM 103 eoinos Joiduoseq en eA sseooJg Jequinw 1ulog adh ubiH ejeos 9 e2S y 12945 ainBiy e eBesseyy preosiq Addy eBessew epniou ueuo eureu JOY 00 Josues duiej pjoo 5 02 palang d1INS 1020014 Lieu ondoy oye sx DOH 1511 SIU uo puz jo ssejppe 151 SIU uo 151 Jo sseuppe jreu e doy 157 101duoseg 1 1equinw JequinN 1811 Paes gt 1517 1 157 09 Ajay ues eq oj
10. 228 A COSS oi teo eoi teftis 229 6 5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM reto teh er ude eto eet nent 230 CHANNELALARM SOUND rent atto o Loa peel cete 231 6 6 OPERATION tte tete ere bp etr tee e DR e a ND Oed ts 232 636 1 Display Modes srren enion cere e eri tee e HE EAE e nes de pe e ER dee 232 6 6 2 Alarm eee 232 6 6 3 Status eee fie cedet uie d ee e bine ds 232 6 6 4 Error m ssdges ee Ge ird c e dede eroe eet 233 NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT 2 233 UNABLE TO HOST n tede eel rete e 233 UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME 233 FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME 2 233 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON 233 THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE 233 YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION 233 YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE 233 7 SCREEN 234 INTRODUCTION 234 7EM Display Ac
11. 16 Gonfigurationi uu scie et 90 to 224 371 Full CODY ee b dee tete teet 206 Configuration permission 187 Input board SCIO Ert sd eM 42 SPeCification ee pelo 350 Security permission 420440 00 187 ea eee 8 ice te eem Leere trece 195 Input event source 91 F nction Maths c e ee ER 107 Inputs 316 Function code 161 173 Permission 3 nae othe des 188 Function code 03 MODBUS 311 SOUTE ire nts 90 Function code 04 MODBUS 312 So rce 1 sense cete 91 Function code 06 312 Source Batch dr 105 Function code 08 MODBUS 312 SOUICE nit a uto ha etus 92 Function code 16 MODBUS sse 313 Exclamation mark symbol 16 Fuse Transmitter power supply 317 344 Bl 108 Equation ie eO endet 111 HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 389 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE G H Cont COIISIA TIL ie eonim den 112 114 HTM2010 Quarterly Test kit 33
12. 52 A elljold euoN ed ejeos EI 00 euoz 5 5 9 elS Stu L 19218 euoz 3 sseuppe H uBiH ejeos F 9L eyuonoes 0 0 Lc E 6v L sseJppy ejeos uondo 21919113 Woman __ 5 g v gt Jojduoseg 181un02 10590 suonoeuuoo euijuo MOU sjeull A 9Igeu3 suun ojasid 81810009 AL 5 suun spun uonoes 2101 Ip S suun 440 enjeA uondo 72 lemau A REEL 4 A 5 2 1 1 D uiejs S SpuooeS _ 9210 temau juoud YBIH User Guide Page 61 Issue 4 Aug 07 HAO28910 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont pieosiq Addy uo pues ejqesiq jnejeq AMM 1043 UO supa uejsuoo Leu A SUUBYD JAM 101duoseq ed A 21 0 Jep1o98 L jequinwN
13. nee 357 event 2 nnne 105 Constant desc ne recedet 187 Batch Running Event Source 90 Change time R of C 79 Batch Start event 90 Channel Batch Stop event 91 Alarm 18 Configutatiorii cats ae hcec hee 100 Alarm SoUrd een en P Perte qe 231 Configuration 372 ice e nocens 254 Control access permission 187 Colour ep rette c 77 Counter initiation 105 Configuration ccccsccceeeseeeeeessteeeeesneeees 71 to 88 370 Enter batch data 189 32 bit data MODBUS 300 to 303 e tes gere 179 323 MODBUS 3 5 eae 273 to 284 Job initiatlon ede ties ee Hie ree 105 etre aie 206 216 Gycle time doe REDE mRNA 247 Message display eese 104 Cycling Ori olf hei ie pene 35 Modbus 2 cuero
14. 2 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 2 2 2 lt lt te 5 2 24 Signal Wing iie tete tet eletti oe eH foo Bh 5 CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS pire A erede 5 2 2 2 4 repel eec poit 9 LINE SUPPLY 9 OW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION srenti a e teo to eh a 9 2 9 AGCESST LEAD e ecuatoriana hs uet CENE 10 VEM MES A 11 232 Card slot ies on tunt ey 11 LED IINDICATORS c rete sni deb eb 11 2 323 USB FrOnt mE Dm 11 2 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION piece ices eer recte entree n 12 2 2 T blap lock operation eee oe ete 12 ARCHIVE INAGCTIME ber RED 12 thi OR RO debate detta 13 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY esee e oon 14 TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES 2 2 14 CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS iiie arte Ede e eret e dea se 15 STATUS BAR yie M 15 371 T
15. 388 33V 0 00 100 00 00 00 209 00 400 00 500 00 600 00 709 00 00 00 900 00 1000 00 5 divisions Scale Log Number format Scientific 1 00 x10 to 1 00 106 388 33V 1 00 1 00 1 1 00 2 1 0 1 0pE4 1 00 5 1 00 6 Scale Log Number format Numeric 1 00 to 1 000 000 00 388 33V 1 00 10 00 199 00 1000 00 10090 00 1000 0 00 1000000 00 Figure 4 3 3b1 Scale type examples large frame 0000 10 9000 20 9000 30 9000 40 9000 50 9000 604000 70 0900 80 4000 90 4000 _ 100 000 0 44 1 5 05 06 i 0 45 58 4 minute triangle 5705708 Linear Scale Log Grid 5 05 06 04018 5 05 06 16667 EXTR 10000 20 9000 20 9000 40 9000 50 9000 70 go00 20 4000 100 000 1049 18 28 05 08 2 10 47 58 4 minute triangle 29090 Linear Scale Linear Grid 28105108 104618 2908 08 hannel 47 14250 cd 1 0000 104000 4 minute triangle Log Scale Log Grid hannel 47 6 4158V 1 0000 4 minute triangle Log Linear Scale Log Grid Figure 4 3 3b2 Trace examples for different scale types large frame Note Grid type is selected in Group configuration Grid and chart text colour is defined in Trend Fore ground in System Customis
16. 147 Jum 63 ShUNt Value sits ERU ne 73 Compact flash location 11 77 Component Sumimertime leeks 201 serere s 253 date xerit ees 201 Info Ori SCEE 240 TimeZone metet 201 Compressibility factor 113 114 es 144 Config Revision sess 31 99 211 Totaliser 135 Config data update rate 157 159 Trace debes eise 77 Gonfiguratiorn 5 nep eee 58 to 88 User linearisation tables 97 to 224 Switching 67 76 VIEWS ERE 82 to 88 ACCOSS ies 32 LOMO aca iib REUNIR MR RH 77 ALARM aus eth cce tero pte ee es 77 Connect from Remote 186 AMOUNT iscsi ete ipia 79 Connections uci ero etie tereti 146 to 224 Average entere 79 Connector locations 5 to 88 Charige tirie eurer Deere Dien 79 Contents 70 Deviation value pe 79 Continuous batch selection 100 Dwell period eere 79 Controller parameters
17. Note For 6 or 12 input channel recorders the transmitter power supply may use either option board 2 connector or as shown the option board 4 connector For 18 input channel instruments the transmitter power supply must use option board 2 connector because option board 3 and 4 slots and associated Sema connector are occupied by input board 3 and its block cold junction sensor NI QS CJ sensor 5 CJ sensor 13 Bottom connector 1 Figure 13 2 1 Typical internal wiring User Guide HA028910 Page 334 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 3 HTM2010 QUARTERLY TEST KIT 13 3 1 Introduction This option is supplied as a six channel 100 mm recorder in a rugged portable case configured for five type T thermo couples and one pressure transducer The option comes complete with pressure transducer insertion tubes and mini ature plugs for type T thermocouples As supplied the recorder is for use with small unwrapped utensil sterilisers The default configuration for the thermocouples is Function Type T Input range 0 to 150 C and for the transducer Input range 1 to 3 bar 13 3 2 Wiring SUPPLY VOLTAGE Caution Before powering the recorder check that the supply vol
18. 213 Saturated Steam 118 Trend scd ee an eet 218 Sg aretooL tc omit MI 108 114 Master 150 to 224 K Configuration menu 374 Key COG i eae ope ouv iet 202 Diagnostics PAP M MM E M OIM E 168 Example configuration 2 2 2 164 L Slave Failure Event source 91 Maths Labelling symbols aeania anodni 1 Configuration menu 372 Language selection 201 Maths channel innare ib fin erit 246 Channel data 5 132 to 224 Last Updated i iie tii 211 Configuration Sau Meena te actin cla 106 MEITAT siut s Me uio Moses o M 78 32 bit data MODBUS 133 to 224 Later 26 ees 206 Left key E 28 16 acted iet e etat 259 Function 107 Across the chart 36 A E 214 Feed E ee eevee 1 79 180 323 324 Modbus addressing E 132 to 2
19. 9 8 99 152 Bargraphi ernable terti ne teret 83 Faceplate 2 ned 249 251 Grid total 249 Minor DIVISIONS titre 249 Trend te a 83 iuo 38 253 382 User Guide 028910 390 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE J L Cont ODS rei RR RUE D Logout dC 184 Pici d Long messages 4 4 4 4 268 Archive Loop n ces 159 172 Bi Dold bet Low iov c Priority 4 2 0444 4 0 4400 4 40 151 Counter Select ifte Aes 108 Demand writes M Disable totaliser Drive relay 196 354 E mail Mail Sener cec eR ET RED Id 176 ee Maintenance a 356 Input channel Schede cce Eee 357 Maths Major circular chart divisions 67 Message Managerrient rsen tinet 190 Output Configuration menu 2 011 376 Preset totaliser Manual archive Recording Boc 52 Report To fhiost icomputer tais teat tee 54 Search Mass flow Configuration 379 108 112
20. RTD type Overall range C Standard Max linearisation error Cu10 20 to 400 General Electric Co 0 02 C Cu53 70 to 200 RC21 4 1966 0 01 C JPT100 220 to 630 JIS C1604 1989 0 01 C Ni100 60 to 250 DIN43760 1987 0 01 C Ni120 50 to 170 DIN43760 1987 0 01 C Pt100 200 to 850 IEC751 0 01 C Pt100A 200 to 600 Eurotherm Recorders SA 0 09 C Pt1000 200 to 850 IEC751 0 01 C User Guide Page 348 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Relay output board General Maximum number of relay boards unit Large frame unit Number of relays per board Changeover relays Normally open relays Normally closed relays Estimated mechanical life Update rate Four Nine Three Four Four 30 000 000 operations See Update rates in Recorder specification above AC load ratings Derating The figures given below are for resistive loads For reactive or inductive loads de rate in accordance with graph 1 in which 2 Contact life Maximum switching power Maximum contact voltage Maximum contact current Actually measured results on representative samples Typical values according to experience Resistive contact life x reduction factor 500VA 250V providing this does not cause the maximum switching power above to be exceeded 2 Amps providing this does not cause the maximu
21. Rc 353 B1 5 354 Bi6 DIAG SUMMARY Soa E ERES 354 81 61 MAC Address sc eR Det Bae mar eet e e rv Don E FOE teas 354 B1 6 2 Software version nomber ter Le espere EP ta 354 Serial ZSerial 2 tbe le te that ee 355 BIGA Bateiy ospe E 355 e 355 B1s676s Option boards etes eit ree Qnem e e gem RO Re S 355 RELAY OUTPUT BOARD S ere eee EC ERR 355 EVENIT INPUTS cs eid err YE eee e ti ae e RE e RES 355 81 62 Input boards 5 ret pee tpe iege cree dee FINT oui 355 B1 6 8 Main m nt Pearce eco picea deb ree 356 MN AGUNT 356 BZ PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE S cc Get e ge rane talent enean 356 B2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CLIEANIING 2 1 erecti tane d nne 356 B2 2 MAIINTENANGE SGEEDULE 3 5 peer ee t 357 B2 2 1 Battery replacement procedure 4 357 2 3 2 252 e DUREE ree I RE EUER 359 B3 OPTION ENABLING ih Pep tt n et te tt 360 COLOUR SELECTION DE t tette er ede e 360 85 TCP PORT NUMBERS 3i teet HD ebrei RE ERU PERRO I pa OE ente eed 36
22. 1 B job 217 Sales Demo Enable Disable ________________ 352 Recording failed internal 69 193 Sample arid Hold teet totem 108 Hectangle e EET 256 Sample ates dope ee deco ake 343 Red line across the 36 Saturated Steam Reference value eese 79 Heat CONSUMED u eenean a 121 Refresh key ier detecte 222 Heat 120 HOglsler erri 173 Mass TOW ita cso E eut dr crees Pop 118 56 239 Relay m S8V6 8S Ue n Ub et e EC EHE E 56 Board specification 24444 4 SHO Saye Restore LM 55 Drive relay 00 04 41 4 213 Key MONU there rer erede Rr 369 WINNO cete redet 8 Permission ccccccccccccccccccceececcccecccectteceeeececcccetteteeseecees 187 Remote 15 doceri 218 Cold Junction Compensation 76 Scale Path wussssssssssssenssessssssssessssessususssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssoe 87 Divisions Major Minor METTE RET 74 250 186
23. CHANNEL 6 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch6 value Ch6 status Current process value PV Channel status Scaled Enum See note 1 Read only ATES 41448 1 9 41449 1 1 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch6 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 1 41450 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 287 100 180MM P
24. E E 15 66 Dispose uM LE mtu tr ie 239 Group minimum 130 cpm 107 arco 6 198 Modbus slave N 152 Do Not Remove Archive Media 13 Recipient list s 176 Domain 198 RAUM 179 323 198 Detect this slave all slaves 152 Draw E oec c efti M E aM cen leo 78 BOQ 6 iti E 245 DHCP Server failure 16 cus pas ESTE PU UTILE persi se 5 Diag Summary eae ca cc cte ce eric A qu n Duo 79 User Guide HAO28910 Page 388 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE E E Cont e to the power maths function 109 re a ttd t din 239 E mail HPV 238 239 WG OB de gt ean 178 Screen penne 57 Appearance 177 User linearisation terne 57 Configuration menu 375 User 5 ee ere e rete 235 Failure event source 91 External GJ eo
25. 4 4 0 4 342 Change annotation 36 S np Mu cM 343 eee Se 201 Serial COMMS 344 Marker Transmitter Power Supply 344 GOloUt 2 E ente 251 344 251 Specified descriptor value 94 Permission to 2442 222 2 187 Speed of recording ez er c LEER Ho este 69 Speed interval B job 218 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 395 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Time Cont U ni Ium 201 Unable to connect to NOSt ceccceccccccccceccccececcecceccecesceseceeeeeses 233 Synch instrument Alarm 0 04024 4 17 Unable to resolve 233 Synchronisation SNTP sse 197 Unack d Synchronisation 17 Alarm 91 To fill storage device nennen 87 Point larmio 90 ZONE SOUS GUN e ener ittis eugiat UNITS 236 Time and date Configuration 378 Conversion Pressure 119 TET 82 OHS a
26. eee 159 Hysteresis beg de ete ein 79 Copy Reference value 79 Configuration 379 Thiresholg etre a te 79 Facility tetto 206 Ty DO a eiie nee ipe et siete p AE aetas 78 ia dik aie 222 Analogue Outputs 170 Maths function dt ees 108 PI CIIVG nine HERUM ER 85 to 88 eroi DM 239 ASCII pintar oom t hem tens 321 eov PEE 140 Audit pack el gutes 190 Configuration data iua net ep ede dene 100 32 bit data MODBUS 142 to 224 Break 24444 0 aTi 76 Configuration data Modbus 141 to 224 Channels ieri eee co eset Pte os 71 to 88 Configuration 372 Cold junction compensation 76 IB C tlean ee 206 ne certc eed 140 JODS dt etude d 215 COULDTEY RR UR DADA OPE 201 Modbus addressing 141 Date formatis ERE rie edid 201 Run time data Decimal iet She 77 32 bit 4 224 20 143 Demand 44 0001 171 Run time data MODBUS 142 to 224 Display brightness
27. re EE HR Ea be ed 221 221 221 H DD Sk FILER OPTION MENU eoe ORE 222 9 2 THETIIDE KEY 52 dente eet totes 222 5 3 FILE STRUCTURE anh ae 224 Cont User Guide HAO28910 Page viii Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 6 BRIDGE REMOTE VIEWER 225 INTRODUCTION ce Li eben tt ot e eerie tench t restent 225 6 1 1 Minimum PC requirements eer ri ettet etta cie Ee bread 226 SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION ice irte 226 6 2 CONNECTION DETAILS 227 6 2 1 Direct PO conhection PERI 227 6 2 2 PGE To remote recorder oie eie d ee eg e Un aout 227 6 2537 INetworked systems iioi e trece e Ri cd et erar p E OR ON 227 6 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION tho etch e i once 228 0 4 RECORDER CONFIGURATIONS ce 228 GAT do ii eut 228 DN 2 PONS A
28. 176 option Mog gu MM E 331 Record logiris iue dot cien nete e 191 Basic option with TRS 333 Recorder DIMENSIONS cd ote E E EEA 330 HTM2010 Test kit 335 LL E 225 6 Low supply voltage CM AM CE IUE 340 Electrical installation 2 2 5 Thermocouple option ee eet teeters 337 Panel installation 2 2 3 4 Positioning Specification 342 Grid eee 240 Synchronisation SNTP 197 Tip 240 feeds 2 Power requirements 2 343 itt 5 to 88 Power Up Recording 91 Enable Md 36 iH 31 Enable Disable emn ines enn Dh 217 Preset Enable disable 68 Glock ai eg U RENE 215 rr 17 Counter 140 215 Interval 69 187 HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 393 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Recording Cont S JODS n LEM E ME 217 symbol VUES En PEERS ah 352
29. 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 uonng 101du2seq uong JequinN uoung ulejs S Aiunoes 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont gt User Guide Page 60 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont g 1 5 MAIAJOAO qg y pueosiq Ajddy pueosiq H Ajddy __ upny yie eigeu3 _ 5 __ ejqeua _ 5 Su 0001 1 __ a euoN sug dois Bos preosiq H Addy 0026 pneg _ 1545 g dno uonoeuuoo jug 1 dnou A 1 020104d Al jud 1019 1 1591 1e uld Addy ce 0 yUNOD 10443 JON 571816 uopoy on 118195 uod 7009461 1e1S eureN jequinN puooes 1009461 1215 ed 1 spuoseg 7 ojieye jeedeu _ L 1ey9 pua 1514 A spuooeS 7
30. suleEW _ g v A87 uoreg mous 1esie10 1 yun polled uonoes uondo syen edoos uonoes uondo asaid s 1e 0 spun suun spun pueosiq 666666 1n9 uBiH spun yo 1n9 2 jeuueu 801 295112101 SHUN 9 6 1 LA IX 81 Jo oueunw JeulJo4 1014 10590 Aguruesn e A eigeua JA Jesie1o pieosiq Ajddy 4 9 28 0011995 uondo L uonesueeur 18st 6 y uonoes suonesueaur 1951 A 19516101 o94nos 2 Ao1duoseg payloads eoejdeu A enjeA eounos 2 eoejdeu SJesi ejo eoinos 1 eoejdeu BRA 5 e 2 1 jo enre oessa uoieg jo eu 1 JequinN 8 2 uonoes 4 pjeosiq iddv suonesueeur 195 uonesuouiny 1x81 uO 1xe 1 1 peuoie1 ed soDesse u Suojing 2767 uonoes suong
31. Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Small Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Large Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Vey tare Figure 4 6 10b Font sizes User Guide HAO28910 Page 210 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 11 About Selecting About from the System key menu gives details of the version numbers of different aspects of the recorder and details of the amount of memory fitted Figure 4 6 11 shows a typical About display page Instrument Variant Config Revision Last Updated 6100A 310908 25 May 2007 12 42 41 At Version 4 2 Created On 6100A Appears only when Security Revision 178008 viewing via Comprising EE Bridge Version 4 2 Product Software Version 4 2 History File Version 1 10 BootRom Version 1 3 Board Version 2 Fitted Memory History 96MB SRAM 256kB DRAM 64MB Support File Figure 4 6 11 About display typical INSTRUMENT VARIANT Displays the instrument type CONFIG REVISION Whenever a change to the Configuration of the recorder is applied the Config Revision is incremented For these pur poses Configuration is defined as including all items within the menu structures of the Config and Network keys and includes User Screens It does not include those item
32. Figure 4 5 1 Network addressing INSTRUMENT NUMBER MAC ADDRESS Unique numbers set up during manufacture to identify the recorder to a remote host or to the recorder manufacturer distributor in case of query IP ADDRESS LOOKUP This field allows an address to be entered for the recorder This can be done either by manually entering an address IP address field below or a network service BootP or DHCP can be used to assign an IP address to the recorder BOOTP TIMEOUT This 28 second period is the maximum time the recorder will wait at power up for a response from the BootP server If no response is received within this time the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway are all set to or remain at 0 0 0 0 IP ADDRESS Allows manual entry of the recorder s internet protocol IP address only if Specify IP address is selected in the IP address lookup picklist above Notes 1 DHCP attempts to connect to the network continuously until successful Only when successful will the network settings be updated and appear at the address page This can take up to 13 seconds after power It takes 2 to 3 minutes for a DHCP failure to be reported so an instrument alarm would not be generated for 2 to 3 minutes after power up should the connection fail to be established User Guide HAO28910 Page 196 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 1 NETWORK ADDRE
33. ge BRIDGE eiectus tein s SCREEN BUILDER prt en Ee Rb Ra Mas ER MODBUS TCP SLAVE ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 5 lene bo erre 10 EVENT INPUTS toe Rr or armo pne breed teen 11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY 22 0 12 ASCIDPRIINTER TS PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS 2 et nato deta re nane trap educ ANNEX A SPECIFICATION is ceca oni ree eh pea uds ANNEX B REFERENCE ttn stance HR aeai ue durada c RR ANNEX C WEB SERVER 5 INDEX This manual refers to recorders fitted with software version 4 2 To determine the software version fitted to the re corder the About screen in the System menu may be accessed as described in section 4 6 11 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page i 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE PAPERLESS GRAPHICS RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Section Page Safety Notes e el Rain enna ass ai eee eds 1 SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING 1 INTRODUCTION ccccccsccccscccsccccsccccccccccccscccsccccscccscccescccscccccccccceeees 2 1 1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER 2 2 INSTALLATION 6
34. 0 097 input 0 027 range 0 448 input 0 033 range 443ppm of input per deg C Note The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 June 2007 For instruments with a status level of E7 or above see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A WARNING For portable case instruments only All connections must be Low Voltage maximum 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak or 70V dc unless the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I O is connected to the recorder Resistance inputs Temperature scale 11590 Types ranges accuracies Influence of lead resistance Error Negligible Mismatch 10 0 Maximum source current 250 Resolu tion In See tables values exclude influence of lead resistance Typical error strument at 20 deg C Maximum error Instrument at 20 deg C Worst case temperature performance 5 0 02 7 input 0 03496 range 0 042 input 0 110 range 35ppm of input per deg C 22mQ 0 02 7 input 0 035 range 0 042 input 0 053 range 35ppm of input per deg C 148mQ 0 03 096 input 0 028 range 0 045 input 0 035 range 35ppm of input per deg C Note The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 June 2007 For instruments with a status level of E7 or above see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A
35. Apply Discard Archiving Control NewUserID 0 Save Restore NewFulUsername 08 Paste Delete Files NewPassword Full Configuration Retype Password Full Security Based On Operator v Batch Control Add Can Sign Can Authorize Apply Discard Perform Upgrades Event Permission 1 Event Permission 2 Event Permission 3 Event Permission 4 Event Permission 5 Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes Force Change Of Password Enter Batch Data Allow web server XIX Apply Discard Figure 4 4 Security configuration menus User Guide Page 184 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 Access levels There are essentially three levels of security associated with the recorder viz Engineer Operator and Logged out The fourth level Service is available only to service engineers When logged in at engineer level the user can set ac cess permissions for other levels and can enter or edit passwords for Operator and Engineer levels The default pass word for Engineer level access is 100 The default password for Operator level access is blank 1 e no password is required unless the Auditor 21 option is fitted in which case the default is also 100 Note To allow free access to the recorder configuration th
36. lowest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period Kelvins The total number of measurement periods As described in Configurable items below this is simplified for the recorder user to four entries viz The number of the channel measuring temperature the number of samples to be used the time between the samples and the relevant Heat of Activation Note The input temperature must be in Kelvins This can be achieved either by setting the relevant channel s units to Kelvins or by using a further maths channel to convert the measuring units to Kelvins C 273 15 or K 0 555 F 32 273 15 User Guide HAO28910 Page 116 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE Cont CONFIGURABLE ITEMS Figure 4 3 11g shows the configurable items for the MKT function Maths Number 1 Mathi V Value 0 0000 Units Function MKT Mean Kinetic Temperature of Math 2 Number of samples 52 Sample interval 604800 S Heat of Activation 83 144 kJ mole Unit Figure 4 3 11g MKT function parameters Mean Kinetic Temperature of Select the source from which MKT is to be derived This may be an input channel scaled in Kelvins or it can be a maths channel used to convert a different temperature scale into Kelvins see Note on previous page Number of Samples Enter the number of samples over which
37. __ puooes 4015 Afuy puooeg 0 18 0 Wels 1514 0096 pneg Akuy 052 1 preosiq Addy TERT si n Auo 4 1uBiupiw lag 2 seadde spjay a Suo A 9UON A 49 UuUud 195 10201014 dum m 4015 hr Sig 9015 10119 19594 1 Jes F 101duoseq 00261 pneg CUI 0 1uno9 10413 MOU LE AZEzZVIF ActcV H uonoeuuot _ uaaq S A J02010Jd a uod seu Ajddy juo Jeedde suoyng eseu MOU jesey 10113 195 0 juno2 10413 A 12095 uno 10413 0 uno9 10229 A 118095 nod Jejuud 195 00 00 00 00 00 00 A aru f eua indui 11560 5 Ily 19ejeq f p1eosiq Addy 6 xxxxxxxx PIOMSSE MT eureujes posia Kiddy A A 1 ays 1 yzi 9215 XEN j C VEH 5 g so eiqeu3 ne Al Joquinn uue v 2 su
38. 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 9 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 3 ACCESS FLAP Note See also section 2 4 if the lockable flap option is fitted Lockable flaps are identified by means of a padlock symbol printed towards the right hand end of the flap label ZS Stylus storage _ 5 x w USBFront Door lock option SD 2 2 Compact Flash card a Insert finger s and pull forward and down small frame behind flap details small frame SD or Compact USB Stylus Flashcard Front Insert finger s and pull forward and down large d behind flap details large frame Figure 2 3 Access flap detail The access flap is located immediately below the recorder screen To open the flap insert one or more fingers under the flap handle and pull it outwards and down figure 2 3 A lockable version of the flap is available see section 2 4 for details Located behind the flap are from left to right 1 astylus press to eject 2 aslot for a Compact Flash or Secure Digital SD card 3 a USB port usbfront User Guide HAO28910 Page 10 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 3 1 Stylus A stylus suitable for use on the touch screen is located in a storage area to the left of the Compact Flash SD Card slot 2 3 2 Card slot The slot for the Compact Flash or SD card is located cen
39. 345 Display 6 ace 83 Configuration e cette eek eee 72 Display un Itera 83 E 72 68 s 72 HOIme 82 7 Horizontal Bargraph 253 Installation Latched maximum ssssssnnnees 108 Category x m des 341 Latched minimum 2 108 Electrical 1a eet ee 5 to 88 MaxIrmum iiie uidi pe He eR ORG 107 000002 21088 MINIMU e ceat ca e cene erac ct 107 Instrument Gettin deh 15 66 Alarm ete 157 246 dee NA el 16 N merie display nente 254 SOUICE 91 Report destination 2 464400 221 IndiGatOE ca ete 16 Selects Ip BR eU HA 28 SUMMAN ET 19 Selection for COMMS messages 148 Alarms ace 381 253 Configuratio
40. 8uuoo pieta __ Jo jequinN q A Wodey 28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 62 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 1 Instrument configuration Instrument Name Instrument Normal Display 100 Saver 50 Save After 30 Minutes Modbus Address 1 Modbus Security Disabled Disabled 2 Comms Channel Timeout 5 Preset Hour 1 Preset 0 Disable Warning Dialogs a Show Operator Notes List W MAC Address 00 0A 8D 00 20 A0 These fields appear only if Show Operator Notes List is enabled AM Shift started Operator Note 1 Operator Note 12 Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 1 Instrument Configuration menu INSTRUMENT NAME Allows the entry of an alphanumeric name for the recorder up to 20 characters long See section 3 3 1 for text entry techniques NORMAL SAVER DISPLAY Allows normal and saver display brightnesses to be defined Defaults are Normal 100 Saver 50 SAVE AFTER The number of minutes between 1 and 99 inclusive which are to elapse after a screen operation before the screen brightness changes from normal to saver Default is 30 minutes MODBUS ADDRESS Allows a Modbus address be
41. E E 30 MESSAGE LOG A PERRA 30 FIRST SWITCEEONN iom ett 31 3 3 1 Access To Configuration see nete pede idee eet i el eed 32 TEXT STRING ENTRY 2 bte deep rir e eO ve bre ode uit 33 DISPLAY eee terea enero Pas 35 ZAT Vertical Trend display tiun or c 35 TIME CHANGE RECORDS tho ct pet e o EIE 36 TREND HISTORY eere oo bte P eb ete bee 36 Cont User Guide HAO28910 Page ii Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section 3 4 2 Horizontal Trend re ee ee ree dece 3 4 3 Circular Trend TREND MO DE oper COUP IRIURE NORMAL VIEW open noii ro Rer er nep rhe day NORMAL VIEW FEATURES e et toit bte tee ER FULL SCREEN DISPLAY ins i tre ee NO aere rita FULL SCREEN FEATURES Pret OTHER NOTES eas teste ette e vi ese e Fe hee ie PH 3 4 4 Vertical bargraph oeste e etie FACEPLATES ABOVE THE FACEPLATES AT RIGHT HAND EDGE 3 4 5
42. 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 177 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 EMAILS Cont THE BODY AREA This contains the body text along with any appended messages In the example above the message has the embedded values of Instrument name Instrument number channel 1 alarm 1 status as implied by the body text OPERATION 1 E mails are generated either by job or by operation of an Event Button from User screen if the Screen builder option is fitted 2 Every time the sending of an e mail is requested a General note is generated and appears in the message log for all groups The format is Date Time Sent e mail descriptor to List N where e mail descriptor represents the descriptor entered in the configuration page for the e mail and List is the recipient list to whom the e mail was sent Access to e mails is restricted to users with Full Configuration permission 4 Signing Authorizing restrictions can be applied only to e mails generated by Event button operation as part of the Event button s configuration section 4 3 7 5 instrument implements the Simple Message Transfer Protocol SMTP incorporating Multipurpose Internet Mail extensions 6 The instrument does not implement the Short Message Service SMS protocol though it is able to send SMS mes sages to a mobile phone via an appropriate server or gateway As some servers gateways use the
43. Last Archive 23 08 05 11 32 18 Media mediacard V Select Media card or USB port Bring Archive Up To Date Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Archive Last 7 Days Archive Last 31 Days Archive Suspend Archiving Archive Transfer Cancel Archive Inactive Media Full 08 09 2006 00 34 57 Media Size 31954944 Bytes Free Space 28786688 Bytes User Guide Page 368 HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Config Security Network System Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure B9b B9dto B j B9k BQI m B9i Save Restore section 4 2 Save Restore New Text Import Screen Export Screen Import User Linearisation Export User Linearsation Import Printer Driver Appear only if Screen Builder option enabled Export screen Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver Configuration Data Save Restore Security Data Network Data l Screens Data New Default Import Screen User Screen 1y File Name screen File Name userlin User Screen 1v File Name screen Save as 6100
44. eai deed pe ede b ides ore 3 4 6 Numeric ctr er ere eaten rq onto 3 5 OPERATOR NOTES coed eta gen 4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER 51 AT ARCHIVE 52 2 T1 ocal Archive 3 e d ot Me en dune 52 BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE 53 A AS 53 ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION e 53 4 1 2 Remote archiving FTP transfer 1 10 2 20000000000000000 000 54 4 2 RESTORE 55 As DM 6 ERE 56 56 4 2 2 56 4 2 3 56 4 2 4 56 4 2 5 Import screen 56 4 2 6 Export screen 57 4 2 7 Import User Linearisation 57 4 2 8 Export User tee dudalen 57 4 2 9 Import printer driver 120 00000 00 00 57 43 CONFIGIKEN EE 58 4 3 1 Instrument configuration 02222 2 2 2 9 63 INSTRUMENT 3 NORMAL SAVER DISPLAY 63 SAVE AFTER eta tet ede gene ee ea ERR PR Pe ER ERROR 63 IM DBUS ADDRESS e estt celui ner EO IE 63 MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED 63 COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT 63 PRESET HOUR ten te t rediere beta ere etd 64 PRESET MINUTE eer de ree tete ER epe totu bee ete
45. uo dnoj5 uo 21 05 MISERE eiqeua Aejdsia 1equinN 02 1167 1 uonoejegs A drop Ajeuueuo ed 9 2 uonoes A eBessei xov 1 dno16 SNA 10 did 2 2 6 uonoeg 51995 39S eipew 59016 5 skeg 96 52 uoneing 10 S1H aum s emau 002 peeds P Bs A _ 181 SeioN 10181940 5 e cmap sBojeig e qesiq I edAy puo _0 1 sjeuueyo 421411 sdnoip 4 Jeasajuy pue s 0 suiuo5 ne SS 7 u wn su 002 Paidesid L v SS puei EAE uM 05 2 sun pussy 00 L Ae dsig jeuuoN 1ueuinJj su ju euinJ1su TOUS uiejs g Aunoeg User Guide Page 59 Is
46. 188 EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5 188 EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT emen nennen 188 ACTION DEMAND WRITES o ene eth Eee 188 FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD 189 ENTER DATA err roe n REPE 189 ALLOW WEBSERVER rore rene e EH ka OR EE EHE RERO CUI EN ET e 189 4 4 2 Management option 3 ariete P Gre oa dre e e et I I RR 190 CHANGES NOT RECORDED 190 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS 191 AddUser uo tt et lat Mai ete Gef ies 195 INEW USER 3 S eti ve eru tete e TO P GE 195 NEW FULL USERNAME ertet re tered he eee 195 NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD 195 BASED ONLU o e S ust eet toa tee col RET 195 4 4 4 Remove 195 423 oet meta TRO e EE uses SONUS 196 AB cl Address ibt IS ERR e 196 INSTRUMENT NUMBER MAC ADDRESS 196 IPADDRESS OOKUP 5520 iere co e tee eae ep eo RE PR 196 BOOTP TIMEQUT sie cette teet co Teo E rte debes 196 IP ADDRESS nies ede eie 196 SUBNET MASK 22122 197 DEFAULT GATEWAY eee re em viste ede ue ege 197 5 SERVER ENABLE 197 SNTP CLIENT ENABLE 197 SINTPSSERVER seit drehen ec ees 1
47. C Cont Configuration Cont tii e us 239 Linearisation type 42244 1 72 Cold junction compensation 76 Locked Indicator eee Dope ettet 18 Colour 4 4424 4 enne 190 247 Master 00 151 Background sz 2 nonien eU E euis 209 Maths charinels 2 ineat 106 Backgroutids cepere 247 MODUS iiie ecran oett 370 to 375 Ghamel ic et 77 247 See alsoAnnex B MESSAGES e ince an tbe ceteras 94 to 224 Colour B select 218 NetWOIKk ee e etes 196 Foreground eR RR eres 209 Offset anh o deii pe T 73 uds E 248 nx D 181 Colours and Fonts eis dte te eei ts 209 Output channels Configuration 379 Analogue outputs 2 170 Communications Modbus M ster ipee Run 169 Channel timeout 90 Printer COMMS parameters 328 DiagriostlC8 riii ede aie p recien 205 FIeports eio dp Pe Ha RUD dus 179 323 Modbus master 150 to 224 Scale nd ci ete D a te ee 73 Printer 6 temere 329 SecUlily en 184 SOMA er oed a 146 Serial COMMUNICATIONS
48. Show Alarm Marks Yes No Allows channel scale alarm marks to be displayed yes or not no Alarm Marks Colour described above allows the user to select a colour for the alarm marks Time Marker colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for time date printing on a trend chart Time Marker interval Default Number of horizontal grid lines between successive time markers Trend Padding Default For group trend only Normal trends are 1 pixel wide Setting a padding value of N adds N pixels on each side of the central pixel For example a padding value of 2 would produce traces 5 pixels wide Applies to all channels in the group Units Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom then Units Font allows the Channel Units font to be selected from a picklist Update when Value changes Action is taken when the value associated with the component changes Always The component is redrawn continuously at the display update rate Vertical alignment Centred bottom top Allows text to be positioned relative to its height setting Value Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom then Value Font allows the Channel Value font to be selected from a picklist Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 5 of 6 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 251 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUI
49. 08 63 Country Selection of seeseeseeeeeee 201 deese tut v cp tte dre rte ede 175 Created On oit het 211 90 to 224 Creating a user screen 2 236 Buttons e er ai ei ie 93 to 224 CSV ElltOE iiie 76 Date Time format 89 it dom o dnt fab baee 65 Use Tab 89 Input low highi recreo treten Nene 72 eite e te 181 Rice cete ree 63 Cursor Keys Del 28 Language ner HOUR RO eR 201 CUSTOMISE n csi ote pere EI 209 Linearisation range eee eene ener 73 Configuration menu esee 379 HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 387 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C Cont D Cont QUEKGy ege RU e 222 Diagnostics Eligh EOW t Seed feta eee 135 GOMIMS strani od rct pee 205 Cycle channels 35 Display eun rende eio ee tee certe 351 D Ethernet Scout et tret tas i Qo ERA Rae 205 Dialogue 254 Digital 53 the Uie Un 157 159 DAMPING neret ce era En ep pe arse 76 ie 9 Disable Bits serial COMMS ice epe ette 148 Alarms on Group
50. 80082 UOISIA Y 0019 5 cv UOISISA 1V c vv 0L 2002 52 se 806016 0019 5 97 5 jnoqv 19410 10 897 uoJees gor Adoy 69 pueosiq A ddy yjnejeq A jas oy BN 5 amp g punoJ66104 10 S H _ 99 punoubyoeg punos6e104 pussy IPF enu 1 peraesiq o nov BH eL pox Le uonoejes _ 99 punosbyoeg erea __ 01 9 uonoes esiuojsno MON 1 1 uonov gor qof epnjou A ejep wieje epniou 1956101 G jaouueu 5 04296 v uonoes e z 01 eoeuunJ Adoy A 879 uonoeg X10M9N Kynoes Biyuoy Adoy jauueyg eounogS 28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 200 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 SYSTEM Cont Touching the System key calls the pick list Clock Locale Upgrade Input adjust Master Comms Diagnostics if o
51. Figure 7 4 11 Typical Event Button 7 4 12 Image This allows a GIF Gif87a format only or JPG image file to be loaded from e g an SD or Flash card Once this has been done bargraphs text messages etc can be superimposed on the image Notes 1 Only user screens to 6 may have images embedded in them and the size of each image may not exceed 250kB see also note 3 Does not apply to Bridge only screens 25 to 124 2 It is recommended that abs_pxl be selected as width and height units before an image is loaded The use of any other units significantly increases the time taken for the loading process to complete 3 For user screens 1 to 6 the physical size of the image may not exceed 1024 pixels wide or 768 high Any attempt to load am image larger than this results in a User Screen Image Error message asking that the image size be reduced The size constraint does not apply to Bridge only screens 25 to 124 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 255 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 13 Text If width and height are left with the default values of zero the text will start at the specified start point and fit in the space between there and the right edge of the screen in a single line left justified ranged as a default If the text string is too long it is truncated text appears in the specified foreground colour superimposed on a box of background colour whi
52. H B IE SOD User Guide HAO28910 Page xiv Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE SAFETY NOTES WARNING Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus or disconnection of the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions Intentional interruption is prohibited Note in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010 the recorder shall have one of the following as a disconnecting device fitted within easy reach of the operator and labelled as the discon necting device a A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947 1 and IEC947 3 b A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool separable plug without a locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 1 Before any other connection is made the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protective conductor The mains supply voltage wiring must be terminated within the connector in such a way that should it slip in the cable clamp the Earth wire would be the last wire to become disconnected 2 Inthe case of portable equipment the protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the I O circuits are connected to hazardous voltages 3 The mains supply fuse within the power supply is no
53. 12 11 06 22108705 A V gt 1 Figure 4 3 10d Typical Batch start messages User Guide HAO28910 Page 104 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH INITIATION Cont NON OPERATOR INITIATION Batch start stop can be initiated by job by counter or via MODBUS TCP JOB INITIATION As described in section 4 7 9 a job can be set up to initiate a batch whenever the job source becomes active If Scope is set to Group a specific group can be selected default 2 Group 1 and the job will act only on the batch associated with this group Batch Start jobs automatically start the batch using the entries made duing the Store function de scribed above Display Batch Dialog jobs allow the user to enter the field values manually before the job starts COUNTER INITIATION If Batch Number is selected as Use Counter then a new batch will automatically be started whenever the selected counter changes value increment decrement or preset The new value of the counter is used as the value associated with Field 1 For the other fields to have values printed on the chart these must have been entered as described above for Operator initiation then the Store button touched The On new clear setting is ignored the stored values being used each new batch Batch start messages a
54. 72 Serial communications 222222000 146 Configuration menus sese 373 Message information 149 Specification utet ML 344 s eee nece bee e eS 9 User Guide 028910 Page 394 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE S Cont S Cont Serial cR RUD ERE 148 321 Square root maths 108 Service level access sesseeeeneeenne 31 Start Set clock 187 hup ct 246 Setting the time and date 201 AS Lite ice eie thee 230 Share SOCKOE dE 152 155 Start End characters 148 noh 33 Start Stop batch selection 100 Shortest trend history 86 Timer Show JOD a Aina e tet PERI 216 B tch Eritry list ieri peo pM 100 POMriMISSIOM 187 Disk settlnigs 86 Status Operator Notes 1 2 64 Drag 15 Title Bar senec ue euet 246 COMMS i ecce Si 172 Shunt value entry 3 baie ee CURE 73 Stop bits aote seb eate pde 148 322 Signal WING hc eu ecce nnper trees 5 to 88 SlO
55. Configuration Data Security Data Network Data JI Screens Data Restore File Name Save As Text Export Import User Linearisation User linearisation 1 UserLiniy File Nam Export File Name Printer Import User linearisation 1 UserLiniw userlin user Folder 14 04 05 12 35 08 config Folder 14 04 05 10 27 13 Config 14 04 05 10 22 23 4445 libV Folder 14 04 05 10 23 14 sdb Folder 14 04 05 14 01 08 user Folder 14 04 05 17 30 29 sve Figure 9 Save Restore menu structure HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 369 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Instrument Section 4 3 1 Channels Section 4 3 3 Channel Number 1 TurbineTempA Y Value 50 002 22 08 05 11 04 56 Input Type Thermocouple Lin Type Type K Y Range Low 0 56 Range High 100 C Range Units c 7 Scaled y ScaleLow f0 ScaleHigh too _____ Units 0 Scale Type Linear Y Scale Divisions Major 10 Scale Divisions Minor 1 _ Filter None Break Response None Y Cold Junction Type Internal Y Descriptor TurbineTempA Switching W Spanned Aly B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Secu
56. Table 4 3 16b Instrument status Register 22 User Guide HA028910 Page 162 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont READING DIGITAL VALUES EXAMPLE Cont Channel Number 1 Card in Value in Input Type Master Commsv Slave 1 Recorder Digital Parameter User Defined v Function Code Read input reg 4 v Register 22 Data Type Bit from register v Bit Position 3 Process Value Medium Priority v Zone Low 75 Zone High 100 96 Colour Open String Card in Closed String Card out Descriptor Card in Alarm Number 1v Enable Trigger v Type Digital v Active when Card out v Dwell 0 S Job Number 1v Category Message Send Message s to All Groups M First Message 1 Card missing Y Last Message 1 Card missing On Active v Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16i Example configuration page HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 163 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE This example describes a recorder Furn1 Master acting as a master to two other recorders Furnl Record and Furn2 Record and a controller Furn Control This example shows only the configuration pages necessary to set up the master inpu
57. 215 Brightness PE Su NE AEE EEE 63 Default ee 352 Demand Write 172 Colour Default Gateway 197 Configuration d PM M 379 Delete 222 238 239 Des riptor eite iba 249 Demand cab e cette ah 249 dei s cfr 172 Mode hates ios tee Me SHIT ETE Mes 35 to 88 Wie eee 82 Buton A 172 Hore SEIS CUM 5 Configuration menu 374 Horizontal Bars dene e deeds 46 COPY cite e DIL SOM CORE 206 Horizontal Trend 38 T BM 219 2 RETURNED 188 Select Mom poppe EORR MEME OMS 28 AMith Traif selected ie codes ol Lem 174 Vertical DAMS eite Pv vea RES va 44 dence 239 Vertical 22 Descriptor PONS netiis cce tna eorr a ere re a ua 249 e 76 Test CE 352 a cepts tees MME 176 UAIS E 249 92 Update rate eee Geo 343 Font 1 14
58. 72 INPUT HIGH os E ree rp epa eg ec 72 NISUS 73 m T 73 RANGE HG oi ttr ost e e ter c UR 73 RAINGE UNITS e OPERE Rb reset rend 73 Hx REC 73 73 74 76 BREAK RESPONIGE ie QUERER EB DS BUR 76 COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION CJC 76 DESCRIPTOR a Pese 76 AZ BSWITCHING ume Pus iU Mou eR nut m 76 SPANNED Sy 5 tH mede eee 77 Sce 77 77 ENSE 77 no 77 p 77 ENABLE E 78 lider AT AT Tr 78 SETPOINT SOURCE 78 PARAMETERS 79 HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE Eo et Er ES ME oan I ERO ba 79 RATE OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE 2 7 220 79 JOB NUMBER 81 CATEGORY 81 rth ap 81 ALARM MESSAGES 81 4 3 4 Views Configuration 82 HOME TIMEOUT 82 HOME GROUP 82 SCOPE so dO E 82 GROUP 83 DISPLAY ENABLE end edes heated 83 gt o E ER ERO UE UIS DE 83 DISPLAY MODE ENABLING 83 USER SCREENS Ne erre eter e ER XR e ER S PER A CEPR YAN 84 Cont User Guide H
59. User Guide HAO28910 Page 36 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE VERTICAL TREND DISPLAY Cont Home Group faceplates appear only if Faceplates selected On from option menu If there are too Trend display mode many faceplates to fit across the Screen they appear down the lt a Highedge instead 44 Faceplate for current Arai qmod Touch and release face plate to increment channel or touch pen to select channel If Channel Cycle On Current channel incre ments every 10 seconds Preparing History please wait 2 Real time date 04 05 04 04 070 11 48 54 i Cursor time date S Touch faceplate to increment channel Trend History mode Value at cursor time date Press bar to move one pageful arrow keys Cursor to move Move slider minimum to required amount date time Page Page forwards in time backwards in time show newer data Show older data Message Log Figure 3 4 1b Trend display mode and trend history mode 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 37 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 DISPLAY MODES Cont 3 4 2 Horizontal Trend display Entered from the Vertical Trend display by means of the down arrow key or selected via the Root Menu Goto
60. p oo Enable Demand Type Master Comms v Gomms orof Status Idle Demand Write Slave 1 Furn 1 Recorder v Sve destination Parameter User Defined v Function Code Preset Multiple reg 16 Register 248 Data Type Float 32 Bit v Descriptor Write 1 Source Constant Defaulto lt q Enter default value Allow Constant Edits uere ud Disable Retries 9 If enabled the write is attempted only once Send On Power Up write is triggered when the unit powers up Apply Discard Figure 4 3 18c Demand Writes to specific register CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS This contains details of parameters unique to Demand Writes to specific registers Other parameters as described above Function Code Allows the Modbus function code 6 or 16 to be selected See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes for this instrument see section 8 2 1 Demand writes of a single 8 or 16 bit register can use either code but code 6 is more efficient Writing two or more registers requires the use of code 16 A decimal number representing the required parameter s location in the slave s Modbus Register map Register This information must be determined from the documentation supplied with the slave For this instru ment section 8 4 contains listings for a number of i
61. 220 Bits serial printer e cete cete tede cte ces 329 Alarms ON POINT JOD 220 Compression ratio 86 Alarn job 220 Encoding MODBUS 263 All Alarms job 220 170 Counter IT 215 Transmission MODBUS 310 LOQIN eic e re e tp eerte 186 Tie 161 173 263 Maths 214 Date leto casei deae bte Peut tees 172 201 216 SU MM REM UNAM NM 201 MOLISE oc 222 218 Date and time s 175 308 Warning Dialogs Configuration menu 378 Discard PEE 239 Daylight saving setup 201 5 Pu ice sedie M Le tie Seek des D 238 239 DC supply Printer wiring 320 Icon TETTE SIE 18 9 Size e 87 Decimal Display Be C n POT 248 248 Point DOSITIOT 77 Bargraph 249 SGAE rS N E 251 Batch Dialogue arent 105 Decrement counter job
62. Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 see note Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write 83 60803 ED85 60805 ED87 60807 ED89 60809 60811 ED8D 60813 EDSF 60815 ED91 60817 ED93 60819 Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 138 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Cont TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING IEEE AREA TOTALISER RUN TIME DATA The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for totaliser 1 Generally Parameter address for totaliser Parameter address for totaliser 1 4 N 1 decimal TOTALISER 1 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Totaliser 1 value Current process value PV Read Write FB7F 64383 2 Totaliser 1 status Channel status Read only FB81 64385 1 0 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Totaliser 1 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 FB82 64386 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4
63. o lt lt 4 e ET de 5 Y a o T 2 a e S W O Qe 2 o 4 9 0 Lu Figure 2 2 16 Connector locations large frame units 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 6 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 SIGNAL WIRING Cont Input board pinouts Attenuator assembly 20 to 20 V dc Thermocouples dc millivolts 30V lt Vin lt 0 8V active 2 Vin 30V not active 0 8 Vin 2V not defined Not active 2 to 30 V Active 0 8 to 30 V Vin Minimum contact 60m sec Digital input contact closure Digital inputs voltage levels Not channels 1 7 13 etc Not channels 1 7 13 etc Figure 2 2 1c Analogue Input board wiring 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 7 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 SIGNAL WIRING Cont Relay outputs Max number of boards 4 for small frame or 9 for large frame nc S no Contacts shown in power off alarm state Contacts shown in power off alarm state
64. 1 25 nene 148 176 322 REA T 184 489 77 110 E 191 Force change 189 Paste K8y ie ete ite ted b paie 222 Question marks in 94 Paste delete file permission 187 Quick entry to user screen edit 240 Period scaler enis tee 136 SERM 205 R Pixels 2 1 236 170 ROI bee eve ted eec Te 180 324 Range Low High Units c scssssssssesssssseeesessseeesesseeeseeseeeees 73 PAL met 90 Rate of change Number 157 IANNIS sh cet E rcu 78 70 157 172 senem DS 109 123 Pollution degree 1 seen 341 1 to Real access eI CE 176 Polygon licet isses n seb tco HE ee eins 258 Reading Polyline 257 Digital values 162 Polynomial gs 108 110 User defined registers 160 POM E 176 LESER 183 Recipient LIST
65. A transient event is triggered at power up For recorders fitted with Maths channels section 4 3 11 this event is set if say one of the inputs to a group averaging function becomes invalid In such a case the average will be calculated on the remaining input values but the result may not be as accurate as expected Loss of one input can also be important in functions such as Fvalue where several sensors may be distributed within the load and their outputs used in a group minimum calculation for input into the Fvalue equation This event is set when the battery is reaching the end of its useful life The event remains active until the battery is replaced see Annex B for details Triggered when the archive medium has reached the fullness defined in Archive configuration section 4 3 5 Transient event at the point of an invalid password entry attempt Transient event at the point when an account is disabled because the number of password re tries has been exceeded Section 4 4 2 Available only if the Auditor 21 11 option is fitted This event becomes active whenever a user with the specified Event Permission logs in The event remains active until all local and remote users with the speci fied permission have logged out See also section 4 4 1 Access levels Allows the operation of an event button if Screen Builder option fitted section 7 to be used as an event source See section 4 3 7 for Event Button details If the
66. Figure 9 Address Instrument number MAC address IP address lookup Obtain from a BootP Server BootP timeout 28 s IP address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 SNTP server enable SNTP client enable SNTP server 149 121 128 179 EuroPRP server enable 240 08 00 48 80 00 0 192 168 111 222 Apply Discard Local Host Andy136 4 Domain Domain Name Service FishesRus co uk Primary DNS Server 149 121 164 11 Secondary DNS Server 149 121 165 14 Apply Discard Figure B9k Network key menu structure HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 377 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure Figure System Current date DD MM YYYY B9b pond B9j B9k Section 4 6 Current time 55 Clock section 4 6 1 Apply Discard Output adjust section 9 Locale Channel ay Locale section 4 6 2 Language English V Select language Country United Kingdom Pick list Appropriate to Upgrade input Adjust Time Zone G
67. Figure 4 3 10b Batch values entry page 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 103 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH INITIATION Cont Status Batch in progress Batch Number 050822 001 Customer Name FishesRus Operator Name Marvin Supervisor Fred Figure 4 3 10c Status page Batch running BATCH MESSAGE DISPLAY The messages are displayed on the Graph Trend display as shown in figure 4 3 10d below This figure uses the exam ple given in the previous sections and uses only four messages Further messages would appear above message 4 The figure also shows that time and date are added to the messages and that the currently running batch number is given in the Group name area Touching this area calls the Batch status page In this job triggered batch the alarm triggering the job also appears as shown EN ES Touching this area calls the 70087 490 00 7 batch status page 800 00 Batch trigger source 12 13 46 22 08 05 22 08 05 12 14 31 Alarm s on 3 1 22 08 05 12 14 31 Supervisor Fred 22 08 05 12 14 31 Operator Name Marvin 22 08 05 12 14 31 Customer name FishesRus 22 08 05 12 14 31 Batch number 050822 001 22 08 05 12 14 31 Config Revision 48 Security Revision 1 22 08 05 12 14 31 Batch start Automatic ban Batch start message Date and time automatically printed Operator entries
68. Invensys EUROTHERM Invensys EUROTHERM Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s name Eurotherm Limited Manufacturer s address Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL United Kingdom Product type Paperless graphic recorder Models 6100A Status level A1 and above 6180A Status level A1 and above Safety specification BS EN61010 1 2001 02 EMC emissions specification BS EN61326 2002 02 immunity specification BS EN61326 2002 02 Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above prod ucts comply with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC and also with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Signed Dated 2 2005 Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited William Davis General Manager 1A249986U670 Issue 1 Dec 05 CN21129 2007 Eurotherm Limited All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form by any means without the prior written permission of the copyright owner Eurotherm Limited reserves the right to alter the specification of its products from time to time without prior notice Although every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained in this manual it is not warranted or represented by E
69. PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 5 5 Serial Communications Configuration Enable Alarms in the Messages To Print area Press Apply A sample Printout is shown in figure 12 5 5 in which it can be seen that it was the Orange channel which triggered the warning Note In the example above the event trigger is Unacknowledged alarm This means that once the first channel alarm becomes active and the relevant report printed then no further reports will be initiated until the alarm is acknowledged no matter how many other channel alarms go active If however an unlatched alarm becomes inactive this is the equivalent of its being acknowledged as far as report printing is concerned For latched alarms each alarm must be acknowledged before further reports can be triggered 22223322242221412322421242221222542252225 Paint Low Warning 455 5555 55 55 55 5 3 5 55 5 5 5 3 03 11 04 13 58 03 Red 73 0625 Blue 22 9688 Green 20 3125 range 9 8397 03 11 04 13 58 03 Alarm s on 4 1 Figure 12 5 5 Example printout UserGuide 028910 328 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 6 TSP600 SWITCH SETTINGS This section applies only to the Star TSP600 Printer The DIP switches are revealed by removing the access panel located on the underside of the printer The two switches appear as shown in figure 12 6a and their elemen
70. Spare Ch10 Alarm 1 enable 10 Alarm 1 type Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare 10 Alarm 2 enable Ch10 Alarm 2 type Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch10 Alarm 3 enable 10 Alarm 3 type 10 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch10 Alarm 4 enable 10 Alarm 4 type 10 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm
71. The default values are representations of an open switch for Open and a closed switch for Closed Figure 4 3 16h shows these two states Open String Closed String Figure 4 3 16h Default Open Closed depictions STATUS BITS This allows the user to view the value of a bit in a status word such as Instrument Status Channels in Group etc The relevant Register is accessed by entering its decimal number into the Register field which appears when User Defined is selected as Parameter Example Figure 4 3 161 below shows a master channel configuration page which causes a message to be sent to all groups if the memory device inserted in a slave recorder is full Open closed strings are also entered as Disk OK and DiskFull respectively so that if this channel is included in a group then whichever of these legends is appropriate will be dis played in the channel faceplate Note The message string is entered as a part of Message Configuration as described in section 4 3 8 From the recorder s documentation Instrument Status is held at register number 22 As can be seen from table 4 3 16b disk full status is reported by bit 4 UJ Item being tested Not used Always zero Not used Always zero Not used Always zero Card Disk 0 Inserted 1 Missing Card Disk 0 Not full i Full Not used Always zero Not used Always zero Channel status 0 No failures 1 Channel failure 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
72. Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length 11 Span high 11 Span low Zone high 11 Zone low Ch11 PV type Decimal places 11 Colour 11 Units Spare 11 Open string Spare Ch11 Close string Spare Descriptor Spare 11 No of alarms Ch11 PV format Spare Ch11 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 type 11 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare 11 Alarm 2 enable 11 Alarm 2 type 11 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare 11 Alarm 3 enable 11 Alarm 3 type 11 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare 11 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 type 11 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched 2 Latched 3 Trigger Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change
73. Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 0261 609 0262 610 0263 611 0264 612 0265 613 0266 614 0267 615 0268 616 026B 619 026D 621 0271 625 0275 629 0279 633 027D 637 0287 647 0291 657 0292 658 0293 659 02 719 02DO 720 02D1 721 02D2 722 02DC 732 02DD 733 02DE 734 02DF 735 02E9 745 2 746 02 747 02EC 748 0256 758 02 7 759 0258 760 02F9 761 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than be the previously configured constant value Constant the value returned will UserGuide Page 276 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 5 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch5 Span high Ch5 Span low Ch5 Zone high Ch5 Zone low Ch5 PV type Ch5 Decimal places Ch5 Colour
74. Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only
75. a ftp lt instrument IP address This allows the user to log in as the anonymous user if the instrument has any account with Remote user name set to Anonymous and a blank password b ftp lt user name password instrument IP address gt to log in as a specific user 3 For IES users only Microsoft Internet Explorer displays by default history files only To exit the history folder either uncheck the Tools Internet Options Advanced Browsing Enable folder view for FTP sites option or check the Tools Internet Options Advanced Browsing Use Web based FTP option HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 54 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 2 SAVE RESTORE As shown in figure 4 2a touching the Save Restore key calls the picklist Save Restore New Text Import Export Screen Import Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver Import Export Screen choices appear only if the User screens option is fitted Save as 6100AY File Name config Save File Name config See Screen Builder description section 7 User Linearisation 1 1 UserLint 1 UserLint 2 User Linearisation Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver zn Archive Config Security Network System 44 Save Configuration Data Restore Security Data New
76. ew 0 sseJppe 01 5103 jo von 6L y uonoes 81u02 s JO 01 Sjoe su JejeureJed ed 1ndino JequinN 1ndino 21767 uonoes sjeuueuo 1ndino suondo 92 JequinN 1eA4eS eN noad us ees pieosiq Addy spreog ndino enBoreuy 1 Anuauno gt gt 52 EXE 9 9 mr 5 2 2 2 s Aep peur 9148511 epoy eur i spieog 1ndu 2 z pieog uo gt pieog uo 2 spieog N SWWOJ 1 15 Joypny Jebeue v Aunoes yog gt gt SJesi elo SYN Sjeuueuo enuiA o sjauueyo gt 127 uonoes pieosig Addy jeuuoN e A1S sewa s Sjeuueuo 1ndino 02 2 uonoes Wass
77. or Adaptive A B Switching a Trend Intervali 6 settings enabled Circular Settings W Circular Speed 1 weeky Appear only if Circular Set Circular Chart Full New Chart Y V4 amp tings enabled Start At Monday Grid Type From Point v Select None Linear Log Grid Type Linear Y Grid Divisions Major 5 Grid Divisions Minor from Channel 3 y Recording Enable Recording 1200 ____ Grid Type Log 7 Recording Intervali 6 cebe oniy Grid Decades 5 Trend History Duration 314 36 Days Recording Enable Archive to Media Enable ilii Iv Archive via FTP Enable y Alarm Message W Ack Message v Point Type Totaliser V Selection 1 3 5 7 9 Enable v Enabled Disable TurbineTempA TurbineTempB Ete Apply Discard List of all available points input channels maths channels totalisers etc Vv Y Figure 4 3 2a Group configuration menu 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 65 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont GROUP NUMBER Allows a particular group to be selected for configuration TREND UNITS Allows mm hr or inches per hour to be selected for the chart speed Automatically converts the trend speed field be low DESCRIPTOR Allows the group name to be edited See sectio
78. 1 Operate the Touch Screen Calibrate key to call the first calibration screen as depicted in figure B1 4 1 2 Using the stylus touch the intersection of the upper set of crosshairs as requested by the display and keep touch ing it until the next target appears 3 Continue the process according to the directions appearing on the screen Once all the targets have been ac cepted the recorder returns to the diagnostic display Touch top left target Figure B1 4 1 Initial calibration display B1 4 2 Touch screen verify This allows the user to check the accuracy of the touch screen without having to carry out the calibration procedure described above Touching the screen with the stylus produces a crosshair at the position the recorder believes the screen to have been touched It is up to the user to decide if the response is good enough for recorder operation After a few seconds of non operation the recorder returns to the top level touch screen display figure 1 4 B1 4 3 Main menu Touching this returns the user to the top level diagnostics screen Figure 1 1 HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 353 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 1 5 SYSTEM SUMMARY This key calls a system summary display as shown for a typical small frame recorder in figure 1 5 SYSTEM SUMMARY Variant 6100A Software 4 0 DRAM 67108864 SRAM 32768 FLASH 134217728 MAC address 000A8
79. 261 Aer M P EET 261 Mec cmm V 261 7 6 ERROR CODES em des idend ede etos 261 8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS 262 821 INSTALLATION s ie orte eoe ut cette tet eoe te ee Eo E Tere dee eie 262 8 2 INTRODUCTION 2 pede ond ge poe PEE POTE RE eee 262 8 22 Function Codes ote aee ere a he eee oe a etn ad 262 DIAGNOSTIC CODES aer RR eiie rap RE RE PAPE Hd EAS 262 EXCEPTION CODES Lt Parton te a tts on 263 9 2 2 ues MY LM mim e P et Lid 263 DATA ENGODIING 3 etes acs ease ederet iei EY PE E Reden 263 8 2 3 Invalid multiple register writes esses 263 8 2 4 SECUTI aee Gur t Ee oe ae oes ou etel Deed 263 TO SEND A EOGIN REQUEST Pe pen RR EROR 266 92215 dextimessdges dc ots dd Ma aco Lip e oe 268 LONG MESSAGES eet npe bete te e sues sues Soya nad tes CE 268 8 3 ADDRESS MAD 3t nur got eu 270 8 4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION ses ee rer bes 272 8 4 1 Instrument data cette e eterne ci fei d ete ede teased eds 272 8 4 2 Channel configuration data sess
80. 273 reve deter e Det ee Yee e e HOT ae eek aes 273 2 aerate 274 CHANNELS 275 CHANNEL eret re Peter fe 276 CHANNELS HET 277 6 5 ae etit o gene Me 278 CHANNEL Z ate erede Tea E Ee 279 CHANNEL tot tort 280 CHANNEL 9s ui I rein a p o D eges 281 CHANNEL T0550 ette teu 282 CHANNEL T Pee 283 CHANNEL 12 ice br espe Det Ue ea 284 Cont User Guide HAO28910 Page x Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 8 4 3 Channel Run Time data 285 CHANNEL ee RAE E EORR 285 CHANNEL 2 285 CHANNEL 3 286 CHANNEL 4 286 CHANNEL 5 287 CHANNEL 6 287 CHANNEL 7 288 GHAININEL B E T e tee RE RR PM 288 el hrlsicc cc ro EOIR 289 CHANNEL 10 289 CHANNEL 11 290 CHANNEL 12 290 84 Group data i ehe preti e I
81. 32 SM 34 SOM 36 38 SN 40 DM 42 EISE 6 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 68 699 70 IAM 72 74 EMA 5 M6 7 8 9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 24 25 M26 27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 34 35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57 M58 M59 M60 M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68 M69 10 70 M71 M72 M73 M74 M75 M76 M77 M78 M79 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85 11 86 M87 M88 M89 M90 M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 100 12 EA 75 TEA 5 EHI 13 118 T19 T20 T21 T22 T23 T24 T25 T26 T27 T28 T29 30 T31 32 T33 14 T34 35 36 T37 T39 T40 T41 142 T43 44 T45 T46 T47 48 T49 15 T50 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C9 C10 C11 C12 C14 C15 C17 C18 19 C20 021 C22 023 024 C25 O26 027 028 C29 030 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Table 8 3 Channels in group interpretation 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 271 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION This section consists of a number of tables showing how the address space within the memory map is allocated For full details of configuration parameters refer to section 4 For convenience the word channel is used as an umbrella term for measuring points in general i e input channels maths chan
82. Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare CHANNEL 12 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Ch12 value Current process value PV Scaled See note 1 AIFA 41466 1 Ch12 status Channel status Enum Read only 1 41467 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Ch12 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 41468 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 2 Alarm 2 inactive 1 2 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6
83. Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Spare Spare IEEE 32 BIT CONFIGURATION DATA 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required 2 Acknowledge alarm 4 Scaled Enum Uintl6 Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write A3E6 41958 A3E7 41959 A3ES 41960 1 1 The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for Totaliser 1 Generally Parameter address for totaliser N Parameter address for totaliser 1 36 N 1 decimal TOTALISER 1 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Span high Span low Zone high Zone low Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value Display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 see note
84. Aqua Pool 37 25 Pale Red 38 26 Pale Blue 39 27 Lilac 40 28 Sky Blue 41 29 Wild Moss 42 2A Turquoise 43 2B Pale Green 44 2C Coffee 45 2D Wicker 46 2E Black 47 2F Dark Dark Grey 48 30 Dark Grey 49 31 Grey 50 32 Light Light Dark Grey 51 33 Light Dark Grey 52 34 Light Grey 53 35 Light Light Grey 54 36 White 55 37 Table B4 sheet 2 Colour definitions 28 to 55 User Guide HAO28910 Page 362 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS The following TCP ports are made use of by the recorder This information would be needed by anyone involved in setting up firewalls which may be used selectively to block incoming or outgoing access to specific ports PORT Usage 20 File Transfer Protocol data 21 File Transfer Protocol control 25 E mail SMTP 80 Web access 123 SNTP server 502 Modbus TCPIP communications 1264 Bridge communications general 50010 Bridge communications trend review HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 363 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS This section contains details of the ASCII characters that may be used with the Serial Comms option All the ASCII characters listed can be used as Start or End of message characters but only characters with decimal codes 32 to 127 can be used in messages as decimal codes to 31 are replaced by Question marks in message
85. Archive to Remote None W M Select archive interval Binary Select Binary and or CSV recorder Group1 0 0 0 0 anonymous RRR RRR 0 0 0 0 anonymous eR KK eR KK Apply Discard Figure 4 3 5b Archive configuration menu Remote settings 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 85 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont COMPRESSION Select Normal or High compression Normal compresses the data but still provides an exact copy High compresses more but channel values are saved only to 1 part in 10 resolution This field does not appear if CSV is selected as file format see below FLASH SIZE Allows the size of the internal flash memory to be viewed by the user SHORTEST TREND HISTORY DURATION This shows which group has the shortest amount of Flash memory allocated to its history record Providing the archive period is less than the value displayed in the Duration window no data will be lost from any group If the archive pe riod is greater than this value then some of the data in one or more groups will have been overwritten and therefore lost If there is more than one group with the same Shortest Trend History Duration the group with the lowest number is displayed E G If groups two and four both have the same duration Group 2 will appear in
86. Cold store temp sensor 1 too Strument name Instrument number chan 1 1 1 29 04 05 09 24 11 Cold store recorSer 6626 Unlatched absolute High 5 000 ctive 5 010 C Text entry body text Body Message if Include message checked Figure 4 3 19b E mail appearance The figure above shows that the e mail is in two distinct parts the header grey area and the body white area THE HEADER AREA The header contains details of the sender the recipient s the subject and the time and date Note The time and date may be local to the generating instrument or local to the recipient depending on the recipient s mail host configuration The header is important in the prevention of spamming The instrument adheres to the RFC2822 standard with re spect to e mail headers Some servers are stricter than others and it is not guaranteed that an e mail generated by the instrument will not be interpreted as a spam message by the receiving server From This contains either the Local Host name as defined in Network Name Setup and mailserver address or the IP ad dress if a fixed IP address is selected in Network Address settings See section 4 5 for details of the Network key To The first valid recipient address in the selected list CC The remaining valid addresses in the recipient list Subject Contains the subject text entered during configuration Empty if SMS Body selected as Protocol
87. Figure 13 1 2b Basic option internal wiring Recorder back panel UserGuide Page 332 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun O7 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY TRS OPTION This option is identical with the 6 12 channel basic option described in section 13 1 above except that one of the option slots is used for TRS output The TRS pinout is given in figure 13 2 below Note Only one transmitter power supply can be fitted in the portable case and may be terminated only at option slot 2 OR option slot 4 if available Pinout for TRS must use option slot 2 OR 4 Figure 13 2 TRS pinout 13 2 1 Internal wiring Figure 13 2 1 shows wiring details between the recorder and the back panel connectors 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 333 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 2 TRS OPTION Cont Portable case Recorder back panel Brown 6 8 me 100 to 240V 50 60 Hz Chassis ground Earth Safety earth Ethernet connector Note For the sake of clarity the Serial Communications and USB option wiring are not shown connector
88. Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Ch8 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 A1FO 41456 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only UserGuide HA028910 Page 288 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 9 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch9 value Ch9 status Current process value PV Channel status Scaled Enum See note 1 Read only AIFI 41457 1 2 41
89. Identifier Group 1 Last Error Group Number 1 Group 1 Y Show Title Bar Yes X Position Y Position 96 v Width v Height 96 v Background Colour Draw order 30 Component Type Group Vertical Trend gr_vtrend Goto Canvas Close More HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 241 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 SCREEN CREATION EXAMPLE Cont 12 Touch the component picklist field and highlight _ GomponemtProperyEditor Sereeni the topmost ch_hor_bar field a lal 5 Identifier Bar 1 13 In the Identifier field enter the name 1 using last Error the pop up keyboard To enter numbers touch the Channel 1 Channeli Numeric tab under the keyboard then touch the X Position 0 M required number Y Position 0 Y Width 100 14 The channel number is as required Height M0 v Background Colour 1 15 Touch the width field and enter a value of 100 Draw Order 20 Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph ch hor bar 16 Touch the height field and enter 10 eren mend ed re 17 Press Save 18 Touch the compo
90. Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour lect Al Alarm Number 1y Select Alarm number Select Unlatched Enable Off Latched Job Number 1 p Select Job number Trigger Category No Action Select Job category Apply Discard User Guide Page 372 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure B9b B9c B9k 91 Instrument Groups Figure B9d Channels Views Archive Events Figure B9e Event Buttons Messages User Linearisations Batch ASCII input Maths Section 4 3 15 Figure B9f Totalisers Counters Timers Connections Master Comms Figure B9h Output Channels Demand Writes Emails Figure 9 Reports Options Port Serial 1 V Select port Link Error Count Reset Error Count Protocol ASCII input Connection EIA232Y Baud Rate 192007 Stop Bits 17 Parity None Y Data Bits Timeout 250 ms First Start Char o Second Start Char First End Char Second End Char Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 SISISISISISTSTS TO Apply Discard Modbus Slave Section 4 3 15 Port Serial 1 Select port Link Error Cout o Reset Error Count Protocol Modbus Slave Co
91. Note All the following figures are approximate 7 5 1 XGA screen The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 245 mm across and 164 mm high This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array 1024 across by 700 verti cally Thus horizontally 10 mm 4 42 pixels Or 1 2 45 mm 10 24 pixels or 10pixels 2 45 mm and Vertically 10 mm 6 43 pixels 1 1 64 mm 7 pixels or 10pixels 2 3 mm Centre of screen is given by X 50 50 or by X 512 pixels Y 350 pixels 7 5 2 QVGA screen The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 100 mm across and 72 mm high This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array 320 across by 210 vertically Thus horizontally 10 mm 10 32 pixels Or 1 1 mm 32 pixels 10 pixels 3 2 mm and Vertically 10 mm 13 29 pixels 1 72 mm 2 4 pixels or 10pixels 3 4 mm Centre of screen is given by X 50 Y 5096 or by X 160 pixels Y 105 pixels 7 6 ERROR CODES Error codes 1 to F may appear at the top left corner of the screen The following codes are currently implemented and if more than one occurs at the same time the code numbers are added For example Error code 6 would mean that codes 4 and 2 had both occurred Component error e g image does not exist Error loading the Pro
92. Note because of the thickness of the lines takes the corners beyond the display area an error message may appear in the Last error field for the lines position maybe out of bounds This should not prevent the screen being drawn correctly Figure 7 4 19b Example 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 259 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 20 Arc This causes a curved line of user definable thickness to be drawn anti clockwise between start angle and start angle arc angle The origin centre of the arc is X position 1 2 Width Y position 1 2 Height Arcs cannot be filled Notes 1 Angle increases anticlockwise 2 Height 2 3 width if measuring in percent 3 Arcs cannot be filled the shading in the figure is included for clarity only X Y Position Arc end point 1 2 Height Arc Start point Start angle gt P Are angle Figure 7 4 20a Arc dimension definitions EXAMPLE An arc definition of X position 50 Y position 50 Width 50 Height 50 Start angle 0 Arc angle 270 would produce the curve depicted in figure 7 4 20b below 14 24 31 X position y position lt Width 1 1 1 Height Start of arc End of arc Figure 7 4 20b Sample arc UserGuide 028910 260 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS
93. Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 8EDD 36573 36574 36575 36576 8EEI 36577 8 2 36578 8EE3 36579 8 4 36580 8 7 36583 8EE9 36585 8 36589 8EF1 36593 8 5 36597 8EF9 36601 8F03 36611 8FOD 36621 8 36622 8FOF 36623 8F4B 36683 8F4C 36684 8F4D 36685 36686 8F58 36696 8F59 36697 8F5A 36698 8F5B 36699 8F65 36709 8F66 36710 8F67 36711 8F68 36712 8F72 36722 8F73 36723 8F74 36724 8F75 36725 Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 141 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 COUNTERS Cont RUN TIME DATA This table shows addresses for counter 1 Generally Counter N address counter 1 address 3 N 1 decimal COUNTER 1 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Value Status Alarms Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Bit 0 0
94. Sort ON If Sort is On those groups with batches running appear in group number order at the top of the list followed by any remaining groups also in group number order The key legend is Sort OFF HIGHLIGHT If Highlight is Off default then all groups text appears in white The key legend is Highlight ON If Highlight is On then the text associated with groups which have batches running appears in green Remaining groups text is in white The key legend is Highlight OFF EXIT Closes the pop up menu It closes itself after approximately 50 seconds HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 23 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont MESSAGE LOG Note Message log can also be selected using the Root menu Goto View Message log key This goes immedi ately to the first Message Log page for the current group to the screen i e the Goto Group menu does not appear If there are more messages than can be displayed in the height of the screen a scroll bar appears to allow hidden mes sages to be displayed Messages are retrieved from the history files in batches of 100 messages If there are more than 100 messages Earlier messages appears after the hundredth message Touching Earlier messages calls the option menu and touching Earlier messages in this menu calls the next batch of 100 and so on If applicable operating L
95. Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Channel 7 value Channel 7 status Current process value PV Channel status See note 1 Read only F8DB 63707 IF8DD 63709 2 1 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Channel 7 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write 63710 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 8 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length See note 1 F8DF 63711 2 Read 1 63713 1 Channel 8 value Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Har
96. The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display according to the specified mini mum height default 12mm If there are more channels than be fitted into the display a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow hidden channels to be accessed User Guide Page 253 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 4 Group numeric display This produces a display of a selected group s numeric values in one of a number of formats as described in Faceplate Style in table 7 3 2 above The number of columns can also be defined by the user according to the overall size of the display number of channels etc The default value of zero means that the recorder will display what it believes to be the most ergonomic number of columns The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display according to the specified mini mum height default 12mm If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow hidden channels to be accessed 7 4 5 Channel vertical horizontal bargraph For a specified channel this produces a dynamic horizontal or vertical bargraph display of channel value in a format defined by Bargraph Style and Scale style described in table 7 3 2 7 4 6 Channel Numeric For a specified channel allows the channel faceplate to
97. Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0 Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit15 0z Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Bo
98. Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uintl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 Double String_60 c Cea Cee eee String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String_60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write 42827 ATAC 42828 42830 A750 42832 42842 A764 42852 A765 42853 A766 42854 A767 42855 A768 42856 A769 42857 A76A 42858 42859 AT6C 42860 A76D 42861 A76E 42862 A76F 42863 770 42864 A771 42865 772 42866 773 42867 774 42868 775 42869 779 42873 797 42903 7 5 42933 A7D3 42963 ATF1 42993 ATE2 42994 ATF3 42995 ATF4 42996 A812 43026 A830 43056 43086 86 43116 43146 A8A8 43176 8 6 43206 8 4 43236 902 43266 920 43296 9 43326 95 43356 1 User Guide Page 292 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 1
99. User Guide HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 226 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 2 CONNECTION DETAILS The connection to the recorder is terminated at the RJ45 connector located as shown in figures 2 2 1a 2 2 1b The other end of the cable may be terminated for example at a hub a dial up router or a PC and it is up to the user to ob tain a suitable cable normally available from a computer supplier or electronic component distributor Note For direct connection between a PC and the recorder a crossover cable is required For all other connections a straight through connection is required 6 2 1 Direct PC connection The RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder is connected via a crossover cable to the PC network card connector 6 2 2 PC To remote recorder As shown in figure 6 2 2 one or more recorders Ethernet connector can be connected to a Dial Up Router plugged into a telephone socket The PC must similarly be connected to a telephone socket via a modem shown externally in the figure but often built in with modern computers The dial up router available from computer suppliers etc has an associated telephone number and can also have a security password system Both the telephone number and any password s must be known to the PC user before any attempt at communication is made The PC can be set up to dial the number automatically or the number may be dialled manually Reference should be
100. and Minimum Channel Figure 4 3 11u below shows the relevant area of the configuration page aths Number 1 Furnace 1 min temp Y Value Value Function Group Minimum Maths Number 1 Group 1 minimum Y Value 234 67 Function Group Minimum v Source 1 Furnace 1 V Units Source 1 Furnace 1 v Units Descriptor type User defined descriptor Descriptor type Minimum Channel DescriptorW Descriptor of channel with lowest current value Descriptor Furnace 1 min temp 7 User entere descriptor Descriptor Temp 1 Figure 4 3 110 Group minimum configuration page User Defined Descriptor This allows a descriptor to be entered in the normal way For example Furnace 1 min temp This descriptor is copied to the Maths Number field at the top of the display page Minimum Channel Descriptor This selection causes the descriptor of the point with the instantaneous current lowest value in the group to become the non editable maths channel descriptor For example if the four channels in the group Temp 1 to Temp 4 have the instantaneous values 800 950 790 and 873 respectively then the Descriptor will be Temp 37 Should Temp 3 rise above 800 whilst all the others remain static then the Descriptor would become Temp 1 The Maths Number field which normally copies the maths channel descriptor contains instead the text N Group
101. ee 251 Viewer 74 INGEWOEK TIFIED eieaa 198 Scaled HCI 73 Removable Media Capacity SE ANIA e 157 161 173 Removable medie e 77 Removable media instrument 5 17 SGODGe x e ee 100 Remove Media eese 27 d 82 Remove User eR RE 195 Screen Configuration menu 376 Builder 23410 261 94 Calibration 352 ere EE 179 323 iiec s 57 Configuration 8 4 44 4 179 323 cyte 246 Nerii nitet 375 63 183 FEM DUS 326 e 261 Jobs URP E DRM EHE 221 SD card location 2 2000 11 Require Authorization Signing 93 191 Second Start End CHIP te 148 Reset Secondary Maths channel 40024 900 214 eatin Ens 198 187 MER
102. for temperatures above and below the sterilizing temperature Fo dry and steam sterilizing calculations can be carried out by entering the correct constant The value can be held using a Disable job or set to zero prior to the next run using a reset job See section 4 7 for a description of jobs The function value is retained during power off Allows two channels A and B to be selected as alternative sources for the selected maths channel to copy The maths channel copies source A unless a Switch to job is active on the maths channel See section 4 7 for Job descriptions This function calculates mass flow from linear type transducer outputs This function calculates mass flow from square root type transducer outputs This takes the average value of a single channel over a specified number of readings taken at a specified interval The function value is retained during power off Mean Kinetic Temperature A single calculation to simulate non isothermal effects of variations in storage temperature Output 10 raised to the power of the selected input value Outputs the minimum value reached by any of the points in a selected source group since last reset The function ignores points that are not producing valid PV A disable job stops the function reading its input A reset job sets the function to the current minimum value within the group Note that for proper operation the maths function
103. subject as the SMS message and others use the body text these alternatives are provided for in the Protocol pick list in the Con figuration page described above 7 Anew event source Email fail can be used to trigger a job list should an e mail send failure occur User Guide HAO28910 Page 178 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 20 Reports configuration This allows the user to configure up to 10 reports for output to the chart or for printing by an ASCII printer option as a result of job action Figure 4 3 20a shows a typical configuration page accessed from the CONFIG button Reports item Report 1 Report 1 v Descriptor Report 1 Number of Fields 6 v Field 1 Type Date amp Time v Style Normal v Field 2 Type Text Text Style Bold Field 3 Type Process Valuey Point Channel 1 Style Emphasisedv Field 4 Type Batch Field 1 Style Banner v Field 5 Type 1 Message 7 Style Normal v Field 6 Type Line Feed v Line Feed 1 Apply Discard Figure 4 3 20a Reports Configuration REPORT Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration DESCRIPTOR A name for the Report can be entered here NUMBER OF FIELDS Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report FIELD N TYPE 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item Date amp Time Causes
104. 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 2 Alarm 3 inactive 1 2 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 139 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 Counters INTRODUCTION The virtual channels option introduces a user configurable number of counters which can be preset disabled incremented or decremented by Job action If access is permitted the user can preset the counter to a selected value as and when required from the configuration page See section 4 7 for Job details and section 4 3 21 for a description of virtual channels If the Batch option is fitted section 4 3 10 then batches can be started when a specified counter changes value and if this is done the batch number is the value of the specified counter CONFIGURATION Figure 4 3 13 shows a typical enabled counter configuration page The page is accessed from the Root menu Opera tor Config menu Counter number 1 Counter 1 Y Enable v Valu
105. 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 t
106. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 269 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 3 ADDRESS MAP Figure 8 3 shows the range of addresses allocated to various recorder functions Each of these functions is described in detail in later sections Addresses 47 to FCBE Counters Addresses FFF5 to FFFF Not used Addresses FB7F to 46 Totalisers Addresses FFFO to FFF4 Permanent ID table Addresses F9EF to FB7E Maths Addresses FCBF to FFEF Spare Addresses F8C3 to F9EE Addresses F8C3 to FCBE Run time data Input channels IEEE Region 32 bit data access area 48 to F8C2 Addresses D4E7 to F8C2 Point configuration data dore RUE IEEE Region 32 bit data access area 32 bit Addresses ED83 to F48A Totalisers config Ps Addresses DOE6 to D4E6 R W Indirection table daia E 05 Addresses 5 to DOES R O Indirection table Addresses CC26 to 4 Feature ID table Addresses D4E7 to DF72 Addresses A4D6 to CC25 Input channels Group data Addresses A47C to A4D5 Counters 406 405 Addresses 109 to 405 Point run time data Address
107. 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 305 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 5 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Channel 5 value Channel 5 status Current process value PV Channel status See note 1 Read only F8D3 63699 F8D5 63701 2 1 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Channel 5 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write F8D6 63702 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 6 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Se
108. 04 4 1220 04 5 1221 04 1231 04D0 1232 0401 1233 04D2 1234 04DC 1244 04DD 1245 04DE 1246 04DF 1247 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 279 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 8 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch8 Span high Ch8 Span low Ch8 Zone high Ch8 Zone low Ch8 PV type Ch8 Decimal places Ch8 Colour Ch8 Units Spare Ch8 Open string Spare Ch8 Close string Spare Ch8 Descriptor Spare Ch8 No of alarms Ch8 PV format Spare Ch8 Alarm 1 enable Ch8 Alarm 1 type Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch8 Alarm 2 enable Ch8 Alarm 2 type Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch8 Alarm 3 enable Ch8 Alarm 3 type Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch8 Alarm 4 enable Ch8 Alarm 4 type Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters ex
109. 0X 0Y where X and Y defines the top left corner position in pixels and and are the width and height of the component in pixels The identifier is the component name as appears in the Identifier field of the Component Property Editor page Quick entry to edit If selected this function allows direct entry from the user screen being edited to the Component Property editor page without the options menu first appearing offering the choice of Batch or Edit Screen If Quick entry is selected the option menu does not appear when the option key is touched The Batch status page can be called by touching the Page Name area at the top of the screen as an alternative to the option menu Quick entry has no effect on screens other than user screens Use Last properties If selected then all the common attributes e g position size colours etc of the most recently edited object are applied to the next component to be added Positioning Grid Causes a grid to appear on the Goto canvas screen to help in component layout Positioning tip If enabled then hovering over the highlighted item in a goto Canvas screen causes the coordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear in whatever units pixels etc are selected for the component The first number gives the left right co ordinate the second gives the up down position Clicking the left mouse key within a component causes the c
110. 2 1 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Channel 9 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 F8E6 63718 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 10 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length See note 1 F8E7 63719 2 Read only F8E9 63721 1 Channel 10 value Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Channel 10 status 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Channel 10 alarms Alarm information F8EA 63722 Bit 0 0
111. 2 ll SO ER NAMES 251 4 049000 148 bee 136 Comms e usse 78 A v cepas et ERAS 152 Unlock flap permission Eun 187 Timer Update when sss 251 Configuration menu 372 Upgrade ects cab ce deii states dante 202 Copy ee eee VARV IR C Ra 206 Configuration MENU eee eee enel 378 Description iere pot reed 144 USB Disable e naa a 216 Front port location 11 ODS Satie x od o cM M tc dt 216 Lock up NES tee 344 Reset o o 8 88 8 216 OVverCurfent 17 Stam JOD pete e De 216 Power fault Key tc dos 17 Start Reset Permission 40 2 187 SpeCGifiCaliori z 3 irem risa n m E des 344 Timer Active Event Source 440 04 90 Unsupported edere tete rien 17 Timestamp circular charts 43 Use Timestamp maths function 109 Counter batch 101 Totaliser Last properties eontra t 240 Configuration Text batch number 101 32 bit data MOD
112. 289 0122 290 0123 291 0124 292 0127 295 0129 297 012D 301 0131 305 0135 309 0139 313 0143 323 014D 333 014 334 014F 335 018B 395 018C 396 018D 397 018E 398 0198 408 0199 409 019A 410 019B 411 01A5 421 01A6 422 01A7 423 0148 424 01B2 434 01B3 435 01B4 436 01B5 437 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 274 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 3 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch3 Span high Ch3 Span low Ch3 Zone high Ch3 Zone low Ch3 PV type Ch3 Decimal places Ch3 Colour Ch3 Units Spare Ch3 Open string Spare Ch3 Close string Spare Ch3 Descriptor Spare Ch3 No of alarms Ch3 PV format Spare Ch3 Alarm 1 enable Ch3 Alarm 1 type Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch3 Alarm 2 enable Ch3 Alarm 2 type Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch3 Alarm 3 enable Ch3 Alarm 3 type Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch3 Alarm 4 enable Ch3 Alarm 4 type Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value disp
113. Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only UserGuide Page 308 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 11 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Channel 11 value Channel 11 status Current process value PV Channel status Float Enum See note 1 Read only 63723 F8ED 63725 2 1 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Channel 11 Al
114. Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch4 Alarm 3 enable Ch4 Alarm 3 type Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch4 Alarm 4 enable Ch4 Alarm 4 type Ch4 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20
115. Span higlilow iis aeeie rne OR 170 Synchronisation by 197 TyD6S coepi ouv 90 System key menu sse 378 So rce 1 ue penne 91 Source 2 sense te ecd ees 92 T 157 159 om 18 B 218 Tas Channel ke mien rs 76 Group Seba tea Ee alee 218 Termination and biassing 146 Select job ME 218 176 179 246 323 Configuration 77 Messages 5 268 Special et De fee sid dei siete 352 Saveand uui e Re EE 56 Specific gas 0 112 114 S MM MEER 209 379 Specification Analogue output rere epp ettet eret 350 There appears to be no free disk space 225 233 Back Up battery 343 Thermocouple Battery nS 343 Type selection ttt 72 Event input board 350 Types and ranges 346 Event inputs sein dite theives ete 316 Types J and T colours 338 Input 4 4288 8222 tents 79 Pressure transducer 22 336 Recorder general
116. Tank Temps 8026C026000002A9 mI Ready ai Figure 4 3 54 CSV data example FTP FILE FORMAT The above description for Media file format also applies to Remote setting 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 89 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 6 Event configuration A number of internal and external Event input option triggers are available for use in initiating Events which will then run job lists Events can have up to two sources each but can themselves be used as sources allowing a large number of inputs to be used Input sources can be logically combined and can be inverted if required EVENT NUMBER Event Number 1 Event 1 J9M Select 1 to 96 Source 1 Sense Source 1 Sourcel gt Select source inversion or not Source 2 Sense Not Source 2 Select source inversion or not Descriptor Event 1 Job Number 1 Y 39 Select job number Source 1 Alarm on Group Vt Select source 1 On Group 1 Group 1 Y Make source 1 sub selection if any Source 2 Point Alarm Y Select source 2 On Math 12 Make source 2 sub selection if Alarm 2 V Make sub sub selection if any gt gt Select logic combination Only AND Operator y NAND NOR Category Action _ V 3J Select Job Category Apply Discard Figure 4
117. The test will result in the legend S1 2 Passed or S1 2 Failed replacing Serial 1 or Serial 2 on short 6199 the appropriate key If the Serial Comms option is not fitted pressing either key returns Failed message Figure B1 6 3 Loop back test wiring B1 6 4 Battery This area normally green flashes red white when the battery needs to be replaced section B2 Battery status is checked once every 15 minutes B1 6 5 Lockable The lockable flap display is green if the lockable flap is fitted or flashes red white if the option is not fitted B1 6 6 Option boards This shows which option boards are fitted where as viewed from the rear of the recorder RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS If relay output boards are fitted the associated relays can be tested by touching the Option board key then touching the relevant relay key to energise de energise the relay Figure B1 6 6 shows a typical display RELAY TESTS Y Exercise relays by 1 Energised 2 De Energised touching keys Relay 4 greyed out for 3 relay boards 3 De Energised Main Menu Return to previous menu level Figure B1 6 6 Relay board test display EVENT INPUTS If event input boards are fitted touching the option board key calls a display showing input status 1 active 0 not active Changes in input status can be displayed by operating the Update key B1 6 7 Input boards This shows how many input boards are fitted
118. across the probe in mV Probe temperature in Kelvins Figure 4 3 11r shows the configuration menu Figure 4 3 11s shows oxygen concentration versus probe emf for various Maths Number 1 Mathi Y Value 0 0000 Units Function Zirconia Probe Y Probe temperature Channel 1 Probe Channel 2 Reference Partial Pressure 20 95 Units Units Figure 4 3 11r Zirconia probe function configuration menu temperatures To obtain a useful result it is necessary to scale correctly The channel which is measuring the probe output would normally need to be set to Input Type mV Input low 0 input high 100 A typical temperature measuring channel might be set up as Input Type Thermocouple Lin type Type Range low 273 Range high 1800 Range units The maths channel scaling would typically be configured as Units 96 Scale Low 0 Scale High 5 for boiler flues or 10 for kilns User Guide 28910 126 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE Cont 100 1 4 2 10 1 4 gt X 1 1 N o D V lt SZ NO 2 S 0 1 o 1 LA v XN 2 0 01 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 1
119. column display figure 3 4 6a is used for groups with up to four points enabled and the two column display figure 3 4 6b is used with scroll bar if necessary for groups with more than four points The small frame recorder does not employ a three column mode figure 3 4 6c User Guide HAO28910 Page 48 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE hannel 3 hannel 5 12 02 27 1 2 700 87 487 39 235 68 378 99 0 49 0 85 3 4 6 NUMERIC DISPLAY MODES Cont 4 6 LA Logged out 700 87 c 378 99 689 43 375 01 c Channel 13 ER ES gt lt Figure 3 4 6b Numeric display mode example 6 channels 06 04 05 Y 487 39 235 68 0 49v 0 85v Y 483 72 c 255 81 Channel _________ 0 53 0 79 235 235 235 320A 331A Figure 3 4 6c Numeric display mode example 19 channels 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 49 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 5 OPERATOR NOTES Note Operator notes should not be confused with similar messages described in section 4 3 8 which appear as a result of job action It is possible for the user to enter a note of up to 120 characters at any time from any display page not from configu ration page
120. lt Select Required Timer On Active Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 8 Timer job menu layout 4 7 9 Batch category If the Batch option section 4 3 10 is fitted a previously Stored batch can be started by job action or by a Batch Start command sent via MODBUS TCP section 8 If a batch is already running it will be restarted In Batch configura tion if Scope Group then a specific group can be selected for the batch job to act on if Scope Instrument the Group selection field does not appear Job Number 17 Category Batch v Select Start or Stop Action Start Fr Select Required Group Group 1 Group 1 only if Scope Group in Batch Configuration On Active V Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 9 Batch job menu layout User Guide HAO28910 Page 216 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 10 Recording category The following Recording jobs are available Enable This enables recording to the group s history file while active while inactive or while unac knowledged This allows for example recording to be enabled job 2 only whilst a Trend Freeze job job 1 is inactive i e recording is disabled for the duration of a Trend Freeze job Trend freeze is described in section 4 7 11 below Speed Interval Recording speed interval B is selected for use for the
121. made to the computer documentation or help pages if necessary Once communication has been established the software can be run phone Tm Socket 05 cotter f Modem Figure 6 2 2 Remote connection example 6 2 3 Networked systems For PCs and recorders connected into an internal network it is necessary only to obtain an IP address or name and the required passwords in order to establish connections between the PC s and the recorder s For PCs remote from a networked system which is permanently connected to the internet it is necessary to obtain an IP address or name and the required passwords in order to establish connections between the PC and the recorder s In many cases it is also necessary that the internal network and firewall if such exists be configured to allow access For PCs remote from a networked system which is not connected to the internet a system similar to that shown in fig ure 6 2 2 is needed 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 227 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Please refer to the CD box insert for details of software installation 6 4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION The recorder configuration is in three areas Network Options and Access 6 4 1 Network The Network key fields are fully described in Section 4 5 6 4 2 Options In order to make the Full option accessible it must first be correctly entered in the Options Me
122. returns to a non active state The indicator is on flashing before acknowledgment steady after acknowledgement until the alarm clears Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration Latched Latched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain active until the alarm is acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned to a non active state The indicator is on flashing before acknowledgment steady after acknowledgement until the alarm has been acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned to a non active state Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration Continuous jobs remain active only whilst the alarm trigger source is active the job finishes when the alarm clears whether acknowledged or not Trigger When triggered all associated jobs are initiated and continuous jobs remain active until the alarm clears There is no alarm indication and no messages are printed TYPE This field appears only when the alarm Enable is not selected Off Each alarm can be defined as absolute high abso lute low deviation in deviation out rate of change rise or rate of change fall Absolute High As shown in figure 4 3 3d an absolute high alarm becomes active when the channel value exceeds the threshold value The alarm remains active until the channel value falls below Threshold minus hyster esis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time
123. section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 283 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 12 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length 12 Span high Ch12 Span low Ch12 Zone high 12 Zone low Ch12 PV type Ch12 Decimal places 12 Colour 12 Units Spare 12 Open string Spare Ch12 Close string Spare Ch12 Descriptor Spare 12 No of alarms 12 PV format Spare Ch12 Alarm 1 enable Ch12 Alarm 1 type 12 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch12 Alarm 2 enable 12 Alarm 2 type 12 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare 12 Alarm 3 enable 12 Alarm 3 type 12 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare 12 Alarm 4 enable Ch12 Alarm 4 type 12 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to e
124. should not be assumed from the above that it will be recognised by the auto detect system If Overwrite existing slaves is not enabled AND the number of detected slaves is greater than the number of free slots then this text reads Please select a maximum of N slave devices where N is the differ ence between the number of slaves detected and the number of free slots If the user selects more than N devices only the first N selected devices are used Please select required slave devices Furnace temps 1 at 149 121 130 211 1 Iv Furnace Temps 2 at 149 121 130 211 2 Iv Instrument at 149 121 130 232 1 m Instrument at 149 121 130 236 1 2747 at 149 121 130 237 1 Discard Apply Re Scan Figure 4 3 16c Auto detect results page As can be seen from the figure above each instrument has a tick box associated with it The user enables those instru ments which are to be included in the Slave List by touching the relevant boxes Operation of Apply then causes the selected instruments to be incorporated into the Slave list in the Modbus Master configuration page If Overwrite existing slaves is enabled existing slaves are overwritten starting with slave 1 in the list If Overwrite existing slaves is not enabled then new slaves selected from the Auto detect page will be inserted into the free slots in the slave list Note free sl
125. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 User Guide HA028910 Page 268 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 5 TEXT MESSAGES Cont Example 3 Message of more than 60 but less than 120 characters 1121314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19120 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Message 04 04 02 1 6 31 05 Blaticlh stopped of belt fajlijlj re 1 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 33 31 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6 75 72 65 20 6E 20 6 Space hex 20 Null 00 1121314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 message 69 6 65 20 33120 73 65 63 74 69 6F 6 20 31 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
126. 07 Page 379 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank User Guide 028910 Page 380 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE ANNEX C WEB SERVER DETAILS INTRODUCTION This feature allows a user limited Read Only access to the recorder from a remote PC by l Opening a standard internet browser 2 Typing in the IP address of the recorder in the form http xxx xxx xxx xxx or the Local host name http Local host IP address and Local host are described in section 4 5 of this manual 3 Entering the correct Remote user name and Remote password as set up in the Security Access menu described in section 4 4 1 If all the entries are correct the Web Server home page appears the top part of which is shown in figure C1 below Note The Remote user must have Allow web server permission enabled section 4 4 1 and must have sufficient network access to the product 12 04 06 14 53 09 FAEUROTHERM Web Server Instrument Trends Message Logs History Eurotherm Home Page Recorder Downloads Document Library Search Figure C1 Home page As can be seen there are two sets of controls viz the internet links and the instrument access tabs C1 1 INTERNET LINKS These three links take the user to various areas of the manufacturer s web site C1 2 ACCESS TABS Most of the information displayed in the pages described below i
127. 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only UserGuide HA028910 Page 290 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 Group data Generally Parameter address for group N Parameter address for group 1 629 N 1 decimal GROUP 1 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec egister Length Grpl Trend type Grpl Trend rate Grpl Archive rate Grp1 Descriptor Spare Grp1 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grpl Text length Grpl Text time stamp Grpl Read text Reserved Write text Reserved Batch start Grpl Batch stop Batch running Text field 1 Reserved Text field 2 Reserved Grp1 Text field 3 Reserved Grpl Text field 4 Reserved Grp1 Text field 5 Reserved Grpl Text field 6 Reserved Spare Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled
128. 1 Function code 03 REQUEST The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described above are Function code 03 1 byte Register start address 2 bytes Word count Total number of registers 1 to 125 decimal 1 to 7D hex 2 bytes Thus to read Channel 5 descriptor start address 031F 10 registers altogether the following request as described in figure 8 5 1a would be transmitted 0000000000060003031F000A Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Register Register Word count Word count identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol identifier function start start high byte low byte lowing code hex address address high byte low byte Figure 8 5 1a Function code 03 request example RESPONSE As a response to a request the recorder returns a similar message but the function code 03 is followed by Byte count 2 x the number of register values requested in hex 1 byte Value of register at start address 2 bytes Value of register at start address 1 2 bytes etc etc Value of final register 2 bytes Thus as a response to the above request for channel 5 descriptor the following message as expanded in figure 8 5 1b would be returned to the host assuming channel descriptor to be Channel 5 Descriptor 0000000000170003 1443686 16E6E656C20352044657363726970746F72 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 0
129. 108 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont Log Base 10 Log Basee e to the power Modulus Channel Maximum Channel Minimum Channel Average Master comms Rate of change O2 Correction Relative Humidity Zirconia probe Timestamp Config Revision Number Security Revision Number Scale Low Scale High Takes 108 of selected input For example Input 2 gives maths function value 0 3010 Takes log of selected input For example Input 2 gives maths function value 0 6931 Takes natural antilog of input For example Input 0 6931 gives maths function value 2 This function copies the magnitude of the input value without the sign For example the modulus of value 100 100 the modulus of 100 100 Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last reset When reset the value is reset to the current input value Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last reset When reset the value is reset to the current input value Takes the average value of the selected channel over a specified time period The time period must be a multiple of 125 msecs For example a period of 0 2 seconds would be rejected but a period of 0 25 seconds would be accepted Allows a maths channel to read point values from other instruments on the Modbus link Produces a value for the speed at which a signal chan
130. 167 MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS 168 23 175 Ouipur channels 1 9 s M Lp tele LO ha LOU LEY 169 MASTER COMMS EA Le is daa decimas tuse i IL 169 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS RETRANSMISSION 170 4 3 18 Demand ar E 171 DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION 171 WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER 173 4 3 19 Emails iier e eR Ue Eas 175 EMAIECONEIGURATION ee e eas ttp sed Ue ee ves do ria 175 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS 176 177 OPERATIONS ttti DER D ERIS 178 4 3 20 Reports configuration essen eene nennen 179 REPORT D Ee m atate ads 179 DESCRIPTOR sse ieir ee res 179 NUMBER OF FIELDS 179 FIELD N TYPE 179 0 180 POINT ie 180 FEED etr totae ing iore a ette deeper Pe epa Rc pU Ed Dee e paid 180 2 3 2 T OptlOns xi noter ens ee eru tec SER 181 TRIAL MODE cement 182 VIRTUAL CHANNELS 182 SIMULATION OPTION eee torte ette t 183 Cont User Guide HAO28910 Page vi Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page SECURITYa s Roo EEE 184 AAT Access levels ce re e eot vett ee ep time eee eta 185 SETT
131. 2 2 1a and 2 2 1b show connector locations for the small and large frame recorders respectively The figures are not to the same scale Figure 2 2 1c shows details of universal input board wiring and figure 2 2 1d gives the pinouts for option boards CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS Maximum wire size 4 13mm 11 AWG Minimum wire size 0 08 28 AWG Design torque 0 35Nm Safety Earth USB 1 USB 2 M4 O USB Ports option l gt Safety Earth USB 1 USB 2 05 5 option 1 2 Ethernet Mains supply Port2 Ethernet Mains supply connection RJ45 connection
132. 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 355 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 6 8 Main menu To return to the main diagnostics display touch the Main Menu key B1 7 QUIT Allows the user to quit diagnostics after confirmation The recorder restarts in normal operating mode B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING CAUTION The touch sensitive screen used in this product is designed for use by hand or by the stylus supplied only The use of sharp or pointed implements such as pens keys and fingernails to operate the instrument must be avoided or irreparable damage will be done to the surface material When cleaning the touch screen a moist cloth should be used if necessary with a minimal amount of mild soap solution ALCOHOLS SUCH AS ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL MUST NEVER BE USED ON THE SCREEN User Guide HAO28910 Page 356 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B2 2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Battery replacement Every three years B2 2 1 Battery replacement procedure WARNING In order to eliminate the risk of user contact with hazardous voltages the recorder must be isolated from line power before its top cover is removed The battery is of poly carbonmonofluoride lithium construction and should be disposed of according to local regula tions covering this type of battery Note All battery backed RAM data is lost during battery change see Anne
133. 3 11 shows the configuration fields for measuring Fo using channel 1 as the temperature input channel Fo values for target temperature 121 1 C and z value 10 C and 75 C as the low cut off value below which killing credits are not to be counted Maths Number 2 Math 2 Y Value OFF Reset now Function fValue F value of Channel 17 Sterilizing Temp 121 1 Temperature interval 10 Low cut off 75 Figure 4 3 11c Fo setup example APPLICATION NOTE To ensure that sterilizer loads which contain materials with differing thermal inertias are thoroughly sterilized a typi cal sterilizer has up to 12 different measuring points within the load To ensure accuracy the temperature sensors should be calibrated and the channel adjustment facility used to compensate for any inaccuracies found If each of the inputs is used to compute an F value each of these values can then be used as an input to a Group Mini mum function with a high absolute alarm set at the correct F value The alarm output can be used to sound a warning or an associated relay can be linked into the autoclave control system to signify the end of a sterilization cycle 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 111 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont LINEAR MASS FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control of
134. 3 6 Event configuration menu layout typical Allows the required event 1 to 96 to be selected for configuration SOURCE TYPES Note Event sources associated with options appear only if those options are fitted Off Global alarm Global Unack d alarm Comms channel timeout Timer active Batch Running Batch Start Event Point alarm Unack d point alarm Alarm on Group The event is disabled The event is active whilst any one or more alarms is active The event is active as long as there is an unacknowledged alarm present The event is set if no communication has been made with Comms channels within the Comms channel timeout period set in Instrument configuration section 4 3 1 The source is reset when the next communication occurs The event is triggered when a specified timer section 4 3 14 becomes active The event is triggered when a batch is started and remains active until the batch stops If Scope Group in Batch configuration section 4 3 10 then a group can be specified If Scope Instrument the group select field does not appear If the Batch option is not fitted Batch running does not appear in the picklist The event is triggered fleetingly when a batch is started If Scope Group in Batch con figuration section 4 3 10 then a group can be specified If Scope Instrument the group select field does not appear If the Batch option is not fitted Batch running does not appear in the pickl
135. 4 4 1 above This field allows the user to set an expiry period of up to 999 days which applies to all pass words The number of days remaining to expiry is shown in the login page If set to zero then the expiry period does not apply Note All required passwords MUST be changed within this number of days or all logins will be disabled In this situation the configuration of the recorder will be available only to those with Service Level access and in most cases a call will have to be made to the recorder supplier or service agency But see Password Change on Expiry below Minimum Password Length This allows a minimum length of password to be entered default 0 minimum 3 If an Require Signing attempt is made to enter a new password with fewer characters than the minimum a warning message appears on the screen Invalid Password Length and the new password is ignored If this field is enabled then changes to the recorder operation configuration or any other item included in the history file can be made only by those users whose Can Sign permission is enabled in the Access menu described in section 4 4 1 above When Apply is attempted a signature page appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and of a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the change 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 191 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUID
136. 42334 ASTC 42364 A57D 42365 ASTE 42366 ASTF 42367 59 42397 5 42427 A5D9 42457 5 7 42487 A615 42517 A633 42547 A651 42577 A66F 42607 68 42637 AGAB 42667 A6C9 42697 6 7 42727 1 Be Bee ee eee eee ee 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 291 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 2 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Grp2 Trend type Grp2 Trend rate Grp2 Archive rate Grp2 Descriptor Spare Grp2 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp2 Text length Grp2 Text time stamp Grp2 Read text Reserved Grp2 Write text Reserved Grp2 Batch start Grp2 Batch stop Grp2 Batch running Grp2 Text field 1 Reserved Grp2 Text field 2 Reserved Grp2 Text field 3 Reserved Grp2 Text field 4 Reserved Grp2 Text field 5 Reserved Grp2 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0 Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit15 0 Point 16 not
137. 88 PassWord air aa 88 Mole ec 216 Remote 88 Permission ect tee erect renes 187 Security dev Eee eed a nae OUT TUR EN 56 Configuration tet ie PEL 184 Retransmission 22220112211 170 Key Retry Modbus slave 4 040 152 376 Retry Time 176 Levels sn tina 185 Reversed colour 4 4 4 250 MCCS 263 239 Revision ONONO 31 99 193 212 Revision Numbers eese 211 Select Right 22 erede dedu ees 28 HOD Bee cont ido eat A 28 Rolling 4 2044 010004044 108 116 ema EE 28 Root key 70 Rotate spe ae 67 Send on power Up ettet 172 pepe rete c n edd 40 Send BDOITIO ceto en ca leet decis 221 Round Rectangle 44 4 230 Sendel 176 RTD Serial Modbus slave ses 152 Scolii 1 346 Serial 2 care 355 Type selection eer
138. 988 1 5E0 1 988 0 4 712 2 0 0 4 712 0 SLO EO 18 840 4 0 0 1 8840E1 25 908 5 0 0 2 5908E1 32 977 6 0E0 3 2977E1 40 045 7 0 0 4 0045E1 47 114 8 0E0 4 7114 1 50 648 8 5 0 5 0648 1 4 60 50 6 5 metres 40 2 metres 30 20 Volume cubic metres 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Depth metres Figure 4 3 9b Sample User Linearisation table User Guide HAO28910 Page 98 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 Batch recording option Batch records form a part of recording history and are included in the normal archiving process to a removable SD or Compact Flash card or to a remote PC sections 4 1 and 4 3 5 Batches can be initiated directly by the operator 1f access permission is granted automatically whenever a specified counter changes value by job or remotely via MODBUS TCP Batches can be defined as start stop or continuous and can incorporate all channels or just those associated with a specified Group For start stop batches the batch record starts when the batch is started and continues until it is stopped For continuous batches the batch record starts when the batch is started and continues until the next batch is started or until batch recording is disabled When using review software the to Batch feature can be
139. Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Spare Spare IEEE 32 BIT CONFIGURATION DATA 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Scaled Enum Uintl6 Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for Counter 1 address for counter N Parameter address for counter 1 36 N 1 decimal COUNTER 1 Parameter Name Description Access AATC 42108 A47D 42109 AATE 42110 Start Addr Hex Dec 1 1 Generally Parameter Register Length Span high Span low Zone high Zone low Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value Display full scale Lower span value display 7 Zone upper value 46 of chart width
140. Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 9 Parameter Name Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access D5E3 54755 D5E5 54757 DSE7 54759 D5E9 54761 DSEB 54763 DSED 54765 DSEF 54767 D5F1 54769 D5F3 54771 Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch9 span high Ch9 span low Ch9 Zone high Ch9 Zone low Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write D607 54791 D609 54793 D60B 54795 D60D 54797 D60F 54799 D611 54801 D613 54803 D615 54805 D617 54807 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option d
141. CSV is ASCII based and cannot interpret Unicode characters Some characters available to the user will therefore be displayed incorrectly in CSV files User Guide HAO28910 Page 88 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont MEDIA FILE FORMAT Cont If CSV or Binary and CSV is selected a number of extra check boxes appear Figure 4 3 5c above shows a typical menu page Figure 4 3 5d below shows the effects of enabling the CSV check boxes with the exception of CSV use Tab delimiter the use of which is as follows CSV USE TAB DELIMITER Despite its name CSV does not always use commas as separators For example in some countries the decimal point is represented by a full stop period whilst in other areas a comma is used In order to avoid confusion between the comma as a decimal point and the comma as a separator a different separator is used usually the semicolon The instrument automatically chooses a separator suitable for use with the Locale selected in System Configuration section 4 6 2 CSV Use Tab delimiter allows the user to override this choice and force the instrument to use tabs as separators This can be particularly useful when moving the data from one locale to another CSV DATE TIME FORMAT Allows Text or Spreadsheet numeric to be selected Text causes a time date to appear in the spreadsheet Spreadsheet numeric displays the numbe
142. Ch5 Units Spare Ch5 Open string Spare Ch5 Close string Spare Ch5 Descriptor Spare Ch5 No of alarms Ch5 PV format Spare Ch5 Alarm 1 enable Ch5 Alarm 1 type Ch5 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch5 Alarm 2 enable Ch5 Alarm 2 type Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch5 Alarm 3 enable Ch5 Alarm 3 type Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch5 Alarm 4 enable Ch5 Alarm 4 type Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above
143. Close The Component property editor page reappears with the default values for the most recently added component displayed Touch the Identifier field then enter the name Group 1 Ok using the pop up keyboard which appears In Group Number select 1 Group 1 Title bar is selected on yes as required Enter the X 25 and Y 48 co ordinates using the same technique as was used for the Identifier field in step 6 The default dimensions 50 x 50 are as required 10 The Draw order is as required 11 Press Save Group Vertical Trend gr_vtrend Group Horizontal Trend gr_htrend Group Vertical Bargraph gr_ver_bar Group Horizontal Bargraph gr_hor_bar Group Numeric gr_num Channel Vertical Bargraph ch_ver_bar Channel Numeric ch_num Channel Data ch_data Dialog Action Navigation Action Operator Button Add Del Copy gr vtrend 6 1 V Identifier gr vtrend 6 1 Last Error Group Number 0 Current display group V Show Title Bar Yes V X Position 10 96 M Y Position 0 y Width 50 y Height 50 Y Background Colour 1 Draw Order 30 Component Type Group Vertical Trend gr_vtrend Goto Canvas Save Close More Add gr vtrend 6 1 V
144. Close string Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters String 8 Read only 008F 143 Spare 0093 147 Chl Descriptor Channel descriptor up to 20 characters String 20 Read only 0097 151 Spare 00A1 161 Chl No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 00AB 171 Chl PV format Enum Readonly 00AC 172 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Spare OOAD 173 Chl Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Read only 00E9 233 0 Off 2 Latched 1 Unlatched 3 Trigger Chl Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Read only 234 0 Absolute low 1 Absolute high 2 Deviation in 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Chl Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Read Write 00 235 Spare 00 236 Chl Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Enum Read only 00F6 246 Chl Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Enum Read 00F7 247 Chl Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Read Write 00 8 248 Spare 00 9 249 Chl Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Enum Read only 0103 259 Chl Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Enum Read only 0104 260 Chl Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Read Write 0105 261 Spare 0106 262 Chl Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Enum Readonly 0110 272 Chl Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Enum Read 011
145. D53B 54587 Read Write D53D 54589 D53F 54591 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value UserGuide Page 300 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 4 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch4 span high Ch4 span low Ch4 Zone high Ch4 Zone low Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch4 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 5 Parameter Name Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone upper value 46 of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access D553 54611 D555 54613 D557 54615 D559 54617 D55B 54619 D55D 54621 D55F 54623 D561 54625 D563 54627 Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch5 span high Ch5 span low Ch5 Zone high Ch5 Zone low Ch
146. EVENT EXAMPLE 92 4 37 cEVENEBUHONS be EGER ERG D eee lotus 93 4 3 8 Messages ate ese e e RO WEA 94 MESSAGE ENTRY 94 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS 94 6 rmm 96 4 3 9 User Linearisation Tables 2 97 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 97 4 3 10 Batch recording option e teen ree etra o dta ea ere tos 99 AUDITOR MESSAGES etre ee t ES aee t eet Crea 99 BATCH SUMMARY 99 CONFIGURATION 100 OPERATOR INITIATION 102 NON OPERATOR INITIATION 105 EVENT SOURCES 105 4 3 11 Maths 106 CONFIGURATION 106 MODBUS ADDRESSING 132 4 3 12 Totalisers 135 INTRODUCTION Jerome ecd fes roce dee d vette ts 135 CONFIGURATION is err do vede ee e ere 135 4 3 T3 Counters E eas 140 140 CONFIGURATION 140 COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING 141 TIMERS 144 INTRODUCTION et SR i tree te tec Mite 144 CONFIGURAT ON De oett ha eoe E eee ae TR 144 5 145 Con
147. Fei Ra eee 335 SUPPLY VOLTAGES iiie hime Fe ire ertt e t ba ed ecd bete die tate ass 335 SIGNAL WIRING E 335 INTERNAL WIRING eee cte ere re oa aen eee ded 336 13 3 3 Specification ete et ote ete eer Pe a EE pin 336 13 4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION Ier che RE 337 13 4 1 Introduction D 337 13 42 Wining a EE Pre pego 337 SUPPLY VOLTAGE otra qe gps 337 337 EROR RP REIS 338 13 4 3 5 ore tete He HR DUC RT plis tees 339 13 5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE 7 340 Annex A SPECIFICATION 6 341 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Recorder 20 00 000 342 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Universal input 345 WORST CASE ERROR 22 00000 347 Iriput errorz gage oae 347 Range erTor s oc erit o has e ERE e ND D dle pe 347 Temperature error e
148. Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 Advanced parameters The selection of the Advanced properties set is carried out from the Properties Options page as described in section 7 2 3 above Advanced properties are in addition to the basic properties described above not a replacement for them Parameter Pick list content Description 3D effect Enable Disable For Channel numeric display only adds an embossed boxed surround to the display Applies only if Custom selected as Faceplate style Alarm marks colour None Allows a colour to be selected for alarm marks on trend scales Default is colour 0 red Bargraph style Single Line For horizontal bargraphs only Plain produces a bargraph with descriptor Faceplate below bar Just bar Bar and scale Default Default Vertical Bargraph System Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph to the left of the bar digital value to the right of the bar and alarm indica tion to the right of the decimal value With units adds units after the digital value 3D adds an embossed boxed surround Scale adds a scale below the bar with end point values and tick points Scale style described below may be used to modify the appearance of the scale Produces coloured bar above channel descriptor digital value and alarm indication No scale is printed Produces a colour bar with no textual information or just the low and high scale values ac
149. KEY The Hide key at the top right corner of the display screen is used to hide show Type Date and Bytes information allowing the full filename text string to appear User Guide HAO28910 Page 222 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Open Folder 5 FILE Cont 000 Root 13 35 29 06 10 05 Remove Media Goto View Goto Group mediacard D Select volume 13 35 49 06 10 05 mediacard Select folder 13 35 59 06 10 05 Select folder 13 36 09 06 10 05 Select folder 13 36 49 06 10 05 Select file Group 1 20050 History 20 09 05 17 17 30 351401 Group 1 20050 History 12 09 05 11 40 50 1555 Note The down arrow navigation key can be used as an alternative to the Folder key Figure 5 File system overview 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 223 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 5 3 FILE STRUCTURE The file structure on the archive medium is as depicted below in figure 5 3 for a six group instrument Each subdirectory contains a maximum of 32 files there being sufficient subdirectories created to contain all the group s history files The subfolder names
150. MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B3 OPTION ENABLING See Upgrade in section 4 6 3 B4 COLOUR SELECTION The following table gives RGB values and decimal and hex numbers for the available channel colours Normally this table is necessary only when communicating over the Modbus link Note Colour representation varies from screen to screen For this reason it is unlikely that the colour on a PC will match those on these pages or those on the recorder display User Guide HAO28910 Page 360 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B4 COLOUR SELECTION Cont Colour Red Green Blue Decimal Hex Red 255 0 0 0 Blue 0 0 1 Green 0 2 Honey Violet Russet Dark Blue Jade Magenta Dusky Rose Yellow Powder Blue Dark Red Avocado Indigo Dark Brown ZEgean Cyan Aubergine Dark Orange Pale Yellow Hyacinth Dark Green Sugar Pink Bluebell Orange Pink Buttermilk Table B4 sheet 1 Colour definitions O to 27 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 361 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B4 COLOUR SELECTION Cont Colour Green Blue Decimal Hex Terracotta 63 28 1 Blue Babe 95 29 ID Lime 30 Blue Jive 31 1 Cucumber 32 20 EuroGreen 33 21 Wheatgerm 34 22 Sea Blue 35 23 Ginger 36 24
151. Master Comms option is fitted this event source allows either a communica tions failure with a specifiable remote device or communications failure with Any connected remote device to be used as an event source See section 4 3 16 for more details If one or more Event Input option boards are fitted this allows a contact closure or negative going voltage signal to be used as an event source The required input is defined by specifying a Board number and an Input number Refer to Section 10 for more details The menu item does not appear if Event input boards are not fit ted Triggered if an attempt to send an e mail section 4 3 19 is unsuccessful The event is triggered fleetingly when a batch is stopped If Scope Group in Batch configuration section 4 3 10 then a group can be specified If Scope Instrument the group select field does not appear If the Batch option is not fitted Batch Stop does not appear in the picklist Allows source 1 to be used in its normal sense Select Source 1 or inverted Select Not Source 1 Example Source 1 is alarm 1 on channel 3 With Source 1 Sense Source 1 the event is active whenever channel 3 alarm 1 is active With Source 1 Sense Not Source 1 the event is active whenever the alarm 15 not active 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 91 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 6 EVENT CONFIGURATION Cont OPERATOR This allows a logical
152. N minimum where Group N is the default name of the source group A typical application of the Minimum channel descriptor would be to include the descriptor in a message sent to the chart on a regular basis by a Timer function Section 4 3 8 describes the entry of the messages and section 4 3 14 de scribes the setting up of timers Continued User Guide Page 130 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont GROUP MINIMUM Cont A typical message entry would be Message Replace 1 with 1 source Replace 2 with 2 source Lowest temperature is 1 at chan 2 Specified Value Group 1 minimum Specified Descriptor Group 1 Minimum resulting in a message such as 22 08 05 14 22 06 Lowest temperature is 790 00 Units at chan Temp 3 where Units is the text entered in the Group Minimum maths channel configuration not that for the input channel although typically they would be the same Note The Group configuration checkboxes for maths channels with Minimum Channel Descriptor selected are greyed thus preventing such channels from being used as inputs to their own source group See section 4 3 2 for Group configuration details 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 131 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS OPTION Cont MODBUS ADDRESSING For units fitted with the Mo
153. Note Operator Note Operator Notes list Appears if note area is touched contin uously for 2 seconds approx AM Shift started List entries are made in Instrument er Configuration section 4 3 1 PM Shift started PM Shift finished Figure 3 5 Access to Note entry page Note Touching the note area continuously for two seconds or more causes a list of pre defined messages to appear Touching one of these messages selects it as the operator note which can then be edited in the normal way if required before the OK key is operated There are a maximum of 13 pre defined messages 12 of which are user editable in the Configuration instrument menu section 4 3 1 the 13th being the non editable MAC address of the recorder User Guide HAO28910 Page 50 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER As described in the Access to Configuration section 3 3 1 above the setting up of the recorder is divided into the following areas Archive Save restore Config Security Network System Section 4 1 Allows manual archiving of data to a memory device or to a remote host FTP transfer Section 4 2 Allows new configurations to be created and saved and saved configurations to be re stored Save Restore also allows the importing and exporting of User Linearisation Tables and if the relevant options are fitted User Screens and Printer Drivers Section
154. PH eee OH Feed RAE Tee ELE VERE 291 GROUP 1 291 GROUP 2 292 GROUP 3 293 GROUP 4 294 GROUP 5 295 GROUP 6 cS TTD AUS 296 8 4 5 Feature identification table FIT 2 2 2 2 2 1 0 00 ee 297 8 4 6 Indirection 0 297 8 4 7 IEEE 32 bit channel configuration data 300 CHANNEL 1 300 CHANNEL 2 300 CHANNEL 3 300 CHANNEL 4 301 CHANNEL 5 301 CHANNEL 6 301 CHANNEL 7 302 CHANNEL 8 302 CHANNEL 9 302 CHANNEL 10 303 CHANNEL 11 303 CHANNEL 12 303 8 4 8 IEEE Area Channel run time data 2 304 CHANNEL 1 304 CHANNEL 2 304 305 305 306 306 307 307 308 CHANNEL TO SN ER E 308 5 evi ab EGENTES 309 CHANNEL 12 309 8 4 9 Permanent ID table 310 8 5 eti ect dee trece En s eet 310 FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES 310 310 8 5 Function code 311 REQUEST ede 311 311 EXCEPTION RESPONSES 311 8 5 2 Function code
155. Parameter Name Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 7 Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value 96 of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access D64F 54863 D651 54865 D653 54867 D655 54869 D657 54871 D659 54873 D65B 54875 D65D 54877 D65F 54879 Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length 12 span high Ch12 span low 12 Zone high 12 Zone low Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch12 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch12 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write D673 54899 D675 54901 D677 54903 D679 54905 D67B 54907 D67D 54909 D67F 54911 D681 54913 D683 54915 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an al
156. Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 4 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length See note 1 F8CF 63695 2 Read only F8DI 63697 1 Channel 4 value Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Channel 4 status 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Channel 4 alarms Alarm information F8D2 63698 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only
157. Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 058B 1419 058C 1420 058D 1421 058E 1422 058F 1423 0590 1424 0591 1425 0592 1426 0595 1429 0597 1431 059B 1435 059 1439 05A3 1443 05A7 1447 05 1 1457 05 1467 05 1468 05 1469 05 9 1529 05 1530 05 1531 05 1532 0606 1542 0607 1543 0608 1544 0609 1545 0613 1555 0614 1556 0615 1557 0616 1558 0620 1568 0621 1569 0622 1570 0623 1571 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 281 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 10 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch10 Span high Ch10 Span low Ch10 Zone high 10 Zone low Ch10 PV type 10 Decimal places Ch10 Colour Ch10 Units Spare 10 Open string Spare Ch10 Close string Spare Ch10 Descriptor Spare Ch10 No of alarms Ch10 PV format
158. Section 4 describes the Configuration displays Figure 3 below depicts a typical trend display for a large frame unit and gives details of the various areas of the dis play page The small frame display is similar but the navigation keys are printed on a strip below the chart area instead of being drawn on the screen Notes 1 Dialogue boxes message boxes etc cause Process Variable displays to freeze for as long as the box is on display Root and Option menus amongst others time out i e are removed from the display after ap proximately one minute Messages however are displayed until the operator takes action to remove them It should be noted especially that several message boxes may be active at one time but only the oldest one is visible until it is removed to reveal the next oldest message and so on 2 Many ofthe screen components can be customised as to colour size etc as described in section 4 6 10 Customise TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES If the amount of space on the display page is insufficient to display the full width of the process variable or scale value then the displayed value is rounded down and the number of decimal places reduced If the width is still too restricted the value is displayed in scientific format or if this is still too wide the final visible character of the integer part of the value is replaced by a as depicted in figure 3 4 4b Page Name and batch status Change battery al
159. Start and End characters are entered as decimal ASCII codes between 0 and 127 as required 0 no character 10 Line Feed 13 Carriage Return See Annex B for a list of ASCII codes If only one start or end character is required the first character must be entered and the second character be entered as Zero GROUP SELECTION For ASCII input protocol this allows groups to be deselected selected for receipt of the messages A checked box indicates that the associated group will receive the messages User Guide HAO28910 Page 148 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Cont ENABLE ERROR CODE B For Modbus Master only If enabled this causes an error code B to be generated in the event of a timeout or a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC ENABLE TALK THROUGH For Modbus Master only If disabled this prevents external Ethernet masters from accessing the slaves connected to this instrument LE only this instrument can act as a master to its slaves MESSAGING INFORMATION Characters are read into a buffer until the end of message characters are received or until the time since last character exceeds the entered Timeout value Date Time and Serial are then prefixed to the message which is then sent to the selected groups The date and time relate to when the first buffered character was received If Start of message charac ters are configured cha
160. Trend Speed Interval B is switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 Note Trend speed interval are not editable fields if Circular Settings is enabled CIRCULAR SETTINGS When checked this checkbox causes the Circular Speed Chart Full Start At fields described below to appear When checked the Trend Speed and Trend Interval fields described above are disabled i e they are no longer editable Notes If Circular Settings is not enabled here in Group configuration but Circular Trend is enabled for the group in Views configuration section 4 3 4 then although the circular chart will appear it is unlikely that the chart will contain any trends CIRCULAR SPEED This field allows the chart speed to be selected from a pick list as detailed in table 4 3 2 below The table also shows the number of major and minor chart divisions CIRCULAR CHART FULL This allows New Chart or Rotate to be selected from a picklist See section 3 4 3 for details Table 4 3 2 shows the major and minor chart divisions for each chart speed START AT This item which appears only if New Chart has been selected in Circular Chart Full above allows the user to select a start time and or date for the new chart The exception is for a chart speed of 1 hr rev which always starts on the hour Chart spd Chart divs New Chart Start at 1 rev per Major Minor Start at
161. Type Master Slave 1 Furn 1 Control y lt Select Required slave Digital Parameter Working Setpoint lt Select Required slave Loop Number 1 4 Select required loop Parameter Process Value Medium Priorityv lt Select iteration rate for Format Numeric Y parameter update SpanLow 0 Units Span High 1 Units ZoneLow 0 Zone High 100 Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour Units Units Descriptor Read 1 Alarm Number Enable Trigger v Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16f Typical Controller parameter page User Guide HAO28910 Page 158 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont TYPICAL CONTROLLER PARAMETERS Channel Number Slave Digital Parameter Loop number Process Value Span Zone etc Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured As soon as Modbus Master is selected as input type this changes from Channel 1 for example to Read 17 Once communication with the slave is established this will change to the descriptor of the remote channel unless the controller type does not support this item in which case a suitable descriptor can be entered later in the configuration Allows the user to select from a picklist the slave from which data is to be retrieved The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master Comms Configura tion described
162. USER GUIDE 4 3 19 EMAILS Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS This subsection contains details of the parameters that appear in the E mail configuration page figure 4 3 19a above Figure 4 3 19b below may also be referred to for further explanation Mail Server Port Number Sender Errors To Retry time Recipient List Descriptor to 10 Email Number Descriptor Protocol Subject Text Include message Enter the name note 1 of the mail server or IP address here This is the destination to which e mails are sent for subsequent delivery This is the port number used for SMTP by the servers Most servers use port 25 for this func tion and this value should be changed from the default only by experienced personnel For DNS operation this is a combination of the Local Host and Domain entries set up in the Network Name area of configuration described in section 4 5 If Fixed I P Address is selected the I P Address appears instead The unit accesses the Sender information automatically and it cannot be edited here The Sender is placed in the From part of the e mail header An e mail address to which any error messages can be sent for display etc The instrument itself cannot receive e mails and so is unable to display for example undeliverable messages itself An entry in this field must be made The same address may be used for any number of instruments The product tries re
163. Vertical Trend screen in the trend history display and in Message Log Batch information and status are retained whilst power is off Batch To initiate a batch either 1 Operate the Option key then press Batch in the Option Menu Note which appears or i Faceplates On Off 2 Touch the coloured message area at the top of the screen The batch Status page appears in this example with no batch run Channel Cycling Off ning 3 Press New A new display page appears figure 4 3 10b Enter History showing all the headings entered in Field 1 to Field 6 during configuration If the Batch Fields entry is less than 6 then only the selected number appear in our example 4 E Group data appears only if Group Group 4 Scope Group Section 1 2 No batch in progress New Close Notes 1 option menu is context sensitive so its appearance may differ from the example shown 2 Batches can also be started and stopped from the Batch Summary page as described in section 3 1 4 User Guide HAO28910 Page 102 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH CONFIGURATION Cont OPERATOR INITIATION Cont Values can now be entered for these headings by entering strings of up to 60 characters including spaces This may be done done by touching the empty field and using the resulting pop up keyboard to typ
164. View key this display mode figure 3 4 22 is similar to the Vertical Trend display described in section 3 4 1 above except that the traces are produced horizontally rather than vertically Faceplates for current Current pen icon channel Touch either faceplate to increment channel 46 Bargraph or touch pen to select channel Non current pen icon idli Alarm mark at adjacent gridli Abs High 06 04 05 12 02 20 Alarm s off 2 1 c Message bar Latest message If this arrow head is displayed then touching the message bar displays previous messages Figure 3 4 2a Horizontal Trend Display One of the channels is defined as being the current or scale channel and this is identified on the chart by its pen icon being diamond shaped rather than triangular as for non current channels If a channel is included in the display group but its status is not good for some reason then its pen icon is hollow Each channel in the display group becomes the current channel in turn for approximately 10 seconds i e the channels are cycled through starting with the lowest numbered channel Once the final channel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds the lowest numbered chan nel is returned to and the sequence repeats This scrolling process can be stopped using the Channel Cycling key in the Option menu There are
165. Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 see note Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write F48B 62603 F48D 62605 F48F 62607 F491 62609 F493 62611 F495 62613 F497 62615 F499 62617 F49B 62619 Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 142 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 COUNTERS Cont IEEE AREA COUNTER RUN TIME DATA The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for counter 1 Generally Parameter address for counter N Parameter address for counter 1 4 N 1 decimal COUNTER 1 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Counter value Current process value PV Read Write 47 64583 2 Counter 1 status Channel status Read FC49 64585 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Counter 1 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 64586 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only
166. a channel scaled 30 to 60 In order to convert this reading to an understandable value a scaling factor must be entered If the low and high scale entries match the slave channel s scale the master reading will be the same as the slave s reading Selecting High Low allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the selected parameter If None is selected the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65 535 DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL Normal Audit Trail messages include both the new value and the previous value for example 09 08 05 11 27 58 1 1 Alarm Number 1 Enab hatched was Off With Demand Writes the recorder has no way of determining what the value of the parameter being written to was prior to the Write For this reason no was value is included in the message A typical Demand Write audit trail mes sage would be 09 08 05 11 35 10 Write 1 wrote 255 75 Please see section 4 4 2 for more details of Audit Trail User Guide Page 174 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 E mails E mails can be sent by the instrument to one or more recipients The user can enter 10 recipient e mail addresses in each of five mailing lists giving a maximum of 50 addresses 10 of which can be sent to at any one time A Recipient can appear in as many lists as required Up to 24 e mails can be configured but which of these e mails is sent is
167. alarm summary page contains the following information for the current group 1 Alarm identifier This appears as a point ID followed by the relevant alarm number in parentheses For example Alarm 1 on maths channel 6 would appear as D6 1 Maths channels are prefixed by D Totalisers are prefixed by T and Counters are prefixed by C Input channels are not prefixed 2 Alarm threshold for absolute alarms only The current process value for the point 4 alarm symbol see Table 3 Alarm symbols flash until acknowledged Notes 1 Alarms are always listed in Point Alarm order with input channels first followed by derived channels totalisers and counters if these options are fitted 2 When the alarm source returns to its non alarm state Unlatched alarms are removed from the list whether or not they have been acknowledged latched alarms remain displayed until acknowledged See section 4 3 3 for a description of alarm types and actions 3 There no time or history components associated with the Alarm Summary If Alarm messages have been enabled in the relevant group s configuration section 4 3 2 then alarm initiation acknowledgement times and dates can be found from the trend and trend history displays described in section 3 4 or in Mes sage log described later in this section 4 Ifan alarm is active on a channel which is not included in any group then although the channel alarm symbol will flash the alarm will no
168. as the job is active Colour B Switches the point being configured to colour B for as long as the job is active Colour B Group Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual colours B for as long as the job is active Speed Interval Switches Trend Speed Interval for the selected group to Speed Interval B for as long as the job is active Note If a B value has not been set the default A value will be used instead If the Simulation option section 4 3 21 is enabled the following additional Trend jobs become available Freeze Freezes process variables and trend displays stops the recorder clock and stops data further writ ing of history files but see note When the job deactivates process values trends are updated to their current values the clock restarts from its frozen value and writing to history files is resumed No blue line is drawn across the chart Clear Clears the trend displays from the screen Saver Display Sets the recorder display brightness to the value set up in Saver display in Instrument configura tion section 4 3 1 Overrides the Save after value Job Number 1 Category Trend V Action Speed Interval EE Select required action Group 1 Group 1 V Em 2222 Required Group or Point according to action While Active 4 amp 7 Select Active Inactive or Unacknowledged Figure 4 7 11 Trend job menu layout Note in orde
169. bargraph display to be switched on andoff Allows the pen icons at the edge of the chart to be switched on and off Allows the current channel faceplate to be switched on and off 7 4 2 Group vertical bargraph Produces a vertical bargraph for a selected group in a format defined by Style and Scale style described in table 7 3 2 The number of rows of bars can also be defined by the user according to the overall size of the display number of channels etc The default value of zero means that the recorder will display what it believes to be the most ergonomic number of rows The recorder attempts to fit as many channel bars as possible into the width of the display The default minimum width of a column is 6 mm If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar device appears at the bottom edge to allow hidden bars to be accessed The recorder attempts to fit as many faceplates as possible into the height of the display If there are more faceplates than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar device appears to allow hidden faceplates to be accessed 7 4 3 Group horizontal bargraph Produces a group horizontal bargraph for a selected group in a format defined by Bargraph Style and Scale style described in table 7 3 2 The number of columns can also be defined by the user according to the overall size of the display minimum width number of channels etc
170. be used to scroll through display modes the left and right arrows can be used to scroll through groups Typical displays See section 3 4 for full details See also section 7 if a Screen Builder option is fitted 700 87 C 48739 C i New Delete Cut Copy Paste Refresh Horizontal trend 05 10 05 12 02 20 Alarm s off 2 1 a ies E Eg CMMA COMTE 235 68 por i Vertical bargraph 1 378 99 49V Figure 9 Root key menu structure HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 367 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Save Restore Config Security Network System Local Remote Figure B9c Archive section 4 1 Figures Figure B9dto 9 B9i Remote Figure Figure 91 Local Last Archive 23 08 2005 10 10 46 Bring Archive Up To Date Archive Transfer Inactive Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Archive Last 7 Days Archive Last 31 days Archive Cancel Archive Figure B9b Archive key menu structure
171. be entered before access can be gained The user name and password set here in the master Comms configuration must match those of the slave For this type of instrument the user name is the Remote user name and the password is the Remote password set up in the Security Access configuration section 4 4 1 Password is necessary only when Modbus security disabled is not selected in Instrument configuration section 4 3 1 For other types of instrument refer to the documentation supplied with that instrument See Login Required immediately above This button causes the master to search for the slave set up on this configuration page If the search is successful the Remote Device name changes to the instrument name or default tag User Guide Page 152 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont DETECT ALL SLAVES Network Ethernet Y Overwrite existing slaves 500 Timeout From Node 149 121 130 200 For 50 Node s Modbus Address To L Start Discard Figure 4 3 16b Detect all slaves setup menu The Detect Slaves key is used to detect any slaves connected to the system within certain search parameters Operation of the button calls a display page figure 4 3 16b which allows the entry of a start IP address a range of IP addresses and a range of Modbus addresse
172. byte Register address 2 bytes Value to be written 2 bytes Thus to write a value of 80 degrees as Alarm 1 setpoint for channel 3 register address 022F the following request as detailed in figure 8 5 3 would be transmitted to the recorder 0000000000060006022F0050 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Register Register Value Value identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol ID function start start high byte low byte lowing code hex address address hex hex high byte low byte Figure 8 5 3 Function code 06 request response example RESPONSE As a response to a request the recorder returns a message identical with the request message EXCEPTION RESPONSES Byte 0 Function code 86 hex i e Hex 80 function code Byte 1 Exception code 01 Illegal function or 02 Invalid data address 8 5 4 Function code 08 This is used to initiate a loop back test The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described in section 8 5 above are Function code 08 1 byte Subfunction code 00 00 2 bytes Query data loopback value HH HH 2 bytes Thus to initiate a loopback test using as an example P 0 as the query data the following request as detailed in figure 8 5 4 is transmitted to the recorder 000000000006000800005051 The response to the receipt of such a message should be to the request back to the host Transaction Tr
173. changes would appear on the screen for an imaginary set up for channel 8 New type chan 8 is the note entered in the Signature page and Kiln8 temp is the channel descriptor 03 08 05 11 53 01 Configuration Revision 486 144 was 486 143 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Job Number 1 Drive Relay 1 on board 7 while Unacknowledged was No action 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Threshold 530 0 C was 500 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Type Absolute Low was Absolute High 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Cold Junction Type Internal was External 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Scale High 1000 0 C was 900 0 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Scale Low 450 0 C was 300 0 03 08 05 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Lin Type Type K was Type J 03 08 05 11 52 57 Config Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer New T C type chan 8 Please see notes below User Guide HAO28910 Page 192 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Notes 1 The Configuration Revision and for changes the Security menus the Security Revision incremented every time the recorder configuration security configuration is changed The current values can be viewed in the System About menu section 4 6 11 configuration and security changes must be made either at the recorder operator interface or from a host pc using Bridge Full sof
174. colour 9 Fore ground colour is default 1 Foreground decimal As background decimal but for the foreground colour Background colour 15 default 1 Colour Thresholds None Used only when Colour style Channel thresholds A semicolon separated list of Colour channel values used to change the colour of the component being configured according to the process value of the point selected in Colour Channel described above The number of threshold values entered must match the number of colours defined in Colour Backgrounds and Colour Foregrounds described above Decimal places Default Number of decimal places in Channel data display Descriptor Font Default For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom then Descriptor Font allows the Channel Descriptor font to be selected from a picklist Display Alarms Enable Disable For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom this selection determines whether or not alarm symbols are displayed in the top right hand corner of the display Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 2 of 6 User Guide 028910 248 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Display Bargraph None If selected a vertical bargraph is drawn at the right hand edge of Ho
175. combination of input sources to be used to trigger an event The selections and their definitions are shown in table 4 3 6 below Operator Event active when Event not active when Only 51 Active 51 not active AND 51 and S2 both active 51 and or S2 not active OR 51 and or S2 active 51 and S2 both not active 51 and or S2 not active 51 and S2 both active 51 S2 both not active 51 and or S2 both active 51 and S2 both active or both not S1 or S2 active active 51 Source 1 52 Source 2 Table 4 3 6 Logical operators for event sources SOURCE 2 SENSE Allows source 2 to be used in its normal sense Select Source 27 or inverted Select Not Source 2 Example Source 2 is Group 1 Batch Running With Source 2 Sense Source 2 the event is active whilst the batch is running With Source 2 Sense Not Source 2 the event is active whilst the batch is not running DESCRIPTOR Allows a text string to be entered as the event title See section 3 3 1 for text entry techniques JOB NUMBER Select the required job number for this event CATEGORY Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm e g Drive relay See section 4 7 for a descrip tion of job categories WHILE ON Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as a while active while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs e g drive relay or b on going active on going inactive or on acknowle
176. defined during Job or Event Button configura tion Any function capable of triggering a job can cause any of the available e mails to be sent As well as a Subject and the body text each e mail can include one of the messages set up in Message Configura tion and can thus include embedded values alarm status batch status etc as described in section 4 3 8 E MAIL CONFIGURATION The figure below shows the e mail configuration page using fictitious names for email server address information Mail Server mail server name Port Number Sender Errors To Retry Time Recipient List Descriptor Ropt1 Ropt2 Rept3 Rept4 Rept5 Rcpt6 Ropt7 Rcpt8 Rept9 Rept10 Email Number Descriptor Protocol Subject Text Include Message Message 5 IP Address of Recorder e mail address to which e mail failure messages to be sent 60 Seconds 1 List 4 Select List Number 11511 e mail address of 1st Recipient on this list e mail address of 2nd Recipient on this list etc 1 Emaili V Select SMTP Emailt SMS Subject Only or SMTP Email SMS Body only Cold store alarm Cold store temp sensor 1 too hot Instrument name Instrument number chan 1Alarm1 3 1 2 3 4 y lt Select Message Number Apply Discard Figure 4 3 19a E mail configuration SMTP Protocol 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER
177. duration of the job See Group configuration for A B switching details Erase all History recorder history is erased only if Simulation option section 4 3 21 is enabled but see also note four Notes 1 group in question will be recorded only if Recording Enable selected in group Configuration section 4 3 2 and the job is active 2 If Audit Trail section 4 4 2 is enabled then in order to preserve the audit trail messages will be saved in the group s history files even when recording is not enabled by job A blue line is drawn across the chart whenever a recording job is used to disable enable recording 4 If the 21CFRI1 option is enabled Erase All History jobs can be triggered but are ignored leaving the recording history unaffected g Job Number 17 Category Recording Recording Enable Select required action Group 1 Group 1 _ 5 required Group if appropriate While Active V 4 amp Select Active Inactive or Unacknowledged Figure 4 7 10 Recording job menu layout 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 217 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 11 Trend category Trend jobs allow the following actions to occur Span B Switches the point being configured to span B and zone B for as long as the job is active Span B Group Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual spans and zones B for as long
178. has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between 1 and 107 To enter a value of 0 0004196 the entry would be 4 196E 4 T Notes 1 Strictly this is a number less than 10 as 10 would be 1 0E1 2 There must be at least one number after the decimal point MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS This defines the number of decimal places in the process value Settable between zero and nine Leading and trailing zeros are not displayed Values too long for the available displaying width are truncated as described in section 3 COLOUR Allows the trace colour to be selected from a colour chart Each of the 56 available colours is displayed with a number and it is this number which is entered The background colour to the selection box changes to the selected colour If A B switching is enabled a second colour selection can be entered Colour A is used during normal operation Col our B is switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 ALARM NUMBER Allows an alarm to be selected for configuration 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 77 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont ENABLE Allows the alarm to be defined as Off Unlatched Latched or Trigger Off Alarm is disabled and the remainder of the alarm configuration is hidden Unlatched Unlatched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain active until the source
179. if the Write has not previously been configured Pending Appears if the Write is waiting to happen or a response is being waited for Can appear for example if the Write is queued Timeout Appears if the slave fails to respond within the timeout set in the Master Comms configuration page Transaction Disabled Appears for example if the Write has been disabled but a job is still trying to trigger it Allows the user to select the Slave to be written to from a picklist containing all the configured devices in the Master Comms configuration page Select parameter to be written to picklist varies according to slave type model Point type Loop Number Group Number Descriptor Source Default Allow Constant edits On Error Write Default Disable Retries Send On Power Up Allows a point loop or group number to be entered for the selected parameter Allows a descriptor to be entered for the Write Allows the source of the Write to be chosen from a picklist containing Constant plus all points in the recorder Allows a value to be entered for use as a default to be written to the destination point Appears if Source Constant or for any other source if the Error Write Default checkbox see below is enabled If this is enabled the user may change the default value before it is sent Applies only to user triggered writes See Demand Write Button below Appears for all sources other t
180. in Config Instrument menu If however Summertime DST is enabled in System Locale configuration then an hour is added whilst daylight saving time is in operation 4 7 7 Counter category If Counters section 4 3 13 are enabled the following jobs become available Preset counter Loads the selected counter with the preset value set in the configuration for that counter Disable counter Stops the selected counter Increment Adds 1 to the selected counter s value Decrement Subtracts 1 from the selected counter s value Preset group Loads all the counters in the specified group with their Preset values Disable group Stops all counters in the specified group Select Preset Disable Increment Decrement Preset group Disable Group Job Number 1 Category Counter __ Action Preset Group Group 1 G 1 1 Group 1 V Select Active Inactive Acknowledgement lt o Acknowledgement Select Required Group Figure 4 7 7 Counter job menu layout group action 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 215 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 8 Timer category The following jobs are available 1 Resettimer sets the timer to zero 2 Starttimer causes the timer to start 3 Disable timer stops the timer Job Number 17 Category Timer Action Reset v Select Reset Start or Disable Timer Timer 1Y
181. in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters
182. in portable case 7 kg max 45 from vertical Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Emissions and immunity BS EN61326 Electrical safety BS EN61010 Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 Power requirements Supply voltage Standard Low voltage option Power max All options Inrush current Standard Low voltage option Namur compliant option Fuse type Standard Low voltage option Interrupt protection 85 to 265 volts 47 to 63 Hz or 110 to 370V dc supply not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply fitted 20 to 42V RMS 45 to 400 Hz or 20 to 54V dc option not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply fitted 50 W 36A 36A 5 5A at 25 C None Holdup gt 200msec at 240V ac with full load Holdup 20msec at 20Vdc or RMS with full load Back up battery Type Support time Replacement period Stored data Poly carbonmonofluoride lithium BR2330 Part Number PA261095 See also section B2 2 A fully charged new battery supports the Real Time Clock for a minimum of 1 year with the recorder unpowered 3 years Time date values for totalisers counters and timers batch data values for those maths functions with history such as Fvalue Rolling average Stopwatch etc Clock RTC data Temperature stability 0 to 50 C Ageing 20 ppm 5 ppm per year Touch screen Colour TFT LCD with cold cathode backlighting fitted with resistive analogu
183. interface Each enabled user screen appears as a selection key in the Goto View menu It is therefore recommended that the number of Bridge Screens is set to the number actually needed in order to reduce the number of More operations Notes 1 User screens are not supported from a PDA 2 Asaresult of the way in which the screen is refreshed unexpected results may be obtained if any compo nent is superimposed upon an active component such as a bargraph or trend display 3 hash key may not be used in text strings UserGuide 028910 234 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 1 1 Display Access As shown in figure 7 1 1 the user screens can be included in the display modes described in section 3 4 and a User screen can be selected as the Home page Note Circular Trend option displays are not supported in User screens with this release of software Home Time out o _ Minutes Home Group 1 Group 1 w Select group for Home display Scope Group V Select Instrument or Group These fields appear Group 1 Group 1 y MED EIS only if Scope Group Display Enable i Home Page Circular Trend Select Home display mode for instrument or for Vertical Trend selected group Horizontal Trend Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph Numere Page Bridge User Screens ar
184. memory stick or a floppy disk drive If more than one such device is required at a time two further rear panel USB ports USB 1 and USB 2 are available as an option Maximum current per USB device 500 mA Note It is the responsibility of the user to establish the electromagnetic susceptibility of any USB peripheral connected to the recorder Refer to the USB port specification in Annex A for details 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 11 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 4 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION This option allows the access flap below the display screen to be locked against unauthorized access to the Compact Flash SD card It also provides some protection in the form of a warning message against the inadvertent removal of such a card whilst archive data is being written to it Removal of the memory device whilst it is being written to will not only corrupt the current archive but might also damage the memory device irreparably rendering it unusable See also section 3 1 4 Notes 1 Control of the flap lock is available only to users with Archiving Control permission enabled 2 Control of the flap lock is not possible via Bridge software 3 The description below applies only to Archive data 2 4 1 Flap lock operation ARCHIVE INACTIVE 1 Touch the root menu or alarm status area at the top of the screen 2 Touch the Unlock Flap key figure 2 4 1a 3 Archiving i
185. mud ER 151 Log Linear Memory device location senes 11 SST 07s esiste 74 ir E 86 211 Logged OUS onc nte ene eet aet teens 31 Menu structure oe 32 194 376 Archive Key 368 Disable RA E ELE T E EEA A E E AE 186 Config aS 370 375 Timeout 191 Network key 377 Login Required Modbus slave 192 Rootimens sel LOL MR IE 367 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 391 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Menu structure Cont Network Cont Save Restore Key 369 Connection has timed 233 Security key 376 Ethernet Serial selection 152 System iere 378 menu ete eere ened 377 Messages ined 94 to 224 323 Te tek e 198 Alarm ica dite IBS 81 Scanning tool 2 edere 197 Auditor rede 99 Specification EE E 344 Batch Initiation 102 abere deta ire recen Pa dy redeant 239 og c 250 uu EE RA 40 67 Configuration menu 371 Gonfiguration cic ee
186. new value in the box at bottom left of the page and confirming either by clicking on the Set button at bottom right or by using the pc s lt Enter gt key To return to the Trend Mode selection page Click on the Trends link at top left User Guide HA028910 Page 382 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C1 2 2 TRENDS Cont VERTICAL TREND This viewing mode is identical in operation to the Horizontal Trend mode described above except that the chart is vertical with the most recent sample at the top and the oldest at the bottom The Vertical scale i e the amount of trend history displayed within the height of the chart is edited as described for Horizontal scale in the Horizontal Trend description above To return to the Trend Mode selection page Click on the Trends link at top left NUMERIC DISPLAY This viewing mode contains only a table of point descriptors spans high and low and process values The table is identical in layout to that shown below the chart in figure C1 2 2b above To return to the Trend Mode selection page Click on the Trends link at top left C1 2 3 Message Logs Figure C1 2 3 shows an imaginary message log with a number of alarm messages for a group called Furnace Temps 1 Instrument Trends 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 Select required group by Jb rap eeu TA clicking on required number Furnace Temps 1 Sele
187. number VALUE Shows the current value of the channel together with either Unadjusted or the date and time of channel adjustment section 4 6 4 INPUT TYPE Select thermocouple millivolt Volt milliamp RTD Ohms Digital not channel 1 7 etc Slave Comms Test or Mas ter Comms as input type Slave Comms must be selected if the channel is to be written to via Modbus Master Comms must be selected if this channel is to read from another instrument See section 4 3 16 for details of Master Comms LIN TYPE The following linearisation tables are available as standard Linear square root x UserLin1 UserLin2 UserLin3 UserLin4 see section 4 3 9 for user linearisations Thermocouple types B C D E G2 J K L N S T U NiMo NiCo Platinel Ni NiMo Pt20 Rh Pt40 Rh Resistance thermometer RTD types 10 Pt oo Pt A JPT o0 Ni Cu 100 100 100 1000 120 For input ranges accuracies etc associated with the above thermocouple RTD tables see Annex A INPUT LOW Enter the lowest value to be applied to the input terminals e g 4 00 INPUT HIGH Enter the highest value to be applied across the input terminals e g 20 00 User Guide HAO28910 Page 72 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont SHUNT Allows a shunt resistor value to be entered for input type mA Commonly used values are 100 ohms and 250 ohms Note
188. of the channel supplying the measured flow rate If Constant selected a further box allows the value for the constant to be entered Use Allows the user to select Temperature or Pressure MPa for the calculation Temperature Appears only if Use Temperature Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Pressure Appears only if Use Pressure Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam pres sure If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Table 4 3 11b below gives multipliers for converting some common pressure units to MPa More details may be found at websites http www ex ac uk trol scol ccpress htm and http www onlineconversion com pressure htm amongst others Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam 0 no vapour 100 no liquid Notes 1 The units of kg sec and m sec are used above for simplicity In fact any time unit can be used For exam ple if the measured flow is in m hour then the Mass flow will be in kg hour 2 ASME Steam tables 1999 from IAPWF IF97 User Guide HAO28910 Page 118 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW Cont PRESSURE UNITS CONVERSION There is a wide range of pressu
189. on the next page shows the relevant component property pages a 11 07 08 Channel 1 EY 0 4187c A hannel 2 0 0000 0 0000 Channel 4 _ 0 0000 04187 Figure 7 2 3e User screen example with coloured background 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 243 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE Cont Add Del Copy Identifier Last Error Page Title X Position 0 Y Position 0 Width 100 Height 100 Background Colour Draw Order 1 main 1 2 main 1 2 Component Type Main 96 96 Goto Canvas Save More Touch background colour field Close 40 4 46 Q 4o 50 51 52 53 54 55 Colour list Figure 7 2 3f background colour selection pages User Guide Page 244 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS The following parameters are associated with the components listed in table 7 2 2 above The list is divided into basic and advanced 7 3 1 Basic parameters Notes 1 all com
190. option USB1 Port 2 USB2 Port 1 gt 20 aw oed 2 9 cc 0 gt gt n Sa 2
191. password window when it appears and enter the password The Engineer level password is 100 when the unit is despatched from the factory Passwords can be edited in Security as described in sec tion 4 4 1 The screen reverts to the home page with the new access level dis 11 46 44 played in the Current access level key 05 04 05 Close Figure 3 3 1a Access to configuration Notes 1 For units which have the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled the default Operator password is 100 Other wise no password is required for default Operator level access In either case the Operator access level password can be edited in Security configuration Section 4 4 1 2 The login screen above can also be called by operating the Root menu then Operator then Security then Login In such a case the screen reverts to the Operator page rather than returning to the home page once login has been achieved 3 Figure 3 3 1a shows Login by user list which is the default method If either Auditor option and or the Security management option is enabled an alternative procedure is possible where each user has to enter a name and associated password i e there is no list of users access levels to choose from See section 4 4 2 Management for details User Guide Page 32 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER US
192. pressure of the steam These values can be constants input chan nels or maths channels Figure 4 3 11j and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details Maths Number 2 Math 2Y Value 987 6543 Units Function Saturated Steam Heat Flow y Flow Channel 1y Use Pressure V Pressure Channel 27 Dryness 10 Units Units Discard Figure 4 3 11j Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page PARAMETERS Flow Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate If Constant selected further box allows the value for the constant to be entered Use Allows the user to select Temperature or Pressure MPa for the calculation Temperature Appears only if Use 2 Temperature Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Pressure note 3 Appears only if Use Pressure Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam pres sure If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam 0 no vapour 100 no liquid Notes The units of kg sec and m sec are used above for simplicity In fact any time unit can be used For exam ple if the measured flow is in m hour then the M
193. quit edit mode If there are unsaved changes the user is asked for confirmation Copies the contents of the current screen to another specified screen leaving the current screen un changed If the destination screen is already in use confirmation is required before the screen is overwritten Causes all changes made since the last Save to be undone This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software When operated it deletes the local version of the screen so that the display reverts to the deployed version This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software It causes the screen to be saved to the PC database and sent to the recorder This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software Calls a browser screen allowing the user to select a path name to which to Export the current screen The Component Property Editor page disappears and the screen is shown with the current component highlighted Click and Drag techniques on the highlight handles allow the component to be re sized and its aspect ratio to be edited Clicking and dragging within the highlighted area allows the component to be moved to any position on the screen Selecting a component and touching the option key Goto Editor key returns the user to the Component Property Editor with the selected component as the current component Using the Goto editor key without first highlighting a component re
194. re quired Button Number 1 Button 1 Select 1 to 96 Descriptor Button 1 Type Latched JM Select Latched or Unlatched Text Off Text gt Enter button text Latched Text Text Enter latched text Require Signing v appears only if Type latched Require Authorisation Figure 4 3 7 Event Button option configuration menu Button number Allows selection of the button 1 to 96 which is to be configured Descriptor Allows a button name of up to 20 characters to be entered Type Select Latched or Unlatched as defined above Text For unlatched buttons this allows entry of the legend which is to appear on the button when displayed For latched buttons this is the legend which appears when the button is in its non active off state Latched Text This field appears only if Type Latched and allows entry of the legend which is to appear on the button when in its active on state Require Signing If this field is enabled then the button can be used only by those whose Can Sign permission is enabled in the Access menu described in section 4 4 1 When the button is operated in the User screen a signature page appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and of a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the operation Require Authorisation This field appears only if Require Signing is enabled If Require Autho
195. required precision None leaves the returned value unchanged For some slaves scale zero scale low is returned as value 0 and full scale scale high as value 65 535 Hex FFFF with intermediate values having proportionate values For example the value 15 would be represented as 32 767 7FFF for a channel scale 0 to 30 as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100 and a value of 45 for a channel scaled 30 to 60 In order to convert this reading to an understandable value a scaling factor must be entered If the low and high scale entries match the slave channel s scale the master reading will be the same as the slave s reading Selecting High Low allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the selected parameter If None is selected the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65 535 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 161 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont READING DIGITAL VALUES Digital values can either be the open closed status of a discrete input or it can be a status string showing for example Instrument Status if User Defined is selected as Parameter Type OPEN CLOSED STRINGS The text strings for the open and closed statuses of a digital input channel can be read by Enabling the Digital checkbox for the relevant slave and Channel number The strings returned will be those entered in the slave channel s configuration
196. rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 06 1743 06D0 1744 06D1 1745 06D2 1746 06D3 1747 06D4 1748 06D5 1749 06D6 1750 06D9 1753 06DB 1755 06 1759 06E3 1763 06E7 1767 06 1771 06 5 1781 OGFF 1791 0700 1792 0701 1793 073D 1853 073E 1854 073F 1855 0740 1856 074A 1866 074B 1867 074C 1868 074D 1869 0757 1879 0758 1880 0759 1881 075A 1882 0764 1892 0765 1893 0766 1894 0767 1895 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source
197. section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than be the previously configured constant value Constant the value returned will UserGuide Page 278 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch7 Span high Ch7 Span low Ch7 Zone high Ch7 Zone low Ch7 PV type Ch7 Decimal places Ch7 Colour Ch7 Units Spare Ch7 Open string Spare Ch7 Close string Spare Ch7 Descriptor Spare Ch7 No of alarms Ch7 PV format Spare Ch7 Alarm 1 enable Ch7 Alarm 1 type Ch7 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch7 Alarm 2 enable Ch7 Alarm 2 type Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch7 Alarm 3 enable Ch7 Alarm 3 type Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch7 Alarm 4 enable Ch7 Alarm 4 type Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 charact
198. selected in Visible Channel and the value entered in Visible Value below For example when using the Greater than operator the component is visible whenever the Visible Channel s value is greater than the Visible Value Visible Value Default For When Visible below is selected as Channel Value Visible Value allows a value to be entered to be used in the Visible Operator compari son described above When visible Always Component is always visible Never Component is never visible Channel value Component is visible or not depending on the relationship between the current value of a selected channel and a specified constant value See Visible channel above for details In alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is active or if the point is in an Error state See Visible Alarm above for details Not in alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is not active or the point is not in an Error state See Visible Alarm above for details Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 6 of 6 User Guide 028910 252 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS This section defines all the available components listed in table 7 2 2 in terms of their parameters The components occur in the order in which they a
199. server enable is enabled the server output will follow the recorder time EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE Enabling this item causes the instruent to declare itself i e to become visible to a network scanning tool running on a PC thus allowing the pc user to identify all such instruments on a network 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 197 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 2 Name Figure 4 5 2 shows the Name fields Archive Save Restore Config Security System Local Host Andy136 4 Domain FishesRus co uk Domain Name Service Primary DNS Server 149 121 164 11 Secondary DNS Server 149 121 165 14 Apply Discard Figure 4 5 2 network name fields LOCAL HOST English language name for the recorder Non editable assigned to the IP Address DOMAIN The name of the Group or area of networked units which contains the recorder Non editable DOMAIN NAME SERVICE DNS Enables the mapping of host names to IP addresses and vice versa PRIMARY SECONDARY DNS SERVER IP addresses supplied by IT department or the Domain manager or Supervisor Notes 1 Any one or more of the above items may be overwritten if address lookup is set to Obtain from BootP Server or Obtain from DHCP server as described under Address above 2 If Domain Name Server is enabled but either n
200. tera e m T uM M eU Lm E PME LE D M 322 PRINTER Ee re eie ester be du vetns 322 PRINTER NAME e e e ted 322 PRINTER 322 PRINTER n EN PEE ERU OUO ES 322 PRINT MESSAGES FROM eee 322 MESSAGES TO PRINT sete riti rte Ct ED RO bM 322 12 3 2 Reports configuration 323 REPORT qe 323 pede MEETS 323 eee bere Lovan te E do dnd 323 EIELD IN TYBE ep E I eaa Ee exe exe 323 STYLES cse tot etae DU ES De Ehe ertt tee mtu eter eres 324 ollm 324 LINES FEED eoa tete rit eh Ei ete rrr ette E 324 12 4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS 325 12 5 REPORT EXAMDLE Ae ee eerte ER ead ie ae ee 326 12 51 Group EXAM e tav rdi 326 GROUP NUMBER 1 crt rette er e 326 Cont User Guide HAO28910 Page xii Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Se
201. text changes to red until it is applied 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 51 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 1 ARCHIVE Notes The archiving functions described below can also be initiated by job action see section 4 7 15 1 2 Archiving is carried on group by group basis with a message being sent to each group when its ar chive is finished When all the groups have been archived a pop up appears to inform the user that ar chiving is complete Because of the sequential nature of this process the time given in this pop up is different from the times which appear in the messages generated for the individual groups 3 For floppy disk drives connected via a USB port it is not recommended that archiving be enabled for more than one group see Group configuration section 4 3 2 4 1 1 Local Archive Caution Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the filing structure on the device rendering it unusable For this reason archiving should be suspended before the device is re moved It is strongly recommended that the Remove Media facility described in section 3 1 4 Summary menu be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device For recorders fitted with a lockable flap see also section 2 4 Save Restore Config Security Network System Last Archive 13 09 2005 11 02
202. that shunt resistors are connected to the input connector The recorder cannot detect whether a shunt is fitted or if one is what value it has Therefore it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the ohmic value of any shunt fitted matches the shunt value entered in this field RANGE LOW Enter the lowest value of the required linearisation range e g 100 RANGE HIGH Enter the highest value of the required linearisation range e g 200 RANGE UNITS Selectable from degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin or Rankine SCALED This box allows the user to select low and high values and units for a scale This box must be ticked if logarithmic scales are to be used SCALE LOW Enter the scale value to correspond with input range low e g 0 SCALE HIGH Enter the scale value to correspond with input range high e g 100 SCALE UNITS Enter up to five characters of unit descriptor 2 Note User linearisation tables units To set user linearisation table units to temperature units for example the Range Units selection box can be used To enter custom units Scaled must be selected Scale low must be set to Range Low Scale high must be set to Range High The required Units string is entered in the Scale units text entry box OFFSET Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable Recorder accuracy figures no longer apply if an offset is included 028910 Use
203. the Home key is pressed in the Root menu Home Time out m Minutes Home Group 1 Group 1 w Select group for Home display Scope Group WV Select Instrument or Group i Select group for These fields appear Group 1 Croup 17y gt display mode enable only if Scope Group Display Enable y Home Page Circular Trend Y Select Home display mode for Vertical Trend instrument or for ia lected Horizontal Trend Moe Circular Trend y Enabled Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph y Numeric Page y User Screen 1 User screens appear only if the Screen Build User Screen 2 er option Section 7 is fitted U S Bridge user screens are accessible only from ser Screen 3 __ a remote which has Bridge software H ser Screen 4 installed and running User Screen za User Screen 24 Bridge User Screens 0 Apply Discard Figure 4 3 4a Views Configuration menu HOME TIMEOUT The recorder returns to the specified home page after the timeout value of minutes has elapsed since the last touch on the display Timeout action is inhibited if a configuration is incomplete there are changes which have not been Ap plied or if a system generated message e g Clock Failure is on display User displays e g Root menu are timed out after approximately 50 seconds A value of zero disables the time out function Valid entrie
204. the bottom right hand corner of the display the page size can be edited as required It is thus possible for the computer to log on to say four different recorders and to display their values simultaneously in different parts of the screen The up down arrow keys allow the enabled display modes to be cycled through and the root menu Goto View menu allows a specific display mode to be chosen for the current group The Home display page can be returned to at any time by operating the Root Menu key followed by the Home Note Any changes to the recorder s group configuration are reflected immediately at the Host PC s screen 6 6 2 Alarm acknowledgement The alarm acknowledgement read messages function are as described in section 3 1 4 6 6 3 Status line The status line at the top of the screen reflects the status of the instrument to which the recorder is connected e g sys tem messages global alarm FTP clock etc User Guide 028910 232 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 6 4 Error messages A number of error conditions may occur to prevent Bridge from viewing the recorder Such conditions result in the appearance of one of the pop up messages listed below NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT This message appears when no connection can be established between the host pc and the instrument This might be caused by for example cable failure the instrument s not bein
205. the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsi bility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equation solved is 2 DeltaP x AbsP 1 x4 Temp where QM Mass flow kg sec at time K Scaling factor see below Rg Specific gas constant in J kg K see below Z Compressibility factor see below DeltaP Measured value across the orifice plate at time Absolute pressure of the fluid at the up stream tapping at time t in Temp Temperature of the fluid at the up stream tapping in Kelvins SCALING FACTOR This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known DeltaP AbsP and Temp The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale SPECIFIC GAS CONSTANT The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables For convenience the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4 3 11a above COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR Z FACTOR Compressibility factor is a density related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a perfect gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions and is give by the equation 7 P x 1 T p where Z Compressibility factor P Absolute pressure of the gas in KPa A T Absolute temperature of the gas Kelvins p gas density at pressure P and temperatu
206. the minimum necessary in order to reduce the number of Goto View More displays Once created a Bridge screen can be copied to one or more recorder screens 1 to 24 if required making it accessible from the recorder Operator Remove Media Alarm Summary Message Log Group 2 Vertical Trend Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Trend Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page User Screen 1 User Screen 2 User Screen 3 More Figure 4 3 4b Goto View and Goto Group submenus User Guide Page 84 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 Archive configuration Notes For the sake of brevity the phrase memory device is used for whatever mass storage medium is fitted to the recorder integral or via a USB port CSV format files are not as secure as Packed Binary format files 1 2 This allows an archive strategy to be set up for saving data to a local memory device or to a remote PC local strat egy includes archive period memory device full operation compression factor and an estimate of the maximum time to next archive to avoid data being overwritten in memory Duration The recorder uses a dedicated area of its Flash memory as an archive data buffer which means that data is written to the memory device or remote PC only when requi
207. the overall arrangement of the indirection table area Figures 8 4 6b and 8 4 6c show simple examples of Read only and Read Write addressing for tables with 6 entries D4E6 02 7 D2E6 Read Write area D0E7 DOE6 No of R W entries D0E5 6 5 Read only area CCE6 5 Table 8 4 6a Indirection table areas User Guide HAO28910 Page 298 Issue 4 Jun O7 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 6 INDIRECTION TABLES CONT CEEB Alarms chan 1 CEEA PV chan 1 Head values here PV chan 1 address hex 200 CEE8 Archive rate CEE7 Trend rate CEE6 Instrument type CCEB Channel 1 Alarm status CCEA 9 8 Channel 1 PV bits 16 to 31 32 bit IEEE channel h 11 PV bi 1 Enter required data addresses here Group 1 archive rate CCE7 CCE6 5 Group 1 trend rate Instrument type number Number of Read only entries Table 8 4 6b Read only indirection example Write values to or read values from this area address hex 200 DOEC Chan 6 Alarm 1 setpoint DOEB DOEA DOE9 Chan 5 Alarm 1 setpoint Enter required data Chan 4 Alarm 1 setpoint addresses here Chan 3 Alarm 1 setpoint DOES8 Chan 2 Alarm 1 setpoint DOE7 5 Ch6 Alarm1 Sp Chan 1 Alarm 1 setpoint DOE6 Number of Read Write entries Table 8 4 6c Read Write indirection example HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 299 100 180 P
208. the recorder As shown in Figure 13 1 2a above the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the case A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder Minimum recommended conductor size is 16 0 2 0 5mm 20AWG SIGNAL WIRING Input and typical options pinouts are as shown in figure 13 1 2a above For full I O wiring details refer to Section 2 2 INTERNAL WIRING Figure 13 1 2b below shows details of the wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder rear panel HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 331 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 1 2 WIRING Cont Portable case Brown 100 to 240V 50 60 Hz m Green Yellow Chassis ground Earth Safety earth Ethernet connector Note For the sake of clarity the Serial Communications and USB option wiring are not shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 1 connector 18 14 15 16 Note For 18 input channels Option boards 3 4 are replaced with input board 3 including associated CJ sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CJ sensor CJ sensor Bottom connector
209. the source to be copied to Allows the final destination point to be selected for the source to be copied to This field appears only for source types which support alarms If this box is selected then alarm data is included in the copy process This field appears only for source types which support jobs If this box is selected then jobs data is included in the copy For source types that support both alarms and jobs it is not possible to include job data without including alarm data as well Source Type Copy To Include alarm data Include job data HAO28910 User Guide Page 206 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 8 COPY Cont Once the copy is complete the user should enter the configuration area of the items that have been copied and edit apply the changes etc COPY RULES 1 The first channel on any input card may not be a digital input type 2 Ifa destination channel was a digital input AND the source channel is an analogue input AND include alarm data is not selected the destination channel alarm settings will be set as Enable Off Type Absolute high Threshold 0 0 Dwell 0 0 3 Ifadestination channel was an analogue input AND the source channel is a digital input AND include alarm data is not selected the destination channel alarm settings will be set as Enable Off Type Digital Threshold Closed Dwell 0 0 4 Descriptors and Colours ar
210. the time and date of report generation to be included in the report Text Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters Process value Allows a specified point s process value including descriptor and units to be included in the report Batch Field 1 Batch field 1 can be included in the report See section 4 3 10 for Batch details Message A message can be selected for inclusion in the report See section 4 3 8 for details of message configuration Line Feed Allows one or more blank lines to be left This can be useful at the end of a report 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 179 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 20 REPORTS CONFIGURATION Cont Note The Style Point and Line feed settings described below apply only to printed outputs and have no effect when presented on the chart or in the message log STYLE See figure 4 3 20b for examples of Normal Bold Emphasised and Banner print styles For all styles if the text is too long to fit on one line it wraps round as shown for normal style in the figure This is Normal style text 12 11 04 12 20 56 This demonstrates what happens if the text is too long to fit on one lirie This is Bold style text This is Emphasised stvle text This is Banner style text EEE EKER EEE EELS Figure 4 3 20b Printer text style examples POINT Allows a point to be c
211. this window Note Trend history duration depends on many factors as described in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 above CSV CHECK BOXES DATE TIME FORMAT These appear only if the Media File Format or FTP file format are set to either CSV or Binary and CSV Refer to CSV Files at the end of this subsection 4 3 5 SHOW This allows the fields which are to appear below Show to be applicable to the local memory device Local Settings or to the setting up of a remote host path for archiving purposes Remote settings The following descriptions contain all the fields which may appear in either menu MEDIA For Local setting only For standard recorders this allows mediacard or usbfront to be selected as the local archive destination If the USB option is fitted the two rear USB ports usb1 and usb2 also appear in the pick list USB ports may support both floppy disk drives and memory sticks ARCHIVE TO MEDIA For Local setting only If the recorder has been powered None Archive must be initiated by the operator section 4 1 down prior to archive time the Hourly Archive occurs on the hour every hour archive takes place the next time the Daily Archive occurs at 00 00 hrs each day unit is powered up Weekly Archive occurs at 00 00 hrs every Monday Monthly Archive occurs at 00 00 hrs on the 1st of each month Automatic recorder selects the least frequent archive period Hourly Daily We
212. to give 1 2 amp 3 4 Access the Alphabet keyboard and insert text and spaces The value of 1 2 amp 3 4 Set Replace 1 to Source Descriptor Set Replace 2 to Source Value Set Replace 3 to Specified Descriptor Set 3 source to Tot one Set Replace 4 to Specified Value 10 Set 4 source to Tot one BOO ON ois The result of this is that should the channel 2 alarm go active the following message would be sent to all groups ap pear on the chart and become part of all groups histories 18 10 01 11 19 58 The value of Chan two 6 0 C amp Tot one 3383 8073 Units Note On some models the message may be wider than the screen If necessary the message can be shortened e g use Ch2 instead of Chan two or it can be viewed in full either in Message log section 3 1 4 or by using Review Software if available User Guide HAO28910 Page 96 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 9 User Linearisation Tables The Channel configuration item Type includes four linearisation tables called initially UserLinl to UserLin4 This User Linearisation part of the instrument configuration allows the user to enter a linearisation look up table of between two and 66 pairs of points The pairs of points are entered as X1Y1 X2Y2 XnYn where n is the specified number of point
213. trend speed interval but define the rate at which data is saved to Flash memory This value also affects how much trace history appears per screen height in trend history mode section 3 4 1 If recording is not enabled these fields are greyed and not editable If A B switching is enabled a second Recording Speed Interval value can be entered Recording Speed Interval A is used during normal operation Recording Speed Interval B is switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 Note With large numbers of points configured in one or more groups the total amount of data generated per iteration may exceed the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available Such a situation may also arise if many messages are being generated The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed and a message Recording failed internal overflow Slowing re cording interval of fastest group s appears to draw the user s attention to the situation TREND HISTORY DURATION Gives an estimated time to fill the group s trend history area of the Flash memory The calculation is based on the ar chive rate the compression ratio the flash size and on the exact nature of the data Rapidly changing values use more space than static slowly changing values If A B switching is enabled the calculation is based on Recording Speed Interval Changing the contents of one group may affect the Trend History Duration of o
214. triggers is produced typical example is given in figure 4 6 9b Channels 1 Alarm 1 Job 3 Channels 3 Alarm 3 Job 1 Channels 6 Alarm 4 Job 1 Maths 1 Alarm 2 Job 3 Ok Figure 4 6 9b Search results typical User Guide HAO28910 Page 208 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 10 Customise Customise allows 1 the background and foreground colours for various screen items to be selected 2 the size of the text font to be varied Figure 4 6 10a shows the display page with the settings used for most of the screen drawings in this manual Desktop 54 Data Entry Background 55 Selection 27 Fixed Text Active Text Disabled Text 8 Title Bar Background Trend Foreground INI Trend Background 55 _ History Foreground 62 _ History Background Font set Auto v Default Apply H Discard Figure 4 6 10a Customise menu Desktop This defines the background colour for the display screens including keytops Data Entry Background This is the background colour for drop down menus and text entry areas Selection The colour that keytops and menu items adopt when selected Fixed Text Active Text This defines the colour of all fixed text items including key top text menu text scale data title bar legends etc The colour of all non fixed text such as
215. using a PC as the operator interface the detailed appearance of the Host PC browse window depends on the Win dows version in use Archive Config Security Network System Save Restore New Text Import Screen Export Screen Import User Linearisation Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver calV File Name Folder 03 06 04 12 35 08 config Folder 01 05 04 10 27 13 Filter a Config 05 07 04 10 22 23 4445 lib sdb Folder Folder 05 07 04 10 23 14 11 05 04 14 01 08 user FileName Folder 05 06 04 17 30 29 Printer_Driver uhi Save Figure 12 4 Importing a printer driver Cancel 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 325 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 5 REPORT EXAMPLE This example shows how to configure a report to be printed if any of channel 1 to channel 4 go into alarm It is as sumed that the Serial comms link with the printer has been successfully established The report is to include the process values of channels 1 to 4 and the time and date Note The example assumes that the channels being configured are in their factory default state Configuration items not mentioned in the example e g Scale Low should be left at their default values 12 5 1 Group Configuration Refer to section 4 3 2
216. where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 011D 285 011E 286 287 0120 288 0121
217. 0 00 00 00 00 17 00 03 14 43 68 61 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol identifier function Noofreg Hex h Hex a lowing hex code hex Peer 2 Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 6E 6E 65 6C 20 35 20 44 65 73 63 72 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII n Hex n Hex e Hex Hex space Hex 5 Hex space Hex D Hex e Hex s Hex c Hex r Hex Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 69 70 74 6F 72 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII i Hex p Hex t Hex o Hex r Hex Figure 8 5 1b Function code 03 response example EXCEPTION RESPONSES Byte 0 Function code 83 hex i e Hex 80 function code Byte 1 Exception code 01 Illegal function or 02 Invalid data address HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 311 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 5 2 Function code 04 This is identical with function code 03 except that 04 must be used as the function code and the exception response Function code is 84 hex not 83 8 5 3 Function code 06 REQUEST This is used to write a value to a single register The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described in section 8 5 above are Function code 06 1
218. 0 Seconds Scale High 1 Units Job Number 1y Category No Action Y Apply Discard Figure B9f Config menu structure sheet 3 Scale Type None y Select None orLinear Zone Low 0 Zone High Colour ij Scale high 60 Scale Type None Y Zone low 0 Zone high 100 PV Format Numeric y Max Decimal Digits 2 Colour 26 Alarm Number 17 Enable Off Y Job Number vj Category No Action vj Maths Section 4 3 11 Apply Discard Totalisers Section 4 3 12 Mins Totaliser Number 1 Totaliser 1 Y gt Select totaliser Enable v Value 123456 number Units totaliser Total of Channel 1 W Select channel etc to be totalised Low cut off o ch units Units of channel High cut off 999999 chium Units Units Preset 0 Units totaliser Preset now Period scaler 1 Unit scaler 1 Descriptor Totaliser 1 Switching Scale Low o Units totaliser Scale High 1 Units totaliser Zone Low 1 9 Zone High 100 Select None Linear or Log if log Scale Type None Y scales option fitted PV format Numeric V J Select Numeric or Scientific Alarm Number 1 Y Select Alarm number Unlatched Enable Off Y Job Number 1 Y Select Job number Trigger Category No Action Y Select Job category Apply Discard
219. 0 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 155 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION This display page shown below is called from the Operator Config Channels as described in section 4 3 3 A similar page appears in the Operator Config Maths configuration described in section 4 3 11 The actual picklists which ap pear depend entirely on the type or model of instrument being read from It is assumed that the user knows which pa rameters are to be accessed The following sections describe a atypical input channel configuration page with Master Comms selected as Input Type and a recorder or data acquisition unit as slave a typical input channel configuration page with Master Comms selected as Input Type for a slave controller c the situation where User Defined has been selected as Parameter In such a case the user must determine the required register number from the documentation supplied with the slave Note For completeness figures 4 3 16e 4 3 16f and 4 3 16g show all possible configuration fields The fields that actually appear are slave model and parameter dependent RECORDER DATA ACQUISITION UNIT CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Channel Number Value Input Type Slave Digital Parameter Scaling Point Type Point Number Process Value PV Format Span Low Span High Zone Low Zone High Max Decimal Digits Colou
220. 00 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 3 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Grp3 Trend type Grp3 Trend rate Grp3 Archive rate Grp3 Descriptor Spare Grp3 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp3 Text length Grp3 Text time stamp Grp3 Read text Reserved Grp3 Write text Reserved Grp3 Batch start Grp3 Batch stop Grp3 Batch running Grp3 Text field 1 Reserved Grp3 Text field 2 Reserved Grp3 Text field 3 Reserved Grp3 Text field 4 Reserved Grp3 Text field 5 Reserved Grp3 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0 Point not in group 1 Point is in group 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0z Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 9
221. 016 07 1 2017 07 2 2018 07EC 2028 07ED 2029 07EE 2030 2031 07F9 2041 07FA 2042 07FB 2043 07FC 2044 0806 2054 0807 2055 0808 2056 0809 2057 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value UserGuide Page 284 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 Channel Run Time data These tables show addresses for channel input values for channels 1 to 12 inclusive Generally channel N address channel 1 address 3 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Chl value Current process value PV Scaled See note 1 AID9 41433 1 Chl status Channel status Enum Read only A1DA 41434 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Chl Alarms Alarm information Uint16 41435 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bi
222. 017 12311 3021 12321 3022 12322 3023 12323 305F 12383 3060 12384 3061 12385 3062 12386 306C 12396 306D 12397 306E 12398 306F 12399 3079 12409 307A 12410 307B 12411 307C 12412 3086 12422 3087 12423 3088 12424 3089 12425 Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide HAO28910 Page 132 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS OPTION Cont MATHS CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA This table show addresses for maths channel 1 run time data Generally channel N address channel 1 address 3 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Chl value Current process value PV Scaled Read Write A2BA 41658 1 Chl status Channel status Enum Read only A2BB 41659 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Chl Alarms Alarm information A2BC 41660 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read on
223. 0mm Type T Supply voltage 110 120Vac Supply voltage 220 240Vac Three 25V nominal 20 per output Installation category Pollution degree 2 100V RMS or dc double insulation 100V RMS or dc basic insulation 100 mA 63 mA USB ports Number of ports Standard Transmission speeds Maximum current per port Peripherals supported 1 at front of recorder standard 2 further ports optional at rear of instrument No front USB port with Stainless steel case option USB1 1 12Mbits sec full speed devices 1 5Mbits sec low speed devices 500mA Floppy disk drive Keyboard Bar code reader Mouse Memory stick Note The recorder meets the industrial EMC requirements of BS EN61326 Typically USB peripherals are tested to domestic information technology standards BS EN55022 with category C performance Some USB peripherals designed for use in domestic or office environments can be susceptible to lock up in environ ments containing high electromagnetic field strengths In order to recover from such lock up situations the peripheral must be disconnected and then reconnected Recorder operation is not affected Other items Virus susceptibility Calibration coefficients Input Instrument The 6000 series VxWorks operating system is immune to viruses targeted at Windows based operating systems As at December 2005 there are no known viruses that target VxWorks The Read only i
224. 1 eue 92 V rsion NUMDErS 211 Vertical Y iue gana 2l NBG 246 Bargraph 4 8 251 Y Le be Ud 246 Bargraph display iit 44 You are already running message 225 233 Bargraph mode enable 83 You are authenticating Full Bridge message 233 Grand ein Sai ene 252 Minor 252 7 Trend uiuis 35 253 Trend mode sess 83 Z Eactor xime Mi LI M 113 114 Vertical trend ie Lebe endet 383 Zirconia Probe 4 n 126 Views Zirconia Probe o aa a aa 109 82 to 88 Zone nennnennennneennnennnennnenn nennen 159 Configuration 370 B select job eese E 218 Virtual channels configuration 182 375 Configuration ienser eere 77 Virus 344 Visible 252 2 ae E ea 252 Operator sss ECRIRE 252 Valie m 252 Web SetVOr 381 Wher
225. 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 4 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Ch4 value Ch4 status Current process value PV Channel status Scaled Enum See note 1 Read only 1 2 41442 41443 1 1 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch4 Alarms Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Alarm information 1 4 41444 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 2 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 2 Alarm 2 inactive 1 2 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any poin
226. 1 273 Chl Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Read Write 0112 274 Spare 0113 275 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 273 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 2 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch2 Span high Ch2 Span low Ch2 Zone high Ch2 Zone low Ch2 PV type Ch2 Decimal places Ch2 Colour Ch2 Units Spare Ch2 Open string Spare Ch2 Close string Spare Ch2 Descriptor Spare Ch2 No of alarms Ch2 PV format Spare Ch2 Alarm 1 enable Ch2 Alarm 1 type Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch2 Alarm 2 enable Ch2 Alarm 2 type Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch2 Alarm 3 enable Ch2 Alarm 3 type Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch2 Alarm 4 enable Ch2 Alarm 4 type Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 7 Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except
227. 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 062D 1581 062E 1582 062F 1583 0630 1584 0631 1585 0632 1586 0633 1587 0634 1588 0637 1591 0639 1593 063D 1597 0641 1601 0645 1605 0649 1609 0653 1619 065D 1629 065E 1630 065 1631 069B 1691 069C 1692 069D 1693 069 1694 06 8 1704 06 9 1705 06 1706 06 1707 06 5 1717 06 6 1718 06 7 1719 06 8 1720 06 2 1730 06 3 1731 06 4 1732 06 5 1733 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value UserGuide Page 282 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 11 Parameter Name Description
228. 100 100 100 17 700 87 AY 487 39 C Channel 3_ 235 68 C 378 99 C 4 0 49 la 0 85v 689 43 C 483 72 C 255 81 C 375 01 C 0 53 Channel 12 M 0 79 A 235v a EN E 5 Figure 3 4 46 Vertical bargraph display more than 6 channels 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 45 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 DISPLAY MODES Cont 3 4 5 Horizontal bargraph Entered from Vertical bargraph by means of the down arrow key or selected using the Root Menu Goto View key this display mode shows the Process Variable PV values as horizontal bars with digital values and alarm data displayed as shown in figures 3 4 5a and 3 4 5b Notes 1 For large frame recorders single column format is used when there are up to 12 channels in the display group double column for more than 12 channels For small frame recorders only the single column mode is employed with a scroll bar when necessary 2 For large frame recorders up to 26 points can be displayed simultaneously for small frame recorders the maximum is 5 points In either case if more points are enabled than can be displayed within the height of the screen a vertical scroll bar appears allowing currently hidden channels to be accessed Trend history mode is not available
229. 1260 4 1261 4 1262 O4EF 1263 04 0 1264 04F3 1267 04 5 1269 04F9 1273 04FD 1277 0501 1281 0505 1285 050F 1295 0519 1305 051A 1306 051B 1307 0557 1367 0558 1368 0559 1369 055A 1370 0564 1380 0565 1381 0566 1382 0567 1383 0571 1393 0572 1394 0573 1395 0574 1396 057 1406 057 1407 0580 1408 0581 1409 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than be the previously configured constant value Constant the value returned will User Guide Page 280 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 9 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch9 Span high Ch9 Span low Ch9 Zone high Ch9 Zone low Ch9 PV type Ch9 Decimal places Ch9 Colour Ch9 Units Spare Ch9 Open string Spare Ch9 Close string Spare Ch9 Descriptor Spare Ch9 No of alarms Ch9 PV format Spare Ch9 Alarm 1 enable Ch9 Alarm 1 type Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch9 Alarm 2 enable Ch9 Alarm 2 type Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch9 Alarm 3 enable Ch9 Alarm 3 type Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch9 Alarm 4 enable Ch9 Alarm 4 type Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare
230. 1a 60 0000 C 68 5277 2 1 Water temp 1b 30 0000 C 23 4531 2 2 Water temp 1b 10 0000 C 23 4531 3 1 Oil pressure 250 000 PSI 260 3425 4 1 1 15 3678 Confirm acknowledge of alarms Yes No Figure 3 1 4e Group Alarm acknowledgement ALL ALARMS To acknowledge all active alarms touch e g the channel alarm icon at the top of the screen From the resulting Sum mary menu select Ack all Alarms then finally touch Yes in the resulting pop up confirmation box Note The options menu is context sensitive and may therefore not appear as illustrated above 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 21 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont BATCH SUMMARY If the Batch option is fitted section 4 3 10 a Batch Summary key appears in the Summary menu Note The following description shows the situation where batch Scope is configured as Group The description is similar when Scope Instrument except that there is only one line Instrument instead of one line per group As shown in figure 3 1 4f below the Batch Summary page contains the following batch information Group names in group number order if Scope Group or Instrument Name if scope Instrument Batch active indicator green spot Initiation time and date Elapsed time for the batch Batch Field 1 and its value Touch Alarm a
231. 1eu19u13 99 11 21 SO FO ZI 100055 2 Jeuueuo 2 mI 4 89 11 21 S0 VO CL A 10005 Jeouueu2 4 PETS 1 1527 y uo 00 00 L0 1e s euueu isnipy A yore ul A Aepuns A 1581 94 uo 10995 10 49 ees 00 00 10 18 11215 9 1527 A 150 1514 115 uoz 1 sonsouDeiq 1eu149u13 v 9 vyuonoeg indu sonsouDeiq suiuo Je1se A 9L y uonoes 6 uonoes 29 uonoes 9 e20 1snfpy 1ndino 1ndu I pieosiq H Ajddy 2 SS wWW HH qu944n2 9012 AAAA WW GG L 9 y uonoes 2019 X1J0M I9N Aunoes User Guide 028910 Page 199 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 SYSTEM Cont 7 12995 nokoj nuaw uoypunBijuoo wass qo g einBi4 gHAT9 NVHG gosz INVYS 152 66 10 SIH peni UOISJ9A 0121 JOISIH UOISI9A BICMOS onpoJgd
232. 2 3 and 4 may be sent but messages 1 3 and 4 cannot be sent without mes sage 2 as well Job Number 17 Category Message V Send Message s to Specified Group Y equi rou Group 1 Group 1 Y only if Specified Group previously selected First Message 1 Message 1 Y Last Message 1 Message 1 V On Active Select Display Groups or Specified Group gt play p p p 4 Select range of messages to be output Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 4 Message job menu layout 4 7 5 Maths category If Maths channels section 4 3 11 are enabled the following jobs become available to applicable functions Reset Sets the selected maths channel value to zero Disable Stops historical functions such as Fvalue Stopwatch and Rolling Average from accumulating further values When the function is subsequently re enabled the function re starts from its pre disabled value Disable has no effect on other functions Switch to B Causes the relevant maths channel to copy source B instead of its normal source A see section 4 3 11 for further details This function is not related to the A B Switching maths function Trigger Used to initiate a Sample and hold function see section 4 3 11 for further details Job Number ay Select Reset Disable Category Math E Switch to B or Trigger Action Reset V Math Math 1 Y E Select R
233. 20 140 160 180 200 Probe mV Figure 4 3 11s Probe emf versus temperature 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 127 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE Cont OXYGEN POTENTIAL The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measurement of its ability to oxidise or reduce For any element a value of oxygen potential free energy of formation is known Above this value the material will oxidise below it no oxidisa tion will occur Figure 4 3 11t below is a free energy diagram for a number of oxidising processes Oxygen potential is given by the equation Op 0 00457 x T x log Op Where Op Required oxygen potential in kilocalories T Probe temperature in Kelvins Op Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere in atmospheres It can be shown that because the oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to 1450 kelvins the zirconia probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere according to E 10 84 x T 40 mV in the range 870 to 1450 Thus it is possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe using a standard input channel of the instrument scaled in units of oxygen potential A typical configuration might be Input Type mV Input low 40 Input high 1124 Scale low 100 Scale high 0 Units kCal Such a configura tion would be suitable over the temperature r
234. 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII B Hex a Hex t Hex c Hex h Hex space Hex Hex u Hex m Hex b Hex e Hex r Hex Null Null Figure 8 5 5a Function code 16 request example RESPONSE The response message detailed in figure 8 5 5b after the 7 byte prefix described in section 8 5 above is Function code 10 1 byte Start address 2 bytes Word count 2 bytes Thus the response to the above batch field request would be 0000000000060010A57F0007 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Base Base count Word count identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol ID function address address High byte Low byte lowing hex code hex 9h byte Low byte Figure 8 5 5b Function code 16 response example EXCEPTION RESPONSES Byte 0 Function code 90 hex i e Hex 80 function code Byte 1 Exception code 01 Illegal function or 02 Invalid data address Note Function code 16 can be used to write multiple registers into the indirection table area for example by writing the base register address of a 32 bit channel value e g channel 3 start address F994 into location D18B 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 313 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION Up to four
235. 24 Ds rre DELE 250 Partial Failure 2222220 08 91 Linear Run time data MODBUS sess 133 to 224 S at a eS URGE NN 68 Maximum Scales 74 oocccccccccccccccececececestetstttstetetetetttteteteteetteteeees 152 Linearisation Number of Bridge dee 233 UNCON ich eth 72 Number of data bytes 262 2 User entered sss 9710224 Mean kinetic temperature s 116 Link error 4 148 321 Measuringdils sues cda cete S LL 261 Local 449 0 1424 40 0 0 594 07 9 8 ernaten 198 c Media es eset etait 86 Local Modbus 9 4 0209 2 205 Archiving file 1OSE prse ace Me 16 Locale Archiving too slow 16 Configuration menu 4 0 4 444989 4 0 378 File 88 89 Lockable flap 44 44 48 0 12 uL ME 53 Log Event lifts 87 OCE Lo 9 8 88 8 68 tes 12 Maths functions 4 4 440040 4 109 87 Scale EEE E ae S Der PRA enc Ria AE 74 Medium Priority intemval
236. 28473 6F3A 28474 6F3B 28475 6F3C 28476 6F3D 28477 6F3E 28478 6F3F 28479 6F40 28480 6F43 28483 6F45 28485 6F49 28489 6F4D 28493 6F51 28497 6F55 28501 6 5 28511 6F69 28521 6F6A 28522 6F6B 28523 6FAT 28583 6 8 28584 6 9 28585 6FAA 28586 6FB4 28596 6 5 28597 6FB6 28598 6FB7 28599 28609 6FC2 28610 6FC3 28611 28612 6FCE 28622 6FCF 28623 6EDO 28624 6FD1 28625 Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 137 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Cont TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING RUN TIME DATA This table shows addresses for totaliser 1 Generally totaliser address totaliser 1 address 3 N 1 decimal TOTALISER 1 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Value Status Alarms Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1
237. 3 86 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL 9 364 B7 TIMEZONE INFORMATION ttt eere eben 365 B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE 366 88 1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION 25 lt deber ie 366 8 2 ERASING HISTORY tno owes UE 366 B9 MENU STRUGCTURE 367 Annex C WEB SERVER 5 SBT C1 INTRODUCTION e canton eme occ pent oerte testes 381 GTST INTERNETLINKS pee RR MES 381 CLZ ACCESS TABS 381 Instrumento soc etn 381 INSIRUMENT ALARMS iiiter t trae det i 381 GLOBAL CHANNEL iere tied ee ede eate ri teas 381 GUD 2s nes tet estie NN RID e VEL NR 382 HORIZONTAL TREIND ne e tee nea cach ee eee nd e a Ue TER Rede 382 VERTIGAL TREND tate Ho eee et eee tpe eate ect pete te qr ist tone 383 IND MAERICDISPEAY eot este Det dis dre ter b REIN AE NS dos 383 C1 2 3 Message logs sii tede Satelit epe nds 383 Hst ry 2 erae ete E IR euet 384 21829 N 0011 p mE 384 Index
238. 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Line thickness 1 Allows a pixel value to be entered for the line thickness of some compo nents It should be noted that the nature of the screen and of the drawing method means that curved lines of multi pixel thickness can suffer from Moir fringe or interference effects Message Colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for messages on a trend chart Minimum Height Default For individual channels within a group horizontal bargraph display Minimum Width Default For individual channels within a group vertical bargraph display Minor grid line colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart minor gridlines Nominal height None 653 503 height of large frame small frame display area in pixels Nominal width None 1024 934 width of large frame small frame display area in pixels Notes None Allows a note to be entered for the users convenience Number of Columns None Lays out group displays other than trend in the specified number of columns Number of Rows None Lays out group displays in the specified number of rows Numeric width None Number of characters in channel data display including decimal point On visibility change Paint Background Paint Repaint the area of the component including any text in its background colour If no background colour has been defined the defaul
239. 3 3 3 Specification Information additional to the general specification in Annex Pressure transducer Input range 1 to 3 Bar G Output range 4 to 20 mA Supply voltage range 12 to 32V dc Non linearity hysteresis lt 0 25 span Long term stability 0 1 in 12 months Safety isolation DC to 65 Hz BS EN61010 Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 Channel to channel 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak or 70V dc to earth Channel to ground 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak or 70V dc to earth User Guide HA028910 Page 336 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION 13 4 1 Introduction This option allows the connection of up to 12 type J K or T thermocouples together with up to two option boards or up to 18 thermocouples with no option boards Transmitter power supply is not available with this option The type of thermocouple the same for all channels must be specified at time of order Each thermocouple input chan nel will be configured at the factory for the specified type of thermocouple and will be set to a range of 0 to 100 de grees Celsius Thermocouple style connectors with copper terminals can also be fitted for use with non thermocouple inputs For such channels the recorder is pre configured as Function Linear Input range 0 to 1 Volt 13 4 2 Wiring SUPPLY VOLTAGE Caution Before powering the recorder check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range sp
240. 4 3 This is the major channel alarm option etc area of configuration Section 4 4 Allows passwords to be entered and edited and allows the Engineer level password holder to enable disable areas of configuration to Operator level password holders New users can be added with their own user names passwords and access level permissions Section 4 5 This area sets up the IP address host names etc used in FTP transfer Bridge and SNTP applications Section 4 6 Allows a Time and date to be set Clock b Language date time format time zone and daylight saving start and finish dates to be set Locale c Software upgrades to be carried out Upgrade d Input channels to be adjusted for errors in transducer inputs Input Adjust e Output channels if fitted to be adjusted Output Adjust see section 9 4 f Master Comms Diagnostics page to be displayed if Master Comms option fitted and enabled 5 A Network diagnostics page to be displayed Ethernet diagnostics h Configuration items e g input channels to be copied to speed up configuration Copy 1 Search criteria to be entered to allow the user to locate trigger sources for a specific job Job search j appearance of the display screens to be customised Customise k Details of the hardware and software associated with the recorder to be displayed About Note In all the following descriptions if a change is made to a menu item then the item
241. 42 Remote Media mediacard V Select Media card or USB port Bring Archive Up To Date Section 4 1 2 Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Archive Last 7 Days Archive Last 31 Days Archive All Suspend Archiving Cancel Archive Inactive 08 09 2006 00 34 57 Archive Transfer Media Full Media Size 31954944 Bytes Free Space 28786688 Figure 4 1 1 Local archive configuration Local archive allows the user to initiate data transfer to the device defined in the Media picklist for all groups with Archive to Media enabled Group configuration section 4 3 2 Archiving is initiated by touching the relevant ar chive period key e g Last Day The memory device can be selected as mediacard the integral Compact Flash or SD card or a USB port can be selected if for example a memory stick is to be the destination device USBfront is lo cated behind the flap below the screen Ifthe option is fitted USB 1 and USB 2 ports are located at the recorder rear panel Archiving starts as soon as the selection is made and cannot be stopped until completed unless the Cancel Archive key is operated in which case the archive will be stopped after a confirmatory message has been responded to The Cancel key is active only if Archiving Control is enabled in Security Ac
242. 44085 AC36 44086 AC38 44088 AC3A 44090 AC44 44100 44110 AC4F 44111 50 44112 5 44113 52 44114 53 44115 54 44116 55 44117 56 44118 57 44119 58 44120 59 44121 ACSA 44122 ACSB 44123 ACSC 44124 ACSD 44125 ACSE 44126 ACSF 44127 AC63 44131 ACS81 44161 AC9F 44191 ACBD 44221 ACDB 44251 44252 ACDD 44253 ACDE 44254 ACFC 44284 ADIA 44314 AD38 44344 ADS6 44374 AD74 44404 AD92 44434 ADBO 44464 ADCE 44494 ADEC 44524 44554 AE28 44584 AE46 44614 1 BB ee ee UserGuide Page 294 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 5 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Grp5 Trend type Grp5 Trend rate Grp5 Archive rate Grp5 Descriptor Spare Grp5 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp5 Text length Grp5 Text time stamp Grp5 Read text Reserved Grp5 Write text Reserved Grp5 Batch start Grp5 Batch stop Grp5 Batch running Grp5 Text field 1 Reserved Grp5 Text field 2 Reserved Grp5 Text field 3 Reserved Grp5 Text field 4 Reserved Grp5 Text field 5 Reserved Grp5 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabl
243. 458 1 1 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch9 Alarms Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Alarm information 41459 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 2 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 10 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Ch10 value Ch10 status Current process value PV Channel status Scaled Enum See note 1 Read only A1F4 41460 1 5 41461 1 1 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch10 Alarms Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Alarm information A1F6 414
244. 4755 AEDA 44756 AEDS 44760 AEF6 44790 AF14 44820 AF32 44850 AF50 44880 AF51 44881 AF52 44882 AF53 44883 44913 44943 44973 45003 AFE9 45033 B007 45063 025 45093 B043 45123 061 45153 BOSF 45183 BO9D 45213 IBOBB 45243 1 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 295 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 6 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Grp6 Trend type Grp6 Trend rate Grp6 Archive rate Grp6 Descriptor Spare Grp6 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp6 Text length Grp6 Text time stamp Grp6 Read text Reserved Grp6 Write text Reserved Grp6 Batch start Grp6 Batch stop Grp6 Batch running Grp6 Text field 1 Reserved Grp6 Text field 2 Reserved Grp6 Text field 3 Reserved Grp6 Text field 4 Reserved Grp6 Text field 5 Reserved Grp6 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0 Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group
245. 5 Global Alarm Event Source 90 acci nm 79 Global channel 381 Global Unack d Alarm Event Source 90 Goto Identifiez iui edocet ete e Gem p Paste cie 246 239 Image 255 Group Key it c eel es O See 28 246 Key ie Doe ur RR RARIUS 20 sos mL 239 Green line across the chart 36 ode tt rented creep 255 Grid Key istae edibles pa eiie eds 238 239 Line colour Printer drivel oerte anh rt eee 325 IDEE feed 249 Screen esssssssee eene nennt nennen nnns 56 235 lege 250 UserlinearIsation ette 57 Type DIVISION Sisene era atte rit p ete 68 Include 176 Increment counter 8 215 107 Indirection tables MODBUS 297 Configuration 4 coche 65 Input Configuration menu 2 2 370 verte 203 oM Saad eae aldol 206 Configuration menu 2 378 Data MODBUS 291 Board specification 2 440
246. 5 274081 E mail info be eurotherm com BRAZIL Campinas SP Eurotherm Ltda Telephone 5519 3707 5333 Fax 5519 3707 5345 E mail info br eeurotherm com DENMARK Copenhagen Eurotherm Danmark AS Telephone 45 70 234670 Fax 45 70 234660 E mail info dk eurotherm com FINLAND Abo Eurotherm Finland Telephone 358 22506030 Fax 358 22503201 E mail info fi eurotherm com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone 33 478 664500 Fax 33 478 352490 E mail info fr eurotherm com GERMANY Limburg Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone 49 6431 2980 Fax 49 6431 298119 E mail info de eurotherm com HONG KONG amp CHINA Eurotherm Limited North Point Telephone 85 2 28733826 Fax 85 2 28700148 E mail info hk Q eurotherm com Guangzhou Office Telephone 86 20 8755 5099 Fax 86 20 8755 5831 E mail info cn eurotherm com Beijing Office Telephone 86 10 6567 8506 Fax 86 10 6567 8509 E mail info cn eurotherm com Shanghai Office Telephone 86 21 6145 1188 Fax 86 21 6145 1187 E mail info cn eurotherm com INDIA Chennai Eurotherm India Limited Telephone 9144 2496 1129 Fax 9144 2496 1831 E mail info in eurotherm com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone 353 1 4691800 Fax 353 1 4691300 E mail info ie eurotherm com ITALY Como Eurotherm S r l Telephone 39 31 975111 Fax 39 31 977512 E mail info it eurotherm com KOREA Seoul Eurotherm Ko
247. 5 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 6 Parameter Name Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access D577 54647 D569 54649 D57B 54651 D57D 54653 D57F 54655 D581 54657 D583 54659 D585 54661 D587 54663 Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch6 span high Ch6 span low Ch6 Zone high Ch6 Zone low Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write D59B 54683 D59D 54685 D59F 54687 D5A1 54689 D5A3 54691 0545 54693 D5A7 54695 5 9 54697 DSAB 54699 Note
248. 62 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 2 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 289 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 11 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Ch11 value Current process value PV Scaled See note 1 AIF7 41463 1 status Channel status Enum Read only AIF8 41464 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Ch11 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 1 9 41465 Bit 0 0
249. 7 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String_20 Uint16 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 Double String 60 GC Eee ee eG eG Cle cc cc String 120 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read onl
250. 710 1985 To IPTS68 IEC584 1 IEC584 1 IEC584 1 IEC584 1 DIN43710 1985 ASTM E1751 95 Engelhard ASTM 1751 95 NiMo NiCo Platinel Ni NiMo Pt20 Rh Pt40 Rh User Guide Page 346 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE WORST CASE ERROR CALCULATION Assuming type T thermocouple at 350 C ambient temp 40 C CJC internal Total error input error range error temperature error linearisation error cold junction error Input error From thermocouple tables a type T thermocouple generates a voltage of 17 819mV at 350 From the dc perform ance table above the maximum error is 0 030 input 0 03 x 17 819 100 5 346u V Range error The 38mV range is used as the type t thermocouple is defined to cover the range 270 6 258mV to 400 C 20 872mV From the dc performance table the maximum range error is 0 052 range and the range is 38 38 76 mV Thus the maximum range error is 0 052 76 100 39 52u V Temperature error The dc performance table above is specifed at 20 but the ambient in this example is 40 From the dc performance table the worst case temperature performance is 25ppm C so our error is 25 40 20 x 17 819 x 109 8 9101 V Linearisation error From the thermocouple table the maximum linearisation error for a type t thermocouple is 0 02 Cold junction com
251. 79 172 Absolute high low 78 Web 189 supply voltage range 9 AIWaySi iiie deii e donee a e epu 251 Access Amount R of C alarms 79 Configuration menu sse 376 Analogue outputs uc d a 170 314 10 5 350 Lock Option 12 WY UG eene EORR HDD 8 185 ANDS Sos ih 92 To configuration sn 32 Apply Key eter tete EH ERR ient 238 239 Wieder c nie cte c E 186 Ack all AIAFMS 19 ANIE EE 245 Message Nr 69 Definition dud beet tiec 260 Acknowledge Height E LUE 245 Alarm job SDa lah Ben BY ft 220 Width Pee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee rere eee eee eee eee eres 245 21 Archive OM MICH 220 All eee 53 Permission uiri ete detis 187 Archive failed instrument 16 Hointid ihe o e eL 220 Archive media deci 91 Afatme ob Loss col cee 220 Configuration eene 85 to 88 Action Demand Writes permission EAE PEU MD 188 Men
252. 8 Hz 62 5 msec 10mA max Isolation Event input to ground Event input to Event input TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Analogue output board 100V RMS or dc basic insulation OV General Max number of analogue boards Number of outputs per board Output ranges Current Update rate Step response Linearity Performance Voltage Four Two O to 10V source 5mA max 20 mA See Update rates in Recorder specification above 250msec 10 to 90 0 024 of hardware range See table Performance in instrument at 20 deg C Range Accuracy Temperature drift 10 V 0 196 of range 0 to 20 mA 0 1 of range 0 12mV 0 022 of reading per deg C t 1 0 03 of reading per deg C Safety isolation Isolation dc to 65 Hz BS 61010 Output output channel Output channel to ground Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 300V RMS or dc double insulation 300V RMS or dc basic insulation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ASCII Printer See the documentation supplied with the printer User Guide Page 350 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE ANNEX B REFERENCE B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY B1 1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY At power up continuously hold a finger in contact with the screen until the main diagnostic display appears as shown in figure B1 1 Special Modes Display Test Tou
253. 97 EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE renean 197 4 5 2 Namie 5 erro conven se RP URGE 198 LOCAL HOST 198 DOMAIN bast Cm 198 DOMAIN NAME SERVICE DNS 198 PRIMARY SECONDARY DNS SERVER 198 Cont 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page vii 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 4 6 SYSTEM rei peste dead eco e da de tee 199 4 6 05 Glock eine tea Sit etin 201 4 6 2 locale terea 201 LONG DATE FORMAT ted to Fe be eed beng Deb d 201 4 6 3 Upgrade 202 A bAt sese temen rhe nose e IRSE vta ob desti dul uva 203 ADJUST PROGEDURE pen rp 204 4 6 5 Output 205 4 6 6 Master Comms Diagnostics 205 4 6 7 Ethernet Diagnostics iere dte EE ELO e dde 205 4 6 8 COPY sites dt D E PS PPP RED REP nnd 206 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS tee cnet tend hebr tee 206 COPY RULES 207 4 6 9 Job search i onere aet e re e RE RE ORE Caen aids 208 SEARCH RESUITS 208 2 6 10 CUstomise sities reote ce to a TM eet EPA re a ved
254. AO28910 Page iv Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section 4 3 5 Archive configuration scenie nirani niin ie COMPRESSION 5222 termes FLASH SIZE c tT ee eot ae eod SHORTEST TREND HISTORY DURATION CSV CHECK BOXES DATE TIME FORMAT SHOW MEDIA ette Meis ARCHIVE TO MEDIA MEDIA FILE FORMAT FTP FILE FORMAT ee nnne ON MEDIA FUL crc MEDIA SIZE io sets REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT ARCHIVE TO REMOTE sess terroir terere ener o rece bands En tese een REMOTE PATH PRIMARY REMOTE HOST PRIMARY LOGIN NAME PASSWORD 22 2 0 000 SECONDARY REMOTE HOST LOGIN PASSWORD 88 RIVES c r 88 4 3 6 Event configuration 90 EVENT NUMBER 90 SOURCE TYPES 90 SOURCE 1 SENSE 91 lt lt E beaters 92 255 6 dese aan ee 92 DESCRIPTOR 92 JOB NUMBER 92 CATEGORY Pe e ena 92 olan 92
255. APERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Ch7 value Current process value PV Scaled See note 1 AIEB 41451 1 Ch7 status Channel status Enum Read only AIEC 41452 1 0 2 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Ch7 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 AIED 41453 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit15 Spare CHANNEL 8 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Ch8 value Current process value PV Scaled See note 1 AIEE 41454 1 8 status Channel status Enum Read only 1 41455 1 0
256. APERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 bit channel configuration data The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for channels 1 to 12 Generally Parameter address for Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A channel Parameter address for channel 1 36 N 1 decimal The word channel is used as an umbrella term for input channels maths channels totalisers etc CHANNEL 1 Parameter Description Name Access Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Chl span high Upper span value Display full scale Chl span low Lower span value display 2 Chl Zone high Zone upper value of chart width Chl Zone low Zone lower value of chart width Chl Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 1 Note 2 Chl Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 2 Note 2 Chl Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 3 Note 2 Chl Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 4 Note 2 Spare CHANNEL 2 Parameter Description Name Read only DAE7 54503 Read only D4E9 54505 Read only D4EB 54507 Read only D4ED 54509 Read Write D4EF 54511 Read Write D4F1 54513 Read Write D4F3 54515 Read Write D4F5 54517 D4F7 54519 Access Start Addr R
257. Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit15 Spare Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 285 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 3 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch3 value Ch3 status Current process value PV Channel status Scaled Enum See note 1 Read only AIDF 41439 41440 1 1 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch3 Alarms Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Alarm information 41441 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required
258. Advanced selection 240 History maximum eesseennm een 69 Component info on screens es 240 History shortest 86 Component list ens 237 History display 36 69 en M 236 Hortzontal i ve aaa Dens 382 Importing Exporting ees 235 Interval Speed Units 66 Key descriptions ces 238 239 Jobs MW uM UIDI E 218 84 Te 251 Properties page 238 Speed interval eese 67 cete eec 240 THICKNESS c 12 oit tecto toe tee ce tech eet 251 Trend speed interval B job 218 Typ re eed nere deti d 66 383 Trial Mode te cep 182 IndiCatOr ERE 18 e nobts 78 Truncation of display values 14 User Guide 028910 396 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE V X Value X PONS we 246 eU URS 251 A POSMON od adie ceaval eae 246 iur idee RE ee e tie 33 ot eec n wos inte 329 neta die idi 25
259. Archiving Control Save Restore Paste Delete Files Full Configuration Full Security Batch Control Can Sign Can Authorize Perform Upgrades Event Permission 1 Event Permission 2 Event Permission 3 Event Permission 4 Event Permission 5 Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes Force Change of Password Enter Batch Data Allow web server Login section 3 3 1 Frederick Bloggs V lt H Discard Select the required access level and enter the password if required User Engineer V Password expires in 30 Days Logout To change access level a password may be required according to configuration Engineer password is 100 when dispatched but can be edited from Engineer level in Access Service is for use by service engineers only Operator default password is blank i e none required unless Auditor pack option is fitted in which case it is also 100 HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 376 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security System Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure B9b B9d B9j to B9i Network Section 4 5 Note appears only when IP address lookup is set to Get from BootP server or to Get from DHCP Server
260. BUS 11111112 138 Geer Configuration data Modbus 137 Adding and removing 195 Configuration menu 2 099 372 92 o on KL 160 Copy UL 206 Defined descriptor 130 EQUATION ice c eie ed edet 135 Linearisation table Jobs 213 Configuration se ETE CREER 97 to 224 Option re C 135 Configuration meri cnet 371 Run time data Importing Exporting eee 57 32 bit 5 139 Units selection 73 97 Run time data 05 4 138 Logged in Event Source 91 Touch screen Login account 91 Calibration nci do ette cc Herr 352 ated teach 195 PRECAUTIONS eapite 356 Password ieee anion e lee eye te 195 Transmitter Power 317 User Screen Image 255 Trend User screens 234 to 261 4 Advanced parameters 247 pere 77 Basic parameters ccececccsecescseesescscseescsssceneatsceeseetens 245 Freeze usse 183 Basic
261. Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 2 Alarm 3 inactive 1 2 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 143 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 14 Timers INTRODUCTION This feature supplies 12 count down timers which can be used for general timing purposes The timers can be either one shot or repeating and can be initiated in the following ways directly by the operator from the configuration page if access permission is granted by job action see section 4 7 at a predefined time date every time period where the time period can be configured to be anything from 1 second to 1 year For exam ple setting seconds to 30 and leaving all other fields Any the timer will start every minute on the half minute Setting seconds to 30 and minutes to 0 will cause the timer to star
262. C NC Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground NC RxB Link to pin 8 NC TxA TxA RxA NC TxB TxB RxB 5V via 15000 5V via 15000 5V via 15000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 2 2 14 Cont Option wiring sheet 2 Serial communications 2 2 2 Supply voltage wiring WARNING DC supply voltages must never be applied to recorders fitted with isolated transmitter power supplies Note The minimum recommended wire size is 20AWG equivalent to 16 0 2 0 5mm LINE SUPPLY The supply voltage to the recorder is terminated using an IEC socket which is connected to the mating plug at the rear of the recorder The recorder is suitable for use with all ac voltages between 85 and 265 V RMS 47 to 63 Hz and requires 50 W max power For recorders without transmitter power supplies supply voltages between 110V dc and 370V dc are also suitable LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION Not suitable for recorders fitted with the isolated transmitter power supply option The low voltage supply option is terminated at a three pin connector plug mounted on recorder socket on supply cable as shown in figure 2 2 2 The option allows the use of ac or dc supplies with the following characteristics AC 20to 42V RMS 45 to 400 Hz DC 20 to 54V See warning above Power 50 W max Earth V or ac or ac Figure 2 2 2 Low voltage supply pinout view on fixed connector face
263. C RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsi bility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equations solved is Flow OM d Vir 19 where OM Mass flow kg sec at time 4 Note 1 Flow Measured flow in m sec at time t Note 1 Volume of liquid per kg of steam at temperature T AV Vyr Vip Where is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T C d Dryness factor between 0 no vapour and 100 no liquid and AV are available from published tables note 2 but the recorder user need only enter values for measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam These values can be constants input channels or maths channels Figure 4 3 11h and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details Maths Number 1 Math 1 Y Value 123 4567 Units Function Saturated Steam Mass Flow V Flow Channel 17 Use Temperaturev Temperature Channel 2Y Dryness 0 Units Units Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11h Typical Saturated Steam Mass Flow configuration page PARAMETERS Flow Select Constant or the number
264. Copy Used to copy the current component to the pasteboard Greyed for Main as this cannot be Copied Paste Used to paste the copied component to the screen The copied item is placed 1 to the right of and 1 be low the source component Greyed until a component Copy action has taken place UserGuide 028910 238 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE Cont KEY DESCRIPTIONS LOWER KEYS Which keys appear at the bottom of the properties page depends on whether the user screen is being viewed at the re corder s user interface or via Bridge software Figure 7 2 3b show the recorder key arrangement figure 7 2 3c the Bridge keys The key descriptions below are in alphabetical order rather than in left right appearance order oto Canvas Save Close More BRevert Discard New More JB Copy Screen Move Screen Close Copy Screen Discard Dispose Deploy Export Goto Canvas Import More Move Screen Figure 7 2 3b Recorder key arrangement oto Canvas Save Revert Discard Close More Deploy New Dispose Copy Screen Move Screen Import Export More Figure 7 2 3c Key arrangement via Bridge Causes the screen to
265. Current access level re tht A E 15 dl 2 PAGE IMME iim etae dba user Len cens manete es E a fedes 15 31 3 Alarm indication a e e E 16 INSTRUMENT ALARM dance enr ie ends 16 CHANINED ALARM duod 18 CHANGE BATTERY Le er coo Dena A 18 Pig eon MEE 18 lese 18 CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR 22 18 TRIAL MODE INDICATOR iet teh teret te pt o re MARRE Lipa 18 31 4 SUmmerydmenu so eee rod 19 INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY 2 19 AGI ALL ALARMS oreste mter bate REOR ie e tees Pot 19 ALARM SUMMARY reo eee Eee rodado bo eset ded amete 20 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 20 21 BATCH SUMMARY cesses etc tio Pe p P E HR ERFURT 22 MESSAGE LOG iro e uti rv ee dicato 24 5 et 27 3 2 ertt E ets 28 9 2 lt 1 Key f nclioris E 28 ROOTMENU KEYS 3 tob dec c oto 28 ALARM SUMMARY
266. D002026 Date 02 08 05 Time 16 41 58 Main Menu Figure B1 5 System summary display 1 6 DIAG SUMMARY Note The diagnostic display does not include details of the Transmitter Power Supply option if fitted MAC address Software version 00 00 00 N N Serial 1 Serial 2 BATTERY LOCKAB 3 RELAY 1 Option boards Input zl Figure B1 6 Diag Summary small frame recorder large frame similar Main Menu B1 6 1 MAC Address Each instrument is allocated a unique hex address as a part of the manufacturing process The display at the top left of the display screen shows the final 6 characters of this address The full address can be found in the System Summary display described above or in the Network Name display described in section 4 5 1 1 6 2 Sofrware version number This shows the version number of the software fitted to the recorder User Guide HAO28910 Page 354 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 6 3 Serial 1 Serial 2 piece iket sie solder bucket side Touching one of these keys performs a loopback test on the relevant Serial port In order for the test to be successful a 9 way D type socket wired as in figure B1 6 3 must be fitted to the relevant serial port at the rear of the recorder If wired as shown the socket is suitable for testing with both EIA232 and EIA485 communications standards
267. DE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Vertical Grid Total Default Number of vertical divisions for trend chart If left at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Vertical Minor Divs Default Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions If left at default the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 is used Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Visible Alarm Default For When Visible below is selected as In alarm or error or not in alarm or error Visible Alarm allows an alarm number to be entered for use in determining whether a component be visibile or invisible Visible Channel All points For use When Visible below is selected as Channel Value In alarm or error or not in alarm or error Visible Channel allows a point number to be selected from a pick list See also Visible Operator and Visible Value below Visible Operator List of operators For When Visible below is selected as Channel Value Visible Operator allows a comparison operator to be selected from a picklist The picklist contains the following items Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Equal to Not equal to The comparison is made between the instantaneous value of the point
268. Diagnostics appears as an additional item on the System Menu For details of the other items see sec tion 4 6 Most items are self evident The Total requests and Bad requests totals both exclude retries The numbers in parentheses are exception code num bers as described in table 8 2 1b The Initiate Comms Test is a loop back test that sends a message to the selected slave and waits for it to be returned If the test is successful the Successful Comms Test is incremented If not successful one or more of the error box values 15 incremented Figure 4 3 16p shows a typical page Archive Save Restore Config Security Network Illegal function codes 01 Gateway Target Fail 11 Successful Comms Tests Clock Locale Slave 1 Furn recorder 1 v Actual High Priority 2 Seconds Actual Medium Priority 1 Seconds Actual Low Priority 10 125 Seconds Modbus Address Slave Status Last Transaction Status Total Requests 1308 Bad requests 10 Good requests 1298 Illegal addresses 02 Illegal Values 03 Slave Failures 04 No Gateway path 10 Timed out requests Master Rejects Retried requests Serial Link Error Count O A o o ooo Initiate Comms Test Reset Diagnostics Figure 4 3 16p Master Comms diagnostic page Upgrade Input Adjust Output Adjust Master Comms Diagnostics Ethern
269. Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 2 Latched 1 Unlatched 3 Trigger Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 1 Absolute high 2 Deviation in 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 2 12273 2FF2 12274 2FF3 12275 2FF4 12276 2 5 12277 2FF6 12278 2FF7 12279 2FF8 12280 2FFB 12283 2FFD 12285 3001 12289 3005 12293 3009 12297 300D 12301 3
270. E 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Require Authorization This field appears only if Require Signing is enabled If Require Authorization is enabled then changes to the recorder operation configuration or any other item included in the history file can be made only by those users whose Can Authorize permission is enabled in the Access menu described in section 4 4 1 above When Apply is attempted a signature page figure 4 4 2b appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the change Note If neither Require Signing nor Require Authorization is enabled then any user can make changes to the recorder operation configuration etc and the signature page does not appear Authorised Engineer Appears only if Requires Authorising enabled Password 0 Signed Frederick Bloggs Password 0 Operator Note only if Requires Signing enabled Note cannot be empty Ok Pop up appears only if Ok is operated without an operator note having been entered Cancel Figure 4 4 2b Signature page Enable Audit trail For either Auditor option if this field is enabled then all changes to configuration are displayed on the chart and become part of the history file for each enabled group The following is an example of how these
271. ER GUIDE 3 3 1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION Cont TEXT STRING ENTRY The keyboard which appears when the password area is touched is the same as that which appears when any non nu meric text string entry is required e g channel descriptor Figures 3 3 1b and 3 3 1c below are an attempt within the limitations of the illustrating process to depict the available keyboards and thus the available character set Actual entry of the text string is by touching the relevant keys When editing existing text strings the existing text string appears highlighted and will be replaced in its entirety by the first character entered To avoid this the left arrow key can be touched to unhighlight it The down and up arrow keys can be used to scroll through previously entered text strings Immediately below the keyboard are six keys with the functions listed below When active the background colour changes to yellow for as long as the key is active Shift Once the shift key has been pressed next entered letter appears as a capital subsequent letters are in lower case Caps When pressed all subsequent letters appear as capital letters until the Caps key is operated again BSpc This backspace key deletes character to the left of the cursor Ovr If selected the next entered character replaces overwrites the existing character to the right of the cursor position If not selected the next entered character in inserted into the existing text s
272. ESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont REMOVE MEDIA Note See section 2 4 if the Lockable Door Flap option is fitted This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when it is safe to do so Touching the key results in either an to remove archive media or NOT REMOVE Archive Media message as appropriate See figure 3 1 41 Caution Removal of memory devices such as SD cards or Compact Flash cards whilst archiving is taking place can lead to permanent irreparable damage to the device rendering it unusable OK to remove archive media Will advise when OK to remove Ok Cancel Figure 3 1 4i Remove archive media messages 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 27 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 2 NAVIGATION KEYS Above the lower edge of the display screen are six keys as shown below for the small frame unit which allow the user to perform various context related tasks such as to change the display mode section 3 4 to access the recorder configuration to archive data to select groups etc In addition to this left and right arrow keys or open close folder keys appear when relevant ZR p pm Page up Page down Left Right Option Root c Close Open Left Right folder folder cursor cursor Fig
273. Figure 11 2 2c Fuse and User terminal block locations To remove the terminal cover 5 Unplug the IEC connector from the rear of the recorder connector panel and remove the cable tie securing the loom to the chassis 6 Close the terminal cover and lift it off Note Four apertures in each side of the terminal cover allow the user to actuate the clips which secure the i o connectors to the rear panel of the recorder This allows the i o connectors to be removed if for example the recorder is to be removed from the panel for any reason The positions of these apertures are shown in figure 11 2 2b right hand side shown left hand side similar 028910 UserGuide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 318 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 11 2 3 User wiring Figure 11 2 3a shows the terminal block pinout and figure 11 2 3b shows typical applications wiring O P1 O P2 O P3 User terminal Figure 11 2 3a Terminal block wiring Long terminal cover Recorder rear terminal panel PCB Voltages generated by various currents for 1000 and R 250Q E ALALS 6S 3 Other transmitters Only one channel Transmitter shown for clarity minimum spec 1 4W 196 100 2 or 2500 as required see table Figure 11 2 3b Applications wiring 28910 User
274. Function Multiply Multiply Channel 3 Y by Constant Y Constant Value 0 006895 Units MPa Descriptor Steam Pressure Scale low 0 MPa Scale high MPa Discard Figure 4 3 11i PSI to MPa conversion example HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 119 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM HEAT FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsi bility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equations solved is _ Flow ES QE E m Ah 585 where QE Heat energy flow kJ sec at time t Note 1 Flow Measured flow in m sec Note 1 V_ Volume of liquid per kg of steam m kg at temperature T C AV Vyr Vip Where V is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T Dryness factor between 0 no vapour and 100 no liquid Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ kg at temperature T C Ah h h where h is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ kg vapour at temperature T C and AV and Ah are available from published tables note 2 but the recorder user needs only to enter values for measured flow and either the temperature or the
275. Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 319 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION 12 1 INTRODUCTION If the Serial Communications option is fitted this allows the printing of messages as and when they occur or the print ing of configurable reports as a result of job action The recorder is set up to drive a number of recommended printers As more printers become available printer drivers can be imported as described in section 12 4 below For printer specification refer to the documentation supplied with the printer 12 2 WIRING 12 2 1 Serial communications ports The printer is connected to one of the Serial communications ports configured for EIA232 standard using the Rx Tx and common signallines Printer Tx must be connected to recorder Rx Printer Rx must be connected to recorder Tx Figure 12 2 1 shows the location of and user connections for the recorder ports See also section 2 2 Serial Port 2 Serial Port 1 Figure 12 2 1a Serial port locations small frame 12 2 2 DC connection Function 24V 10 24V OV Not connected V 0 O Shell Chassis ground Figure 12 2 2 DC connector pinout solder side of user connector 1 5 e eoo 6e e ee9 e View on solder bucket face of user socket EIA232C Signal NC Rx Tx DTR Signal ground NC NC NC via 15000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 12 2 1b Ser
276. HANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 6 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch6 Span high Ch6 Span low Ch6 Zone high Ch6 Zone low Ch6 PV type Ch6 Decimal places Ch6 Colour Ch6 Units Spare Ch6 Open string Spare Ch6 Close string Spare Ch6 Descriptor Spare Ch6 No of alarms Ch6 PV format Spare Ch6 Alarm 1 enable Ch6 Alarm 1 type Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch6 Alarm 2 enable Ch6 Alarm 2 type Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch6 Alarm 3 enable Ch6 Alarm 3 type Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch6 Alarm 4 enable Ch6 Alarm 4 type Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 7 Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Tr
277. IC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH OPTION Cont CONFIGURATION Select Scope Group gt Instrument EM or Group Group 1 Group 1 Show Batch Entry List MAC Address 00 0A 8D 00 20 A0 These fields appear only if Show Batch Entry List is enabled Predefined Entry 1 FishesRus Predefined Entry 12 Enable v Batch mode Start Stop gt Start Stop or Continuous Batch Fields 4 Y Field 1 Batch Number Batch field 1 Use Counter Y gt Gounte unter or Text Select Counter Counter Counter 1 V gt Appears only if Use Counter selected Field 2 Customer Name Field 3 Operator Name Field 4 Supervisor On start log 4 V On stop log 1 Y On new clear 1 Name files by batch Apply Discard Figure 4 3 10a Batch configuration menu As depicted in figure 4 3 10a the following configuration entries can be made SCOPE Allows the user to define all configured channels instrument or just those in a particular group for batch control If Group is selected a further picklist appears allowing a specific group to be selected SHOW BATCH ENTRY LIST Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used as field entries when starting or storing a batch as described in Operator initiation below The first entry is the MAC address of the recorder and i
278. ING PERMISSIONS 185 ACCESS 186 NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD 186 CONNECT FROM REMOTE 186 REMOTE USER NAME REMOTE PASSWORD 186 IOGIN DISABLED 2 ne eter e ER YE RD er Us 186 EDIT OWN PASSWORD 20 05 trt e e eben tu a deren 186 CHANGE ALARM 5 5 0001211000 186 ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS 00 0 1 20 00 nn nene an nenne nean 187 EDIT MATHS CONSTANT s teer epee thor ERR EN e 187 RESET MATEIS EE rr rt Dat pubes E 187 PRESET TOTALISERS dotes ho ete ee 187 PRESET COUNTER eri prex ra ERR ER Red 187 START RESET 2 er tee eh deett Linee 187 SET CLOCK 187 ADJUST I O 187 eta ee P reet Lope ER ete dud bete 187 SAVE RESTORE um E 187 PASTE DELETE FILES 187 FULL CONFIGURATION 187 FULL SECURITY 187 BATCH CONTROL tete ehh 187 CAN SIGN eene 188 CAN AUTHORIZE 188 PERFORM UPGRADES 188 EVENT PERMISSION 1
279. IP address the range of Modbus addresses used for slaves can if required be the same as the range used by a unit with a different IP address For Serial communications each unit including the master must have a unique Modbus address For the unit described by this manual the Modbus address is accessed in Instrument configu ration section 4 3 1 For other instrument the documentation supplied with those instruments should be referred to A pick list of supported instrument types Third party is used as a default and for non listed instrument types This field is updated automatically if the slave is Detected Allows a timeout period to be set for the read write process See Retry below and Disable Retries in section 4 3 15 Allows entry of the number of times the master attempts to get a response from the slave before aborting If not successful an error message appears Always 124 for supported instruments this field is editable for Third party instruments The maximum block length supported by a particular instrument is found from that instrument s documentation This item appears only for slaves with Network Ethernet When enabled allows a reduction in the number of links between a master and multiple slaves See Share Socket below for more details Generally it is recommended that this item is left at the default for the particular slave being configured Some slaves require a user name and password to
280. L MODE INDICATOR This symbol is displayed whilst the recorder Trial Mode section 4 3 21 is enabled User Guide HAO28910 Page 18 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 Summary menu This pop up display appears if the Alarm Indication area at the top of the display is touched Figure 3 1 4 shows the display Touch Alarm area 77 e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Note For recorders fitted with the Lockable Flap option Remove Media is replaced by Batch Summary Unlock Flap see section 2 4 above Message Log Remove Media Figure 3 1 4a Summary pop up menu INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY Maths Channel Failure Printer Error Ok Figure 3 1 4b Typical Instrument alarm summary display This contains a list of the currently active instrument alarms For a list of possible alarms and their definitions see section 3 1 3 above ACK ALL ALARMS Confirm acknowledge of alarms Yes No Figure 3 1 4c Ack all Alarms display Yes confirms all active unconfirmed alarms This page can also be displayed by touching an alarm in the alarm summary page described below HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 19 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont ALARM SUMMARY PAGE As shown in figure 3 1 4d below the
281. LESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Enable Online Descriptor Network IP Address Modbus Address Profile Timeout Retry Max Block size Share Socket Login Required Username Password DETECT THIS SLAVE If this window is not selected none of the following fields appears and the Remote Device cannot be accessed If enabled normal communications with the slave are carried out When disabled the connec tion with the slave is terminated Allows a new name for the slave device to be entered This name is used only within the master it does not overwrite the Instrument Descriptor in the slave itself Select Ethernet or a Serial port the slaves on the link must have the same communications parameter values e g Baud Rate as are set for the master See Section 4 3 15 for Serial Communications Configuration details Note Serial ports appear in the selection list only if Protocol has been set to Modbus Master in the Serial Comms Configuration section 4 3 15 This field appears only if Network Ethernet This must match the IP address or DNS name of the slave For this unit this information is to be found in Network Address and Network Name respectively For other instruments refer to the documentation supplied with those instruments For Ethernet links Modbus addresses are associated with the IP address This means that for any
282. LEVELS Cont ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS Allows each user with this permssion enabled to acknowledge alarms section 3 1 4 EDIT MATHS CONSTANT For recorders fitted with the Maths option only If one or more maths channels are configured with function Constant then with this permission set the user may edit the constant value s RESET MATHS Allows the user to reset applicable maths functions See section 4 3 11 for further details of maths functions PRESET TOTALISERS Allows the user to preset totaliser values if the option is fitted See section 4 3 12 for further details of totalisers PRESET COUNTERS Allows the user to preset counter values if the option is fitted See section 4 3 13 for further details of Counters START RESET TIMERS Allows the user to start and reset the timer value See section 4 3 14 for further details of timers SET CLOCK Allows each user with this permission enabled to set the recorder time and date functions under System Clock ADJUST 1 Allows the user to adjust recorder inputs and outputs as described in section 4 6 4 and section 9 below ARCHIVING CONTROL Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to archive control For units fitted with the lockable flap option the flap may be unlocked only by users who have this Archiving Control permission enabled SAVE RESTORE Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to saving and restoring functions as described i
283. MT Yi Select the selected Output adjust Master comms disagnostics Geet ummentinen bem anguage nm 2 section 4 3 16 Slave 1 Furn recorder 1 V Start at 12 00 00 PM emove just aster L omms Viagnostics Actual High Priority 2 Seconds on the Last v 1 0 60 13 10 05 15 22 54 negen Mer Weee Actual Medium Priority 1 UE i 1 t 2 0 960 13 10 05 16 03 09 Copy Actual Low Priority 0 125 Seconds in March O Wl summertime n End at 12 00 00 PM period to be 3 8 563 Unadjusted Job Search Modbus Address 1 x denned 4 0 000 Unadjusted Slave Status Online o E Customise B9m Sunday v 5 0 365 Unadjusted Last Transaction Status in October R 896 About Total Requests 1308 Long Date format Bad requests 10 Good requests 1298 Apply Discard Specify the low output and then the low reading Illegal function codes 01 0 Illegal addresses 02 0 Low Output 4 Illegal Values 03 0 Ynstrument Number 8203 Low Reading 4 018 Slave Failures 04 0 Key Code WC8N 9F5E 1D41 When the values have been entered select No Gateway path 10 0 Rey Doen OnE EA Gateway Target Fail 11 0 ras Timed out requests 10 Source Files From Remote FTP Site V Discard Master Rejects 0 Upgrade Retried requests 4 Ethernet diagnostics Serial Link Error Count 0 Input Adjus
284. Message enable disable 69 Pack pes E 190 Permission A E AEE LE C DUM evi is 187 Trail aiden emer e 174 192 Contiguration 77 Auto detect page 004 8 t 154 DD 181 J be tous un 220 Average 1 2 22 44 79 i tii ei ERRARE RSS 15 cut fr O sente et 247 HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 385 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B C Background colour 209 245 Cable Bargraph Signal Max min sizes 5 Channel e eu ie Eee 254 Supply voltage min size 9 Displays 44 46 Gan Authorize 5 n 188 Group Cali SII iste suf ee 188 Horizontal tienen 253 iecore eere 33 MertiCaliz ere A ERES rre cen 253 Centralised security 193 A E b c OUI 247 Change ne etek aie 195 Alarm setpoint permission 186 Basic edit level eee eee eun 240 Battery Basic Advanced selection 240 Indicator x eoi eee ee E ab eun 18 Re Pas 99 to 224 Procedure
285. NNN N Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 133 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS OPTION Cont IEEE Area Maths Channel run time data The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for maths channel 1 Generally Parameter address for channel N Parameter address for channel 1 4 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Channel 1 value Current process value PV Read Write 9 63983 2 Channel 1 status Channel status Read only F9F1 63985 1 0 2 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Channel 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 F9F2 63986 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack re
286. Network Data Y a Screen Data Amm Screen Restore Save As Text Export Screen Configuration Data Security Data Network Data _ See ASCII Printer Out put option description File Name userlin Import section 12 Figure 4 2a Save Restore menu Screen Data _ New Default Where a file name is required then if the displayed file name is suitable operation of the Save Restore Import or Export key will initiate the action If instead a file name has to be entered this is carried out as follows Touching the filename window causes a pop up menu to appear giving a list of Volumes in the Flash memory or on the memory device if inserted Figure 4 2b shows an imaginary Volume contents list displayed by touching the name user then operating the down arrow or open folder key See section 5 below for more details Once the correct folder is open either select an existing file or enter a new filename by touching the FileName window and entering the name using the pop up keyboard s as described in section 3 3 1 above Operation of the Save Restore key initiates the action f B Hide cal Folder 03 04 05 12 35 08 configV Folder 01 04 05 10 27 13 Filter1a Config 05 03 05 10 22 23 4445 libV Folder 05 03 05 10 23 14 sdb Fold
287. OUS euoN esuodseg jeuuoN uoisse1duio skea 90 80 L uoneing HON dnoi15 10 pue1j 1seuous SAUER Eb eyes aw Sz ee ezig yse 4 __________ woy 55 pereos eaan 96 uonoes b 001 SAIYOI N n Addy pueosiq Ajddy A uonoy on 0 2 A JequinN gor e g 101duoseq 10 BSUBS 2 21 05 A 9 97 80 90 70 20 20005 A p jequinN 0 sueeJog ueeJog 1950 y ueeJog 1955 A e 5 g ueeuos 1955 uonoes paeosiq A ddy eBeg Os __ 2 A 95 95 21 91e Suasije o sjouueuo EII A z syw speuueuo gduie euigan L i Sjuiod e qejrene 30 157 A vduie 1 euiqun A pussy SENSA YO A pues 10 2 eiqesiq A puai jeonioA 1 dnoio
288. PWateN es ite ceca erect eere 107 Sirmulatiort ep te etr ree etis eee eee 183 Store diagnostics 2 151 unde ed et ted o eee ss 157 159 172 D tede eee ed ci des 180 324 Comms Maths 107 Styl s locatlon tr oie meteor 11 Selection imet e en tt bonu 151 SUDE Cta rt P E 176 Slowing recording 69 193 Subnet Mask eite 197 Email 1 1 nce Lee 176 Subtract oc niet ocn t Inde een tete 107 SMS iscing eite equite 178 Summary iiie reete te 176 Men aah estes fe be rete citro dc res 19 Subject Only 176 Page SMTP cuero c UTE eS 178 Alarm ae ERE oet dts 20 iiie COP RR E 197 HR ADAM I 22 Client enable eo eni eri 197 Summertime 201 Instrument 17 Supply Voltage 1 E teruel iet ee S 9 Server enable sse 197 Support eec 212 Socket Share nite er 155 Suspend Archiving eese 53 Software VErSiON sersa cete ne tene cete tein ee 211 SWITCH ect etum dn dot 108 SOUMCC 172 Printer tee eene por cmn 329 Descriptor value 2 1000000 94 Symbols used on labels 2 1
289. R NOTES LIST Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used in Operator Notes The first entry is the MAC ad dress of the recorder and is not editable The remaining 12 entries of up to 60 characters each are freely editable Any one of these predefined notes can be selected as described in section 3 5 by touching the Operator Note area continuously for two seconds then touching the required note from the picklist which appears Once selected the predefined note can be edited before use like a normal Operator Note Such editing does not affect the original note entered here in Instrument Configuration User Guide HAO28910 Page 64 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 Group configuration Note Groups 1 to 6 is a standard recorder feature The supply of groups seven to twelve is an optional extra Group configuration allows the user to define the following Group trend speed interval Group recording speed interval Group descriptor Group content Circular Trend speed and chart full operation Chart grid divisions 0 0 The production of alarm messages and the saving of group data to Flash memory to removable memory device and or to remote computer FTP transfer can also be enabled disabled from this menu Group Number 1 Group 1 Y 39 Select Group p Select Trend Units mm r Y mmp hr or in hr Descriptor Group 1 Trend Type Adaptive gt
290. R11 option is fitted the minimum password length is that set in the Security Manage ment menu described in section 4 4 2 For all recorders the maximum password length is 20 characters 2 For maximum security it is recommended that the remote password and the local password be non identi cal Access when Fred v New Password Retype Password Connect from remote W Remote user name Fred Remote password Retype remote password Login Disabled Edit own Password Change Alarm Setpoints XIX Figure 6 4 3 Remote user access fields HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 229 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM Initiate the program using the START button in the normal way Once the program starts a Host name and User name will be requested as depicted in figure 6 5a Enter the Local host name e g Andy136 4 found in the recorder Network Name area followed by a dot full stop period followed by the domain name e g FishesRus co uk also in the Network Name area These examples would result in an entry of Andy136 4 FishesRus co uk Notes 1 If frequent use is to be made of this option it is recommended that a short cut be created and placed on the computer desktop To create a new Bridge link right click on the desktop left click New in the pop up menu which appears then left click on the Bridge ico
291. RLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 CIRCULAR TREND Cont NORMAL VIEW FEATURES Scales Chart speed Faceplates Message Bar FULL SCREEN DISPLAY Two scales are provided one for the left hand side of the chart the other for the right hand side Channel scaling is a part of channel configuration as described in section 4 3 3 below The scales apply only to values along the horizontal line through the centre of the chart Values for other angles times can be most easily found from the trace history selected from the Option key or by touching anywhere in the chart or in the green background area for a few seconds This displays the currently selected speed of revolution of the chart This speed is set up as part of Group configuration section 4 3 2 Up to 12 faceplates can be displayed giving point values and alarm indication The message bar at the bottom of the screen displays the latest message If an up arrow appears at the right hand end of the bar there is more than one message Touching the message bar calls View Messages window detailing previous messages See the description in section 3 4 2 for more details As shown in figure 3 4 3c below this maximizes the chart diameter leaving only the chart chart speed and faceplates Gf selected on on display The figure shows a view with faceplates selected off For the large frame recorder faceplate on off selection can be made only from one of the other displ
292. Reports Section 4 3 20 Trial Mode DisabledV Trial Time Remaining 30 day Fitted channels 187 Virtual channels 36 V Maths 12 V Totalisers 12 Counters 7 V Groups 127 Batch Enabled V Security Manager DisabledV Auditor 21CFR11W Screen Builder Full Bridge Level Full Simulation Enabled V currently 1 4 Relay Boards 2 Relays on Board 1 Relays on Board 2 currently O SEE Event Input Boards Analogue Output Boards 1 V currently 0 Apply Discard Autoconfigure E mail Section 4 3 19 Report 1 Report 1 7 Descriptor Report 1 Number of Fields 6 7 Field 1 Type Date amp Time v Style Normal v Field 2 Type Text Style Bold M Field Type Process Valuev Point Channel 1 v Style Emphasisedv Field 4 Type Batch Field 1 Style Banner Field 5 1 Message Style Norma v Field 6 Type Line Feed Line Feed 1 v Apply Discard Mail Server Port Number Sender Errors To Retry Time Recipient List Descriptor Rept1 Rept2 Rept3 Rept4 Rept5 7 Rept8 Rept9 Rept10 Email Number Descriptor Protocol Subject Text Include Message Message 25 Recorder address 60 Seconds 1 List V List 1 Email1 SMTP Email v ERE EE a 1 Message 1 v Apply Discard Figure B9i C
293. SS Cont SUBNET MASK This field is editable only if Specify IP address is selected in the IP address lookup picklist above The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits in the host address reserved for sub network identification By convention all the network address bits are set to 1 The subnet mask is used to identify the subnet to which an IP address belongs by performing a bitwise AND on the mask and the IP address DEFAULT GATEWAY To deliver traffic from one subnet to another devices called routers or gateways are placed between segments default gateway address informs each network device where to send data if the target station does not reside on the same subnet as the source SNTP SERVER ENABLE This tick box allows the recorder to act as an SNTP time server SNTP CLIENT ENABLE This tickbox allows time synchronisation from a Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server to be enabled and disa bled When enabled the instrument time is updated every 15 minutes SNTP SERVER If Obtain from BootP server or Obtain from DHCP server is selected as the IP address look up see above then this address appears automatically Otherwise this area allows an IP address to be entered for the SNTP server Notes 1 SNTP is a protocol that allows clients on a TCP IP network to set their times to that of a server port number 123 The recorder can act both as a client and as a server when acting a
294. STER COMMS Cont MASTER OUTPUT 1 SETUP This shows the setup required in order to output the master s channel 2 Furn1 1 to Furn2 Record channel 1 The Descriptor Furnl Templ has been entered as the Output Name This happens to be the same as the channel descriptor but could be any required text string Output Channel Number 1 Furnt Temp ty Enable W Output Type Master Slave 3 Furn2 Record Parameter Comms Channely Point Type Channelv Point Number Process Value Medium Priorityv Descriptor Furn1 PV1 Source 2 Furnt Default 0 1 On Error Write Default Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16m Master Output 1 setup example SLAVE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SETUP Figure 4 3 16n shows how to set up a slave channel to read an input from a master Note that the scaling of this channel must match the scaling of the source channel Channel Number 1 1 Temp1 Value 658 3654 Unadjusted Input Type Slave Comms Y Scale Low 0 DegC Scale High 1000 Deg Units Deg C Scale Type Linear v Scale Divisions Major 10 Scale Divisions Minor 1 Descriptor Furn1 Temp 1 Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16n Slave channel setup 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 167 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS Master Comms
295. STYLE See figure 12 3 2b for examples of Normal Bold Emphasised and Banner print styles For all styles if the text is too long to fit on one line it wraps round as shown for normal style in figure 12 3 2b below This is Normal style text 12 11 04 12 20 56 This demonstrates what happens if the text is too long to fit on one lirie This is Bold style text This is Emphasised stvle text eoe This is Banner style text Figure 12 3 2b Text style examples POINT Allows a point to be chosen when Process value has been selected as Field Type The point is selected from a pick list containing all the input channels derived channels totalisers etc in the instrument LINE FEED Appears only when Line Feed has been chosen as Field Type Allows the user to enter the required number of blank lines up to 10 which are to be inserted User Guide 028910 Page 324 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS The importing of new printer drivers is carried out from the SAVE RESTORE button menu fully described in section 4 2 Before a printer driver can be imported it must be available from the recorder s Flash memory from an SD or Flash card from a USB memory stick or for Bridge users from the host PC Printer driver files have the suffix uhi Figure 12 4 depicts the process for a recorder When
296. Superseded BS4937 1993 IEC584 3 1989 Current BS1843 1952 Superseded BS4937 1993 IEC584 3 1989 Current 51843 1952 Superseded Black Yellow Green Brown Brown White White Blue White Blue White Blue Black Black Green Red Brown Figure 13 4 2b Thermocouple wiring details Blue UserGuide Page 338 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 4 2 WIRING Cont Portable case Recorder back panel Brown Line supply C n 100 to 240V 50 60 Hz Chassis ground Earth Safety earth Ethernet connector Note For the sake of clarity the Serial Communications and USB option wiring 3 2 are not shown Options s connector Note Two input board 12 t c wiring shown One input board version 6t c similar but input board two and associated wiring and connec CON 7 tors are not fitted Three input board 18 t c similar but with CON 8 option boards 1 and 2 being replaced by the CON 9 third i p board and the 22 way connector being CJ sensor 3 to CON18 Input board 3 channels 1 to 6 are wired to CON 13 to CON 18 respectively CJ sensor t Figure 13 4 2c In
297. Symbols Figure 3 3 1 Alternative keyboards User Guide HA028910 Page 34 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 DISPLAY MODES The display modes described below allow the currently displayed group s process values channels totalisers etc known collectively as points to be displayed as vertical horizontal or circular chart traces as vertical or horizontal bargraphs or as numeric values The various display modes are cycled through using the up down arrow keys or a spe cific mode or view can be selected from the Root Menu Goto View key Groups can be scrolled through using the left right arrow keys The Home key returns the user to the Home page defined in Configuration Views section 4 3 4 from anywhere in the Operator or Configuration pages in the recorder When dispatched the Home page is Group 1 vertical trend display See also the Screen builder description in section 7 3 4 1 Vertical Trend display This display figure 3 4 1b shows each point in the display group as though it were being traced on a white chart It is possible to change the appearance of the chart in the System key Customise area of configuration section 4 6 10 It is recommended that some thought be given to ensuring good contrast between trace colours and background colour One of the channels is said to be the current or scale channel This channel is identified by its diamond shaped pen icon and by
298. Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 0303 771 0304 772 0305 773 0306 774 0307 775 0308 776 0309 777 030A 778 030D 781 030F 783 0313 787 0317 791 031B 795 031F 799 0329 809 0333 819 0334 820 0335 821 0371 881 0372 882 0373 883 0374 884 037E 894 037F 895 0380 896 0381 897 02E9 907 02EA 908 2 909 02 910 0256 920 02 7 921 0258 922 02F9 923 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than be the previously configured constant value Constant the value returned will 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 277 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 C
299. UIDE ANNEX A SPECIFICATION INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree 2 These are defined as follows Installation category The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V ac mains is 2500V Pollution degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however a temporary conductivity caused by conden sation shall be expected 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 341 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Recorder Board types 1 Universal input board Relay output boards 3 change over 4 normally closed or 4 normally open relays per board 6 event input board Serial communications board 2 channel analogue output retransmission board Standard features Bridge Lite Configuration Copy CSV Archive file format E mail File transfer protocol FTP 6 Groups Job search Log scales MODBUS TCP Messages Timers USB port behind access flap not stainless steel case option Web server Options Software Hardware ASCII Printer output supplied as a part of the Serial Communications option Audit trail 21CFRI l Audit Batch Recording Bridge Full version Event Buttons supplied as a part of the Screen Builder option Master Comms Maths Totalisers Counters Multiple groups six additional gr
300. URITY Touching this key allows the operator to select Login described in section 3 3 1 Management Access or Add Remove User for configuration Selecting Access displays the current user level Touching this area allows the user to select Logged out Operator Engineer or any of the added users The user may also go directly to logged out mode by operating the Logout key Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Select the required access level and enter the password if required User Engineer Y Login Section 3 3 1 Password expires in 29 Days Login Access Logout Manegemeni Management option Section 4 4 2 Access Section 4 4 1 Add User DA 5 See UNT Logins 14 Access when Engineer M Login Timeout Minutes New Password with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Retype Password Password Retries 3times v Connect from remote Passwords Expire 30 Days Login Disabled Minimum Password Length 3 Edit Own Password Require Signing v Change Alarm Setpoints Require Authorization W Acknowledge Alarms Enable Audit Trail W Edit Maths Constant Password Change on Expiry Reset maths Centralised Security Preset Totalisers Login By User List W Preset Counters Apply Discard Start reset Timers Set Clock Add User Adjust Section 4 4 3 Remove User Section 4 4 4 User User Full Name v Remove
301. above Allows data to be read into a digital input Allows the user to select a specific parameter table 4 3 16a shows a typical set or User defined to be selected User defined allows a decimal register address to be entered see User defined below Allows the user to enter a Loop Number for the parameter read Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value The three rates Low Medium and High have the values set in the Master Comms configuration This Span setting allows the Zero and Full Scale values for the parameter to be entered The remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in section 4 3 3 Alarm status Auto Manual Process value Read alarm active status Read alarm unacknowledged status Working output power Working setpoint Table 4 3 16a Typical Controller read parameters 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 159 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont USER DEFINED REGISTERS As previously mentioned User Defined be selected for all slaves and for some slave types it is the only way of accessing some or all parameters The number of the register holding the required parameter is to be found in the user documentation supplied with the slave For instance if the unit to which this manual refers were to be a slave then the list of registers is to be found in section 8 For example for t
302. active 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 309 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 9 Permanent ID table This table contains information relating to the recorder and also gives the start address of the feature identification table FIT FFF4 Checksum FFF3 FIT start address FFF2 Version ID FFF 1 Product ID FFFO Company ID Table 8 4 9 Permanent ID table 8 5 DATA TRANSMISSION Each message request or response is packaged in the MODBUS frame shown below The messages consist of a 7 byte prefix followed by the function code in hex followed by the relevant data bytes the number and content of which depend on the function code as described in subsequent sections Bytes 8 onwards Protocol Protocol Numb
303. ad only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 304 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 3 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Channel 3 value Channel 3 status Current process value PV Channel status See note 1 Read only 63691 F8CD 63693 2 1 0 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Channel 3 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write 63694 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only
304. age is displayed It is unlikely that this will contain any useful information because the input channels will not as yet have been configured to suit the type of input signals being applied to them as described in section 4 Notes There is no on off switch associated with the recorder Date time and the message Power Up are printed on the chart each time power is applied to the recorder followed by a similar message giving Config Revision and Security Revision A red line is drawn across the width of the chart at power up 1 2 The recorder has four security levels as follows Logged out Operator Engineer Service Initially no access to recorder configuration is possible Only Archive Login security and the System About functions can be accessed via the root menu Limited or full access can be permitted from level No access to recorder configuration is possible until access permissions have been set up Section 4 4 1 describes how limited or full access can be permitted by an operator with Engineer level access Accessed initially by entering 100 as the password section 3 3 1 below Full access to all recorder functions is available Section 4 4 1 describes how the Engineer level password can be edited and an Operator password can be entered if required The section also describes how access permission to some or all of the recorder functions can be granted or not to indivi
305. age trigger time Alarm Type Embedded details Absolute Enable Type high or low Threshold Status Deviation Enable Type in or out Reference Deviation Status Rate of change Enable Type rise or fall Amount Change time Status Table 4 3 8 Alarm details versus alarm type Note If any of Source Descriptor Source Value or Source Alarm Data are embedded in a message which is triggered by a job which cannot be associated with a specific source e g event timer then the embedded value will be 22227 Continued User Guide 028910 94 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 8 MESSAGES Cont Replace nj with Cont Specified Descriptor Specified Value Specified Alarm data Produces a further field n source described below Batch Status Causes the status Active or Inactive of the current batch to be embedded See Section 4 3 10 for details of the Batch option Batch Field data Allows a selected batch field to be included in the message If a batch is not running at the time the message is triggered the Batch field data is replaced by 22227 See Section 4 3 10 for details of the Batch option Note Group number must be entered if the batch is configured for Group mode Instrument Name Allows the Instrument Name as entered in Configuration Instrument section 4 3 1 to be included in the message Instrument Number C
306. ages associated with these options See notes 1 and 2 below Notes 1 Security Revision be used as an input to one or more maths channels If such a maths channel is in cluded in one or more groups the revision number can be determined for any time date when Trend His tory mode is invoked for the group s in question See section 4 3 11 for maths option details 2 If Centralised Security is enabled the Security Revision is in a different format e g 15 001 see section 4 4 2 SUPPORT FILE If the unit is not performing as it should e g it resets itself unexpectedly the Support File key allows the user to save critical system files into a single file SupportInfo uhq for despatch to the manufacturer for analysis This file may be saved to the instrument s Compact Flash or SD card or using Bridge software to a remote PC For security reasons this file cannot be viewed by anyone other than the manufacturer or his agents Once the save operation is complete a Support message appears on the screen giving details of where to send the file More information is held in the file SupportInfo txt which is also saved to the disk This file can be opened and the information within it read by inserting the disk into a PC clicking on the floppy disk icon drive in Computer and then double clicking on the file icon when it appears SupportInfo is the default name This name may be edited by the user
307. ails egal Function An invalid function code was received egal Data Address An invalid data address was received egal Data Value An invalid data value was received lave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred in the recorder egal Sub Function An invalid sub function was received Gateway path unavailable Gateway misconfigured or overloaded Gateway target device failed to respond Device not present on the network Table 8 2 1b Exception codes 8 2 2 Data types The following data types are supported 1 2 scomplement signed 16 bit analogue values with implied decimal point The decimal point position must be configured in both the recorder and the host computer 2 s complement 16 32 and 64 bit signed integers 16 bit unsigned integer values 32 bit IEEE Floating point values Strings of limited size can be transferred across Modbus TCP in ASCII format using a single non multiplexed set of consecutive registers 4 DATA ENCODING MODBUS uses what is called a Big endian representation for addresses and data items This means that when numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted the most significant byte is sent first For example a 32 bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12 followed by 34 followed by 56 and finally 78 8 2 3 Invalid multiple register writes When a recorder receives a multi register write request it is possible that one or mo
308. ained for as long as the I O is connected to the recorder P 430 mm gt 190 mm gt 4 384 8 mm ACT 40 5 Figure 13 Portable case dimensions UserGuide 028910 330 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 1 BASIC OPTION 13 1 1 Introduction The basic portable case option provides 6 or 12 input channels with up to four option boards or 18 input channels and up to two option boards 13 1 2 Wiring Figure 13 1 2a below gives alternative back panel connector layouts for the 12 input and 18 input recorder options USB Ports option Serial comms option Ethernet RJ45 Mains supply Serial comms option Ethernet RJ45 Mains supply connection connection board 1 Option board H board 1 Option board 4 gt lt gt gt lt 4 1 22 1 22 ch Figure 13 1 2a Back panel connector details SUPPLY VOLTAGE Caution Before powering the recorder check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range specified on the serial number label at the rear of
309. analogue output boards can be fitted each of which supplies two outputs This allows any of the recorder points to be output as a voltage or current signal as configured Any part of the source point s span can be mapped to the output range and the outputs can be adjusted as described below to compensate for errors in the monitoring sys tem 9 1 SIGNAL WIRING Figure 2 2 1d shows the output wiring for analogue output boards 9 2 SPECIFICATION See Annex A for the analogue output board specification 9 3 CONFIGURATION See section 4 3 17 output channel configuration for details 9 4 OUTPUT ADJUST Notes 1 Output adjust is relevant only to output channels configured as mA not to those configured as Master Comms 2 Output channels can be adjusted only by users with Adjust I O access permission section 4 4 1 9 4 1 Adjustment procedure This procedure is carried out as follows 1 Select Output Adjust in the System menu 2 Select the required channel 3 Enter a low value for the recorder to output 4 Observe what value the monitoring equipment is reading for this output 5 Enter this monitored value 6 Repeat for a high value Note 10 and 90 of output range are commonly used as low and high values respectively Figure 9 4 1 below shows typical adjust pages 9 4 2 Adjustment removal Adjustments can be removed at any time as follows 1 Select Output Adjust in t
310. and connect the corresponding input High Point 5 When the values below have settled select Apply 1 Channel 1 4 9993 Unadjusted 2 Channel 2 4 9972 Unadjusted 3 Channel 3 5 0010 Unadjusted 4 Channel 4 49994 6 Channel 6 5011 Apply Discard Figure 4 6 4c Typical high end input adjust page High Point Default value displayed but a different value can be entered here if required Apply the High point value to the relevant input channels and wait some minutes for the recorder readings to become stable When the readings are stable press the Apply key to return to the status page Note Adjusting a channel invalidates the accuracy values given in the specification in Annex A for that channel User Guide HAO28910 Page 204 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 5 Output Adjust Applies only to units with Analogue output option boards fitted See section 9 for details 4 6 6 Master Comms Diagnostics This menu item is concerned only with Master comms diagnostics and is fully described in Section 4 3 16 4 6 7 Ethernet Diagnostics This screen figure 4 6 7 allows the user to test the status of the connection with a host computer and if Modbus comms is enabled the connections with local and remote Modbus slaves The page is available to any access level with Full Configuration enabled in Security Access c
311. ange 873 to 1473 K 600 to 1200 C User Guide HA028910 Page 128 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE Cont 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 Oxygen potential kilocalories milliVolts 0 500 1000 1500 2000 Degrees Celsius Note Colours serve no purpose in the figure above other than to simplify interpretation Change of state Element Melting point Boiling point Sublimation point Transition point Figure 4 3 11t Free energy diagram 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 129 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont GROUP MINIMUM The following description assumes a group name of Furnace 1 which contains four channels with descriptors Temp 1 Temp 2 Temp 3 Temp 4 The output of the Group Minimum function is the current lowest value of any of the points in the source group The required source group is selected by picklist Should a point return a non valid value it is excluded from the calcula tion and the result of the function is the minimum of the remaining points DESCRIPTORS As a part of the Group Minimum function configuration it is possible to select one of two types of descriptor User Defined
312. ansaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS SubfunctionSubfunction Query data Query data identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol identifier function code code high byte low byte lowing code hex Pigh byte low byte ASCII Q Hex Hex Figure 8 5 4 Function code 08 loopback test example User Guide 028910 312 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 5 5 Function code 16 Hex 10 REQUEST This is used to write values to multiple registers The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described in section 8 5 above are Function code 10 1 byte Register Start address 2 bytes Word count Total number of registers to be written 1 to 100 decimal 1 to 64 hex 2 bytes Byte count B 2 x word count 1 byte Values to be written 2B bytes Thus to write Batch Number as batch field 1 for group 1 start address A57F the following message expanded in figure 8 5 5a would be transmitted to the recorder 0000000000150010A57F00070E4261746368204E756D6265720000 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Base Base count Word coun guie count identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes to fol identifier function address address High byte Low byte low hex code hex High byte Low byte Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte
313. ar panel terminals figure 2 2 1d either as a voltage signal or as a current signal as required Figure 4 3 17 shows a typical configuration page See section 9 for Output Adjust details Output Channel Number 1 Output 1 v Enable Select Master Output Type V v Comms mA or V Descriptor Output 1 RangeLow Range High Ho Offset 0 Source span low 0 Source span high 10 Data Source Channel 1 Yj Select source point On Error Drive Off v Select Drive Drive as High or Drive Low Apply Discard Figure 4 3 17b Typical analogue output configuration page CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Output Channel Number Allows the user to select the Output to be configured Enable Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled Output Type Select V or mA Descriptor Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel name Range Low The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at Source span low Range High The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at Source span high Offset Allows a fixed value to be entered to the value of the source signal before conversion to the output range Source span low Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in Range Low appearing at the output terminals to be set Source span high Allows the value of the s
314. are the numerical part of the first history file that they contain For example if the first file name is Furnace 20051012 80155F2601000120 uhh then the subdirectory name will be 20051012 80155F2601000120 If there are more than 32 files the next subdirectory name is 20051012 80155F2601000140 assuming the file names are contiguous SD or Flash card history a a group 6 group 5 group 4 group 3 group 2 group 1 Only group 1 structure shown for clarity Each group contains subdirectories each containing up to 32 files sub directory n Remaining group 1 history files max 32 Figure 5 3 File structure archive _ sb sub directory 2 directory 1 Second 32 First 32 group 1 group 1 history history files files User Guide Page 224 HA028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 BRIDGE REMOTE VIEWER 6 1 INTRODUCTION This feature comes in two levels called Full option and Lite supplied as standard The Full option allows full operation and configuration of the recorder simultaneously from up to ten PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below When a change is being made to the configuration of the recorder by one Bridge user client the message Feature Locked Another client IP ADDRESS has locked this feature Wait for loc
315. arm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 303 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE Area Channel run time data The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for channels 1 to 12 Generally Parameter address for channel N Parameter address for channel 1 4 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Channel 1 value Channel 1 status Channel 1 Alarms CHANNEL 2 Parameter Name Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 2 Alarm 2 inactive 1 2 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack req
316. arm Disk icon FTP activity indicator Configuration locked indicator Time and date if option fitted Channel alarm free space Instrument alarm Current access level or user name Status bar Channel descriptor gt Channel scale Off channel s gt Logged out Channel 1 0 00 20 00 gt gt Channel value 1338Y 60 00 An animated bar appears over the date when the recorder is busy Though normally pale blue the bar is gold coloured when the recorder configuration is being updated remotely via Bridge software Other traces Pen icon Alarm threshold marker absolute high Scale Current trace Diamond icon 28 05 05 11 51 93 Alarms s off Channel 3 alarm 1 time and date Tim m 11 48 04 28 05 05 11 47 51 Alarms s on e date sta p 28 05 05 3 1 time and date Navigation keys Figure 3 Trend display definitions large frame unit User Guide 028910 14 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY Cont CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS In each of the different types of PV display each channel s faceplate gives the status of the channel s alarms The status of each alarm
317. arms Alarm information Uint16 63726 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 12 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length See note 1 F8EF 63727 2 Read only 8 63729 1 Channel 12 value Current process value PV Channel status 0 2 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Channel 12 status 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Channel 12 alarms Alarm information F8F2 63730 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 in
318. as Modbus master is selected as input type the display changes from Channel 1 for example to Read 1 This legend stays as Read 1 until a descriptor is entered below which immediately overwrites it Allows the user to select from a picklist the slave from which data is to be retrieved The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master Comms Configura tion described above Allows data to be read into a digital input Allows the user to select Alarm setpoints Process Value Batch status model dependent or User defined to be selected User defined allows a decimal register address to be entered For some slaves scale zero scale low is returned as value and full scale scale high as value 65 535 Hex with intermediate values having proportionate values For example the value 15 would be represented as 32 767 7FFF for a channel scale 0 to 30 as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100 and a value of 45 for a channel scaled 30 to 60 In order to convert this reading to an understandable value a scaling factor must be entered If the low and high scale entries match the slave channel s scale the master reading will be the same as the slave s reading Selecting High Low allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the selected parameter If None is selected the process value is displayed as a proportion of 64k This item appears f
319. as necessary GROUP NUMBER 1 Descriptor Colour mix Alarm message Disable Deselect all points except Channels 1 to 4 12 5 2 Channel configuration Refer to section 4 3 3 as necessary CHANNEL 1 Input Type Test Scale High 2100 Units 96 Descriptor Red Alarm 1 Enable Unlatched Type Absolute low Threshold 10 CHANNEL 2 As channel 1 except Descriptor Blue CHANNEL 3 As channel 1 except Descriptor Green CHANNEL 4 As channel 1 except Waveform z Sine 4 minutes Descriptor Orange User Guide 028910 326 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 5 3 Event Configuration Refer to section 4 3 6 as necessary EVENT NUMBER 1 Source 1 Unack d Alarm on Group Descriptor Paint low Job number 1 Category Report Send Report to Select required printer Report 1 report 1 On Active 12 5 4 Report Configuration Descriptor Paint Low Number of fields 8 Field 1 Type Text Text Paint Low Warning Style Banner Field 2 Type Line Feed Line Feed 2 Field 3 Type Date amp Time Style Normal Field 4 Type Process Value Point Red Style Normal Field 5 Type Process Value Point Blue Style Normal Field 6 Type Process Value Point Green Style Normal Field 7 Type Process Value Point Orange Style Normal Field 8 Type Line feed Line Feed 5 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 327 100 180
320. as normal numeric values Numeric or in Scientific format Scientific When Scientific is selected values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1 and 101 the mantissa followed by a multiplier the exponent E G to enter a value of 1244 5678 the value entered would be 1 2445678E3 where 3 repre sents the number of places that the decimal point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between 1 and 101 enter a value of 0 0004196 the entry would be 4 196 4 Figure 4 3 9b below gives further examples Notes 1 2 Strictly this is number less than 10 as 10 would be 1 0 1 There must be at least one number after the decimal point 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 97 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 9 USER LINEARISATION TABLES Cont CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Cont Number of points This is used to enter the total number of point pairs in the table The following XY fields increase in number up to the entered value A scroll bar appears if there are more points than can be displayed in the available screen height X1 to XN The input values to the table where N is the Number of Points entered above Y1 to YN The resulting corresponding output values from the look up table 3metres gt gt 4 A Numeric Scientific Y X Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 074 0 5 0 7 4 2 0 589 1 0 0 5 89 1 1
321. ash memory or disk The operator can assign a suitable filename before ex porting 7 2 DISPLAY CREATION The following description is an attempt to show how to create a simple screen layout The technique used is to define an object then to specify its size and where its top left corner is to be located on the screen The option offers two levels of sophistication basic and advanced The basic system defines size position fill colour etc for components section 7 3 1 Advanced parameters allow a more sophisticated fine tuning of the appearance of the components Note X is horizontal increasing rightwards Y is vertical increasing downwards Top left corner is 0 0 As implied in figure 7 2 3a screen component position and dimensions can be specified as percentage absolute pixels or relative pixels Percentage is percentage of screen size Absolute pixels allow position and or dimensions to be defined as an absolute number of pixels Relative pixels are the same as absolute pixels except that if the display is rescaled on say a pc screen the absolute pixel object will remain unchanged whereas the relative pixel object will scale appropriately Similarly for transfer from an XGA screen recorder to a 1 4 VGA recorder or vice versa 7 2 1 Before starting Before starting to lay the screen out 1 The user must have full configuration access permission 2 One or more user screens must be enabled in Views Configu
322. ass flow will be in kg hour 2 ASME Steam tables 1999 from IAPWF IF97 3 Saturated Steam Mass Flow above for details of pressure unit conversion User Guide HAO28910 Page 120 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED Note The following assumptions are made with regard to this implementation 1 The condensate return is 100 wet saturated water No flash steam component is included 2 same mass leaves the system as enters it Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equations solved is Flow TI 9 7 ss ae 700 him where Heat energy consumed in kJ sec at time t Note 1 Flow Measured flow in m sec Note 1 Volume of liquid per kg of steam m kg at temperature C Vyn Virop Where V is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature C d Dryness factor between 0 no vapour and 100 no liquid h Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ kg at temperature Ah Airp where h is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ kg vapour at temperature h LT2 Enthalpy of
323. ata Has Been Modified Apply Discard Cancel User Guide Page 58 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont 1 5 erAje o qg y Ajddy A uonoy 1 sequinn A 1 1921 02 _ su6ig xen oueunw 1 Ad pieosiq Addy pieosiq p40Mssed adAjoy s p10Mssed snoufuout eureu jepuooes 0 0 0 150 Ajepuooes 00 LIPON skeq ajqeaoway 609 06 9215 rm n n4 eipei UO A yeuuo euN s p10Mssed snoufuoue eureu uibo 5 m aE LIPON 0 0 0 80 2 peuueds 201 MOUS Ldno19 19p10991 y ed __ sa euge A 7 Areure ewo dij due euina 9 HoIsiH pusa iseuous SUON qw 52 66 216 use J ed 5 M
324. atch Field 2 Custd 20975 ld 2 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Field 1 Batch h field 1 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Batch fields 3 was 1 05 04 05 08 50 50 Config Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer New batch fields 04 04 05 16 42 11 Alarm s off 2 1 04 04 05 16 32 50 Alarm s off 1 1 04 04 05 16 31 05 Batch stop Engineer 04 04 05 16 31 05 Stop Batch Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer Belt Failure 04 04 05 16 29 33 Alarm s Ackd 1 1 2 1 04 04 05 16 28 05 Ack all alarms Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer Belt Failure 04 04 05 16 27 13 Alarm s ont 1 04 04 05 16 27 13 Alarm s on2 1 04 04 05 14 06 22 Config Revision 682759 Security Revision 746261 v A V gt lt 1 Figure 3 1 49 Message log page showing message type picklist User Guide HAO28910 Page 24 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont MESSAGE LOG Cont MESSAGE TYPE FILTER All Messages All messages are displayed System Only System messages and instrument alarms are listed Alarms Only alarm on off and acknowledgement messages appear Power Up Displays power up messages only including Config Revision and Security revision are included See About section 4 6 11 for more details General Displays e mails messages sent via Modbus operator notes custom messages etc if they do not have to be signed Auditor option 21CFR11 only see section 4 4 for more details If the notes etc are signed they appear in the S
325. ater messages Later messages calls the previously displayed 100 messages As can be seen from figure 3 1 4g the list of messages can be filtered both by type and by time For example setting the message type to Alarm and the period filter to Last Day excludes all messages except alarm messages which have occurred within the previous 24 hours For clarity the figure shows both filters open In fact only one can be open at a time j Touch Alarm area f 7 e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Batch Summary Unlock Flap _____ ____ All Messages y History v System Last Hour 05 04 05 09 06 18 Alarm s on 1 1 Alarms Last Day 05 04 05 09 06 18 Operator s name A P U Last 3D 05 04 05 09 06 18 Customer FishesRu 27 97 P 05 04 05 09 06 18 Batch number 0202 General Last Week 05 04 05 09 06 18 Config Revision 682 patches Last Month 05 04 05 09 06 18 Batch start T 05 04 05 08 50 30 Configuration revisid 9 5 AlHistoy _ 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Name files by Signings alse 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch On start log 3 Audit Trail 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Field 3 Oper field 3 05 04 05 08 50 28 B
326. aths Number 1 Fo1 Y channel number Value 82 655 Mins Current value Reset 4 forrecenabiefunctons Function fValue Select Required maths function Fvalue of Channel 1 V J9 Select Source input Sterilizing Temp 1211 Temperature interval 10 Low cut off 75 Units Mins Descriptor Fo 1 Switching _ Scale Low 0 Mins Scalehigh oo Zone low 0 96 Zone high 100 Scale Type None Y Select None Linear or Log PV Format Numeric Select Numeric Elapsed Time Max Decimal Digits 2 Scientific Time or Date Colour 26 Alarm Number 1 V Select Alarm number Enable Off Y gt Select Off Unlatched Latched orTrigger Job Number 1 j Select Job number Category No Action Select job category Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11a Maths configuration menu typical varies from function to function Maths number Allows the user to select the required maths channel for configuration The maximum number of maths channels is selected in the Virtual channels section of the Configuration Options display described in section 4 3 21 Value This field shows the current value of the selected maths channel If the channel has not yet been configured the value reads Reset Now This button appears only after a resettable function has been select
327. ation configuration 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 75 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont Input FILTER deni For noisy slowly changing signals damping can be used to filter noise so Recorder response that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly None 2 4 8 16 32 3x 64 128 or 256 seconds can be selected Damping Effect of damping on step It is not recommended that damping be used on quickly changing signals change in input signal Figure 4 3 3c Channel filter BREAK RESPONSE For thermocouples and other low level inputs i e input voltages less than 150 mV the recorder can be made to re spond in one of the following ways if a break in the input circuit is detected None trace drifts with the input wiring acting as an aerial High trace placed at full scale Low trace placed at scale zero COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION CJC For input type thermocouple None Internal External or Remote can be selected for cold junction compensation INTERNAL Internal CJC is by means of an RTD connected across pins 11 and 12 of the input board connector EXTERNAL If the cold junction is maintained by the user at a known fixed tempera ture external should be selected An extra numeric entry box appears to Break Response None Y Cold Junction Type External Y External CJ Temp 0 Descriptor Channel 1 all
328. auses the instrument number Network Address Section 4 5 1 to be embed ded Config Revision Embeds the Config File Version number System About section 4 6 11 in the message source This field appears only if the previous field Replace with is selected as Specified Descriptor Specified Value or Specified alarm data The associated picklist s allow a specific point and specific alarm if appropriate to be selected It is thus possible to configure say alarm 1 on channel 2 to produce a message giving the descriptor and or value of say totaliser 1 Notes l n 1to9 2 example below is intended to clarify message entry techniques 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 95 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 8 MESSAGES Cont EXAMPLE To configure Message 2 to read value of Chan two Value channel 2 amp Tot one Value totaliser 1 Before configuring the message In channel configuration Set channel 2 descriptor to Chan two Set Channel 2 alarm job to Category Message Send message s to All Groups First message 2 Message 2 Last Message 2 Message 2 On Active In Totaliser configuration Set Totaliser 1 descriptorto Tot one In Messages configuration 1 Select Message 2 Access the Symbols keyboard section 3 3 1 and enter without spaces amp Access the Numeric keyboard and insert 1 2 3 4 within the braces
329. ay modes as the navigation keys are not visible in this display mode 06 04 05 11 00 06 04 05 10 55 06 04 05 10 50 11 05 33 06 04 05 06 04 05 10 10 1 hr rev 06 04 05 11 05 06 04 05 10 15 06 04 05 10 20 06 04 05 10 25 06 04 05 10 30 06 04 05 10 45 06 04 05 10 35 06 04 05 10 40 Figure 3 4 3c Circular Trend full screen view with faceplates selected off FULL SCREEN FEATURES Faceplates As described above for Normal View features User Guide Page 42 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 CIRCULAR TREND Cont TIMESTAMPS Time and or date are displayed at every major chart division The following rules apply 1 For chart durations of a week or more only the date is displayed 2 For chart durations of less than a week both time and date appear with the following exception In New Chart mode unless the chart bridges midnight the date appears only at top centre of the chart other chart divisions are identified by time only OTHER NOTES 1 Adaptive recording results in two traces per trend as in other trend display modes 2 For successful circular trend display Circular Settings must be enabled for the relevant group section 4 3 2 and Circular Trend must be enabled for the group in Views configuration section 4 3 4 If Circular Trend is enabled but Circular Settings is disabled then althoug
330. b action Only those messages in the enabled categories see Messages to Print below EEEEEEEEEEREEEEOE A GE printed Banner Figure 12 3 1 Test printout MESSAGES TO PRINT This set of enable boxes allows the user to select which if any messages will be printed Enable boxes appear even if the relevant option is not fitted Messages are printed as they arise but reports take precedence For example if a report is to be printed when channel one goes into alarm and Alarms is enabled in the Messages To Print area then the Report is printed before the alarm message Note Messages will be printed only if they are enabled in the relevant part of the recorder s configuration For example Logins messages will be printed only if Record Logins is enabled in the unit s Security configuration section 4 4 and Alarms messages will be printed only if Alarm Message and or Ack Message are enabled in the relevant group s configuration section 4 3 2 UserGuide 028910 322 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 3 2 Reports configuration This allows the user to configure up to 10 reports for printing by the ASCII printer as a result of job action Figure 12 3 2a shows a typical configuration page accessed from the CONFIG button Reports item Report 1 Report 1 v Descriptor Report 1 Numb
331. be displayed in one of a number of formats as described in Faceplate Style in table 7 3 2 above 7 4 7 Channel data For a specified channel allows one of Current value Descriptor Units Span low or Span high to be selected for dis play 7 4 8 Dialogue Action This displays a pushbutton which can have one of three actions assigned to it 1 Call the Login page 2 Call the Batch Status page 3 Call the Operator Note dialogue box For Batch and Operator Note use a Group number can be selected 7 4 9 Navigation Action This displays a pushbutton the purpose of which is to call a different display screen A Group and a screen can both be specified so this button provides a shortcut version of the Goto group and Goto View keys of the root menu User Guide 028910 254 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 10 Operator button This displays a user pushbutton The legend on the pushbutton and the task it is to carry out are defined in the button configuration If the text is too long for the width of the button the text is truncated e g Reset Ave Possible tasks are as follows assuming that the relevant options are fitted Edit the threshold setpoint setting for alarms 1 to 4 for point N Reset Maths channel N Edit Maths constant N Preset Totaliser N Preset Counter N Figure 7 4 10 Start Stop Timer T ypical operator button Initiate Demand Wri
332. be edited only via Security Management software This item appears only if one or more of Security Management Audit trail or 21 CFR11 options is fitted Discard Be 21CFR11 Security Manager Record Logins Enable Audit Trail This item appears only if the Centralised Security Centralised Security lt t Security Management option Login By user List 7 Login By user List v Apply Discard Apply Discard Audit Trail Security Manager Security Manager only Figure 4 4 2a Management menu structure CHANGES NOT RECORDED Changes to configuration made via MODBUS TCP are not recorded It is up to the user to write the identity time date reason for change etc as text messages which when sent via MODBUS TCP become part of the relevant history file User Guide HAO28910 Page 190 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Notes Unless otherwise indicated the following parameters appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted 2 If Centralised Security is enabled none of the other parameters in this menu can be edited at the recorder Changes can be made only using Security Management software Record logins Login Timout with unapplied changes Password Attempts Passwords expire For either Auditor option if this field is enabled then ea
333. before saving to disk or pc The uhq suffix is automatically appended to the new name User Guide HAO28910 Page 212 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 JOBS A number of sources e g channel event totaliser can be set up to trigger one or more jobs The following description includes all possible job categories but which jobs are available on any particular recorder depends on the options fit ted to that recorder Many job categories require the relevant access level permission to be set as described in section 4 4 1 above The type of action continuous or single shot available for selection depends on the type of trigger source Continu ous actions are selected from While active While inactive or While unacknowledged The available single shot ac tions are On becoming active On becoming inactive On acknowledgement 4 7 1 No Action This means that no job action is configured for the trigger source 4 7 2 Drive relay category Allows a specific relay to be set up to change state whilst the trigger source is active inactive or whilst it remains unac knowledged Relays are normally energised i e common c is shorted to normally open no When in alarm the relay is de energised i e common c is shorted to normally closed nc Thus if power is removed from the recorder all relays automatically fail safe to their alarm conditions See section 2 2 1 for details of relay o
334. ber 1 Mathi Value 0 0000 Units Function O2 Correction v Measured O2 Channel 1 Y Measured Gas Channel 2 Y Specified 02 0 ____ Units Units Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11p Oxygen correction configuration menu User Guide HAO28910 Page 124 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont RELATIVE HUMIDITY This determines the percentage relative humidity from wet and dry temperature and atmospheric pressure inputs Standard temperature and pressure at sea level are defined as 1 01325 Bar and 15 C Pressure varies with height as indicated in table 4 3 11c The standard psychrometric constant is 0 000666 6 66 x 10 The equation solved is _ Ay WA wA wA w A w As px AbsP d w RH 2 3 4 5 Ay dA dA Where Geometric height Pressure RH Percentage relative humidity metres Bar 3 6 17204663 x 10 250 1 04365 A 4 28096024 x 10 0 1 01325 1 53342964 x 10 250 0 983576 2 40833685 x 107 200 0 29461 D 9 750 0 926346 3 04249240 pi 1000 0 898762 A 2 65867713 x 10 1500 0 845596 Psychrometric constant 0 000666 2000 0 795014 AbsP Pressure in Bar absolute not gauge Table 4 3 11 c d Dry bulb temperature in degrees Celsius Height versus atmospheric pressure w Wet bulb temperature in degrees Celsius Maths N
335. c Y gt Select Numeric or Scientific Max Decimal Digits 4 _ Colour B Alarm Number 17 Select Alarm number Select Off nlatched Enable Off gt DE Job Number 1 W Select Job number Trigger Category No Action J Select Job category Apply Discard Figure 4 3 12 Totaliser configuration menu The totaliser equation works in seconds If the totalised channel units are other than second a period scaler other than the default 1 must be entered For example if the input channel is in litres per hour then the period scaler would have to be the number of seconds in an hour 3600 If for example the input channel is in litres per hour the totalised value will be in litres unless the unit scaler is set to a value other than 1 If itis more convenient the totalised value can be in thousands of litres by setting the unit scaler to 1000 Setting the unit scaler negative causes the totaliser to decrement rather than increment The zero and full scale values for the totaliser as traced on the screen If A B switching is enabled a second set of scale low and scale high values can be entered values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration section 4 3 3
336. can be triggered by any event either internal or as a result of external events wired to an event input board If this option is fitted Event input board appears as a event source and the user must then specify a board number and associated input number as required Event Number 1 Eventi Y Source 1 Event Input Board Board 17 Select Event Input board Input 57 gt Select Input on associated board Source 1 Sense Source 1 Y Discard Figure 10 1 Event input selection 10 2 SIGNAL WIRING See figure 2 2 1d 10 3 SPECIFICATION See Annex A User Guide 028910 316 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY 11 1 INTRODUCTION WARNING Transmitter power supplies must not be used with dc supply voltages Notes 1 Transmitter power supplies are not suitable for use with dc or low voltage ac supplies 2 transmitter power supply is available only with 100 mm recorders This option consists of a circuit board terminal block and suitable wiring inside a long terminal cover at the rear of a 100mm recorder The board supplies three mutually isolated dc supplies nominal 25 Volts each of which is intended to power a single 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA current loop 11 2 FUSING 11 2 1 Fuse Rating The circuit board is protected by a 20 mm anti surge type T fuse the value of which depends on th
337. cause the instrument has no way of determining what the value of the parameter was before the write oc curred The messages are of the form 23 08 05 10 14 30 Auto Mode wrote 19 37 23 08 05 10 14 29 Demand write Auto Mode Signed Engineer No Auth Reqd Note where Auto Mode is the descriptor associated with the demand write and 19 37 is the value written User Guide HAO28910 Page 188 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD When this checkbox is enabled for a user it means that that user will have to change password at his her next login At next log in a pop up dialogue box requests that a new password be entered If a new password is not entered login is denied Entering the new password clears the checkbox so this is a one shot operation until the checkbox is enabled again by a user with Engineer level access New Password Retype Password Apply Logout ENTER BATCH DATA If Batch Control is enabled then this field is automatically enabled and is greyed out so that it cannot be edited If Batch Control is not enabled then enabling this item allows the user to enter batch data but not to start stop or create new batches ALLOW WEB SERVER Any user with this permission and Connect from remote permission will be able to view the recorder from a remote PC using the Remote use
338. centre punched at suitable positions to locate the tips of the case clamps Otherwise particularly on smooth surfaces the clamps can wander as they are tightened leading to inefficient clamping and possible damage to the recorder mounting slots The unit is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel With the weight of the recorder supported a panel clamp is inserted into each of the mounting slots one each on the left and right hand sides The jacking screws are then tightened sufficiently to clamp the recorder into position EXCESS FORCE SHOULD NOT BE USED IN TIGHTENING THESE SCREWS User Guide HAO28910 Page 2 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 INSTALLATION Cont Standard terminal cover 246 5 mm Long terminal cover 288 closed 415mm open 24 75 144 mm x a 211 5 mm lt 1 i 1 Safety Earth udi ES I 3 n 5 Side elevation Ms 3 g ES ES a 5 1 ae ieee ri 2 gt E Access Flap 1 WU m _____ BAM 1 5 Panel thickness 3 to 25 mm Optimum thickness depends on panel material IXI gt Panel cutout 138mm x 138mm 1 0 darid E lew on undersi 5 44 x 5 44 inches 0 04 0 00 B Minimum
339. cept where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 04 9 1257 4 1258 4 1259 04EC
340. cess e tee teer et 235 7 1 2 Importing Exporting 0 000200 2 0000 eee 235 IMPORTING SCREENS docs nese Fee tr ee e ede dee 236 EXPORTING SCREENS ee risotto tcl tract etr oes SA eee ed 236 7 2 DISPLAY CREATION rtr e Ree EUER C S 236 5221 Belore starling ui esee err s d bens essit m ten e etna 236 7 2 2 Screen components god eia eee a ee a re e 237 7 2 3 The properties page ire tetendit i e eee na due 238 KEY DESCRIPTIONS UPPER KEYS rete tlt t EC 238 KEY DESCRIPTIONS LOWER KEYS 239 OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS ote ratto barre ie is Po EE UHR BA 240 7 2 4 Screen creation example 2 4 10 2222 040000 0000000 241 PROCEDURE hg petere rores e bed 241 7 3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS wat nt ee ue tte tede 245 73 1 te pat e er Dei e 245 7 3 2 Advanced parameters 2 22222 000000000000 247 Cont HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page ix 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 7 4 COMPONENT 2 253 7 4 1 Group Vertical Horizontal eee 253 7 4 2 Group vertical bargrap
341. cess section 4 4 for the current login User Guide 28910 52 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 1 1 LOCAL ARCHIVE Cont BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE This causes the recorder to archive all history files created since the last manual or automatic section 4 3 5 archive ARCHIVE ALL This causes the recorder to archive all its history files If the memory device becomes full before archiving is complete archiving pauses and a pop up request appears asking for a replacement If this request is not responded to within 10 minutes of its appearance archiving is aborted Unattended archiving can be paused by the user e g to change media without losing data by operating the Suspend Archiving Resume Archiving button Any archiving in progress is allowed to complete before the Suspend Archiv ing request takes effect Transfer activity is indicated in the Archive transfer window Below the selection buttons are a number of status windows relating to the selected memory device Media Full is an estimate based on the current configuration of when the memory device will become full The meanings of the Media Size and Free Space values are self evident If automatic archiving is active section 4 3 5 then automatic and manual archives will operate on a first come first served basis Some files will be saved twice in such a circumstance the later archive s files overwritin
342. ch Calibration System Summary Diag Summary Quit Figure B1 1b Top level diagnostic display 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 351 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 2 SPECIAL MODES For factory use only selecting Special Modes allows the enabling and disabling of the Sales Demo mode of operation 5 S symbol is displayed at the top of the screen whilst the recorder is in sales demo mode B1 3 DISPLAY TEST Selecting this option allows the user to check the display by flooding the screen with single colours Repeatedly touching the screen scrolls through the following colour sequence Black White Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow A further operation of the touch screen returns the main diagnostic screen B1 4 TOUCH CALIBRATION Touching this key calls a selection screen as shown below Touch Screen Calibrate Touch Screen Verify Main Menu Figure B1 4 Touch screen selections User Guide HAO28910 Page 352 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 4 1 Touch screen calibrate This key initiates the display calibration offset correction procedure This procedure ensures that the display screen image is positioned correctly compared with the touch screen so that what you touch is what you get The procedure is necessary only rarely if at all and is included here only for the sake of completeness
343. ch is the same width of the text string If width and height are defined then the text will fill the defined width and any remaining text is truncated The text appears in the foreground colour default black over a field of background colour default grey Advanced properties allow the text to be set to range left range right or be centred at the top bottom or centre of the field and for the foreground and background colours to be swapped 7 4 14 Round rectangle Similar to a rectangle described in section 7 4 15 but offers the user the opportunity to draw rectangles with curved corners The horizontal and vertical curve angles are specified separately and the aspect ratio of the screen should be taken into account when working in percentage units Note The rounded rectangle will draw incorrectly if either of the arc height width settings are greater than half the rectangle height width settings X Position 1 2 Arc idis Y Position Height lt Width Figure 7 4 14 Round rectangle definitions S 1 2 Arc height 7 4 15 Rectangle This draws a rectangle on the display page If the height and width of the rectangle are defined in the default percent age units then entering equal values for height and width will result in a rectangle with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen not a square as might be expected Because the screen height is approximately 2 3 the width the rectangle heigh
344. ch time a new login occurs a message appears giving the date time and login name E G 23 08 05 15 32 20 Login by Frederick Bloggs Logouts are recorded in a similar way e g 23 08 05 15 49 43 Logout by Frederick Bloggs If the login or logout is via a Bridge session section 6 the IP address of that viewer appears in the login logout message e g 23 08 05 15 58 03 Login by 149 121 130 126 Engineer When set to zero the login remains valid until changed For any other value the user is logged out after the number of minutes entered here has elapsed since the last time the screen was touched This field does not appear if the Login Timeout has been set to zero For non zero time out values this allows the user to choose whether a unapplied changes lost when the Login Timeout period has elapsed or b thelogin timeout is ignored if there are any unapplied configuration changes This allows the user to limit to three the number of attempt that can be made to enter a pass word choices are 3 times and unlimited When set to 3 times the user login is disabled after three incorrect attempts to enter the password have been made A System Message appears on the screen and is also sent to the chart 23 08 05 13 20 42 User Frederick Bloggs login disabled invalid password In order to re enable the login a user with Engineer access level must deselect Login Disa bled in the Access menu described in section
345. choices Examples comments 2 On the hour 2 2 5 4 hours rev Start at 12 5 00 to 23 This chart will start at 1200 hrs and re start at 2 00 00 hrs 1600 2000 2400 0400 0800 hrs etc 2 2 2 Day of week at 2 days rev Start Monday 4 00 00 00 Chart starts Mon 00 00 00 and restarts Weds Fri etc 4 D f k At each power on the system resets to the first week 7 ay of week at oF the period with the most recent Start at day of the 0 00 00 00 week at the top of the chart Table 4 3 2 Circular chart speed details 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 67 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont GRID TYPE Grid type allows the chart grid type to be defined for the group being configured This is not necessarily related to channel scale section 4 3 3 unless From point is selected when the grid matches the scale of the selected point NONE No chart grid is traced LINEAR The chart grid is linear with the major and minor divisions defined by the fields Grid Divisions Major and Minor which appear if is selected as grid type Figure 4 3 2c below defines major and minor divisions LOG The chart grid is logarithmic with the number of decades being selected in the Grid Decades field which appears if Log is selected as Grid Type Figure 4 3 2c gives an example Note For the small frame recorder the minor divisions within each decade are shown only for g
346. click on Set Trend Refresh Seconds Figure C1 2 2a Trend mode selection HORIZONTAL TREND Figure C1 2 2b shows a horizontal trend display for an imaginary group Furnace Temps 1 with two channels Stack 1 and Stack2North Time and date of most recent sample update EUROTHERM Return to mode selection page Trends Message Logs History About 5 1 5 2 5 Select required group b uU 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121 ing os coquired uber Descriptor of selected group Furnace Temps Span High Earliest sample y Span Low Descriptor Span Low Process Value Stack 1 0 0000 61 6667 Stack2North 0 0000 41 1667 C 100 0000 _____ Select horizontal scale here Confirm horizontal scale here JL 6 Show me the last minutes of data Pset Figure C1 2 2b Horizontal trend example As shown in the figure the group process values appear as though being traced on a chart which is rolling from right to left i e the oldest sample is at the left edge of the chart and the latest sample is at the right edge of the chart The point Descriptors Span high and Span low values and process values at the time and date at the top left of the screen appear in a table below the chart The amount of time across the width of the chart the horizontal scale can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a
347. corder model the right hand part of the message is invisible to the user The message appears in full in the message log sec tion 3 1 4 and when Review Software is used Display destination messages are always fully visible MESSAGE ENTRY The message configuration page is shown below in figure 4 3 8 The page is accessed from the Root menu Operator Config menu Message Number 1 The value of Y k Message The value of 1 2 amp 3 4 5 Replace 1 with Source Descriptor w Replace 2 with Source Value V Select embedding source Replace 3 with Specified Descriptor w 2 P Select point whose 3 source Totaliser 1 Replace 4 with Specified Value descriptor value etc is to be inserted 4 source Totaliser 1 Replace 5 with Config Revision 2enlace 6 with Blank Apply Discard Figure 4 3 8 Message entry configuration page 4 4 4 4 4 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Message Number Select the required message from the picklist Message Enter the message by using the pop up keyboards section 3 3 1 Replace with picklist allowing the user to select data to be embedded in the message Source Descriptor The descriptor of the source which triggers the job message Source Value The instantaneous value of the source at trigger time Source Alarm Data Details see table 4 3 8 of the source alarm at mess
348. corder memory Alarms are still scanned for and any associated action taken The trend history display is similar to the real time trend display with the addition of a slider control and up and down keys for selecting that part of trend history which is to be displayed The controls are used as follows 1 Touching the up down key causes the trace history to move an incremental amount 2 Holding the up down key continuously causes continuous movement 3 Touching the bar above or below the slider causes a page height shift The Page up and Page down keys can also be used to provide this function 4 Touching and dragging the slider whilst observing the time date display allows the user to select the section of history exactly On first entry to trend history mode the channel value and the time and date shown in the faceplate are those at the top edge of the chart Touching the screen causes a cursor to appear at point of screen contact This cursor can be touched and dragged up and down the screen to provide a reference point on the current trace The displayed value date and time refer to the cursor intersection with the current channel To return to real time trending the Option key is operated followed by Exit History When back in real time trending the Horizontal Trend display can be called using the down arrow key Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes section 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Menu Goto View key
349. cording to component Produces a colour bar with a scale but no digital value or alarm indication Produces a colour bar with scale with descriptor digital value and alarm indication above Produces a colour bar with a scale Produces a colour bar with a scale Produces a colour bar with scale with descriptor digital value and alarm indication above Best Fit Font Enabled Disabled For Channel numeric only Applies only if Custom selected as Faceplate style If enabled the display fonts for descriptor value and units are selected by the instrument to suit the screen scale The fonts will thus vary in size according to the size of the Channel Numeric display Overridden by any settings for Value Font Descriptor Font or Units Font other than Default Channel cycle time 10 For group trend displays allows a time period in seconds to be entered for channel scroll rate 0 no scroll Colour Alarms None Used only when Colour style Channel alarms A semicolon separated list of Colour channel alarms used to change the colour of the compo nent being configured according to alarm status Colours are defined in Colour Backgrounds and Colour Foregrounds described below Colour Backgrounds None Used only if Colour style Channel Alarms or Channel thresholds A semicolon separated list of background colours for the component being configured The number of colours ente
350. cted group s descriptor Messages 19 04 06 11 21 26 CO2 OK 19 04 06 11 21 26 SO2 OK 19 04 06 11 21 26 CO OK 19 04 06 11 21 26 Alarm s off1 1 19 04 06 11 21 26 Alarm s off2 1 19 04 06 11 11 13 CO2 over limit 19 04 06 11 11 13 SO2 over limit 19 04 06 11 11 13 CO over limit 19 04 06 11 11 13 Alarm s onl 1 19 04 06 11 11 13 Alarm s on2 1 Enter history time here Confirm time here Show me the last minutes of data Figure C1 2 3 Message log The required group is selected by clicking on the relevant number at the top of the page The length of time that the list covers can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at bottom left of the page and confirming by clicking on the Set button at bottom right or using the Enter key on the pc If there are more mes sages than can be accommodated in the window height a scroll bar appear at the left edge of the window to allow hid den messages to be revealed 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 383 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C1 2 4 History This produces a list of all the uhh files held in the instrument archive The files can be saved to a user specified loca tion for use in Review or Quickchart applications Figure C1 2 4 shows part of a typical page Instrument MERGE AQ RE History SEXES Click here to select all files for sav Download Data Files ing to a us
351. ction Page 12 5 2 Channel configuration t Pea e e M ans 326 CHANNEL Mr 326 enti cL 326 einst 326 Mec 326 12 5 3 Event o toris sod e ne bte basia oto tci 327 EVENT NUMBER IRE Tei serie e as fec sive 327 12 5 4 Report Configuration essen 327 12 5 5 Serial Communications Configuration 20 328 12 6 15 600 5 SETTIINGIS i eerta eer tete eee ees 329 13 PORTABLE CASE 65 330 3 1 end 331 13 1 Introduction rn e 331 13 12 Wiring esee er ed donne o eor do 331 SUPPE VOLIAGE mu Met Coney a AT Eds 331 SIGNAL WIRING eonia P 331 INTERNAL WIRING rar aa erre ee ier eae E 331 13 2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY TRS 333 13 2 1 Internal E tore e aM 333 13 3 2010 QUARTERLY TEST 335 zi des et 335 13 3 2 Wiring repeti oe eeepc tte epatis tope Pere be uet ev
352. d contain ing date time source and status details of the upgrade 4 Upgrade appears in the System menu only for access levels which have Perform Upgrades enabled in Security Access configuration section 4 4 1 5 Signing Authorizing apply to upgrades if the relevant boxes are ticked in Security Management configu ration See Management section 4 4 2 for further details User Guide HAO28910 Page 202 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 4 Input adjust Notes 1 Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of Digital Test comms 2 Input adjustments can be carried out only by users with Adjust I O permission see section 4 4 1 3 instrument must be powered for a sufficient time e g 30 mins for it to reach thermal equilibrium before an input adjust is performed This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc The technique used is to select those channels to which adjust is to be applied then for each channel to a apply a known low level signal at or close to the low input range value to the relevant input When the recorder reading is steady press Apply b apply a known high level signal at or close to the high input range value to the relevant input When the re corder reading is steady press Apply Figure 4 6 4a shows the initial display which appears when Input adjust is first selected f
353. d into two and so on See figure 4 3 3b1 for an example showing five minor divisions LOG For some input type selections this appears only if Scaled is ticked Channels with Scale Type Log appear with logarithmic scales These scales have major divisions at each decade boundary and space permitting minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9 Examples are shown in figure 4 3 3b1 Because of the nature of logarithms neither negative values nor the value 0 can be used as scale zero Linear inputs are traced as exponental curves figure 4 3 3b2 LOG LINEAR For some input type selections this appears only if Scaled is ticked Channels with Scale Type Log Linear appear with logarithmic scales These scales have major divisions at each decade boundary and space permitting minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9 Examples are shown in figure 4 3 3b1 Because of the nature of logarithms neither negative values nor the value 0 can be used as scale zero Linear inputs are traced as straight lines figure 4 3 3b2 User Guide 28910 74 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont Scale Linear Major divisions 10 Minor divisions 1 Standard for 180mm recorders 388 33V 0 00 1000 00 Scale Linear Major divisions 10 Minor divisions 5 Intermediate scale values displayed only if room permits
354. d will then be joined by straight lines The first and last points are automatically joined by the recorder The shape drawn in the specified foreground colour with the specified line width can be filled with the specified background colour Note When working in percentage units it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only 2 3 the size of horizontal percentage units this affecting the appearance of the drawn item Example To draw a left pointing solid arrow positioned with its point at the centre of the screen Access the component page as described in section 7 2 3 select polygon closed area and press Ok In the properties page carry out the following configuration units 96 X position 50 Y position 50 Background colour 22 Foreground colour 30 Draw edge Yes Fill area Yes X points 0 10 10 30 30 10 10 Y points 0 15 5 5 5 5 15 Press Apply then Close to produce a dark green arrow with pale green outline as depicted in figure 7 4 17 below X20 y Point 2 X210 y 15 Point 3 X 10 5 Point 4 X230 5 Point 1 0 Point 5 Wes 5 Point 7 X 10 y 15 Figure 7 4 17 Polygon example User Guide Page 258 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 18 Oval Similar to an arc section 7 4 20 with an arc angle of 360 degrees but arcs cannot be filled If the height and width of t
355. d only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 01 447 01 0 448 01 449 01C2 450 01C3 451 01C4 452 01C5 453 01C6 454 01C9 457 01 459 01 463 01103 467 0107 471 01DB 475 01 5 485 O1EF 495 01 0 496 O1FI 497 022D 557 022 558 022F 559 0230 560 023A 570 023B 571 023C 572 023D 573 0247 583 0248 584 0249 585 024A 586 0254 596 0255 597 0256 598 0257 599 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 275 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 4 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch4 Span high Ch4 Span low Ch4 Zone high Ch4 Zone low Ch4 PV type Ch4 Decimal places Ch4 Colour Ch4 Units Spare Ch4 Open string Spare Ch4 Close string Spare Ch4 Descriptor Spare Ch4 No of alarms Ch4 PV format Spare Ch4 Alarm 1 enable Ch4 Alarm 1 type Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch4 Alarm 2 enable Ch4 Alarm 2 type
356. d to write the change to the recorder data base Figure 4 4 4 depicts the display page The User Full Name appears in this page User Steven Eric Andrew BassY Remove Apply Discard Figure 4 4 4 Remove User display page 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 195 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 NETWORK KEY Note This manual does not describe network setup in detail as each network is different In most cases the help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required for example in the allocation of valid ad dresses and passwords Touching the Network key calls a selection box to the display allowing Address Name to be selected for configu ration 4 5 1 Address Figure 4 5 1 shows the address menu fields Archive Save Restore Config Security System 240 Instrument number MAC address 08 00 48 80 00 0 See connie ata f BootP j IP address lookup Get from BootP Server Get hom DHCP Server BootP timeout 28 5 Appears only for Get from BootP Server IP address 192 168 111 222 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 SNTP server enable SNTP client enable SNTP server 149 121 128 179 Fig 4 5 2 EuroPRP server enable Apply Discard
357. dbus TCP comms option the following table gives hex addresses for maths channel 1 Generally Maths channel N parameter address maths channel 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation see section 8 Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for MATHS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA this software version Span Zone Colour CHANNEL 1 Parameter Name Description etc are therefore all setting A Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Chl Span high Chl Span low Chl Zone high Chl Zone low Chl PV type Chl Decimal places Chl Colour Chl Units Spare Chl Open string Spare Chl Close string Spare Chl Descriptor Spare Chl No of alarms Chl PV format Spare Chl Alarm 1 enable Chl Alarm 1 type Chl Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Chl Alarm 2 enable Chl Alarm 2 type Chl Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Chl Alarm 3 enable Chl Alarm 3 type Chl Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Chl Alarm 4 enable Chl Alarm 4 type Chl Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open
358. ddress Unknown error An unknown internal error has occurred Table 4 6 7 Ping Status HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 205 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 8 Copy This facility allows the user to copy a point or group configuration from one point group etc to one or more others The user may choose whether or not to include alarm and if applicable job data when copying point configurations Descriptors and colour selections are not copied Figure 4 6 8 shows a typical configuration page for copying the configuration of channel 1 Furnace 1 to chan nels 2 to 5 inclusive Source Type Channel v Copy From 1 Furnace Temp 1 Copy To 2 Channel2 5 Channel 5 Include alarm data Include job data Figure 4 6 8 Copy configuration page typical When Copy Now is operated a confirmatory dialogue box opens to allow the user to check the source and destination entries From 1 Furnace Temp 1 To 2 Channel 2 5 Channel 5 Cancel CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Picklist allows selection of Group Channel Event Message Maths Channel Totaliser Coun ter Timer Output or Demand Write as the type of source to be copied Copy From Allows the user to select a specific point group etc to be copied Allows the first destination point to be selected for
359. ded so operate the Suspend Archiving key before removing the memory device This ensures that no attempt will be made by the recorder to write to the device until Resume Archiving is operated b If the Cancel key is not operated the warning message remains on the screen then when the archive is com plete archiving is automatically suspended and the flap unlocks again for five seconds allowing the memory device to be removed The message on the screen changes to to remove archive media figure 2 4 1b although for demand archives this is masked by the Demand archive finished message Will advise when OK to remove Cancel Figure 2 4 1c Do Not Remove Archive Media message 4 Archiving automatically resumes a 15 seconds max after a memory device is inserted b after 10 minutes if no new memory device is inserted i e the flap was opened for a reason other than to re place the memory device Note A System message is generated each time the flap is unlocked 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 13 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY The operator interface consists of a touch sensitive screen showing either process variable values in one of a number of formats or showing configuration or operational details for use in setting up the recorder This section 3 describes the process variable displays
360. des greater than 127 such as 6 a etc Section B6 Annex B shows codes 0 to 127 LOGIN DISABLED For all levels except Logged Out This allows any one or more of the access levels to be removed from the Access when picklist Note This feature should be used with discretion or the situation might arise in which the recorder cannot be logged onto either at a particular access level or at all It is recommended that at least one user with Engineer level access is retained with login enabled or it may become necessary to return the recorder to the manufac turer or to arrange for a service visit Auditor option notes 1 Ifthe Auditor 21 11 option is fitted and the number of Password Retries is exceeded then the relevant login is disabled A user with Engineer level access can re enable the login 2 If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted and the Password Expire time has been exceeded all logins are disabled In order to reconfigure the recorder it is necessary to use the Service password please contact the recorder supplier or the nearest service centre for advice EDIT OWN PASSWORD Allows each user with this permission enabled to edit his her password CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS Allows each user with this permission enabled to edit alarm parameters under Configuration Channel User Guide HAO28910 Page 186 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS
361. dgement for one shot jobs e g increment counter See also figure 4 3 3g and associated text EVENT EXAMPLE An event is to be active whenever Channel 1 Alarm 1 is active whilst Channel 3 alarm 2 is not active Source 1 Point alarm On Channel 1 Alarm 1 Source 2 Point alarm On Channel 3 Alarm 2 Source 1 Sense Source 1 Operator And Source 2 Sense Not Source 2 It is possible to achieve the same result by inverting both Source senses and using the Nor operator User Guide 28910 92 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 7 Event Buttons This configuration item appears only if the Screen Builder Option is fitted section 7 The Event Button configuration menu allows a number of Push Buttons to be set up for use as event sources Buttons be defined as Unlatched push on release off or Latched push once on push again off etc Note Unlatched button action occurs when the button is released Unlatched types have a single text string associated with them Latched types have two text strings one for the On latched state the other for the Off state Figure 4 3 7 shows the configuration menu Event buttons are independent of the Security Management option described in section 4 4 2 This allows individual buttons to be a entirely open to the user b to require signing or c to require both signing and authorization as
362. drew 05 04 05 09 06 18 Customer FishesRus 05 04 05 09 06 18 Batch number 020205A12 05 04 05 09 06 18 Config Revision 682759 Securif Option Menu 05 04 05 09 06 18 Batch start Engineer 05 04 05 08 50 30 Configuration revision 682 759 Batch 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Name files by batch true 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch On start log 3 was 1 Note 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Field 3 Operator s name 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Field 2 Customer was B Enter History 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Field 1 Batch number w 05 04 05 08 50 28 Batch Batch fields 3 was 1 Full Details 05 04 05 08 50 50 Config Signed Engineer Author oatch fields 04 04 05 16 42 11 Alarm s off 2 1 Benen 04 04 05 16 32 50 Alarm s off 1 1 04 04 05 16 31 05 Batch stop Engineer 04 04 05 16 31 05 Stop Batch Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer Belt Failure 04 04 05 16 29 33 Alarm s f 04 04 05 16 28 05 Ack all ala To call Option Menu touch message highlights yellow or Option key 04 04 05 16 27 13 Alarm s 6 04 04 05 14 06 22 Config Revision 682759 Security Revision 746261 SN REUS T Figure 3 1 4h Message Log options menu See section 4 3 10 See section 3 5 history Operating the Enter History key causes the recorder to display that page of h
363. ds did not match appears when the APPLY key is operated and password entry must be repeated If the password does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management if fitted section 4 4 2 a warning message Invalid Password appears when the Apply key is operated and password entry must be repeated CONNECT FROM REMOTE Enabling this field causes two further entry boxes Remote user name and Remote password to appear These items are used in establishing connection between a host computer and the recorder To make use of the Web server facility Annex C Allow web server below must also be enabled REMOTE USER NAME REMOTE PASSWORD These two entry boxes allow user name and password to be entered for use by the remote host operator The remote user will be able to access the recorder configuration according to the other access permissions enabled in this page The password must be entered twice to ensure integrity To allow unrestricted view only to the host Logged out permission level should be selected and then a user name of anonymous entered and the password field left blank Notes 1 Remote login will be refused if the user account is disabled for any reason 2 For maximum security it is recommended that the remote password and the local password are non iden tical 3 Attempts to establish a Bridge connection will fail if the relevant Remote User Name contains characters with ASCII co
364. dual user names and default security levels except Service Full access to all recorder functions and to areas of recorder memory for diagnostic purposes For use only by Service Engineers Note For units with the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled the default Engineer and Operator passwords are both 100 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 31 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 1 Access to Configuration amp As shown figure 3 3 1a once the recorder has initialised touch the current access level key Touch the Logged out field and then touch Engineer from the resulting picklist Touch the blank Password area to call the keyboard display see figure 3 3 1b Touch lt Numeric gt lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt OK gt to enter the password 100 The screen reverts to the Home page Operation of the Root key followed by a touch on the Operator key calls the top level page allowing access to the Archive Save Restore Config Security Network and System areas described in section 4 below CD Touch Current access level key Channel 1 0 0000 Logged out 11 52 59 05 04 05 0 0237V 0 2000 0 4000 0 6000 0 8000 1 0000 11 52 04 05 04 05 Select the required access level and enter the password if required User Logged out Touch logged out area then touch access level required 11 49 24 05 04 05 Touch the
365. dware error Channel 8 status 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Channel 8 alarms Alarm information F8E2 63714 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 307 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 9 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Channel 9 value Channel 9 status Current process value PV Channel status See note 1 Read only F8E3 63715 F8E5 63717
366. e Units Units Units Preset 0 Units Preset now Descriptor Counter 1 Switching Scale Low 0 Units Scale High 1 Units Zone Low 0 Zone High 100 Scale Type None Y P Select None or Linear Colour Alarm Number 1 9 Select Alarm number Select Off Unlatched Enable Off Latched Job Number 1 9 Select Job number Trigger Category No Action Y JM Select Job category Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 13 Typical Counter configuration menu CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Counter number Allows any of the available counters to be selected for configuration Enable Allows the user to start stop counting by enabling disabling the counter Value Shows the current dynamic value of the counter Units Allows a text string of up to 5 characters to be entered as a units description Preset Allows a counter value to be entered for manual or job action preset Scale low high The values to appear at the scale end points If A B switching is enabled a second set of scale low and scale high values be entered values are used during normal operation values are switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 The remaining configuration items are as described for input channels in section 4 3 3 except that Log Linear scales are not available Note An absolute high alarm for example with a
367. e box a slider control appears which can be used to access previous messages up to a total of 60 messages Further messages cause the oldest messages to be discarded to keep the total to 60 Note At power up only those messages which occurred within the time width of the page are displayed Channel 1 2 20 Batch Number 050406 3 11 41 Config Revision 218 Security 11 11 34 Batch start Engineer 06 04 05 11 09 34 Alarm s on 1 1 06 04 05 11 09 26 Alarm s off 1 2 06 04 05 11 07 41 Alarm s on 1 2 06 04 05 11 07 34 Alarm s off 1 1 06 04 05 11 05 34 Alarm s on 06 04 05 11 05 26 Alarm s off 06 04 05 11 03 41 Alarm s on of 06 04 05 11 03 34 Alarm s off 06 04 05 11 01 34 Alarm s on 06 04 05 11 01 26 Alarm s off 06 04 05 10 59 41 Alarm s on 06 04 05 10 59 34 Alarm s off 1 06 04 05 10 57 34 Batch Number 050406 2 06 04 05 10 55 41 Config Revision 218 Security Revision 3 06 04 05 10 55 34 Batch start Engineer Ok 14 13 40 06 04 05 06 04 05 12 02 20 Alarm s off 2 1 Figure 3 4 2b Horizontal Trend mode message dialogue box The circular trend mode can be called by using the down arrow key Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes section 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Me
368. e touch panel Screen specification Small frame Large frame 1 4 VGA Resolution 320 x 240 pixels XGA Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Update information Input relay output sample rate Display update Archive sample value Trended displayed value 8 Hz 8 Hz Latest value at archive time Latest value at display update time 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 343 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION RECORDER Cont Ethernet Communications Type Protocols Cable Type Maximum length Termination RJ45 LED indicators Green Yellow Internal green LED 10 100 base T IEEE802 3 TCP IP FTP DHCP BootP SNTP Modbus SMTP ICMP CATS 100 metres RJA5 Indicates a 100MB link Indicates Ethernet activity Indicates a 1OMB link Serial communications option Number of ports Protocol Transmission standards Isolation dc to 65Hz BS 61010 Terminals to ground Two at rear of instrument ASCII input ASCII printer Modbus master Modbus slave EIA232 and or EIA485 software selectable per port EIA485 be connected as 3 wire or 5 wire as required Installation category Pollution degree 2 50 V RMS or dc basic insulation Transmitter power supply Isolated Small frame recorders only Number of outputs Output voltage Max current Isolation dc to 65Hz BS EN61010 Channel to channel Channel to ground Fuse 2
369. e Low Zone High Max Decimal Digits Colour Units Descriptor Configuration Data Alarm Number Enable 1 Furnt PV1 Y 33 2453 Unadjusted Master Commsy 1 Furn1 Control v Process Value 1 Medium Priorityv Numeric v O 100 Units 0 100 a 0 Units Furn1 PV1 LowPriority v m jaaer Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16k Master Channel 1 setup example 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 165 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER CHANNEL 2 SETUP Master channel 2 setup to read the Channel 1 PV from Furnl record into channel 2 is shown in figure 4 3 161 below Channel Number Value Input Type Slave Digital Parameter Point Type Point Number Process Value PV Format Span Low Span High Zone Low Zone High Max Decimal Digits Colour Units Descriptor Configuration Data Alarm Number En 2 Furni Temp v 658 3654 Unadjusted Master Comms Y 2 FurmniRecord Process Value Y Channel Y 1 Medium Priority Y Numeric v 0 Units 1000 Units 0 100 lA E Units Furn1 Temp 1 Low Priority v 1 Figure 4 3 161 Master Channel 2 setup example User Guide Page 166 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MA
370. e Ne PESE 209 210 4 6 11 211 INSTRUMENT VARIANT e e ec ib ter e P D E T ER Ee eds 211 CONEIS dote oo tee hee das Ee DO Na er RES 211 LAST UPDATED 211 AT VERSION 211 CREATED rir tere eh i rper ende dde 211 SECURITY REVISION 212 SUPPORT FILE 212 LWAMIO IEEE 213 2 77 SING ANCHO Mises re e o Ae ates e e p rei 213 4 7 2 Drive relay category 213 4 7 3 Totaliser Category eerte ettet titt erede roe ode eei nte odorata 213 4 7 4 Message category e D EE gress 214 4 7 5 Maths category 214 4 7 6 Clock category 215 4 7 7 Counter category Ox HERE eda EO 215 4 7 8 Timer category 216 4 7 9 Batch Category iens eruit eseo dte ere euet ipi AN EID 216 4 7 10 Recording category sssssssssseeeeeeneneeee eene eren eene nnn 217 4 7 11 Trend 2 2 9 rennes 218 4 7 12 Output Category ere Ut tette reet 219 4 7 13 Demand Writes category 219 4 7 14 Alarm category 220 4 7 15 Archive category 220 4 7 16 Email category 221 4 7 17 Report category 221 SENDREPORT TO itae
371. e accessible only from User Screen 1 a remote PC which has Bridge software User Screen 2 installed and running User Screen 3 __ Screen 4 User Screen z3 User Screen 24 2 Bridge User Screens Apply Discard Enabled Figure 7 1 1 Views configuration menu 7 1 2 Importing Exporting screens The Save Restore screen figure 7 1 2 includes the categories Import screen and Export screen Archive Config Security Network System Save Restore See section 4 2 for descriptions of other Save Restore functions Import Screen _ gt User Screen User Screen 1 Export Screen File Name screen New Import User Linearisation Import Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver Figure 7 1 2 Save Restore menu Import screen User Guide 028910 235 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 1 2 IMPORTING EXPORTING SCREENS Cont IMPORTING SCREENS Touching the filename area allows a previously created user screen to be selected either from the Flash memory or from disk to be imported The User Screen picklist allows the user to define which User screen is to be replaced by the imported file EXPORTING SCREENS Allows user screens to be exported to Fl
372. e in the entry or by touching the field continuously for two seconds or more and then selecting one of the predefined Batch Entry messages previously entered in the configuration page In the latter case the predefined mesage may be edited in the normal way before being Applied Such editing has no effect on the original message Once the entries are complete operation of the Start button initiates batch recording Operation of the Store button saves the configuration for later initiation by job by counter or via MODBUS TCP The Values entry page is replaced by the batch status page figure 4 3 10c this time showing details of the batch in progress This page allows the batch to be stopped or a new one triggered Note Text may also be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port behind the access flap or Gf the relevant option is fitted one of the USB ports at the rear of the instrument section 2 2 Batch Number Customer Name Operator name Supervisor Batch Entry list Appears if batch entry area is touched continuously for 2 seconds approx List entries are made in Batch Config uration These keys not shown whilst the Batch Entry list displayed 060509 015 FishesRus Marvin FishesRus Marvin Arthur Tricia Jason Manky Clothes Ltd Rat s Nest Hair Co Store Start Close
373. e never copied 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 207 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 9 Job search With multiple job sources it can sometimes be difficult to discover what the trigger for a particular job is particularly if the recorder has been configured by more than one operator The Job Search facility allows the user to define a job type and the recorder then produces a list of relevant triggers Figure 4 6 9 shows a typical search page which will produce a list of all triggers for Preset Totaliser jobs Section All Sections V Job Category Totaliser Job Action Preset Search Now Figure 4 6 9a Job search Section Allows the user to select a point type for the search For example selecting Maths causes the search to be restricted to Maths channels All Sections causes all enabled point types to be included in the search Job Category Allows a job category e g Totaliser to be selected for the search Job Action This depends on the job category For example for Totalisers Preset Disable Preset Group or Disable Group to be selected Section 4 7 gives details of all job types and their associated actions Search Now Operation of this button initiates the search after confirmation SEARCH RESULTS The search results in one of two displays one No Match was found if no jobs are found which match the search crite ria or a list of
374. e note 1 F8D7 63703 2 Read only F8D9 63705 1 Channel 6 value Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Channel 6 status 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uintl6 Read only Read only Read Write Channel 6 alarms Alarm information F8DA 63706 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only UserGuide Page 306 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter Name Description Access
375. e password can be set to blank This allows subsequent access without a password having to be entered not for recorders with either Auditor option fitted Users with Full Security permission can Add and Delete users sections 4 4 3 4 4 4 and assign them individual pass words and access permissions SETTING PERMISSIONS Once logged in at Engineer level operate the Security key and select Access page similar to that shown in figure 4 4 1 appears allowing the permissions to be set for the various access levels and for individual users The list of parameters is the same for all access levels except for Logged out for which the password pa rameters and login disabled items do not appear Note If the Security management option is fitted and Centralised Security is enabled in the Security Management system section 4 4 2 permissions are Read Only i e not editable at the recorder In such a case permissions can be changed only by using the Security Management software Access when New Password Retype Password Connect from remote Remote user name Remote password Retype remote password Login Disabled Edit own Password Change Alarm Setpoints Acknowledge Alarms Edit Maths Constant Reset Maths Preset Totalisers Preset Counters Start Reset Timers Set Clock Adjust I O Archiving Control Save Restore Paste Delete Files Full Configuration Full Security Batch Control Can Sign Can A
376. e supply voltage as shown in table 11 2 1 below Access to the output wiring and to the fuse is achieved by isolating the recorder from mains power and opening the terminal cover after removing its securing screws The process is fully described below Supply voltage Fuse rating Part Number 115V ac 100 mA CH050012 230V ac 63mA CH050630 Table 11 2 1 Transmitter power supply fuse details 11 2 2 Access to the user connections fuse 1 Isolate the recorder from the supply voltage 2 Atthe rear of the recorder remove the terminal cover securing screws figure 11 2 2a taking care to retain them for use in re assembly e Cover securing screws Figure 11 2 2a Retaining screw locations User Guide 028910 317 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 11 2 2 ACCESS TO THE USER CONNECTIONS FUSE Cont 3 Open the cover figure 11 2 2b to reveal the circuit board user connections etc figure 11 2 2c N Swing rear cover down for access Recorder Body Connector clip access 2 N Figure 11 2 2b Opening the rear cover 4 fuse is located as shown in figure 11 2 2c User wiring to the terminal block figures 11 2 3a b can be carried out now or the terminal cover can be removed for convenience as described in steps 5 onwards below Power cord to recorder User terminal block
377. e user can select Rotate New Chart ROTATE In the following description the word segment is used interchangeably with Major chart division The number of Major chart divisions is a function of the selected chart speed as described in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 With Rotate selected the traces start one major chart division anti clockwise from the top of the chart and trace clock wise until they reach the top of the chart 112 o clock At this point the chart complete with time stamps and traces rotates one major chart division anticlockwise and the tracing process continues When the chart is full the oldest segment full of tracing is removed leaving an empty segment to be traced on when the chart rotates Figures 3 4 3b and 3 4 3c below show Circular trending in Rotate mode NEW CHART With New Chart selected tracing starts at top of the chart 12 o clock and continue to trace clockwise round the chart back up to the vertical When the chart is full it is cleared new timestamps are displayed and tracing restarts from the top of the chart The start time of the tracing be set as part Start of group configuration the choices available depending on the time per revolution setting The start time is placed at top centre of the chart and backfilled clockwise round to the current time Figure 3 4 3a below shows New Chart mode Note The use of 12 o clock above is inte
378. eans that the batch number value and the Customer Name value to be cleared A new batch cannot be started without new values first being entered 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 101 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH CONFIGURATION Cont NAME FILES BY BATCH As an aid to identification if Files by Batch is selected the Batch Name as entered by the operator is inserted into the history file name For example if a batch name of 060511 001 is amongst the items archived to disk then this file will appear in the form Group Name 060511 001 YYYYMMDD HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Where YYYYMMDD is the date e g 20060511 11th May 2006 and HH HH is a 16 digit hex code used by the recorder and by review software to identify the file If name files by batch is not selected the Batch name is not in cluded and the file will appear as Group Name Y YY YMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH The HHH HHH code contains the following information V Lowest 3 bytes of the sequential number May skip one if there instrument MAC address is a configuration change History file format Group number version identifier Group 1 00 Group 2 01 etc OPERATOR INITIATION This section describes how the operator initiates a new batch Batches can be initiated from any of the trend bargraph or numeric display modes but the start stop and other messages appear only on the
379. ecified on the serial number label at the rear of the recorder As shown in Figure 13 4 2a below the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the case socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder Minimum recommended conductor size is 16 0 2 0 5mm 20AWG SIGNAL WIRING Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug and inserting the plugs into the relevant socket at the rear of the recorder Figure 13 4 2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel for 12 and 18 channel versions Figure 13 4 2b shows thermocouple wiring details and Figure 13 4 2c shows the wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder for a 12 thermocouple option Ethernet RJA5 Serial comms option Ethernet RJ45 Mains supply Mains supply connection connection Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 one Option board 1 Option board 2 gt lt oe Con10 5 Con4 Figure 13 4 2a Rear panel connector locations typical 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 337 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 4 2 WIRING Cont THERMOCOUPLE WIRING T C type J colours 4 wire T C type K colours T C type T colours BS4937 1993 IEC584 3 1989 Current BS1843 1952
380. ecorder for dc supply only This recorder for either ac or dc supply Risk of electric shock 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 1 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE USER GUIDE 1 INTRODUCTION This document describes the installation operation and configuration of a paperless graphic recorder The recorder comes in two versions which differ in physical size and in the number of I O channels and options available but oth erwise are identical i e the operation and configuration procedures are the same for both The standard recorder comes equipped for FTP transfer and is also fitted with Bridge Remote viewing software UNPACKING THE RECORDER The recorder is despatched in a special pack designed to give adequate protection during transit Should the outer box show signs of damage it should be opened immediately and the recorder examined If there is evidence of damage the instrument should not be operated and the local representative contacted for instructions After the recorder has been removed from its packing the packing should be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed The packing should then be stored against future transport requirements 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Figures 2 1a and 2 1b give installation details for the small and large frame cases respectively Note It is recommended that the rear face of the panel be
381. ect Active Inactive or v Acknowledgement On Active Figure 4 7 17 Report category job menu SEND REPORT TO Allows the user to select Group or an ASCII printer if fitted requires Serial Comms option as the report destina tion If Group is selected as in the figure above a further field appears allowing the user to specify the group to which the report is to be sent Group 3 in the figure above If a printer is selected the report is sent to the printer GROUP This field appears only if Group has been selected as the report destination and allows the destination group to be defined If a group descriptor has been entered Furnace 3 in the figure above then this descriptor appears in the field REPORT This defines which of the reports is to be sent when the job is triggered If a Report descriptor has been entered then this appears in the field Current temps in the figure above 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 221 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 5 FILE 5 1 Cut Copy Figure 5 below gives an overview of the File Menus The area is entered by touching the File key of the root menu and can be used to display the contents of directories stored both in the user area of flash memory and on any bulk stor age device inserted or connected The first display page shows the volume or device names associated with the various areas of memory ava
382. ed Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0 Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 star
383. ed Startas Lite Channel Alarm Sound Police Siren FT i lie START Figure 6 5a Profile uhv file Figure 6 5b Bridge icon approximation User Guide HAO28910 Page 230 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM Cont CHANNEL ALARM SOUND If the host PC is fitted with a sound card enabled bridge can cause sounds to be played on point alarm not system alarms The sound is selected on a connection by connection basis via the profile uhv file see figure6 5a This allows each user to choose a sound including none suited to the local environment The sound runs for as long as any point alarm is active and unacknowledged Bridge software supplies a range of sounds as listed below In addition eight bit mono uuLaw format AU sound files can be imported to install location gt Series6000 startup sounds Once a sound has been imported create or edit the profile UHV file The new file should appear in the list Select it and start The default sounds are Buzzer Car Alarm None Police Siren Siren Fast Siren Slow Something wrong Train bell 99 venatu dec bon 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 231 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 6 OPERATION 6 6 1 Display Modes When the program starts the Home page as set up in Configuration VViews section 4 3 4 is displayed on the computer screen By click dragging on
384. ed Operation of the button sets the maths value to Zero User Guide HAO28910 Page 106 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS CONFIGURATION Cont Function This picklist allows the relevant maths function to be selected In the following description the word channel is used as an umbrella term for input channels maths channels totalisers etc Off Constant Add Subtract Multiply Divide Group average Group minimum Group maximum Allows the function to be disabled Once Apply has been actioned all configuration for this Maths number is lost Allows a maths channel to be set to a constant value Allows any channel or a constant value to be added to any other Allows any channel or a constant value to be subtracted from any other Allows any channel or a constant value to be multiplied by any other Allows any channel or a constant value to be divided by any other Should the value of the divisor pass through zero Maths Channel N error and Maths Channel Failure messages appear The instantaneous value of all the channels in the source group added together and divided by the number of channels in the group For example in a group of four channels whose instanta neous values are 4 8 2 and 6 the group average is 4 8 2 6 4 5 The relevant source group is selected by picklist Should a channel return a non valid value it is excluded from the calcula
385. ed or enabled in the recorder The number and distribution of virtual channels reverts to that configured before Trial mode was invoked 2 When disabling Trial mode all configuration for the trial features is lost Should the user decide to pur chase a trial feature then it is recommended that the trial configuration be saved see section 4 2 so that it may be restored once the purchased trial feature is fitted and enabled keycodes cannot be entered in Trial Mode 3 Trial mode can be enabled only by users with Perform upgrades permission section 4 4 1 VIRTUAL CHANNELS Virtual channels are Maths channels Totalisers and Counters The total number of virtual channels is as specified at time of order The user can select whatever combination of maths channels totalisers and counters is required so long as the total does not exceed the number of virtual channels available If it does a warning is given when the Apply button is operated and the edit is ignored User Guide HAO28910 Page 182 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 OPTIONS Cont SIMULATION OPTION This option consists of a number of additional jobs as described below This option is not enabled in Trial mode TREND FREEZE When this Trend category job section 4 7 11 is initiated the displays are held at their values at the time of initiation When the recorder is unfrozen the displays switch to thei
386. ee etae 316 10 2 SIGNALE WIRIBIG 2 het tice tr ES Pu 316 10 3 SPECIFICATION inii oath eh hti ie Metro te Piet etae eds 316 11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY 917 Ec 317 TIEZ FUSING EE espe rtp RO RD Recte qain Inde 317 TEZA F se Ratihig i Eee UI DT cott e eoe a 317 11 2 2 Access to the user connections fuse 2 9 e eene enne s ses 317 1 253 User Wiking etti ee E RO RR 319 12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION 320 12 1 INTRODUCTIONS ee nt ottenere te Sov ca OARE TaESA 320 12 2 WIRING iini coe reete eee dese ee ee ERU 320 12 2 1 Serial communications ports 320 22222 DG toto eo thom R ER 320 12 3 Contiguration e 321 12 31 i o comte C tat es 321 Mind LIN DM A T ES 321 mE 321 PROTOCOL 15e ee RERUM EE mettre tenta 322 LAUDATE 322 STOP BITS s diri rrt tee ete poete bte pte eene 322 PARITY toto atr
387. ee aa 64 DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS D e 64 SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST dente eite e Le ede dela 64 2 3 2 Oro p contigurdiio sss M Lei aed 65 GROUP NUMBER 66 TREIND UNITS s epe tbe e metet e ente etus 66 DESCRIPTOR UL 66 EN serta EM HORE des 66 A B SWITCHING ettet ee itte eee een 67 TREND SPEED TREND INTERVAL 67 CIRCULAR SETTING S t e Dd E me ett de 67 CIRCULAR SPEED ict ee DEO Ee e EP RE ERE EORR RES RES 67 CIRCULAR CHART FULL 67 START ned tee 67 GRID TYPE 68 RECORDING ENABLE 2 5 2 tree tede e ere e 68 RECORDING SPEED RECORDING INTERVAL 69 TREND HISTORY DURATION Prat ettet de dad 69 Cont ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE 69 HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page iii 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 4 3 2 Group configuration Cont ALARMIMESSAGE tenenda Es essem 69 ACK MESSAGE irt em rese eg 69 POINT TYPEZSELEGTION citer cm ont freto rita eee oerte tate ertt a west 70 4 3 3 Channel Alarm configuration 71 CHANINELINUMBBER reete rene Ee Re ers 72 VALUE Er 72 INPUT TYPE eer tee hee pente 72 LIN TYPE 72 INPUT LOW
388. effects of spurious spikes Figure 4 3 3f Rate of change alarm definitions 028910 User Guide Page 80 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont JOB NUMBER Select the required job number CATEGORY Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm e g Drive relay See section 4 7 for a descrip tion of job categories WHILE ON Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as a while active while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs e g drive relay or b on going active on going inactive or on acknowledgement for one shot jobs e g increment counter Figure 4 3 3g below shows the various actions graphically For While unacknowledged and on acknowledgement settings two cases are shown one where the alarm goes inactive before acknowledgement the other where the alarm is acknowledged whilst the alarm is still active The coloured shaded areas show the duration for which continuous jobs run the down arrows show trigger points for one shot jobs See section 3 1 4 for details on how to acknowledge alarms Active Alarm trigger Inactive While active While inactive Acknowledge B While unacknowledged atchingaiarm While unacknowledged Job goes inactive even if non latching alarm alarm not yet acknowledged Whi
389. egister Hex Dec Length Ch2 span high Upper span value display full scale Ch2 span low Lower span value display 2 Ch2 Zone high Zone upper value of chart width Ch2 Zone low Zone lower value of chart width Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Spare CHANNEL 3 Parameter Description Name Read only D50B 54539 Read only D50D 54541 Read only D50F 54543 Read only D511 54545 Read Write D513 54547 Read Write D515 54549 Read Write D517 54551 Read Write D519 54553 D51B 54555 Access Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Ch3 span high Upper span value display full scale Ch3 span low Lower span value display 2 Ch3 Zone high Zone upper value 46 of chart width Ch3 Zone low Zone lower value of chart width Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Spare Read only D52F 54575 Read only D531 54577 Read only D533 54579 Read only D535 54581 Read Write D537 54583 Read Write D539 54585 Read Write
390. ekly Monthly which is guaran teed not to lose data as a result of either the internal Flash or the local memory device running out of space calculated assuming that the memory device is initially empty When Automatic is selected further non editable menu item appears showing which of the archive frequencies has been selected Note Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes Thus if the archive is set to daily weekly or monthly then during Summer Time the archive will occur an hour late i e at 01 00 hrs instead of midnight User Guide HAO28910 Page 86 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont MEDIA FILE FORMAT FTP FILE FORMAT Allows Binary uhh files CSV csv files or Binary and CSV to be chosen for FTP transfer For further details of CVS archiving see description at the end of this subsection 4 3 5 ON MEDIA FULL For Local setting only Overwrite Oldest data is replaced with latest data when storage medium is full Stop Archiving stops when the storage medium is full Note When in Overwrite mode the recorder will overwrite only those files which it has itself created Thus if a storage medium is inserted which contains history files from another recorder these cannot be overwritten The file names are of the form UUU UUUIIIIIIFFGGSSSSSS where represent the lowest three byt
391. el Timeout 0 5 Preset Hour Preset Minute Disable Warning Dialogs Show Operator Notes List mr NN 2 v Disabled Apply 1 Discard Groups Section 4 3 2 Group Number 1 Group 1 Y Trend Units mm hr Y Descriptor Group 1 Trend Type Adaptive Y Switching Trend Speed 240 mm hr Trend Interval Circular Settings 5 S Circular Speed 1 weeky Circular Chart Full New Chart Y Start At Monday Grid from Recording Enable Recording Speed Recording Interval Trend History Duration Archive to Media Enable Archive via FTP Enable Alarm Message Ack Message Point Type Selection From Point V Channel 3 y 1 200 mm hr 1 S 5 9 Days ial Y 1 3 5 7 9 Enable Disable TurbineTempA TurbineTempB List of all available points input channels maths channels totalisers etc v Y Etc Apply Discard User Guide Page 370 HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont A
392. elays are fitted per card Subsequently should further options be fitted relay board two and Analogue output board 1 in the above example this page shows the difference between the hardware actually fitted and the hardware the recorder software is configured for currently Whenever there is a difference the Autoconfigure key can be pressed to alert the recorder to the fact that extra options have been added or taken away If no changes have occurred since last switch on then the currently fields and the Autoconfigure key do not ap pear 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 181 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 OPTIONS Cont TRIAL MODE Enabling Trial Mode allows the user to enable temporarily the various software options that are available Once the user has made the required choices the Set Trial Options key at the bottom of the screen must be operated followed by an Autoconfigure procedure Initially the trial mode is set to expire 30 days after enabling whether the recorder is powered or not Any change in configuration results in a pop up message stating how much of the 30 days period remains Once Trial mode is disa bled by the user the remaining Trial Time Remaining value is retained until Trial Mode is re enabled Notes 1 Trial mode enables disables all options or features except Simulation and History Maintenance which are not fitt
393. enting the encryption result NOTES None ONCE AREE HN RI ee Ushort Driver encrypt cchar pswd cchar ipAddr Uchar keyl Uchar key2 Ushort dataLen Uchar ibyte Ushort byteResult 0 Uchar encryptedData NULL Uchar eKeys 4 Ulong ipAddress Convert ip address to an unsigned long value so that we can manipulate each of the 4 bytes to be used as our private keys ipAddress inet addr ipAddr Now split the bytes up by copying the IP address into a byte array memcpy eKeys amp ipAddress sizeof Ulong From the 4 bytes of the IP address create two exclusive keys eKeys 0 eKeys 3 key2 eKeys 1 eKeys 2 Calculate the length of the string to be encrypted dataLen strlen pswd Create some memory to store the new encrypted password encryptedData Uchar malloc sizeof Uchar dataLen Copy the unencrypted password into a byte array so we can use the character code as each byte value memcpy encryptedData pswd dataLen Perform EXOR comparison between keys and raw data Perform the operation on each byte using alternate key values starting at byte 1 with key 1 for ibyte 0 ibyte lt dataLen EXOR with the encryptedData ibyte keyl Continued User Guide 028910 264 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Con
394. equired Maths channel On Active V Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 5 Maths job menu layout User Guide HAO28910 Page 214 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 6 Clock category This job causes the System Clock to be Preset to the value entered in Instrument Configuration Preset Hour Preset Minute Section 4 3 1 This job can be used to synchronise a number of recorders as follows a For each recorder set up one input channel as Input Type Digital Closed String Synch for example Enable Trigger Active when Synch Job 1 category Clock Job 1 action Preset Job 1 On Active b For each recorder set the same preset hour and minute in Instrument Configuration c For each recorder provide a simultaneous pulse or contact closure to the digital input previously set up The recorders will all be automatically set to the preset time on receipt of the input An alternative way of synchronising recorders is via an SNTP time server as described in section 4 5 1 Job Number 17 Category Clock Action Preset V On Active Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 6 Clock job menu layout Notes 1 Whenever a time change occurs a green line is drawn across the chart in vertical trend mode 2 Theclock presets to the Preset Hour value set
395. er The Reset Error Count key is used to reset the count to zero Note For instruments fitted with two printers the count relates to the currently selected printer HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 321 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 3 1 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION Cont PROTOCOL Select ASCII Printer BAUD RATE Select Baud Rate setting to match that set at the Printer STOP BITS Selectable as 1 or 2 PARITY Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of None Odd Even For reliable communications with the printer it is recommended that the default parity be used PRINTER TYPE Allows a printer driver to be selected for the printer connected to this port PRINTER NAME Allows a name to be entered for the printer PRINTER STATUS Not Responding Printer is not communicating check wiring OK Printer is connected and working correctly Paper Low The printer paper is getting low The roll should be replaced as soon as possible Paper Out The printer paper roll is exhausted Unknown error Printer is not working correctly perhaps an unknown type of printer has been attached PRINTER TEST Printer Test Operating this button causes a test printout to appear at the printer as XXE shown in figure 12 3 1b PRINT MESSAGES FROM The user can select a group for message printing These messages are printed as they occur and are not dependent on jo
396. er 11 02 05 14 01 08 usen Folder 06 04 05 15 41 30 FileName Filter1b 5502 ee Figure 4 2b Typical volume contents page HA028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 55 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 2 1 Save Touching this item allows the current configuration to be saved in the recorder s memory Files saved in this way are not in a readable format and are used only for archive security purposes or for transfer to another similar recorder SAVE AS This selection box allows a configuration to be saved if required in a format suitable for importing into previous re corder models The default is always the current instrument 4 2 2 Restore Touching this item allows the user to select or type in a previously saved configuration file name which will then be used as the current configuration Touching the Restore key completes the operation Check boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data Security data note 3 Network data and Screen data to be chosen for the restore function Notes 1 Screen data restores faceplate status for vertical trend and vertical bargraph modes and user screen infor mation if the option is fitted 2 If archiving is in progress when a Restore is requested the Restore operation will be delayed until the archive is complete maybe several minutes If required the Cancel Archive key section 4 1 above can be used to speed up the Restore process at the cost of
397. er fails after two attempts to establish communica tions with the primary server as defined in Archive Configuration section 4 3 5 After the second attempt has failed the Secondary server is tried This error is set if the recorder fails after two attempts to establish communica tions with the secondary server as defined in Archive Configuration section 4 3 5 See also FTP Primary Server Failure above There is insufficient memory available for the configuration Can be caused by use of Rolling Average maths functions Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Appears if the User partition is full To clear either user screens must be simplified or files must be deleted from User or both Appears if for example the divisor of a divide function is zero Archive failed A file which has not been archived has been detected Archive is too infrequent The recorder effectively switches to Automatic section 4 3 5 to ensure that data is not lost The recorder is unable to establish connection with the BootP or DHCP server This might be caused by for example cable failure network hardware failure etc Indicates a hardware failure in the output channel circuit see note Note Unlike other in
398. er of Fields 6 v Field 1 Type Date amp Time v Style Normal v Field 2 Type Text Text Style Bold Field 3 Type Process Valuey Point Channel 1 Style Emphasisedy Field 4 Type Batch Field 1 v Style Banner v Field 5 Type 1 Message 7 Style Normal Field 6 Type Line Feed 1 Apply Discard Figure 12 3 2a Reports Configuration REPORT Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration DESCRIPTOR A name for the Report can be entered here NUMBER OF FIELDS Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report FIELD N TYPE N to the number of fields selected in the previous item Date amp Time Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the report Text Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters Process value Allows a specified point s process value including descriptor and units to be included in the report Batch Field 1 Batch field 1 can be included in the report See section 4 3 10 for Batch details Message A message can be selected for inclusion in the report See section 4 3 8 for details of message configuration Line Feed Allows one or more blank lines to be left This can be useful at the end of a report 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 323 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 3 2 REPORTS CONFIGURATION Cont
399. er of MODBUS Data identifier identifier identifier identifier Always 00 bytes fol Recorder function Depends on usually 00 usually 00 00 00 lowing dentifier hex function code Figure 8 5 MODBUS package Notes 1 transaction identifier has no active function the recorder just copies the bytes from the request message to the response message 2 Therecorder identifier has no active function the recorder just copies the byte from the request message to the response message 3 The protocol identifier bytes are always zero FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES Refer to section 8 2 1 for lists of function codes and exception codes supported TEXT STRINGS When sending text strings such as Batch fields the final character must be followed by one or two Null characters The number of bytes in the text string including the null must be even even if this means adding two nulls at the end of the message instead of one For example the text string Batch Number should be sent as Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er NullNull or Ba tc hSpace Nu mb SpaceNull where each pair of characters occupies 16 bit word Similarly the text string Batch Number would be sent as Ba tc hSpace Nu mb null but only one Null character is required to provide an even number of bytes UserGuide 028910 Page 310 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 5
400. er specified location Note This data is in archived TAR format and cannot be opened directly by Review without first having been unzipped File Name Size Last Modified Group 1 20060501 00204B26000001C4 uhh 4 Click on individual files to save to a 391 Kb 01 05 06 16 20 10 user specified location Group 1 20060501 00204B26000001C5 uhh 391 Kb 01 05 06 20 20 10 C1 2 4 History file display C1 2 5 About Clicking on this tab displays a subset of the information which appears in the recorder s About screen described in section 4 6 11 The items which appear are Instrument variant Serial number Product software version Boot ROM version Board version SRAM and DRAM sizes User Guide HAO28910 Page 384 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE INDEX Symbols Alarm Cont ie eee HR URLs 212 Message enable disable 69 22222 in message sese 94 95 Ia de ie 81 1n SOUIGCO ihe noie dp beet ti d uem 94 On Group Event source 90 10 to the power maths function 108 SOUNOS PE 231 SD effect dou be rep eet tested 247 Summary page rime etd 20 E 77 78 lll stratiOls rerit 80 eh Allow AI B Switchlhng eee enm 67 76 5 n es 211 3
401. ers Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 0447 1095 0448 1096 0449 1097 044A 1098 044B 1099 044C 1100 044D 1101 044E 1102 0451 1105 0453 1107 0457 1111 045B 1115 045F 1119 0463 1123 046D 1133 0477 1143 0478 1144 0479 1145 04B5 1205 04B6 1206 04B7 1207 04B8 1208 04C2 1218 04C3 1219
402. es to A47B Totalisers 109 108 Addresses A2BA to 5 Maths Addresses A1D9 to A2B9 Input channels Addresses 8EDD to A1D8 Counters Addresses 007B to A1D8 Point configuration data Input channels points 1 to 75 Math channels points 76 to 175 Totalisers points 176 to 225 Addresses 6F39 to 8EDC Totalisers Counters points 226 to 255 Addresses 2FF1 to 6F38 Maths Addresses 0078 to 2FF0 Input channels Addresses 0001 to 007A Instrument data Address 0000 Not used Figure 8 3 Address map representation Notes 1 addresses hexadecimal 2 Areas represent relative sizes but are not to scale UserGuide 028910 270 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 3 ADDRESS MAP Cont The contents of each group can be determined by reading the relevant register number as shown in section 8 4 4 be low The table below is a decoder for the results For example if a group has channels 1 to 6 maths channel 1 and totaliser three fitted the results would be Register 1 63 32 16 8 4 2 1 channels 1 to 6 Register 5 2048 maths channel 1 Register 12 2 Totaliser 1 other register values 0 Value if bit set Bit number 0 DE 11 EE 13 15 Register Number 1 2 3 5 8 9 10 12 14 8159 16 o 20 22 24 26
403. es moyens de production User Guide Page 272 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Note A B Switching 8 4 2 Channel configuration data B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A The following tables give hex addresses for channels 1 to 12 inclusive Generally channel N parameter address channel 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Chl Span high Upper span value display full scale Scaled Read only 0078 123 1 Chl Span low Lower span value display zero Scaled Read 007 124 Chl Zone high Zone high value two decimal places Scaled Read only 007D 125 Chl Zone low Zone low value two decimal places Scaled Read only 007 126 Chl PV type Input type Enum Read 007 127 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Chl Decimal places Number of decimal places 0 to 9 Uint16 Read only 0080 128 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Chl Colour Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Enum Read 0081 129 Chl Units Units string up to five characters String 5 Read 0082 130 Spare 0085 133 Chl Open string Open Digital Input string up to eight characters String 8 Read only 0087 135 Spare 008B 139 Chl
404. es of MAC address of the recorder which created the file see section 4 5 1 It is not possible for the user to delete files created by another instrument i e one with a different MAC address MEDIA SIZE For Local setting only this displays the capacity of the memory device REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY For Local setting only this gives an estimated time to fill the archive medium based on the archive rate the compres sion ratio the storage medium size and on the exact nature of the data Rapidly changing values use more space than static slowly changing values When archiving to Floppy disks via USB port this field remains empty until after the first archive has taken place MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT For Local setting only this allows the user to specify a percentage full value for the storage medium at which the event source Archive media full is triggered The event remains active until the storage medium is replaced or has data removed from it to make more room available ARCHIVE TO REMOTE For Remote setting only None Archive to host is initiated by the operator section 4 1 2 Hourly Archive to host occurs on the hour every hour Daily Archive to host occurs at 00 00 hrs each day Weekly Archive to host occurs at 00 00 hrs every Monday Monthly Archive to host occurs at 00 00 hrs on the 1st of each month Automatic recorder selects the slowest out of Hourly Daily Weekly or Monthly which is guaran
405. escription 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide 028910 302 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 10 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch10 span high Ch10 span low 10 Zone high 10 Zone low Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch10 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch10 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 11 Parameter Name Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value 46 of chart width Zone lower value 96 of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access D62B 54827 D62D 54829 D62F 54831 D631 54833 D633 54835 D635 54837 D637 54839 D639 54841 D63B 54843 Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length span high Ch11 span low 11 Zone high 11 Zone low Alarm 1 setpoint 11 Alarm 2 setpoint 11 Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 12
406. eserved Grp4 Write text Reserved Grp4 Batch start Grp4 Batch stop Grp4 Batch running Grp4 Text field 1 Reserved Grp4 Text field 2 Reserved Grp4 Text field 3 Reserved Grp4 Text field 4 Reserved Grp4 Text field 5 Reserved Grp4 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0 Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but fo
407. et diagnosticcs User Guide Page 168 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 17 Output channels Output Channels appears as a configuration item only if either or both of the Master Comms or Analogue outputs op tions is fitted MASTER COMMS For Master Comms this feature allows a Master Unit to write one or more of its points to one or more slaves chan nels Figure 4 3 17a shows a typical configuration page Output Channel Number 1 Output 1 v On Error Write Default Enable lv Select Off Master A Output Type Master Commsy Comms mA or V Slave 1 Furn Recorder 24 Parameter Comms Channelv Scaling High Low v Scaling items appear only Scale Low 0 for some slave types Scale High 100 Point Type Channel 2 60 ect destination point Process Value Medium Priorityy Select iteration rate Descriptor Output 1 Source 1 Channel 4Y Select source point Default 0 Apply Discard Figure 4 3 17a Typical output channel configuration page CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Output Channel Number Enable Output Type Slave Parameter Scaling Point Type Point Number Loop Number Process Value Descriptor Source Default On Error Write Default Allows the user to select the Output to be configured Allows the output channel to be e
408. etween 500 and 600 degrees is of most interest In such a case setting span low to 500 and span high to 600 will cause the recorder to display only that part of the input range and this will fill the zone width which is selected next effectively magnifying the area of interest If A B switching is enabled a second set of span low and span high values can be entered values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 ZONE This allows the portion of the chart which the channel occupies to be defined in terms of percent where the left edge of the chart is 0 and the right hand edge is 100 For example setting a low value of 50 and a high value of 100 causes the channel trace to be confined to the right hand half of the chart If A B switching is enabled a second set of zone low and zone high values can be entered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 PV FORMAT This allows the PV value alarm setpoints hysteresis values etc to be displayed as normal numeric values Numeric or in Scientific format Scientific When Scientific is selected values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10 the mantissa followed by a multiplier the exponent E G to enter a value of 1244 5678 the value entered would be 1 2445678E3 where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal point
409. except that Log Linear scale type is not available For job information see section 4 7 User Guide Page 136 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Cont TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option the following table gives addresses for totaliser 1 configuration data Generally Totaliser N parameter address totaliser 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation see section 8 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION DATA TOTALISER 1 Parameter Name Description Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Span high Span low Zone high Zone low PV type Decimal places Colour Units Spare Open string Spare Close string Spare Descriptor Spare No of alarms PV format Spare Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Cou
410. ext string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uintl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 Double String_60 c Cea Cee eee String_60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String_60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String_60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write B1IF 45343 1 B120 45344 B122 45346 B124 45348 2 45358 B138 45368 139 45369 B13A 45370 B13B 45371 B13C 45372 B13D 45373 B13E 45374 B13F 45375 B140 45376 B141 45377 B142 45378 B143 45379 B144 45380 B145 45381 B146 45382 B147 45383 B148 45384 B149 45385 B14D 45389 B16B 45419 B189 45449 B1A7 45479 1 5 45509 B1C6 45510 B1C7 45511 1 8 45512 B1E6 45542 B204 45572 B222 45602 B240 45632 B25E 45662 B27C 45692 B29A 45722 B2B8 45752 B2D6 45782 B2F4 45812 B312 45842 B330 45872 Be UserGu
411. figured a mini mum of 30 day s worth of traces is available for viewing provided that the group contents are not re configured during this period in which case the history starts at the end of the re configuration The amount of trace visible on the screen depends on the recording rate the higher the rate the less trace is visible at any one time Notes 1 Trend history mode is not available for groups with Recording Enable disabled Group configuration section 4 3 2 2 Channel cycling is inhibited in trend history mode To increment the current channel touch the faceplate 3 Group faceplates are not displayed in trend history mode 4 Operation of the Root Goto View Message Log key section 3 2 1 when in history mode displays a mes sage log page containing messages which occurred at or near the selected cursor time 5 With A B switching selected traces are displayed with the A or span zone colour settings etc obtain ing at the cursor time See sections 4 3 2 4 3 3 and 4 7 for more details of A B switching To enter trend history mode the option key can be used as shown in figure 3 4 1b or the trace area of the screen can be continuously touched until the screen blanks prior to re drawing A Preparing History please wait message appears whilst the re drawing calculation is taking place Although tracing stops whilst trace history mode is active no data is lost Process Variable values are saved in the re
412. file list if necessary refer to section 5 below for more details Source Files From Allows the user to select Remote FTP site or Local Media Upgrade Initiates upgrade once the upgrade source has been defined see figures below Host Address Name UsbFront RELEASE FTP Username FTP Password Source Path name to upgrade file ae aia r1 FileName upgrade module Open Cancel Cancel Figure 4 6 3b Remote upgrade details Figure 4 6 3c Local upgrade detoils Caution Power to the recorder must be maintained during the upgrade process or the recorder might not power up If such a situation arises the manufacturer s local service centre should be contacted for advice Notes 1 Recording is suspended and the user interface touchscreen is disabled whilst the upgrade is in progress During the subsequent automatic power cycle any alarm relays will go into their alarm states until the recorder has re initialised 2 When upgrading from another instrument using Remote Upgrade the I P address or network name of the source instrument should be typed into the Host Address Name field and mediacard or usbfront etc as appropriate should be entered in the Source field 3 If Audit trail is enabled see Management section 4 4 2 then system messages are generate
413. fol identifier function address addresslow ters high isters low lowing hex code hex high Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 0 45 6E 67 69 6E 65 65 te 00 HH HH Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password E Hex n Hex g Hex i Hex n Hex e Hex e Hex r Hex High Low Byte Byte SS User name as configured in instrument Must be followed by null character Hex 00 Byte 24 o Null character inserted only if Null lt otherwise the Byte count in Byte 12 would be Odd Figure 8 2 4a Login request via Ethernet Modbus Slave MODBUS Start No of regis No of reg Byte count identifier function address low ters high isters low excluding Hex n Hex g Hex code hex CRC Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 65 65 72 00 HH HH 00 HH HH ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password Null CRC low CRC high e Hex e Hex r Hex High Low Byte Byte Byte Byte Null character inserted only if without it the Byte count in Byte 6 would be Odd Figure 8 2 4b Login Request using a serial transmission line Notes 1 The high and low password bytes are entered using the result of the encryption program above If the pass w
414. from this display mode To call numeric display mode use the down arrow key Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes section 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Menu Goto View key User Guide HAO28910 Page 46 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 5 HORIZONTAL BARGRAPH Cont Logged out 11 58 08 06 04 05 700 87C 800 00 487 39 C 0 00 Channel 5 235 68 C 378 99 C DNE Figure 3 4 5a Horizontal bargraph display single column example Logged out 120009 Channel 1 700 87C 4 Channel 2 487 39 C AY x 800 00 T 4 800 00 Channel 3 235 68 C I Channel 4 378 99 C I e Channel 5 0 49V 2 Channel 6 0 85V Channel 7 689 43 C Channel 8 483 72 400 00 ws 800 00 Channel ____ 255816 Channel 10 375016 i x ERE ins Channel 11 0 53V Channel 12 0 79V 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 channel 13 97 1 1 238V soo a Channel 15 235V TChannel16 ___ 320A 2 Channel 816A 332A 500 0 500 64 20 54 100 fo 100 2696 Channel 22 4796 Channel 23 56 enam 4 81 a 5 gt Figure 3 4 5b Horizo
415. g any earlier archive s files which have the same name ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION For recorders fitted with the lockable flap section 2 4 it should be noted that when the flap is opened archiving is automatically suspended It is therefore necessary to press on the Resume Archiving key before any attempt is made to carry out a demand archive Before removing the memory device archiving should be suspended again using the Suspend Archive key This ensures that the memory device can be safely removed HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 53 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 1 2 Remote archiving FTP transfer This allows archiving of recorder files for all groups with Archive via FTP enabled to a remote computer connected using the RJ45 telephone type connector at the rear of the recorder either directly or via a network Archive via FTP is enabled disabled as part of Group configuration section 4 3 2 In order to carry out a successful transfer details of the remote host must be entered in the Archive section of the Config menu section 4 3 5 Note An FTP server must be running on the remote host Figure 4 1 2 shows the menu for remote archiving The Archive last hour day etc keys allow the user to determine which files are to be archived Selection of Bring Archive Up To Date causes the recorder to select whichever of the Last Hour Last Day etc ca
416. g powered network hardware failure etc UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST Similar to the timeout message above but with the additional cause incorrect host address UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME Caused by an incorrect host address or network failure FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME Caused by incorrect user name or password MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON An attempt is being made to establish more than the maximum number of Bridge sessions to the specified instrument THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON Appears if there is insufficient space on the PC hard disk YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION Appears if the pc is already connected to the recorder and running a Full Bridge session YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE Only Bridge Lite is accessible to users using Anonymous 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 233 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 SCREEN BUILDER 7 1 INTRODUCTION This option allows the user to create screen layouts using recorder data simple drawing tools text and or imported image files 24 user screens are editable directly from the operator interface A further 100 extra screens 25 to 124 which can be created edited etc only via Bridge software are also available Once created such screens can be copied or moved to one or more of screens 1 to 24 thus becoming accessible at the instrument s operator
417. ge characters they will be replaced by question marks on the screen User Guide HAO28910 Page 364 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION This section gives an explanation of the time zone abbreviations listed in the System Locale Time Zone pick list The list starts at GMT travelling Eastwards round the world Abbre Full title Time at Hours of viation noon GMT difference GMT Greenwich mean time 0 UTC Co ordinated Universal time 0 Central European time 1 Eastern European time 1 Arabic standard time 2 EAT Eastern African time 3 Middle East time NET Near East time 4 Pakistan Lahore time 5 IST India standard time BST Bangladesh standard time 5 6 VST Vietnam standard time China Taiwan time Japan standard time Australia Central time Australia Eastern time Solomon standard time New Zealand standard time Midway Islands time Hawaii standard time Alaska standard time Pacific standard time Phoenix standard time Mountain standard time Central standard time Eastern standard time Argentina standard time Brazil Eastern time Central African time 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 365 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION This option which must be specified at time of order is intended for use by hire companies etc who have a re
418. ges over a specified period This function carries out O correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring applications This uses wet and dry bulb temperatures and atmospheric pressure inputs to produce a percent age Relative Humidity reading Allows oxygen concentration and oxygen potential to be determined by solving the Nernst oxygen equation When triggered by an event or alarm job this causes the current number of milliseconds since 00 00 hrs on Ist January 1970 to appear as the function value If the selected PV format is date or time the result is displayed as date or time respectively Allows the Configuration Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel When this maths channel is included in a group the user can determine the Configuration Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record Allows the Security Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel When this maths channel is included in a group the user can determine the Security Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record Note See About in section 4 6 for a description of the Configuration and Security Revision numbers The zero and full scale values for the maths function as displayed If A B switching is enabled a second set of scale low and scale high values can be entered values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as descr
419. gnin i 1 NEZ if Media File Format is q 0 0 M CSV include column headings CSV or Binary and CSV Figure B9i Reports Require Authorisation CSV Date Time format Spreadsheet numeric Y mon CSV use Tab delimiter Options BB Show Local settings W User Linearisations Media mediacard Section 4 3 9 Archive to Media None User Linearisation 3 UserLin3Y Messages ene a dE Binary 20 csv Descriptor UserLin3 Section 4 3 8 nes Media Size 30 4746094 Mb Format Numeric V a Th 1 1 mber d Panek Message Number 1 value of w Remavabie Media 33 18 Days x1 lo Message The value of 1 2 amp 3 4 5 Media Full event limit 100 96 yib Replace 1 with Source Descriptor w Apply Discard x2h Replace 2 with Source Value v yolt Replace 3 with Specified Descriptor w Apply Discard 3 source Totaliser 1 v Replace 4 with Specified Value v 4 source Totaliser 1 v Replace 5 with Config Revision Replace 6 with Blank v Replace 7 with Apply v Figure B9e Config menu structure sheet 2 HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 371 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure Figure B9b B9c Figure B9d Figure B9e Figure 9 Figure B9h Figure 9 Fig B9j Figure Figure Instrument Balm Groups Channels Views Archive Eve
420. gure 3 1 3 Archive activity indication Notes 1 The icon appears only when a memory device is present AND when that memory device has been se lected in the Archive to media selection in archive configuration section 4 3 5 For example if a memory stick is inserted in usbfront but Archive to Media is set to mediacard then the disk icon ap pears only if a suitable card is present in the mediacard slot 2 When disk is inserted into a USB floppy disk drive which is connected to the recorder the disk icon appears only after the disk has been accessed either by reading from it or writing to it or after the file system has been opened by touching the file key This note does not apply for disks which have been inserted before the disk drive is plugged in 3 central area goes green whenever local archiving is taking place not only when archiving is taking place to the memory device selected in Archive configuration FTP ICON The FTP icon appears to the right of the disc icon position whenever transfer activity is taking place dl CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR This symbol appears only when Bridge software is being used in the following situations 1 Whilst units are synchronising configuration changes 2 Whilst configuration is taking place If the reconfiguration is taking place at the host pc Bridge Full only then the symbol appears at the target instrument and vice versa TRIA
421. h the circular chart will appear it is unlikely that it will contain any trends 3 The circular chart speed is unaffected by switching of Trend Speed Interval section 4 3 2 Circular trends backfill only to the previous power up HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 43 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 DISPLAY MODES Cont 3 4 4 Vertical bargraph Entered from Circular Trend mode by means of the down arrow key or selected from the Root Menu Goto View key this display mode shows the Process Variable PV values as vertical bars with faceplates containing digital values and alarm data There are two versions one with faceplates above the bars 1 to 6 channels figure 3 4 42 the other with faceplates at the right hand edge of the display figure 3 4 4b is used where there are more than six channels Note The description above refers to the 180 mm version of the recorder For the 100 mm version the faceplates appear above the bars for one or two points but to the right of the bars for three or more points Operation of the option key calls the Option menu display for this display page allowing faceplates to be selected on or off This feature is available for vertical trend circular trend and vertical bargraph displays only To call the horizontal bargraph display mode use the down arrow key Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes section 4 3 4 can be selected using the R
422. han Constant If this function is enabled then the default value is written instead of the source value should the source be in an Error state When enabled the Default entry box appears if it was previously hidden If enabled this function causes the recorder to attempt the Write only once instead of retrying according to the number of retries set in the Master Comms Configuration Page If enabled this causes the default value to be Written at Power Up DEMAND WRITE BUTTON When operated this pushbutton causes the Write to be initiated If the source is Constant and the Allow Constant Edits item is enabled an Edit page appears figure 4 3 18b allowing the user to change the constant value from its default value before the Write is carried out Otherwise the Write is carried out without any further action being re quired Status Constant 0 Write now Figure 4 3 18b Constant Edit page User Guide HAO28910 Page 172 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 DEMAND WRITES Cont WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER When User Defined is selected or if the slave device is Unknown then a register can be defined which can be writ ten to directly The register addresses must be found from the documentation supplied with the slave device 5 j Select the Write to Write number 1 Write 1 Y
423. has been ex ceeded Absolute Low As shown in figure 4 3 3d an absolute low alarm becomes active when the channel value falls below the threshold value The alarm remains active until the channel value exceeds Threshold hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded Deviation in As shown in figure 4 3 3e a deviation in alarm becomes active whenever the channel value enters the band Reference Deviation It remains active until the channel value leaves the band Reference De viation Hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded Deviation out As shown in figure 4 3 3e a deviation out alarm is active whenever the channel value leaves the band Reference Deviation It remains active until the channel value enters the band Reference Deviation Hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded Rate of change shown in figure 4 3 3f rate of change alarms become active whenever the signal value changes by more than a specified amount within a specified period If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded An averaging period can be set to remove the effects of sudden but short lived changes such as noise spikes on the signal Note Alarm icons appear at the di
424. he System menu 2 Select the required channel 3 Operate the Remove Adjust key 4 Select Yes from the resulting confirmation dialogue User Guide 028910 314 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 9 4 OUTPUT ADJUST Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security Network Clock Locale Upgrade Input Adjust Channel ay Remove Adjust Specify the low output and then the low reading 13 10 05 15 22 54 Low Output 4 2 13 10 05 16 03 09 Low Reading 4 018 3 8 563 Unadjusted 4 When the values have been entered select 4 0 000 Unadjusted Apply Unadjusted 1 10 690 13 10 05 15 22 54 Specify the high output and then the high reading High Output 9 High Reading 8 917 When the values have been entered select Apply to complete the adjustment procedure Discard Figure 9 4 1 Typical output adjust pages 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 315 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 10 EVENT INPUT OPTION 10 1 INTRODUCTION Each Event input option board offers six isolated input circuits Inputs can be either switch closures or voltage levels Section 4 3 6 Event configuration describes the use of events and how they can be combined to perform logic func tions if required Job lists
425. he first message Notes 1 If any of messages is of less than 60 characters the unused part of message is filled with null charac ters example 1 Thus by reading character 60 the master can determine either that this is the last mes sage character 60 null or that there is at least one message to follow character 60 is not null 2 Continuation messages cannot contain only null characters For this reason if the message itself i e ex cluding final null characters is exactly 60 characters long or a multiple of 60 characters long then the final extension message contains a space followed by 59 nulls Example 2 3 Time and date appear only in the main message not the continuation message s Example 1 Message of less than 60 characters Character no gt 1 213 4 5 167 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 English message 0 4 0 4 0121 116 21 05 of 11 ASCII Hex 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 33 31 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 66 20 62 65 74 20 66 61 69 75 72 65 00 00 00 00 00
426. he oval are defined in the default percentage units then entering equal values for height and width will result in an oval with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen not a circle as might be expected Be cause the screen height is approximately 2 3 the width the oval height should be 3 2 its width to produce a circle The actual height width ratio 0 669 7 4 19 Line This causes a straight line of user definable thickness to be drawn between the points X position Y position and X position width Y position height Notes 1 Y increases downwards X increases rightwards 2 Height 2 3 width if measuring in percent X position Y position Widt X position width Y position height Figure 7 4 19a Line definitions EXAMPLE To draw an approximation to a St Andrew s cross saltire Access the component property editor page as described in section 7 2 3 Select Advanced Edit level then in the component property editor page 1 touch the Add key at the top of the screen In the List of Component types page press Line Add Line Add then Close 2 In main 1 2 set background colour to 6 In line_2 3 Set Width to 100 Height to 100 Set Foreground colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35 5 In 3 4 Set X position to 100 Width to 100 Height to 100 Set Foreground colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35 6 Press Save then Close gt
427. hen using the right left arrow keys It is not possible to disable the Home group HOME PAGE Allows a particular display mode to be selected as the default display either for all groups Scope instrument or on a group by group basis Scope group DISPLAY MODE ENABLING A series of tick boxes allow the various display modes to be added to or removed from the up down arrow scroll list and to be activated deactivated in the Root menu Goto View menu either for all groups Scope instrument or on a group by group basis Scope group It is not possible to disable the selected Home page mode Note If Circular Trend view is enabled here in Views configuration but the Circular settings checkbox is not enabled in Group configuration section 4 3 2 then although the circular chart will appear it will not contain any trends 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 83 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION Cont USER SCREENS 1 to N This field appears only for recorders with the Screen Builder option fully described in section 7 Up to 24 user screens can be included in the up down arrow scroll list and to be active in the Root menu Goto View menu figure 4 3 4b In addition to the 24 screens accessible from the recorder display up to 100 extra screens which can be accessed only by using Bridge Full software can be specified The number selected should be kept to
428. his instrument to determine what type of alarm alarm 1 on channel 2 is register 396 would be used and the expected value would be 0 for Absolute low 1 for absolute high 2 for Deviation in 3 for De viation out 4 for Rate of change high or 5 for Rate of Change low Channel Number 1 Read 1 4 Reflects descriptor once the Value 0 0400 Unadjusted Apply key has been operated Input Type Master Commsv Slave 1 1 Recorder2y lt Select required slave Digital Parameter User Defined Y 4 Select required slave parameter Function Code Read holding registers 3 v 4 Select Function Code Register 396 Enter required register number decimal Data Type Ulnteger 16 Bit lt Select Data Type Scaling Decimal Placesv lt Select None or Decimal Places Decimal Places Enter No of decimal point shifts Process Value Medium Priority Y lt Select iteration rate for PV Format Numeric Y continuous parameters Span Low 0 Units Span High f Units Zone Low 0 Zone High 100 7 ecimal digi Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16g Configuration page for user defined parameters User Guide HAO28910 Page 160 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS This section defines those parameters which are unique to user defined registers Value Fu
429. hosen when Process value has been selected as Field Type The point is selected from a pick list containing all the input channels derived channels totalisers etc in the instrument LINE FEED Appears only when Line Feed has been chosen as Field Type Allows the user to enter the required number of blank lines up to 10 which are to be inserted Line feeds appear only on printed outputs not on the chart or in the message log Note See section 12 for printer configuration details User Guide HAO28910 Page 180 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 Options Trial Mode Disabled Trial Time Remaining Fitted channels Virtual channels Maths Totalisers Counters Groups Batch Enabled V Security Manager DisabledW 1 Auditor 21 11 Screen Builder Full V Bridge Level Full Master Comms Devices 327 Simulation Enabled V Relay Boards 2 4 currently 1 Relays on Board 1 4 4 Relays on Board 2 currently O Event Input Boards 4 Analogue Output Boards currently O Apply Discard Autoconfigure Figure 4 3 21 Options menu layout Touching this key calls a display showing the current recorder hardware software setup for example the number of input channels fitted the number of output relay boards fitted and how many r
430. i 76 Enter Batch 2 2 2 189 First Start End Char dede dede 148 Erase all liiStory MER 183 n rte RR ERE Eni eR RE 31 217 Flap unlock permission 187 eim 366 Flashislze aue eT Ue Hoe et lenire ttes 86 Error messages Folder keys ec 28 Bridge eU MR 233 56 8 decade facade 261 cl p 210 Errors To E mail es 176 um sisse 249 Ethernet Force change of password 189 5 354 Foreground GoloUr tente tetur 245 Diagnostics tenerent 205 378 Foregro nd colo ett 209 LED interpretation eee etes 344 M M c ee 183 218 Modbus slave tentes 152 FTP EuroPRP server enable 197 Archiving file 5 0 16 Event Archiving too 8 88 16 93 to 224 245 File format nne Bi entres 89 Configuration 371 fca 18 Evernt SoUutce ote etr e 91 Primary Server Failure 16 Siz6 shape elc uec ees 255 Secondary Server Failure
431. ial port pinout UserGuide Page 320 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 12 3 CONFIGURATION Configuration takes place in two areas viz Connections and Reports section 12 3 2 12 3 1 Connections Figure 12 3 1a shows the default configuration page for ASCII printer protocol See section 4 3 15 for other protocols Port Serial 1Y Online Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Protocol ASCII Printery Connection EIA232 Baud Rate 9600 Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits ay Select 1 or 2 Parity Even Y Printer Type Star TSP600 V Select printer type Printer Name Star TSP600 0 Printer Status Not Responding Printer Test Print Messages From 1 Group 17 Messages To Print Alarms Power Up General Batches Logins O Discard Figure 12 3 1a Serial communications configuration menu PORT This allows serial port 1 or serial port 2 to be selected for printer configuration Separate independently configurable printers can be connected to the two ports or if only one printer is to be connected any of the other available protocols can be selected for the non printer port LINK ERROR COUNT The counter is incremented every time there is a framing error a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy check CRC error whilst communicating with the print
432. ibed in section 4 7 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 109 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont PV FORMAT Numeric Provides a decimal value for the maths channel Elapsed time Shows the maths channel value in HH MM SS hours minutes seconds format Normally used only for time functions For other functions elapsed time counts in milliseconds e g a PV of 10000 would be displayed as 00 00 10 a PV of 60000 would be displayed as 00 01 00 Scientific Values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1 0 and 107 the mantissa followed by a multiplier the exponent E G to enter a value of 1244 5678 the value entered would be 1 2445678E3 where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal point must be shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between 1 and 10 To enter a value of 0 0004196 the entry would be 4 196E 4 Time date For timestamp functions displays the timestamp as time or date as selected instead of a number of milliseconds as would be displayed in numeric format Notes 1 Strictly this is a number less than 10 as 10 would be 1 0E1 2 There must be at least one number after the decimal point REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration section 4 3 3 FUNCTION DETAILS POLYNOMIAL FIT A polynomial curve fit of up to eight order
433. ications to be used as Modbus master or Modbus slave When acting as a master the unit can communicate with up to 16 slaves Use of the Serial port is complementary to the use of Ethernet connections Note When configuring a unit as a Modbus slave it is recommended that the Instrument and Point Configura tions give easily identifiable instrument and point names descriptors INSTALLATION If the option is fitted two 9 way D type connectors plugs are fitted at the rear of the recorder as shown in section 2 2 TERMINATION AND BIASSING Not EIA232 If the communications line is left open ended the end of the cable acts as a reflector returning what can appear to be true data signals back down the line receiver cannot distinguish between true and reflected data with the result that true data is corrupted In order to avoid this a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument If the value of this resistor is equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable e g 120 Ohms then the line appears to be of infinite length and no reflections occur Such a value however does not always give the best signal to noise ratio so a compromise value e g 220 Ohms is normally selected to give the optimum performance in reducing unwanted reflections and in improving the signal to noise ratio The recorder communications port is terminated as shown in figure 4 3 15a below for a sing
434. ide Page 296 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 5 Feature identification table FIT This table allows the host to identify which features are available at the recorder Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Number of features Number of supported features Read only CC26 52262 Feature 1 Indirection Table Read CC27 52263 Read only indirection table start address R O vector Read only CC28 52264 Read Write indirection table start address R W vector Read CC29 52265 Spare CC2A 52266 Feature 2 Function codes supported FC LD Read only CC2B 52267 Bit map of supported MODBUS function codes Read only CC2C 52268 Bit 0 0 code 1 not supported 1 code 1 supported Bit 1 0 code 2 not supported 1 code 2 supported Bit 2 0 code 3 not supported 1 code 3 supported Bit 3 0 code 4 not supported 1 code 4 supported Etc Bit 15 02 code 16 not supported 1 code 16 supported Reserved CC2D 52269 Reserved CC2E 52270 Feature 3 Security ID MODBUS login security feature Read CC2F 52271 User name Write only CC30 52272 Password Write only CC58 52312 Reserved CC80 52352 Feature N 100 Spare addresses for further features CC81 52353 8 4 6 Indirection tables The standard MODBUS protocol allows block register reads and writes This is efficient only if data
435. idge is con nected to a master which has several slaves attached 2 If Link error occurs whilst connected to a Modbus slave the slave s delay parameter if any should be enabled If no such parameter is available the slave s manufacturer should be contacted for advice An example configuration is given later in this section showing how to set up a master unit to read inputs from two slaves and to re write one of these channels to a third slave User Guide HAO28910 Page 150 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU A typical master comms configuration page is shown in figure 4 3 16a below Note For the sake of completeness the figure below shows all possible fields even though some are actually mutually exclusive e g Login Required does not appear for Profile Third party High Priority interval 0 125 _ Seconds Medium priority interval Seconds Low priority interval 2 Seconds Store diagnostics Slave 1 1 v Enable v Online Descriptor Hemote 1 Network Ethernet 4 Select Ethernet or Serial port IP Address 1149 121 30 0 Modbus address 1 Address field appears only if Ethernet selected Detect This Slave as Network type Profile Third Party Timeout 250 ms Retry 13 Max Block Size 124 Register Sha
436. igger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 03A5 933 03A6 934 03A7 935 03A8 936 03A9 937 03AA 938 03AB 939 03AC 940 943 03 1 945 03B5 949 03B9 953 03BD 957 03C1 961 O3CB 971 0305 981 03D6 982 03D7 983 0413 1043 0414 1044 0415 1045 0416 1046 0420 1056 0421 1057 0422 1058 0423 1059 042D 1069 042E 1070 042F 1071 0430 1072 043A 1082 043B 1083 043C 1084 043D 1085 Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 Ifan alarm s Setpoint Source
437. ight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 0771 1905 0772 1906 0773 1907 0774 1908 0775 1909 0776 1910 0777 1911 0778 1912 077B 1915 077D 1917 0781 1921 0785 1925 0789 1929 078D 1933 0797 1943 07 1 1953 07A2 1954 07A3 1955 2015 07 0 2
438. ignings message type list Batches Displays only batch messages including Config and Security Revisions if either Auditor option is enabled Logins Lists only changes in login Signings This list contains only notes messages etc that have been signed and authorized This category is used only when Require Signing and Require Authorization is are enabled in the Security Management menu see section 4 4 for more details Audit trail This list contains Configuration change messages only This category is used only when Audit Trail is ena bled see section 4 4 for more details Reports For each report this contains all the Report s fields set up in Reports configuration on separate lines Line Feed fields are ignored 1 they do not appear PERIOD FILTER This picklist allows the user to select one of the following to define the period of time that the message list is to encom pass History Last Month 28 days Last Week Last 3 Days Last Day or Last Hour 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 25 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont MESSAGE LOG Cont OPTION MENU Touching a message highlights yellow calls the Option Menu as shown in figure 3 1 4h below Batch Note Enter Full details Messages History v 05 04 05 09 06 18 Alarm s on 1 1 09 06 22 05 04 05 05 04 05 09 06 18 Operator s name An
439. ilable to the user If one of these volume names is selected touched and the open folder key operated the contents of the selected volume is displayed This would typically consist of a list of folders Similarly if a folder name is selected and the open folder key is touched the contents of the folder is displayed and so on To return to higher levels the close folder key is used The path name of the current window is shown at the top of the window Note The open folder and close folder key functions are the same as the down arrow and up arrow key functions respectively FILER OPTION MENU KEYS These keys appear in a pop up menu when the option key is pressed This menu appears only when an actual file has been selected i e it does not appear if a directory folder or volume is selected Cut and paste functions are available only to users with the relevant access permissions section 4 4 Removes a file from the list ready for pasting to another destination Copies a file from the list ready for pasting to another destination Delete Removes a file from the memory New Paste Allows a new directory folder to be created Places a cut or copy file into the new destination Refresh Refreshes the display 5 2 A key s legend is hidden if at any time its function is not applicable i e displayed in the colour selected for Disabled Text in the System key Customise menu THE HIDE
440. ing pixels test 352 maths 108 116 Display IRR 77 383 108 122 Display mode enable ee 83 Modbus De nete 250 Address it ee RUE ee 152 ACCESS 255 dnd ond tein 149 Address Setting a 63 Camel Reis tu he su 109 124 Master Slave Diss onde cT x UNE 73 Configuration 373 Correction touch 352 Maximum number of data bytes 262 o cc RENE 33 RTU 6 146 to remove archive meda rim tote te 12 aed Ses 263 Security disable 63 Becoming active inactive 213 Slave Error Write 4422 1 172 152 Media full 87 152 New clear cs bear eee es 101 Selection iue ge EE 151 Start Stop Log 101 Status MH uo intu pU RR DIRE D 205 Visibility change 250 Wiring ieeeeeneeenenennnennnennnennnennnennnnennnennnennenna 262 Online Modbus slave 152 Modulus maths function 4 444444 4 109 Open Closed 162 Mouse
441. is grouped contiguously or nearly so Indirection tables are a means by which widely spaced register addresses can in effect be grouped offering the host the ability to access a block of user defined data in one single read write request Two configurable tables are available one for read only parameters the other for read write Each table is in two halves the lower address half contains the addresses of the registers to be accessed the higher address half contains the values which have been read or which are to be written Notes 1 For Ethernet connections indirection table entries are lost at power off as the result of a brown out or if the connection with the host is broken 2 Parameters in IEEE format can be accessed by configuring two successive entries in the table Parameters which occupy more than one register can be loaded into the indirection area by using function code 16 pre set multiple registers and the parameter s base address i e the parameter s 1st register 3 Separate indirection table entries are held for each host the recorder automatically switches each host to its own indirection table without user intervention 4 Indirection table addresses 5 to D4E7 cannot be entered in the indirection tables Any attempt to do so will be ignored HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 297 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 6 INDIRECTION TABLES CONT Table 8 4 6a shows
442. is shown by one of the icons depicted in table 3 either flashing if it is active and unacknowledged or on continuously if it is active and acknowledged See section 3 1 4 below for a description of how to acknowledge alarms Absolute alarm threshold icons and deviation alarm bars appear in any display which includes a scale except circular charts For deviation alarms the bar stretches from Reference Deviation to Reference Deviation Note Trigger alarms do not display threshold marks or bars or faceplate symbols Absolute High Absolute Low IT Rm Absolute Absolute Deviation Rate of Deviation in low high In Out change Horizontal d Rod No Deviation out Scales 4 indication of isi Vertical Rate of change Rising 1 v RS Rate of change Falling For Deviation alarms Reference d deviation P lt gt 4 Faceplate symbols Scale symbols Table 3 Alarm icons 3 1 STATUS BAR This appears across the top of the display and contains the items described below 3 1 1 Current access level There are four access levels available Logged out Operator Engineer and Service and the current level is displayed in this key at the top left hand corner of the display Touching this key calls the login page as described in section 3 3 1 Access to configuration below If a user has been added using the Add User part of the Securit
443. iser Value Shows the dynamic current value of the selected totaliser Total of Allows an input channel or a maths channel to be selected as the source to be totalised Low Cutoff The value of the source channel in engineering units below which it is not to be totalised High Cutoff The value of the source channel in engineering units above which it is not to be totalised Units The totalised units e g m2 Preset Allows the entry of a 10 character positive or nine character negative value from which the totaliser is to start counting Direction of counting is defined by the sign of the Unit scaler viz increment decrement Preset now Operation of this key initiates the totaliser preset 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 135 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION Cont Period Scaler Unit Scaler Scale Low High Totaliser Number 1 Totaliser 1 ee Enable v Value 123456 Units totaliser Total of Channel 1 V Select channel etc to be totalised Low cut off o ch units Units of channel High cut off 999999 euis totelised Units Units Preset b Units totaliser Preset now Period scaler 1 Unit scaler 1 Descriptor Totaliser 1 Switching Scale Low 0 Units totaliser Scale High totaliser Zone Low 1 Zone High 100 Scale Type None Select None Linear Log PV format Numeri
444. ist Allows another event to be specified as a source Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point Remains active until the alarm is acknowledged section 3 1 4 Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active Continued Batch stop also available see below User Guide Page 90 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 6 EVENT CONFIGURATION Cont EVENT SOURCES Cont Unack d Alarm on Group Instrument alarm Power up Maths channel partial failure Battery Low Archive media full Invalid Password Entry User Login Account Disabled User Logged In Event Button Master Comms Slave Failure Event input board Email Failure Batch Stop SOURCE 1 SENSE Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active The event remains active until the alarm is acknowledged This source triggers an event if any of the following becomes active Any Input channel failure Removable media failure Removable media full No removable media fitted FTP primary server failure FTP secondary server failure Maths channel failure Clock failure Unrecognised PCCard Recording failure overflow Network not found SNTP server failure Time synchronisation failure Battery backed RAM cleared See section 3 1 3 for Instrument alarm details The event remains active until the instrument alarm clears
445. istory which includes the highlighted message See section 3 4 1 for details of trend history When in Trend history mode operating the Message Log key calls that message log page which contains those messages which are nearest the trend history cursor time operating the Full Details key Refresh Earlier messages Later messages Refresh places at the top of the screen any messages which have occurred since the Message Log page was last entered or since the last Refresh If earlier or later messages have been selected then Refresh is replaced by Earlier messages or Later messages as appropriate and operating the key calls the next or previously displayed group of 100 messages to the display respectively The option menu can also be called by touching the option key In this case a Enter History calls the current Trend History display as described in section 3 4 1 and b Because no message is highlighted the Full Details key is not enabled If the highlighted message is wider than the display the whole message can be displayed by Notes 1 Selecting Enter History whilst either Earlier Messages or Later Messages is highlighted calls the current History page 2 Ifthe Option Menu has timed out leaving a message highlighted and the option key is operated then this is equivalent to reselecting the message User Guide Page 26 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERL
446. it registers that can be accessed in one transac tion is 255 2 127 and the maximum number of IEEE 32 bit registers is 127 2 63 8 2 1 Function Codes MODBUS function codes 3 4 6 8 and 16 defined in table 8 2 1a below are supported and are fully described in sec tion 8 5 below MODBUS definition Description Reads the binary contents of holding registers Read holdi ist rus un In this implementation code 03 is identical with code 04 Reads the binary contents of input registers In this Read input registers implementation code 04 is identical with code 03 Pre set single register Writes a single value to a single register Diagnostics Obtains communications diagnostics information Pre set multiple Registers Writes values to multiple holding registers Table 8 2 1a MODBUS Function code definition DIAGNOSTIC CODES Function code 08 subfunction 00 Return query data echoes the query Loop back UserGuide 028910 262 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 1 FUNCTION CODES Cont EXCEPTION CODES MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions These codes provide error information relating to failed requests Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being added to the function code of the request followed by one of the codes listed in table 8 2 1b below ES MODBUS definition Description see Modbus specification for full det
447. ition for the number of channels or to be located above North below South to the right East or to the left West of the bargraphs Also allows faceplates to be turned off altogether For group trend displays these faceplates are in addition to the current channel faceplate which always appears above the chart across the full width of the display unless turned off using Horizon tal Faceplate disable Font style List of fonts Picklist holds a number of sizes plain bold and underlined bold Grid Line colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart gridlines Horizontal Alignment Left centred right Allows text to be justified relative to its width setting Horizontal Faceplate Enable Disable For vertical trend displays allows the current channel faceplate to be selected on or off Horizontal Grid total Default Number of vertical divisions of a trend chart If left at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Horizontal Minor Divs Default Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions If left at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 3 of 6 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 249 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7
448. its descriptor digital value and scale being displayed on a faceplate across the full width of the screen above the chart Faceplates for all the group channels can be displayed by using the Faceplates On Off key in the op tion menu If selected On faceplates showing colour descriptor digital value and units for all the group s channels appear either above the current channel s faceplate or if there are too many to fit across the screen at the right hand edge of the screen When necessary a slider bar appears to allow further hidden faceplates to be viewed Each channel in the display group becomes the current channel in turn for approximately 10 seconds i e the chan nels are cycled through starting with the lowest numbered channel Once the final channel in the group has been dis played for 10 seconds the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the sequence repeats This scrolling process can be enabled or disabled using the Channel Cycling On Off key in the Option menu To select a particular channel to be the current channel the relevant pen icon can be touched To cycle through the channels manually the faceplate area is touched repeatedly until the required channel is reached If a channel is included in the display group but its status is not good for some reason then its pen icon is hollow gt See section 4 3 10 for Batch Option Batch details See section 3 5 for Opera
449. k to be released and try again appears on the screen of any other user who attempts to change the configuration When changes are complete the message Feature changed Synchronising data appears on the screens of all clients except that of the one making the change Bridge Lite allows the user to view recorder standard screens dynamically on line from up to 10 PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below The software is supplied on a CD ROM which also includes PC Review PC Configuration and Acrobat reader soft ware and various manuals relevant to the recorder The Bridge software is suitable for any physical hardware configurations some common examples being l Asingle PC connected directly to a recorder 2 Multiple PCs connected via a network to one or more recorders Each recorder can be accessed simultaneously by a maximum of 10 PCs but one PC can look at only N recorders where N depends on how much memory is available at the PC For example a minimum specification computer section 6 1 1 running Windows NT can at up to three recorders simultaneously 3 Asingle PC connected via a telephone line to a remote recorder This manual does not describe network setup in detail as each network is different In most cases the help of the net work administrator or supervisor will be required for example in the allocation of valid addresses and passwords Notes 1 When logging in
450. l to ground 60dB 250Volts continuous A5mV at lowest range 23 74 Volts peak at highest range Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 300V RMS or dc channel to channel double insulation channel to common electronics double insulation and channel to ground basic insulation 1500Vac for 1 minute 2500Vac for 1 minute gt 10 at 500V dc 65 3kQ gt 10 0 50V peak 150V with attenuator Open circuit detection applies only to 38mV and 150mV ranges Detection current Recognition time Minimum break resistance Long term drift typical 57nA max 500 5 10MQ Better than 0 03 of reading or whichever is greater over a three month period DC input ranges Shunt Additional error due to shunt Performance Externally mounted resistor modules 0 1 of input See table Maximum error Instrument at 20 deg C Typical error Instrument at 20 deg C Worst case temperature performance Resolution 0 013 input 0 031 range 0 030 input 0 052 range 25ppm of input per deg C 0 013 input 0 028 range 0 029 input 0 039 range 25ppm of input per deg C 0 013 input 0 024 range 0 029 input 0 029 range 25ppm of input per deg C 0 075 input 0 027 range 0 393 input 0 033 range 388 of input per deg Note The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above June 2007 For instruments p
451. lay zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 1 Absolute high 2 Deviation in 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall 2 Latched 3 Trigger Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Rea
452. le point to point application 5 Volts TxB Transmit lines Receiver from sender device TxA 100kQ 0 Volts Recorder Figure 4 3 15a Recorder termination single drop EIA485 application User Guide HAO28910 Page 146 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 CONNECTIONS Cont CONFIGURATION The default ASCII Serial comms configuration menu is as shown in figure 4 3 15b below Figures 4 3 15c and 4 3 15d show the alternative menus for Modbus slave and Modbus master selections respectively If the ASCII Printer Output option is fitted a fourth Protocol choice ASCII Printer appears see section 12 for details Note The serial communications hardware is limited to one start bit Port Serial 1 V Select port Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Protocol ASCII input _ Connection EIA232Y Baud Rate 19200Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 17 Select 1 or 2 Parity None V Select None Odd or Even Data Bits gw Select 7 or 8 Timeout 250 ms Enter required Timeout value First Start Char 0 Second Start Char 0 Enter decimal ASCII value between 0 and 127 0 no character First End 13 See User Guide section B6 for list Second End 10 Group 1y Group 2 Group 4 Select Group s to receive messages Group 4 lV Receive Group 5 Group 6 y Discard Appl
453. le unacknowledged latching alarm While unacknowledged non latching alarm ALARM MESSAGES Ackn owledge gt Job goes inactive even if alarm still active Active Alarm trigger Inactive On going active On going inactive On acknowledgement latching alarm Acknowledge B On acknowledgement non latching alarm Y Job triggers even if alarm not yet acknowledged i On acknowledgement latching alarm Acknowledge B Job triggers even if alarm still active On acknowledgement non latching alarm Y Figure 4 3 3g Graphical representation of job actions Alarm on off and alarm acknowledge message printing on the chart can be enabled disabled as a part of Group con figuration described below See section 3 1 4 for details on how to acknowledge alarms 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 81 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 4 Views Configuration This part of the recorder s configuration allows groups to be set up either individually or globally to include the vari ous display modes described in section 3 4 above and user screens if fitted When enabled a display mode is added to the Group s Goto View menu and to the up down arrow scroll list Home Group and Home Page picklists allow a group and display mode to be defined for display when
454. li dete ete tte a ee 253 Group horizontal cate Ai Lo ete tete epe tette e 253 FAA Group numeri display uoces er 254 7 4 5 Channel vertical horizontal bargraph 022 2 20 254 7 AsO Channel Blumeric i eto BER 254 7 4 7 Channel datas die eq eo De m e 254 FAB DialoguevACHom ioi tom Io LN Lo teca etes 254 TAD Navigation Action s 4 ecrire er Gin err ere pet 254 Z AAO Operator buoni eoa idest ted be qt 255 FAM EveritiButton ne poe Tte pa e 255 7 4 12 MAGE DER ede PARTEM 255 ZANO TEI c ri t det ee s etie cuo teu I bap DI Rp E DES 256 7 4 14 Round rectangle eie tetra eet eget dee de ee Ya 256 FAVS Cu 256 7 4 16 Polyline series of points 1 111 257 7 417 Polygon closed arei eee e Die ps eerte ee 258 er EM 259 TANG M M Mm 259 EXAMPLE 259 FADO e sidere o RO b er ette eed edes 260 EXAMPLE ree pene y aite pte RR Eb ER 260 7 5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS
455. llows the user to quit the search Start Once the search information has been entered operation of the Start key causes the unit to search for any instruments which respond to the search criteria Discard Returns to the Modbus configuration page without saving Apply Saves the details of the detected slaves to the Modbus configuration page The changes to the configuration page are temporary Re scan Allows the user to repeat the scan with the same or edited search criteria 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 153 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont AUTO DETECT PAGE The Autodetect page displays the progress of the search Once the search is complete the results are displayed as shown in figure 4 3 16c below For example the top two lines show that devices with Modbus addresses 1 and 2 were detected at IP address 149 121 130 211 For instrument types similar to those described in this manual the Instrument Descriptor is displayed in the list For other instruments if the type is recognised then the instrument type ID e g model number appears As can be seen from the figure the instrument descriptors for the first two detected instruments have been edited section 4 3 2 the second two have the default descriptor Instrument and the final one is a model 2747 Note The model number 2747 is used for illustrative purposes only If such an instrument type exists it
456. lock up vcd eie ee ce 344 Screen Uie e 239 x reet e eter ae me catback Sm atin 31 185 Multiply maths function 41 4 107 iiie cn tutte te cet Ed 255 N EVentlOQIC stati aie RT es 92 28 N Value ith e tr iib 246 Notes Messages 2 24 1 1 50 Name Files by 22 1 21 102 Option n pee etes 92 Display en Re HERR 181 375 Navigation 254 T 28 Network OR 92 Address Output Configuration menu 377 nhe e es 205 314 Boot fallure 16 Channel fette p Decree ns 196 Analogue outputs 2 170 User Guide 028910 392 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Output channel Cont Preset Cont Configuration 374 TotaliSOr z i et et EE eene 135 Default 188 JOD nsi aote tip HDi 213 Master COMMS 169 tenaci eau 187 CODY detected re He ce oe te cie loe e
457. losing the archive data 3 Centralised Security is active part of Security Management configuration section 4 4 2 Security Data is not selectable either for Restore or for New below 4 2 3 New Touching this item causes the factory entered default configuration to be loaded for use or for editing Operation of the New Default key completes the operation Tick boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data Security data note 3 above and Network data to be chosen for the restore default function only those items which are ticked are replaced by default values For recorders with the User Screens option section 7 a further tick box is displayed Screen Data 4 2 4 Text This is identical to the Save function described above but the configuration is saved in ASCII format and can be transferred to a computer and read printed etc as required It is not possible using this means to modify the configu ration and then re load it 4 2 5 Import screen This field appears only if the User Screens option section 7 is fitted and allows a previously exported User Screen file to be imported User Guide 28910 56 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 2 6 Export screen This field appears only if the User Screens option section 7 is fitted and allows a User Screen to be exported to a removable memory device or to the internal Flash memory The exported
458. ly Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA The following table shows addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for Maths channel 1 Generally Parameter address for channel Parameter address for channel 1 36 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter Description Access Start Addr Register Name Hex Dec Length Chl span high Upper span value Display full scale Read only DF73 57203 Chl span low Lower span value display 2 Read only DF75 57205 Chl Zone high Zone upper value 46 of chart width Read only DF77 57207 Chl Zone low Zone lower value of chart width Read only DF79 57209 Chl Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 see note Read Write DF7B 57211 Chl Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 see note Read Write DF7D 57213 Ch 1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 see note Read Write DF7F 57215 Ch 1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 see note Read Write DF81 57217 Spare DF83 57219 N N N NN
459. m switching power above to be exceeded DC load ratings Maximum switching power Maximum contact voltage current See graph 2 for operating volt Amp envelope See graph 2 for examples Safety isolation Isolation dc to 65 Hz BS 61010 Relay to relay Relay to ground Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 300V RMS or dc double insulation 300V RMS or dc basic insulation Max DC load breaking capacity F 300 1 0 9 200 0 8 E resistive load 2 0 7 5 100 rae 5 5 8 0 6 2 8 50 5 58 5 40 inductive loa B ed e 30 4 7 20mse 2 20 0 3 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 10 es 0102 051 2 5 20 DC current Amps Graph 1 Derating curves for ac loads Graph 2 DC load switching curves 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 349 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Event input board General Maximum number of event input boards Four Number of inputs per board Type of input Six Contact closure active closed or voltage level active low Recognition levels input to C terminal R contact resistance 30V to 0 8V or switch contacts closed R 35kQ 0 8V to 2 0V 35 lt R lt 200kQ 2V to 30V or switch contacts open R gt 200kQ Active Undefined Inactive Maximum frequency Minimum closure or pulse width Current sink for voltage inputs
460. mand Write Configuration described in section 4 3 18 Job Number 17 Category Demand writes Y Action Write V Acyclic 1 Write1 lt Select Required Write number On Active V amp Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 13 Demand write jobs menu layout 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 219 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 14 Alarm category This allows the user to set up a job to acknowledge or disable point alarms as follows Acknowledge AII Alarms Acknowledges all alarms Acknowledge Alarms on Group Acknowledges all alarms in the specified group Acknowledge Alarms on Point Acknowledges all alarms associated with the specified point Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges specific alarm Disable Alarms Disables all alarms Disable Alarms on Group Disables all alarms in the specified group Disable Alarms on Point Disables all alarms associated with the specified point Disable Alarm Disables a specific alarm Further selection boxes allow a group or point respectively to be defined Job Number 17 Category Alarm Y Action Acknowledge Alarms on Group Group 1 Group _ Select Required Group or point On Acknowledgement Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Select required Acknowledge or Disable function Figure 4 7 14 Alarm job menu layout 4 7 15 Archive category Archive jobs allow a job to be used t
461. matically when the Security Manager detects that a local change has occurred or manually as and when required 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 193 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Login by User List This checkbox appears if either of the Auditor options and or the Security management option is fitted When enabled the normal login window appears with a pull down list of users Once a user has been selected the correct password for that user must be entered in order to log in When disabled the user must enter a user name and associated password in order to log in Select the required access level and enter the password if required User ID Logged out V Login By User List enabled Type in your user ID and a password if required User ID Login By User List not enabled User Guide Page 194 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 3 Add user Figure 4 4 3 shows that the selecting of Add User from the SECURITY picklist allows new user IDs to be entered together with passwords and a chosen set of access permissions which can subsequently be edited under Security Access The ADD key and the APPLY key must both be used to write the change to the recorder data base The user must have Full Security access in order to add a new user If either Audi
462. meter above Allows name for the current user screen to be entered in Main This name appears at the top of the screen and in the Screen number picklist for navigation action buttons For navigation action buttons allows a screen to be selected When the button is operated the instru ment will switch to the selected display screen When set to Yes group displays e g Group Vertical Trend display a title bar across the top of the component giving the selected group s descriptor Selecting Show Title Bar to No removes the title bar from the display Start Angle For Arcs only defines a start point for Arc Angle above See figure2 4 20a for definitions Text Allows a text string to be entered for display at the screen The hash key may not be used in text messages Width The width of a component measured rightwards from the component s X position Negative values measure leftwards X points Defines the X co ordinates for polylines and polygons Must match the number of Y points for correct interpretation X position Distance between the left edge of the screen and the left edge of the component Y points Defines the Y co ordinates for polylines and polygons Must match the number of X points for correct interpretation Y position Distance between the top edge of the screen and the top edge of the component Table 7 3 1 Basic level parameters sheet 2 of 2 User Guide 028910 246
463. missions set for the login See section 4 4 2 for details of the Auditor options PERFORM UPGRADES Upgrade appears in the system menu only for access levels in which this box is ticked Section 4 6 3 contains further details Trial mode section 4 3 21 can be enabled disabled only by users with Perform Upgrades permission EVENT PERMISSION 1 If this is enabled then this login will trigger an event source which remains active for as long as the login is active See section 4 3 6 Event Sources User Logged In for further details EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5 As for Event permission 1 above EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT Appears only if the Master Comms and or Analogue output option is fitted When enabled this allows a user with this login to edit the default value of any output channel Normally the defaults are used only when the source channel is Error ACTION DEMAND WRITES Appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted See section 4 3 16 and section 4 3 18 for further details When enabled this allows a user with this login to write values manually over master comms either directly by job action or if the option is fitted by using the User Screens Operator key Where Demand Writes are initiated by Job action the job will be carried out whether or not this login has permission to action Demand Writes Note When Audit trail is enabled only the newly written value appears in the audit trail messages This is be
464. must be in a group which is not the source group If this is not the case it will always see itself as the lowest valued point in the group and Reset operations will have no useful effect As for Group Latched Minimum above but outputs the maximum value of the source group This function is initiated by a trigger job At trigger time the selected point value is sampled and its value at trigger time is output continuously by this function On reset the PV becomes data Outputs the square root of the value of the selected point Allows two points to be selected as inputs The output of the function is the value of that input point which currently has the higher value Allows two points to be selected as inputs The output of the function is the value of that input point which currently has the lower value Calculates mass flow in kg s for saturated steam using either the steam temperature Celsius or pressure MPa as appropriate to the process Calculates the energy flow in kJ s for saturated steam using either the steam temperature Celsius or pressure MPa as appropriate to the process Saturated Steam Heat Consumed Calculates the heat consumed in kJ s for saturated steam using the inlet steam temperature Celsius or pressure MPa as appropriate to the process and the return condensate tempera ture Group MKT Calculates Mean Kinetic Temperature of a specified group of channels User Guide 028910
465. n above this allows driver uhi files for new printer types to be imported either via the Compact Flash SD card or USB memory stick or if the Bridge Full option is fitted directly from the host PC See section 12 for further details Note Imported printer drivers do not become effective until after the next configuration Apply operation 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 57 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Touching this key calls the top level configuration pick list Instrument Messages Connections Groups User Linearisations Master Comms Channels Batch Output Channels Views Maths Demand Writes Archive Totalisers Emails Events Counters Reports Event Buttons Timers Notes 1 Figure 4 3b gives an overview of the configuration menus 2 Ifan option is not fitted it does not appear in the above list When making changes to the configuration the name of each changed parameter is displayed in red instead of the nor mal black until the Apply Discard key has been operated For example in channel configuration if a thermocouple were to be changed from Type J to Type would appear in red until the Apply key is operated Should an attempt be made to leave configuration with unsaved changes a warning message appears allowing the user to apply the changes to discard the changes or to return to configuration Cancel D
466. n When naming Bridge files the extension uhv must be used 2 If there is no DNS server associated with the system the IP address found in the recorder Network Ad dress area should be used instead 3 The PC locale setting e g Daylight Saving Time must match that set in the recorder System Locale the displayed time will be incorrect 4 Ifan attempt is made to start the program whilst another user is configuring the recorder a Feature Locked message appears Another client instrument has locked this feature Retrying until successful appears As soon as the other client Saves the new recorder configuration this message disappears and the program continues its startup Enter the user name as entered in the recorder s Security Access Remote user name field section 6 4 3 If password entry is not required disable the tick box goes blank then press Start to start running the program If a password entry is required ensure that the password required tick box is enabled tick visible Press Start then enter the password as entered in the Security Access Remote User Name Remote password field followed by car riage return to start running the program Clicking Start as Lite allows the user to select the View only version of Bridge This has the advantage of faster operation d Bridge Configuration Host 149 121 130 232 User name Engineer Password requir
467. n 2 63 Vertical bargraph 2 253 Configuration menu 370 Data MODBUS utto toss 272 H LU ee 63 Handshake 329 M 196 Hardware 211 Variant 211 246 Insufficient non volatile 16 High Priority 151 Internal flash application required 16 High Slate ceste easiest edo URS nubit 108 Internal flash user is full emen 16 HIStory mcr D ntu utu MN DE eL UM 384 Internal flash user required repair 16 Amount of ee d 36 69 Internal flash screens 16 36 Interval recording 69 Interval 2 218 GIOUD ace E oped ee ote 82 Invalid multiple register writes 263 t e RE De PEE gd 28 Invalid Password Entry 91 Page Display 83 Invalid Selection 2 41211 70 E atone III AE REP 82 uiuit edente 196 Horizontal 196 APTE E 249 Manual entry eese 196 d Cert ek 251 Modbus
468. n 3 3 1 for text entry techniques TREND TYPE This allows the selection of Adaptive Recording for vertical and horizontal trend modes The purpose of adaptive re cording is to ensure that rapid short duration spikes for example are represented on the chart even at low trend speeds This allows the user to extend the total amount of history stored in the recorder by using slow trend speeds without losing transient data The adaptive recording method works by measuring the input signal at the normal 125 msec period and saving the maximum and minimum values continuously over the period of trend update When the trend is updated both maxi mum and minimum values are traced on the chart i e two traces are produced for each channel in the group The faceplates and pen positions are still updated every second as normal Notes During the period between updates the maximum and minimum values are shown on the trend as a hori zontal line just beneath the pen where the ends of the line represent the minimum and maximum values so far This line is removed at trend update time 2 Adaptive recording takes twice as much memory as normal recording so to maintain the total amount of history stored the trend speed must be reduced to 50 of that which would be used for non adaptive re cording 3 In Trend History mode both minimum and maximum values for the cursor position are shown on the faceplate See section 3 4 1 for a descriptio
469. n alarm clears before the dwell period has expired the alarm is ignored For Deviation alarms this is the central value of the deviation band For Deviation alarms this value defines the width of the deviation band each side of the reference value LE the total width of the deviation band is 2 x Deviation value For Rate of change alarms this value defines the minimum amount by which the signal value would have to change within the Change Time period below in order for the alarm to become active For Rate of change alarms this selects the time period Per second Per minute Per hour within which the change in signal value must exceed the Amount value entered in the preceding field in order for the alarm to become active See Rate of Change example below for more details For rate of change alarms this allows an average period to be entered for signal smoothing HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE Threshold 100 units Hysteresis 5 units With the above settings an absolute high alarm would become active if its input were to rise above 100 and would remain active until its value fell to below 95 units An absolute low alarm would become active if its input fell below 100 units and would remain active until its input rose above 105 units Deviation alarms behave in a similar manner RATE OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE Rate of change alarms allow the user to enter an amount say 3 degrees and a time period say 1 minute and if the process val
470. n of trend history Figure 4 3 2b shows the difference between normal and adaptive recording at slow trend rates Note that rapid changes in signal such as those shown in the circled area of the actual signal are largely filtered out by Normal Tracing but is displayed by the Adaptive Trace Figure 4 3 2b is for illustrative purposes only as traces such as these could never appear on the chart together Actual input signal Normal trace Figure 4 3 2b Adaptive recording compared with Normal tracing User Guide HAO28910 Page 66 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont A B SWITCHING If enabled this function allows alternative values for Trend speed interval and Recording speed interval to be entered values are used during normal operation values are switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 TREND SPEED TREND INTERVAL Allows the chart speed to be selected either as mm or in per hour or as an interval Entering a value in one field auto matically converts the value in the other field A trend interval of N seconds is equivalent to 1200 N mm hr chart speed a chart speed of P mm hr is equivalent to a trend interval of 1200 P seconds If A B switching is enabled a second Trend Speed Interval value can be entered Trend Speed Interval A is used during normal operation
471. n section 4 2 above Without this permission the SAVE RESTORE key does not appear PASTE DELETE FILES Allows each user with this permission enabled to Paste and Delete files as described in section 5 FULL CONFIGURATION Allows each user with this permission enabled full access the recorder configuration FULL SECURITY Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to all recorder security functions BATCH CONTROL This field appears only if the Batch Option section 4 3 10 is fitted Allows the user to enter batch data and to start stop and create new batches If this access permission is set Enter Batch Data below is automatically enabled and cannot be disabled 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 187 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont CAN SIGN This appears only if the Auditor 21 CFR11 option is fitted If the field is enabled it allows the user to change the con figuration of the recorder according to the other permissions set for the login providing the security management system Require Authorization is not enabled If it is changes can be made only if the correct password for a user with Authorize permission is entered See section 4 4 2 for details CAN AUTHORIZE This appears only if the Auditor 21 CFR11 option is fitted If the field is enabled it allows the user to change the con figuration of the recorder according to the per
472. nable Demand Type Master Comms v 59160 Master Status OK Demand Write Slave 1 Furn 1 Recorder v 510 destination Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 4 00 parameter Point Type TA Select destination Point Number Descriptor Write 1 Source Constant Defaulto Enter default value Allow Constant Edits amp Allows user to edit the constant prior i If enabled the default value is written should On Error Write Default the selected source be in an Error state Disable Retries 4 if enabled the write is attempted only once Send On Power Up 4 Write is triggered when the unit powers up Apply Discard Figure 4 3 18a Typical Demand write configuration page 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 171 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 DEMAND WRITES Cont CONFIGURABLE ITEMS Write number Enable Demand Type Status Slave Parameter Allows the user to select the Demand Write number to be configured Allows the user to enable disable the write Select Master Comms or Off Shows the status of the transaction The meaning of most status strings are self evident the remaining ones have the following definitions OK Transaction was carried out and a satisfactory response has been received Idle Appears only before the first Write following a power cycle or
473. nabled or disabled Select Master Comms Select the slave to be written to Select required parameter from picklist varies according to slave type model If this field appears depends on slave type the Low and High scaling should match that of the slave Channel being written to Allows a point type to be chosen from a picklist Picklist items vary according to slave type model For recorders allows a point number to be entered This point must be configured as Comms or Slave Comms etc depending on slave type or model at the slave For Controllers allows a loop number to be selected from a picklist Allows the selection of High Medium or Low priority interval as defined in the Master Comms configuration page in section 4 3 16 Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel name This allows the user to select the source point to be written to the slave destination point This is the value written if the source is in Error and the On error Write Default item below has been enabled If this item is enabled the default value is written instead of the selected Source if the Source is in Error 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 169 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 17 OUTPUT CHANNELS Cont ANALOGUE OUTPUTS RETRANSMISSION For Analogue outputs this feature allows the user to direct any recorder point to a pair of re
474. nction Code Register Data Type Scaling Shows the value returned from the selected register as modified by the scaling factor if any Allows Modbus function code 03 or 04 to be selected In some implementations the functions of the two codes are identical In others the codes have different functions See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes For this instrument see section 8 2 1 A decimal number representing the required parameter s location in the slave s Modbus Register map This information must be determined from the documentation supplied with the slave For this instru ment section 8 4 contains listings for a number of instrument groups and input channels For details of maths totalisers etc refer to the relevant option description Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter again from the slave documentation For this instrument a list of relevant data types is given in section 8 4 Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent If scaling is required the choice may be Decimal Places or High Low again according to Model Decimal Places allows a dividing factor to be entered An entry of 1 divides the returned value by 10 An entry of 2 divides by 100 etc for successful implementation there must be a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the Decimal Digits configuration field for the value to be displayed with the
475. nd the counter value is appended to the text associated with Field 1 See section 4 3 13 for details of counters Note Start batch is initiated on any change in counter value not just increment FIELDS 2 TO 6 Fields 2 to 6 are also used as headings for batch information Values for these headings must be entered by the operator prior to Batch initiation See also new clear below Headings can be up to 20 characters long including spaces ON START LOG This defines how many of the selected Fields are to be printed at batch start An entry of 1 means that only Field 1 will be printed An entry of 2 means that Fields 1 and 2 will be used and so on An entry of 0 means that only the Batch Start message will be printed It is not possible to print only say Field 3 If Field 3 is required it must be preceded by Fields 1 and 2 ON STOPLOG As for On start log above but for batch stop This item appears only if Start Stop is selected as batch mode ON NEW CLEAR For Use Text Batches only this allows the user to clear none or more of the batch entries at each batch start In the example above if the user enters a batch number of say 050825 001 with Customer Name FishesRus Operator name Marvin Supervisor Fred then setting On New Clear to 1 causes the batch number to be cleared and to have to be re entered each time a new batch is started In a similar way setting On New Clear to 2 m
476. nded to be illustrative and only to explain angles in terms of a normal analogue clock face It does not mean that this position must actually be noon or midnight in real time User Guide HAO28910 Page 40 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 CIRCULAR TREND Cont 06 04 05 10 00 10 30 Figure 3 4 3a Circular trend New chart mode NORMAL VIEW Normal view is available only for large frame recorders also small frame recorders when viewed via Bridge software As shown in figure 3 4 6b below this provides a view of the chart together with scale chart speed message bar and navigation keys The figure shows a view with faceplates selected on 11 05 33 EIS urnace 1 Temp 13 897 3476 C 1 hr rev 1500 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 1500 000 06 04 05 10 10 Chart Speed 1125 0956 C Scale for left half Los 44 05 Scale for right of chart N half of chart 1113 9806 C Full Screen 06 04 05 11 007 N 06 04 05 2 10 20 Furnace 1 Te 1200 9456 C 06 04 05 10 55 06 04 05 10 25 Flow 1 1365 211 06 04 05 10 50 06 04 05 10 30 4 1299 65l hr Chart Full scale 06 04 05 10 45 06 04 05 10 35 06 04 05 10 40 989 54l hr 06 04 05 11 07 52 Engineer Restarted 11 07 Figure 3 4 3b Circular Trend normal view with faceplates 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 41 100 180 PAPE
477. nels totalisers etc The following types are used in the tables 16 bit unsigned integer 32 bit unsigned integer 64 bit unsigned integer Double precision floating point value scaled to represent single precision 16 bit integer between 32 767 and 32 767 Represented as a single 16 bit integer Enumeration value represented by a single 16 bit character 16 32 and 64 bit 2 s complement signed integers Uintl6 2 Uint32 3 Uint64 4 Scaled 5 Boolean 6 Enum 7 Note When reading a Process Variable PV values as scaled integers the position of the decimal point is set by the Max Decimal Digits parameter in the relevant Channel s Configuration Only if the resulting value can be represented within 16 bit resolution 32767 will the value be transmitted accurately For example a value of 12 3456 needs more than 16 bit resolution and the transmitted value would be the maximum value of 32767 over range Reducing the number of decimal places to three for example 12 345 allows the value to be encoded as a 16 bit value which can be transmitted accurately 8 4 1 Instrument data Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Instrument type Instrument descriptor Reserved Instrument status Config counter Time Date Global alarm acknowledge A value of 1 acknowledges all alarms Other values no effect Uint16 Write only 0020 32 Spare Pr
478. nent picklist field and select Component propery Editor Screen 7 other bargraph Add Dei Copy ch hor bar 4 2 NND Identifier Bar 2 19 In a similar way to that described for Bar 1 Last Error a enter the identifier 2 Channel 2 Channel 2 Y b select Channel 2 from the picklist X Position 0 Y c enter a Y value of 12 Y Position 12 7 Y d enter width 10046 height 1096 Width 1000 Y Height 10 20 Similarly configure Bar 3 and Bar 4 using the Background Forground Colour 1 appropriate Y values 24 and 36 and Channel Draw Order 1 selection 3 and 4 Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph ch hor bar Goto Canvas Save Close More 2 Finally press Save then Close to reveal the display page cc nn n Channel 1 0 4187c 0 0000 1 0000 Channel 2 0 3316 E 0 0000 1 0000 3 0 1427 lt es 0 0000 5 1 0000 Channel 4 0 6293 DII c as 0 0000 I 1 0000 SSS S 0 187 0 0000 0 2000 0 4000 0 6000 0 8000 1 0000 13 59 02 11 07 06 Figure 7 2 3d Complete user screen User Guide HA028910 Page 242 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE Cont In order to provide a degree of contrast the background colour of the Main page can be changed to a darker colour as shown for colour 22 in figure 7 2 3e below Figure 7 2 3f
479. nnection EIA232Y Baud Rate 192007 Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 17 Select 1 or 2 Parity None Y Select None Odd or Even Apply Discard Port Serial 1 Y Select port Online Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Protocol ASCII Printer Connection EIA232Y Baud Rate 9600 Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1Y Select 1 or 2 Parity Even V Select None Odd or Even Printer Type Star TSP600 Vj Select printer type Printer Name Star TSP600 0 Printer Status Not Responding Printer Test Print Messages From 1 Group 1Y Messages To Print System _ Alarms Power Up _ ASCII Printer General Batches Section 12 Logins Signings Audit Trail lV Print these messages Apply Discard Modbus Master Section 4 3 15 Port Serial 1 Y Select port Link Error Count o Reset Error Count Protocol Modbus Master Connection EIA232Y Baud Rate 192007 Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 17 Select 1 or 2 Parity None V Select None Odd or Even Timeout 1000 lt Enable error code B Enable Talk Through _ Apply Discard Figure B9g Config menu structure sheet 4 HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 373 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont
480. nput coefficients are stored in EEPROM on the input board Instrument configuration is held in FLASH memory and has no effect on calibration coefficients User Guide Page 344 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Universal input board For small frame recorders only General Termination Max number of inputs Large frame Input ranges Input types Input type mix Sample rate Noise rejection 48 to 62Hz Common mode Series mode Maximum common mode voltage Maximum series mode voltage Isolation dc to 65Hz BS 61010 Dielectric strength Channel to ground Channel to channel Insulation resistance Input impedance Overvoltage protection Small frame 20V range Other ranges For input recorders up to four option boards may be fitted Edge connector terminal block 18 three 6 input boards 48 eight 6 input boards 38mV 150mV 1Volt 20 Volts Dc volts dc millivolts dc milliamps with external shunt thermocouple 2 3 wire resistance temperature detector RTD Ohms Contact closure not channels 1 7 13 19 25 31 37 43 Minimum contact closure 6Omsec For 12 input recorders up to four option boards may be fitted For 18 channel recorders up to two option boards may be fitted Freely configurable See Update information above gt 140dB Channel to channel and channe
481. nstrument groups and input channels For details of maths totalisers etc refer to the relevant option description Data Type Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter again from the slave documentation For this instrument a list of relevant data types is given in section 8 4 028910 User Guide Page 173 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 DEMAND WRITES Cont WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Scaling Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent If scaling is required the choice may be Decimal Places or High Low again according to Model Decimal Places allows a dividing factor to be entered An entry of 1 divides the returned value by 10 An entry of 2 divides by 100 etc for successful implementation there must be a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the Max Decimal Digits configuration field for the value to be displayed with the required precision None leaves the returned value unchanged None leaves the returned value unchanged For some slaves scale zero scale low is returned as value 0 and full scale scale high as value 65 535 Hex with intermediate values having proportionate values For example the value 15 would be represented as 32 767 7FFF for a channel scale 0 to 30 as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100 and a value of 45 for
482. ntal bargraph display dual HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 47 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 DISPLAY MODES Cont 3 4 6 Numeric Entered from Horizontal bargraph mode by means of the down arrow key or selected using the Root Menu Goto View key this display mode shows the Process Variable PV values as digital values The format which is automatically selected is based on the number of channels in the display group Figures 3 4 6a 3 4 6b and 3 4 6c show typical large frame examples of the one two and three column versions of this display mode respectively Within each ver sion the process variable display areas expand or contract to fill the screen Trend history mode is not available from this display mode A further operation of the down arrow key returns to Vertical Trend Display mode described in section 3 4 1 above or if user screens are fitted and enabled to the first user screen section 7 Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes section 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Menu Goto View key 2 11 54 50 Channel 4 22 1 Rc Nd AY 700 87 487 39 235 68 378 99 0 49 2 Channel 3 Channel4 Channel 5 Figure 3 4 6a Numeric display mode 1 to 5 channels example Note Figures 3 4 6a b and c apply to the large frame instrument For the small frame instrument the single
483. nter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write 6 39
484. nts Event Buttons Messages User Linearisations Batch Maths Totalisers Counters Timers Connections Master Comms Output Channels Demand Writes Emails Reports Timer number 1 Timer 1 y Enable Remaining 00 00 00 Repeat in 100 00 00 Options Scope Group v Group 1 Group1 vj Show Batch Entry List E Enable Iw Batch mode Start Stop Batch fields 4Y Maths Number 1 1 Value 32 65 Mins Reset now Function fValue Y Field 1 Batch Number Batch field 1 Use Counter V Counter Counter 1 V Sterilizing Temp 121 1 Temperature interval 10 Low cut off 75 Units Mins Field 2 Customer Fvalue of Channel 1 Reset button appears only for resettable functions Descriptor Fo 1 Batch Field 3 Operator Name Switching _ Scale Low 0 Section 4 3 10 Field 4 Supervisor On start log 4y On stop log 17 On new clear 1 Y Name files by batch y Apply 4 Discard Timers Section 4 3 14 Counters Section 4 3 13 Reset now Counter number 1 Counter 1 Y Start now Enable 7 Descriptor Timer Value OFF Units Self start W Units Units Date Units Month AnyY sp Minute enabled Descriptor Counter 1 Second A B Switching Duration so Seconds Scale Low 0 Units Repeat after
485. nu If the Bridge level displayed does not match the currently value if displayed operation of the Autoconfigure key will add the option to the database If all options are correctly entered the Currently fields and the Autoconfigure key do not appear Trial Mode Disabled Trial Time Remaining 30 day s Fitted channels 0 v Virtual channels 36 V 12 y Maths Totalisers 1 N 4 Counters Groups Batch Enabled Check that the Bridge Security Manager Disabled V level is correct If not press Autoconfigure i Auditor 21 11 Screen Builder Full Bridge Level Full 7 arrently Lite Master Comms Devices 32 V Simulation Enabled 7 currently c sabled Apply 1 Discard Autoconfigure Figure 6 4 2 Options menu UserGuide HAO28910 Page 228 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 4 3 Access Each of the access levels and user IDs can have Connect from Remote access enabled When this box is checked password entry fields appear as shown in figure 6 4 3 Initially the Remote User Name is the same as the login name or access level Enter the required User name and password then re type the password to ensure it was entered cor rectly This name and password are required when establishing connection with the host computer Notes 1 Ifthe Auditor 21CF
486. nu Goto View key 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 39 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 Circular Trend This allows up to 12 points to be traced as though on a circular chart More than 12 points can be included in the group but only the first 12 traces and their associated faceplates are included in the real time display Entering Trend History mode by using the Options button or by continuously touching the screen for a few seconds allows all the points to be reviewed but only in vertical trend history mode described in section 3 4 1 above For large frame recorders two alternative views called Full Screen and Normal View are available and are toggled between by means of a push button key near the top left corner of the screen In each case faceplates can be displayed or not as required using the Option key Faceplates On Off selection The diameter of the chart is independent of faceplate on off selection When quitting History Normal view is always returned to Small frame recorders use only full screen view except when viewed via Bridge software when the small frame recorder behaves in the same way as the large frame recorder Notes Alarm icons section 3 do not appear on circular trend scales TREND MODES The way in which traces are laid down on the chart depends on the action to be taken when the chart is full as set up in group configuration section 4 3 2 Th
487. number of minor scale divisions to be specified for the channel Overwrites the Scale Divisions Minor setting in the Channel s configuration Scale style Scale on bar No Text Decimal scale Default Horizontal Bargraph Horizontal Faceplate Vertical bargraph See the figure below for clarification For vertical bargraphs only Produces scale tick marks but without values For bargraphs produces scale with 9 divisions 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of scale width Zero and full scale values printed For Horizontal bargraphs each scale division has 4 minor divisions 0 20 40 60 80 100 of major division Uses scale information from each point s scale configuration As default for horizontal bargraphs Produces faceplate display with scale end points descriptor digital value and alarm indicator As default for vertical bargraphs The examples below are alternatives only one style can be chosen for each group bargraph display 800 00 760 00 720 00 680 00 640 00 600 00 800 00 100 100 100 767 00 90 90 90 733 00 700 00 667 00 633 00 60 60 60 600 00 50 50 50 800 00 800 00 80 80 80 70 70 70 560 00 567 00 40 40 533 00 400 00 400 00 Scale on bar Value 10 Scale on bar Left Value 12 Vertical Bargraph Centre Decimal scale Scale on bar Percent Right
488. o DNS server is connected to the network or neither the DNS Primary nor secondary server can be found it can take up to four minutes for the system to timeout During this period the recorder s user interface touchscreen will not respond User Guide HAO28910 Page 198 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 SYSTEM 9945 nokoj uoupunByuoo ueisAg 09 pjeosiq y iui snapoy z snapoy 2 8201 8201 eI qeuoeeu ISOH 5 139 1105 4 APS did ejoueg 5 4 21105 L7G 1 4S46 N8OM 2028 1 suondo Mau 2 9 866 9 QUUBYD 99 11 21 lt 0 0 2 10005 9 JauUBYD 99 11 21 GO PO ZL A 10005 9 9 10005 pieosiq Ajddy 97 uonoes GS L LZE SO FO C ewo ejeq sonsouDeiq
489. o LR 206 Pressure unit conversion 4 119 219 Preventive maintenance 356 OWall 259 Primary OVE Sie s TA HD dq p 33 DNS diete dedu 198 Oxygen Login iet tene e ea 88 Correction 109 124 Remote anime tne 88 TT T 126 128 Print Messages 322 Printed ecce deeem ete te fet ges 28 P Printer eoruin utet 2 246 Driver importing 325 Page Up dOWN KeyS quer us Eis 28 NS RSS 322 Paint ot respondlrig s custo toe Oe e itat 17 Are E pee 250 br MN RUM M ME 322 Backgrou rid baa eae 250 Supply Wiring 320 Paper Low message 17 Switch settings iUe 329 Paper Out 17 HOST sees E 322 Parametere 157 159 172 D ashe ete 322 Parity a n Sotal prior 152 PasSWOIQ un unice eie E UE 185 Properties page User screens 238 Change on expiry 193 Protocol
490. o Lan guage and Country selections Country Date display Language 01 05 06 01 05 2006 1 05 06 1 05 2006 01 05 06 01 05 2006 01 05 06 1 May 06 06 05 01 06 05 01 01 05 06 1 mai 06 01 05 06 01 05 2006 1 5 06 1 mei 06 01 05 06 1 Mag 06 01 05 2006 1 Mai 06 06 05 01 2006 05 01 1 05 06 01 may 06 01 05 06 1 mai 06 01 05 06 01 05 2006 01 05 06 1 mag 06 01 05 06 01 May 06 United States 5 1 06 01 May 06 Uruguay 01 05 06 01 05 2006 Table 4 6 2 Date format examples HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 201 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 3 Upgrade This allows 1 New options to be enabled by the entering of Key Code and or 2 The recorder operating software to be upgraded by reading a file from Compact Flash SD card or other local or remote source Instrument Number 8203 Key Code WC8N 9F5E 1D41 Key Code File Source Files From Remote FTP Site Y Upgrade Upgrade software Add new options Apply Discard Figure 4 6 3a Upgrade menu Instrument Number This number must be quoted when ordering upgrades It is unique to the instrument and is not user editable Key Code If the relevant key code is known it can be entered manually using this field Key Code File If Key Code File is selected the first line of the file must be the Key Code To select the file for reading the Key Code File field is touched to display the
491. o trigger an archive to the instrument s mass storage medium or to a host computer using FTP transfer The following jobs are available Archive Last Hour Last Day Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to FTP Bring FTP archive up to date Cancel Archive to FTP Archive Last Hour Last Day Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to Local device Bring Media Archive up to date Suspend Archive to Media Cancel Archive to Media These jobs copy the archiving functions available from the Archive key described in section 4 1 of this document For FTP items see Remote archiving for Media see Local Archive Job Number 17 Category Archive Y Action Bring Media Archive Up to Date Ye Select required Archive function On AcknowledgementY lt Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 15 Archive jobs menu layout User Guide HAO28910 Page 220 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 16 Email category Allows the user to send a specified e mail to the recipients set up in e mail configuration see section 4 3 19 A system message is generated and displayed in all recording groups whenever an e mail is sent 4 7 17 Report category Category Report v Send Report to Group 4 Select Group or printer if fitted If destination Group Group 3 Furnace 3 select destination group Report 2 Current temps Va select the report to be sent Sel
492. oct t be tee he bate ae Eee D TUN 312 8 5 3 Function code 06 312 C TEE RERUMS 312 dedo cL 312 EXCEPTION RESPONSES 312 Cont 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page xi 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 8 5 4 Function code 08 1 253 d iet c RE ER eee E UR RR RU Sdn 312 8 5 5 Function code 16 Fex ha et rele tries 313 EN 313 RESPONSE tetto S P DOOR ei a 313 EXCEPTION RESPONSES 2 rt trate te ta e rupes ha ee e cue dorado 313 9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION 6 lt 314 9T SIGNAL WIRING iot ee tet et e Cb e ce Una 3l4 9 2 SPECIFICATION 222325 te e E Roe Eos 3l4 9 39 CONFIGURATION eerte i ee dead aad 3l4 94 OUTPUT ADJUST t t ee tente t pee ir ee SS 3l4 9 4 1 Adjustment procedure 2 1 1 02020 00000 000 00000 314 9 4 2 Adjustment removal ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeem eene 314 EVENT INPUT OPTION 316 25 ete
493. oduct version Serial number Not used Company ID Product ID Instrument type number Uint16 Read only 0001 1 1 Instrument descriptor up to 20 characters String 20 Read only 0002 2 10 Not used 000C 12 10 Uint16 Read only 0016 22 1 Bit 0 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 1 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 2 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 3 0 SD Flash card inserted 1 Missing Read only Bit 4 0 SD Flash card not full 1 Full Read only Bit 5 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 6 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 7 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 8 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 9 0 No channel failures 1 channel failure Read only Bits 10 to 15 Not used value always 0 Read only Counts configuration changes Powers up at zero Uint16 Read only 0017 23 and is reset to zero at brown out Current instrument time UTC format Double Read only 0018 24 Current instrument date Double Read only 001C 28 Not used 0021 33 Product version Returns value HHHH CNOMO int 16 Read only 006B 107 HHHH version number in hex E G 0401 version 4 01 Returns Instrument Number see Section 4 5 in decimal int32 Read only 006 108 006 110 Company ID Returns value hex 0500 CNOMO int 16 Read only 0079 121 Product ID Returns model number in hex CNOMO int 16 Read only 007A 122 CNOMO Comit de normalisation d
494. of a channel taken at N second intervals where R and N can be defined by the user At initiation up to the time of the first sample reading the displayed value is the average of the channel sampled every iteration i e at 8 Hz The number of readings over which the average can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM instantaneously available and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available see section 3 1 3 for details Maths Number 4 Math 4 Y Value OFF Reset now Function Rolling Average Y Average of Channel 1Y Number of samples 10 Sample Interval 60 S Figure 4 3 11f Rolling average menu MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE MKT MKT is defined as the isothermal temperature that corresponds to the kinetic effects of time temperature distribution The recorder calculates MKT using the equation below AH _ _ AH 1 7 2 where T The required mean kinetic temperature in Kelvins AH The heat of activation universal gas constant Tmax highest temperature reached during the first measurement period in Kelvins T mn The lowest temperature reached during the first measurement period in Kelvins The highest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period in Kelvins
495. olean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 Double String_60 U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String_60 String_60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String_60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write A4D6 42198 A4D7 42199 A4D9 42201 A4DB 42203 A4E5 42213 A4EF 42223 A4FO 42224 42225 AAF2 42226 AAF3 42227 A4F4 42228 4 5 42229 A4F6 42230 AAF7 42231 A4E8 42232 A4F9 42233 A4FA 42234 42235 A4FC 42236 4 42237 AAFE 42238 AAFF 42239 A500 42240 A504 42244 A522 42274 A540 42304 ASSE
496. onfig menu structure sheet 6 HA028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 375 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Network System Figure Figure Figs B9d Figure Figure B9b B9c to 9 B9l m Login Security Access section 4 4 Management Add User Remove User Remove user section 4 4 4 User User Full Name Apply Discard Add user section 4 4 3 NewUserID NewFulUsername NewPassword Retype Password Based On Operatory Add Apply Discard Management section 4 4 2 Record Logins W Login 1 Minutes with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Y Password Attempts 3times V Passwords Expire 30 Days Minimum Password Length Require Signing Require Authorization Enable Audit Trail Password Change on Expiry Centralised Security Login By User List W Apply KK ie Discard Figure B9j Security key menu structure Access section 4 4 1 Access when New Password Retype Password Connect from remote Remote user name Remote password Retype remote password Login Disabled Edit own Password Change Alarm Setpoints Acknowledge Alarms Edit Maths Constant Reset Maths Preset Totalisers Preset Counters Start Reset Timers Set Clock Adjust I O
497. onfiguration section 4 4 1 865 Ping Status Host Reachable v Local Modbus Client 1 127 0 0 1 7 Local Modbus Client 2 Offline 0 Remote Modbus Client 1 149 121 130 242 Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline 0 Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline Remote Modbus Client 4 192 168 189 89 Figure 4 6 7 Ethernet Diagnostics display Host Allows the IP address or DNS Name of the host to be Pinged Ping Status Indicates the latest status returned see table 4 6 7 below for details Ping Now Operating this button causes an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP command to be sent to the host If the host receives the message it returns a message to the sender within a few seconds Local Modbus Client Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled Indicates that the local Modbus Master is connected Remote Modbus Client Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled Displays the IP address of connected Modbus TCP IP clients Otherwise Offline is displayed Displayed Status Interpretation Waiting The default status displayed on power up In Progress Displayed whilst waiting for a response from the host Host Reachable A device was found at the specified address Ping Error in value Host refused to allow socket connection on the defined Ping Port Request Timed Out Unable to reach a host at the specified network address Host Unreachable Unable to reach a host at the specified network a
498. ons board option ASCII input Modbus Slave Modbus Master or ASCII Printer protocols are available CONNECTION Allows EIA232 or EIA485 to be selected as transmission standard BAUD RATE Allows a Baud rate to be chosen from a picklist of 300 600 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link STOP BITS Selectable as 1 or 2 This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link PARITY Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of None Odd Even This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link DATA BITS For ASCII input protocol only selectable as 7 or 8 This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link TIMEOUT For ASCII input protocol this allows a timeout value to be entered of between 50 and 3000 msec inclusive value of 0 no timeout See also Messaging Information below For Modbus Master protocol this allows a timeout to be entered of between 100 and 9 999 msec inclusive An error code B is generated if so configured see Enable Error Code below If the master has not received a reply to a request within the timeout period For slaves configured with their own timeout periods these will override the entry here MESSAGE START END CHARACTERS For ASCII input protocol only the message can be prefixed by 0 1 or 2 specific characters and be suffixed by 0 1 or 2 specific characters The First and Second
499. oordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear in whatever units 76 pixels etc are selected for the component Clicking the left mouse key outside a component shows the co ordinates of the mouse cursor tip To see these co ordinates within a component the mouse must be click dragged from outside the component User Guide 028910 240 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 Screen creation example To produce a new display screen with channels one to four inclusive each displayed as an independent bar graph across the width of the screen with Group 1 vertical trend display below To achieve the above the following items will be required peser EX Barl Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 0 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 1 Bar2 Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 12 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 2 Bar3 Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 24 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 3 Bar4 Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 36 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 4 Group 1 Vertical trend group with X 25 Y 48 Width 50 Height 50 Group name to appear above display PROCEDURE 1 Operate the Add key to call the Component se lection list Touch Channel Horizontal Bargraph to highlight it then press Add Repeat step 2 three times then Touch Group Vertical Trend then Add then
500. oot Menu Goto View key Trend history mode is not available from this display mode FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS See figure 3 4 4a As the number of channels in the display group increases the bars and their faceplates get narrower FACEPLATES AT RIGHT HAND EDGE See figure 3 4 4b As the number of PVs increases the bars get narrower As the bars get narrower so the scale values become truncated as shown in figure 3 4 4b The bars have a set minimum width and if the total number of points in the group cannot be displayed within the width of the screen a horizontal scroll bar appears allowing hidden bars to be viewed Similarly the faceplates reduce in height to a minimum readable height If there are more point faceplates than can be accommo dated within the height of the screen a vertical scroll bar appears allowing hidden faceplates to be displayed as re quired User Guide HAO28910 Page 44 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 4 VERTICAL BARGRAPH Cont 11 48 56 06 04 05 one Channel 1 A Channel 2 lt Channel 4 A 4 700 87 C 487 39 C 235 68 C 378 99 C 0 49V 800 00 800 00 400 00 400 00 1 00 Logged out Figure 3 4 4a Vertical bargraph display 1 to 6 channels 11 49 37 A 06 04 05 80 80 40 40 1 0 1 0 80 80 40 407 1 0 1 0 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100
501. opens the Component Property Editor with Main as the current component When editing via Bridge double clicking on a component returns to the Component Property Editor with that component as the current component This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software Calls a browser screen allowing the user to select a User Screen for import Calls next keyset Moves the contents of the current screen to another specified screen leaving the current screen empty If the destination screen is already in use confirmation is required before the screen is overwritten New Allows the creation of a new blank screen Current screen components are deleted after confirmation leaving a blank screen Items be retrieved using the Revert key above prior to the next Save Deploy Goto canvas Revert Causes all changes made since the last Goto canvas operation to be undone Save Causes the current screen to be saved to flash or for Bridge operation to the PC database 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 239 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE Cont OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS Edit level Allows Basic or Advanced edit level to be selected for further use Component info on screen Enabling this box causes a component description to appear at the top left corner of each component This descrip tion is in the form Identifier X Y
502. or Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only Point type allows the relevant point type i e input channel maths channel totaliser etc in the slave to be selected This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only Point number allows the relevant point number in the slave to be selected This item appears for Parameter Batch Status only Group number allows that group the status of which is to be read to be defined Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value The three rates Low Medium and High have the values set in the Master Comms configuration Where the input value is scaled see above this Span setting sets the Zero and Full Scale values for the channel This is different from the situation obtaining in input channels where span and scale have different meanings Remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in section 4 3 3 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 157 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont CONTROLLER PARAMETERS The following parameters may be accessible from a controller depending on type Note Figure 4 3 16f is a typical page and may show more or fewer items than appear on the actual screen for a particular controller Channel Number 1 Read 1 lt Reflects descriptor entry Value 0 4670 Unadjusted Input
503. ord is blank both High and Low Bytes must be 00 null 2 For successful login the Connect from remote item must be enabled ref Access levels in section 4 4 1 UserGuide 028910 266 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST Cont Response Figures 8 2 4c and 8 2 4d show response messages for successful and non successful login attempts Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Start Start of regis No of regis identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol identifier function duce dd ters high ters low lowing hex code hex 19 ow Figure 8 2 4c Response to a successful login attempt Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Exception identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol identifier function code lowing hex code MSB set hex Figure 8 2 4d Response after an unsuccessful login attempt Note MSB Most Significant Bit 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 267 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 5 Text messages In order to increase efficiency it is possible to set the system to transmit screen messages e g alarm on off only when new message occurs This is done by continuously polling the Text Length parameter in g
504. orrupt it is discarded and the software will await a further message 7 Start and End of message characters are removed before the messages are sent to the groups MODBUS ADDRESS When acting as a slave the recorder will respond both to the address set in Instrument Configuration section 4 3 1 and to address 255 used by some network scanning software 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 149 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 Master comms INTRODUCTION This option allows the unit to be used as a Modbus Master unit as well as a Modbus Slave The instrument can com municate using the Ethernet RJ45 connection or by means of one of the serial communications ports if fitted see section 4 3 15 for details or both simultaneously Master Configuration consists of entering a Modbus Address and for Ethernet connection an IP address or DNS path name for each of the available remote devices which are to be used as slaves The configuration also allows three dif ferent priority intervals to be entered and read write parameters can be configured to be accessed at one of these three rates The unit comes complete with a number of Profiles for known instruments This allows it to recognise an instru ment as a slave type and simplifies the read write process for known instruments by presenting commonly used Pa rameters by name Other parameters can be accessed by entering the relevant regi
505. ot is either an empty slot or a slot containing a slave which has not yet been enabled User Guide 028910 154 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont SHARE SOCKET This advanced configuration feature is used to improve communications performance to take advantage of the higher speed of Ethernet links compared with Serial links It is recommended that the default value enabled or disabled according to type be left as despatched from the factory unless there is good reason to change it A socket is the name given to a logical connection between two Ethernet nodes The establishment and maintenance of sockets is controlled by the recorder and the user has no control other than to enable or disable the Share sockets facility The share socket feature is available only for slaves configured as Ethernet devices i e Network Ethernet The upper illustration in figure 4 3 16d shows master 1 communicating with slaves 1 to n via an Ethernet to Serial converter called a Modbus Gateway In such a case it is more efficient to allow all the slaves to communicate over one link between master 1 and master 2 than to establish individual links between master 1 and each of the slaves In this example Share sockets should be enabled The lower illustration show a similar situation except that master 2 is not just a gateway but is a measuring device in its
506. oups Screen Builder User screens Security Manager Simulation Transmitter power supply isolated 100 mm recorders only Low supply voltage Access flap lock Stainless steel case no access flap check availability Further two USB ports at rear of recorder Serial Communications Environmental Performance Temperature limits Operation Storage Humidity limits Operation Storage Altitude maximum Protection Standard bezel display Standard sleeve Portable case option Stainless steel case Shock Vibration 10 Hz to 150Hz O to 50 C 20 to 60 C 5 to 80 RH non condensing 5 to 90 RH non condensing 2000 metres 66 for a recorder mounted in a panel IP20 IP21 66 for a recorder mounted in a panel BS 61010 2g peak User Guide Page 342 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION RECORDER Cont Physical Panel mounting Bezel size Small frame Large frame Panel cutout Small frame Large frame Depth behind bezel Small frame Large frame Weight Small frame Large frame Mounting angle DIN 43700 144mm x 144mm 292mm x 292mm 138mm x 138mm 0 0 1 0 mm 281mm x 281mm 0 0 1 0 mm 246 5 mm 211 5 mm without terminal cover 284 with long terminal cover Note For portable case dimensions see section 13 260 90 mm 211 mm without terminal cover 3 kg max 5 kg max if fitted
507. ource signal which is to result in Range High appearing at the output terminals to be set Data Source This allows the user to select a point or a constant to act as the source If Constant is selected a further field not shown in figure 4 3 17b appears allowing the constant value to be entered On Error Drive Off the output signal is switched off 0 Volts or 0 mA Drive High the output signal is set to Range High 15 Drive Low the output signal is set to Range Low 1596 User Guide HAO28910 Page 170 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 Demand Writes DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION Demand writes allow slave values to be written from the master by operator action from the configuration page by job action or if the Screen Builder option is fitted section 7 by operation of a suitably configured Operator key Figure 4 3 18a shows a typical configuration page Modbus codes 6 and 16 can be selected for this purpose see sec tion 8 2 1 for code definitions Figure 4 3 18a shows a typical configuration page for writing to a recorder Figure 4 3 18b shows the Edit Constant page Figure 4 3 18c shows a configuration page for the case where the destination is defined as a register location WRITING TO A KNOWN DEVICE Figure 4 3 18a shows the configuration page for writing a value from the master unit to a known slave unit Write number 1 Write 1 E
508. ow the user to enter the temperature at which the cold junction is main tained REMOTE Remote is selected if the cold junction temperature is to be Break Response None Y Cold Junction Type Remote Y Remote CJ Temp from Channel 3 Descriptor Channel 1 measured by an external device connected to the instrument An extra picklist appears which allows the user to select any input or maths channel to act as the cold junction temperature source chan nel The temperature units displayed here are those of the channel being configured not those of the CJ source channel The CJ source channel must be configured appropriately for the external device and must provide a value which is consistent with the configured channel s units DESCRIPTOR Allows a text string of up to 30 characters including spaces to be entered for the channel descriptor e g Turbine 2 tempA A B SWITCHING If enabled this function allows alternative Span Zone and Trace Colour values to be entered values are used dur ing normal operation values are switched to by job action as described in section 4 7 User Guide HAO28910 Page 76 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont SPANNED This box when selected allows span low and high values to be entered For example in an input range of 0 to 600 deg C it may be that the temperature range b
509. own right In such a case Socket 1 is used for high speed communications between master 1 and master 2 and Socket 2 is used to link master 1 to the slaves individually In this case Share Sockets should be disabled for master 2 and enabled for all other devices IP address 123 123 1 2 Modbus address 10 Master 2 TCP Gateway Serial link RS485 Ethernet Socket 1 Socket 1 communicates with IP Address 123 123 1 2 Modbus addresses 1 to IP 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave3 Slave n 1 Slaven Modbus Address 1 Modbus Address 2 Modbus Address 3 Modbus Addr n 1 Modbus Address n IP address 123 123 1 2 Modbus address 10 Socket 1 Serial link RS485 Socket 2 Socket 1 Communicates with IP address 123 123 1 2 Modbus address 10 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 123 123 1 2 Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave n 1 Slave n Socket 2 communicates with IP Address Modbus Address 1 Modbus Address 2 Modbus Address 3 Modbus Adar n 1 Modbus Address n 123 123 1 2 Modbus addresses 1 to n Notes 1 The IP address 123 123 1 2 is for demonstration purposes only 2 Modbus address can be any number between 1 and 247 but must be unique per IP address 3 Modbus addresses need not be consecutive Figure 4 3 16d Share socket examples 02891
510. p tion fitted Ethernet diagnostics Copy Job search About Figures 4 6a and 4 6b above give an overview of the System Menus 4 6 1 Clock Selecting clock causes the recorder s date and time to be displayed To edit the date touch the current date area to call the keyboard and enter the new numbers The date is edited in a similar way The settings apply as soon as the Apply settings button is touched See also SNTP details in section 4 5 1 4 6 2 Locale This allows the setting of the following items Language Choose the required language from the picklist Country Displays a pick list of countries associated with the selected language Time zone Select required time zone from picklist Use Summertime DST Select box if daylight saving is to be used If Use Summertime DST is selected the times and dates for the start and end of summertime can be entered using picklists see figure 4 6a Notes 1 format DD MM YY or MM DD YY is defined by the language and country selected Time format e g 12 24 hr clock is defined by the country selected 2 When using Bridge software the host PC s locale information and the recorder locale information should match or the displayed time will not be correct Note For more information see B7 Annex B and or http www timeanddate com LONG DATE FORMAT Table 4 6 2 shows some examples of the Standard and Long Format date layouts which are available according t
511. peatedly until successful to dispatch the e mail until the Retry time has expired If the e mail has not been sent within this period it is deleted and a General message is generated Allows a list to be chosen for entry of recipient e mail addresses Allows a name to be entered for the selected list These fields allow 10 recipients e mail addresses to be entered for the selected list The first valid address appears in the To part of the e mail header subsequent valid addresses appear in the Cc part of the e mail header note 2 Allows an e mail to be selected for configuration Allows a descriptor to be entered for the e mail This appears in the list of e mails when setting up a job and also in the message log Choose one of Email SMS Subject Only and SMS Body Only Operation below gives some details of the application of the SMS protocol in this instrument SMPT Email Selecting this protocol allows both a Subject and Body text to be entered SMS Subject Only Selecting this protocol allows a subject to be entered but the entry field for the body text is not presented for use Any text previously entered here whilst another protocol was se lected is lost SMS Body Only Selecting this protocol allows Body text to be entered but the Subject field is not displayed Any text previously entered as a Subject whilst another protocol was selected is lost Allows the entry of up
512. pensation CJC error The internal CJC error is 1 C maximum with the instrument at 25 The CJC rejection ratio is 50 1 so a further error of 40 25 50 0 30 may occur giving a total maximum CJC error of 1 3 Maximum error From the above the total error adds up as follows Input error 5 346uV Range error 39 520uV Temperature error 8 910 Linearisation error 0 02 C error 1 30 C Total error 53 776UV 1 32 C From thermocouple tables a change of 1 C is equivalent to a change of 60UV so a change of 53 776uV is equivalent to a change of 0 896 C Thus the total worst case error for this example is 0 896 1 32 2 216 C 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 347 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS This section contains dc performance and resistance input data for instruments with status levels prior to D6 June 2007 DC input ranges Shunt Additional error due to shunt 0 1 of input Performance See table Resolution Externally mounted resistor modules Typical error Instrument at 20 deg C 0 035 input 0 03196 range Maximum error Instrument at 20 deg C 0 085 input 0 052 range Worst case temperature performance 80ppm of input per deg C 0 035 input 0 028 range 0 084 input 0 039 range 80ppm of input per deg C 0 035 input 0 024 range 0 084 input 0 029 range 80ppm of input per deg C
513. perty uhr file Error loading the Style uhr file Error loading the usrscrn uhu file oo Ne 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 261 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS 8 1 INSTALLATION The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder either 1 Directly to a host computer using a crossover cable 2 Toa host computer via a network using a straight through cable 8 2 INTRODUCTION MODBUS TCP allows one or more recorders to act as slave devices to one or more host computers connected via the 5 connector at the rear of the recorder Each recorder must have a unique Internet Protocol IP address set up as described in Section 4 5 MODBUS TCP Transmission Control Protocol is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications protocols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of MODBUS messaging in an intranet or internet environment using TCP IP protocols Much of the MODBUS detail in this manual is derived from the document openmbus doc available at http www modbus org default htm The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users Note The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or written to in one transac tion For this reason the maximum number of standard 16 b
514. ponent Property Editor page to the display This display contains the basic prop erties of the Main background screen onto which the required components are to be overlaid Note This may take some seconds according to the complexity of the configuration 4 further press of the Option key calls the user screen Options display page 5 Use the Option key again to return to the Component Properties display Batch Note Edit Screen mE Component picklist field Identifier main 1 1 Component Add Delete etc Last Error keys Page Tite X Position 0 Component properties Fields vary according to Width 100 component type dicemus Height 100 Background Colour 1 n 5 oan Dimension picklist mi Component Type Main Select absolute pixels or relative pixels Goto Canvas Save Close Edit level Basic V Component info on screen Quick entry to edit Use Last Properties Positioning Grid Positioning Tip Figure 7 2 3a Component properties and User screen options pages KEY DESCRIPTIONS UPPER KEYS Calls the Component selection list Del Deletes after confirmation the component in the Identifier field except the Main pane which cannot be de leted
515. ponents have all the following parameters associated with them The component definitions in section 7 4 define each component s parameters 2 generic term solid objects as used in this description includes rectangles lines arcs rounded rectan gles ovals polygons and polylines Lines and arcs do not have a background colour as they cannot be filled 3 Default parameter units are in percentage of screen width height The picklist next to each dimension field allows pixels to be used instead Parameter Description Arc Angle For Arcs only the number of degrees of arc drawn anti clockwise counter clockwise from the Start Angle Negative angles draw clockwise See figure2 4 20a for definitions Arc Height For Rounded Rectangles only this is double the vertical distance from the corner of the unrounded rectangle at which the curve is to start To draw circular corners this value must be 3 2 times the Arc Width The Arc height value must be less than half the Rectangle height Percent units are relative to the rectangle height not the screen height Arc Width For Rounded Rectangles only this is double the horizontal distance from the corner of the unrounded Background colour Button Text Channel Draw edge Draw Order Edit Parameter Event Button Feature Fill Area Foreground Colour rectangle at which the curve is to start To draw circular corners this value must be 2 3 the Arc Height The A
516. ppear in the list 7 4 1 Group Vertical Horizontal Trend This produces a display which mimics a recorder chart for a selected group the functions e g trend history de scribed in sections 3 4 1 and 3 4 2 The following unique parameters fully described in table 7 3 2 are available for configuration Background colour Message Colour Time Marker Colour Grid Line Colour Faceplates location Time Marker Interval Vertical Grid Total Horizontal Grid Total Trend Padding Channel cycle time Display Messages Display Bargraph Display Pens Horizontal Faceplate Allows the chart to be drawn in the selected colour The colour of messages printed on the Chart The colour of time date printed on the Chart The colour of the Chart grid lines Allows group faceplates to be enabled disabled and when enabled allows the position of the faceplates to be defined These group faceplates are additional to the current channel faceplate which always appears above the chart unless it has been disabled under Horizontal faceplate below Selects the number of horizontal chart lines between successive time markers Total number of vertical chart divisions Total number of horizontal chart divisions Sets thickness of traces Allows a number to be entered for the scrolling period between channels 0 Channel hold Allows message printing to be enabled disabled For Horizontal trending only allows the vertical
517. quire ment to remove all customer data from recorders which are not fitted with the Simulator option which includes an Erase all history job See section 4 3 21 for a description of the Simulator option The History maintenance option is not enabled in Trial Mode section 4 3 21 The erase history procedure consists of entering a special keycode into the System Code area section 4 6 3 and operating the Apply button CAUTION The option should be used with discretion as once the history has been erased it can never be regained B8 1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION Notes 1 This operation can be carried out only from the recorder s operator interface It is not possible to extract the keycode or to erase history from a remote pc 2 Tobe able to carry out the procedure below users must have Paste Delete Files permission enabled in the Security menu section 4 4 1 3 keycode displayed in the System Upgrade menu returns to its previous value after a history erase op eration 1 Recorders fitted with this option come complete with a file called HMT TXT in the user area of the filing system accessed as described in section 5 Filer Options 2 Highlight this file and copy it using the Filer Options menu key Now Delete 3 With a memory device e g SD card Memory stick etc inserted use the Filer Options menu Paste key to save the file into the
518. quired Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare User Guide HA028910 Page 134 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Totalisers INTRODUCTION Each totaliser allows the user to maintain a running total of any input channel or of any maths channel Using the maths functions it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels so the value of two channels added together or the difference between two channels could be totalised if required The totaliser equation is tot where tot tot ma t 17 PSF USF PSF x USF totaliser value this sample totaliser value last sample tot value of totalised channel this sample Period Scaling Factor See Period scaler description below Units Scaling Factor See Unit scaler description below Note Time between samples Recording interval set in Group configuration See Update information in Annex A for details CONFIGURATION Figure 4 3 12 below shows a typical enabled totaliser configuration page Totaliser Number Allows any of the available totalisers to be selected from the picklist for configuration Enable Allows the user to enable disable the total
519. r Channel data only allows the type of data to be displayed e g Current value to be selected from a pick list If set to Yes this causes a solid object to be filled with the background colour If set to No the inside of the object is transparent If draw edge is also set to No the object is invisible The line colour of solid objects The bar colour of bargraphs default 2 normal point colour The colour of Text and of numeric values Where applicable this overrides channel colour Table 7 3 1 Basic level parameters sheet 1 of 2 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 245 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 1 BASIC PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Description Group number Height Identifier Image File Last error N Value Page Title Screen Number Show Title Bar Allows a group to be selected for group trend bargraph and numeric displays and for Dialogue action buttons Select specific group or 0 to follow current display group Height of a component measured downwards from the component s Y position Negative values measure upwards Component name Initially as in the Add Component list but editable by the user Allows a file name to be entered when importing GIF or JPG images A text message describing the last error to occur for this component The component must be re edited in order to clear the problem See para
520. r Channel failure DHCP Server failure FTP Archiving file lost FTP Archiving too slow FTP Primary Server Failure FTP Secondary Server Failure Insufficient non volatile memory Internal flash application required repair Internal flash history required repair Internal flash screens required repair Internal flash user required repair Internal flash user is full Maths Channel failure Media Archiving file lost Media Archiving too slow Network boot failure Output channel failure Message explains archive failure This message appears if the battery has failed and the unit has been switched off Internal clock was corrupt at power up or the time has never been set Can be caused by battery failure in which case the battery icon will also be visible The error is cleared by setting the time and date Server time forced to 00 00 1 1 1900 Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the internal CJ temperature measurement Indicates a hardware failure in the input channel circuit see note For instruments with IP address lookup set to Get from DHCP Server this alarm occurs if the recorder cannot obtain an IP address from the server See section 4 5 for details Archive failed A file which has not been archived has been detected Remote archive is too infrequent The recorder effectively switches to Automatic section 4 3 5 to ensure that data is not lost This error is set if the record
521. r Units Descriptor Alarm Number 1 Read 1 4 Copies descriptor entry 0 4670 Unadjusted Master Comms 1 Furn 1 Recorder v 4 Select required slave Process Value v Select required slave parameter type None lt Appears only for some slave types Channel Y Select Required Slave parameter point Select iteration rate for Medium Priority v parameter update Numeric n 0 Units 1 Units 0 96 100 96 lA 51 Units Read 1 Figure 4 3 16e Channel configuration page Typical Recorder User Guide Page 156 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont RECORDER DAQ CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont TYPICAL RECORDER PARAMETERS The following parameters may be accessible from a recorder or data acquisition unit depending on model number Figure 4 3 16e above refers Notes Items such as Scale Zone and descriptor may be editable white background or not grey background depending on model This description includes only those items which are unique to input channels with Input Type Master Comms For other items please see section 4 3 3 1 2 Channel Number Slave Digital Parameter Scaling Point type Point number Group Number Process Value Span Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured As soon
522. r Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 73 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont SCALE TYPE This field allows Linear Log to be selected as scale type For linear scales the number of major minor scale divisions can be selected This does not affect the chart grid divisions which is set up as a part of Group con figuration section 4 3 2 Figures 4 3 3b1 and 4 3 3b2 show various examples NONE Channels with Scale Type selected to None appear with no scale information in any display mode LINEAR Channels with Scale Type Linear appear with scale information in all display modes except numeric The number of major and minor divisions can be selected from subsequent fields Examples are shown in figure 4 3 3b1 SCALE DIVISIONS MAJOR Appears for Linear Scale types only Setting major divisions to 1 means that the scale consists only of zero and full scale Setting Major divisions to 2 means that the scale has divisions at zero 50 and full scale and so on Intermedi ate scale values appear at major divisions if there is sufficient space Default 10 for large frame recorders or 5 for small frame units SCALE DIVISIONS MINOR Appears for Linear Scale types only With minor divisions set to 1 default the scale major divisions are not divided i e no minor division tick marks appear Setting Minor divisions to 2 means that each major scale division is divide
523. r current values and the clock will re start from where it stopped No blue line is drawn across the trace to indicate time discontinuity Time change records section 3 4 1 Note If SNTP client enable is enabled Network Address area section 4 5 then the recorder time is synchronised at power up only the normal checks of recorder time compared with server time are not carried out with the Simulator option enabled If SNTP server enable is enabled then the recorder will supply recorder time CLEAR This Trend category job section 4 7 11 clears the display Used in conjunction with Erase all History below this is known in some applications as Recall Mode ERASE ALL HISTORY This Recording category job section 4 7 10 erases all the history files in the recorder Used in conjunction with Clear above this is known in some applications as Recall Mode Note If the 21CFRI1 option is enabled Erase History jobs can be triggered but are ignored leaving the recording history unaffected SCREEN SAVER This Trend category job section 4 7 11 switches the display brightness to the value set up in Saver Display Instru ment Configuration section 4 3 1 for the duration of the job The job overrides the Save after time value also set up in Instrument Configuration 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 183 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 SEC
524. r name and Remote password described above Note See Annex C for details of the Web server facility 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 189 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 Management option This menu selection appears only if the Audit Trail option 21 11 option and or Security Management option is fitted Which configuration fields appear depends on the option s fitted Figure 4 4 2a below shows the configuration menus for the various combinations The 21CFR11 option allows the recorder to be set up so that all changes to configuration with the exceptions listed below are added to the history files and also allows certain constraints to be placed on the recorder passwords Once these items of configuration are set up they apply to all groups Figure 4 4 2a below shows the configuration menu Record Logins This field appearsonly if Login Login Timeout Minutes timeout is non zero gt with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Password Attempts 3times Passwords Expire Days Minimum Password Length Require Signing This field appears only if d Require Signing is enabled Require Authorization Enable Audit Trail Password Change on Expiry Centralised Security Login By User List Apply v Im This item appears only if the Securiy Management option is fitted If enabled all other security fields can
525. r of days since December 30th 1899 The decimal part of the value represents the latest 6 hours so DDD DDD 25 represents 0600 hrs DDD DDD 5 represents noon etc Numeric format is more easily interpretable by some spreadsheets than Text format is Click drag separator to edit field width A1 S Instrument A B C D J K 8 1 Distil temp Serial 9921 Software V4 0 Timezone GMT Bi 2 Mac Addre00 AB 8D 80 26 CO Language en Country GB 3 Group Nar Tank Tem 4 Low 0 High 40 C 5 Tank1 Ten Low 0 High 40 C 6 Tank Low 0 High 40 Deg C details 7 Tank2 Ten Low 0 High 40 Deg C 8 Tank2 TenLow 0 High 40 Deg C 9 Ten Low 0 High 40 Deg C 10 Difference Low 20 High 20 Deg C 11 Date Time Tank1 TenTank1 TenTank2 TenTank2 Ten Difference Incl 12 C C Deg Deg Deg C Deg Deg C 13 09 39 0 23 49 23 74 24 01 31 2334 29 7693 30 0983 6 61 14 09 44 0 23 53 23 70 23 88 30 6458 29 0673 29 9083 6 13 15 09 49 0 23 57 23 68 23 91 30 0945 28 8936 29 9083 5 91 16 09 540 23 50 23 69 23 99 31 1437 29 4387 30 0235 6 47 09 54 0 08 04 05 14 09 54 Alarm off 18 ab anim 19 Right click then 21 Format cells 22 Select Time as number category 53 Select time date as required 25 26 r 28 29 30 31 32 34 gt
526. r points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uintl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 Double String_60 c Ce Gc ee eee String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String_60 String 60 String_60 String 60 String_60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write AC35
527. r to ensure that no further data is written to the recorder s history files recording must be disabled by setting a second Recording job to be initiated by the same trigger as initiates the Freeze job This Re cording job should be set to Enable while Inactive Recording jobs are described in section 4 7 10 above User Guide Page 218 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 12 Output category Applies only to recorders with Modbus master option fitted As described in section 4 3 16 when Modbus Master is enabled a number of Output channels become available for configuration This feature allows any specified recorder point to be copied to a destination instrument s input channel if this is set to Input Type Slave comms An output job allows a specific output channel write to be disabled when the recorder is acting as a modbus master Job Number 1 Category Output Action Disable Writey Output 1 Output 1 V lt Select required output 44 On Active W lt t Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 12 Output Job menu layout 4 7 13 Demand Writes category Applies only to recorders with Modbus master option fitted Demand Writes jobs allow the user to set up the recorder so that when the job is triggered it initiates the selected De mand Write The write action is performed to the remote device as defined in De
528. racters will be read into the buffer only after these characters have been received The buffer holds up to 120 characters plus date time etc and start end of message characters Further characters are discarded until End of message is received or timeout occurs Message characters below Hex 20 decimal 32 will be replaced by question marks Message characters above Hex 7F decimal 127 will be treated as Unicode MESSAGING RULES 1 If no start of message characters are configured but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered the new mes sage will start after the timeout period has elapsed 2 If no end of message characters are configured but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered the new mes sage will end after the timeout period has elapsed If start of message characters are configured and a timeout value other than 0 has been entered all characters prior to the Start of message characters are ignored 4 Ifstart of message characters are configured but neither end characters nor timeout have been configured then this is an invalid configuration Should this configuration be a requirement if the same characters are entered as end of message characters in stead then each message will be sent to the groups when the next message is received 5 If no start or end of message characters are entered and no timeout value is entered all received characters discarded 6 Ifareceived message is deemed to be c
529. ration section 7 1 2 3 Alayout plan is produced with all the required screen s components listed with their top left corner co ordinates their widths and heights and where appropriate background and foreground colours User Guide 028910 236 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 2 Screen components Table 7 2 2 shows the selectable screen components their default top left corner positions widths heights and draw order All these components are described in section 7 4 below Arc Channel data Channel horizontal bargraph Channel numeric Channel vertical bargraph Dialogue action Event Button Group horizontal bargraph Group horizontal trend Group numeric Group vertical bargraph Group vertical trend Image Line Main Navigation action Operator Button Oval Polygon Polyline Rectangle Round rectangle Text Table 7 2 2 User screen selectable item default values 25 29 of off off off 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 237 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 3 The properties page 1 Ensure that one or more user screens is enabled in views Configuration section 7 1 1 If necessary call the required User screen to the display using the Root menu Goto View menu 2 Press the Option key to call the Option Menu 3 Press Edit Screen to call the Com
530. rawn by a USB device max 500 mA USB power fault key USB power fault too much current being drawn by all USB devices max 1100 mA USB unsupported Unsupported USB device inserted 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 17 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 3 ALARM INDICATION Cont CHANNEL ALARM 26 This red bell indicator appears if any channel is in alarm The symbol is illuminated continuously if all alarms are acknowledged or flashes if any active alarm is unacknowledged Refer to ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT below for details of how to acknowledge alarms CHANGE BATTERY E This flashing indicator first appears when the battery voltage checked every 15 minutes indicates that the battery is approaching the end of its useful life The indicator continues to flash until the battery is replaced B2 2 in Annex B The indicator does not appear if the battery is not fitted DISK ICON This shows the free space available on whatever mass storage medium is fitted if any and selected for Archive desti nation note 1 The disk icon appears soon after the device is inserted but see note 2 During archiving the colour of the central area of the disk changes to green see note 3 No other disk activity e g save restore configuration is indicated This area of the icon coloured green during any archive activity ges not necessarily to the device selected in Archive configuration 99 Fi
531. rc width value must be less than half the Rectangle width Percent units are relative to the rectangle width not the screen width The fill colour of solid objects the background colour for the main page trend charts text messages etc For Bargraphs the colour behind the bar For operator buttons Dialogue Action and Navigation Action Allows button text to be entered Event button text is defined in Event Button Configuration described in section 4 3 7 Allows a channel to be selected for bargraph numeric value etc display If set to Yes this causes the outline shape of a solid object to be drawn in the foreground colour If set to No the object s outline is not drawn Allows a layer scheme to be introduced Items with higher draw order values are overlaid on compo nents with lower draw order values The Draw Order feature is included specifically to allow a dy namic element such as bargraph to be placed top of a background static image A dynamic element is always drawn on top all other elements at update time When one or more dynamic ele ments are placed on top of one another the results are unpredictable For operator buttons allows the user to select the parameter type e g Channel N Alarm 1 to be edited when the button is operated The parameter number N is entered in the N value field For Event buttons this allows the user to assign an Event button to the User Screen Button to be displayed Fo
532. rchive Save Restore Security Network System Compression Normal Remote Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure nam Flash Size 96 25 Mb B9b B9c B9l m Arcnive Shortest Trend History Group 1 Instrument e Section 4 3 5 Duration 10 86 Days Groups D Show Remote settings Figure B9d Archive to Remote None v Channels Event Number 1 Event Y Ftp File format Binary v Views Source 1 Alarm on Group Y Remote path history Archive Section 496 On Group 1 Group 1 Y Primary remote host 0 0 0 0 Events Source 2 Point Alarm Y Primary login name anonymous Event Buttons Primary password V s 21 Retype password ource ense Source 1 Messages 2 ae Secondary remote 5110 0 0 0 n User Linearisations Y Secondary login name anonymous li e Secondary password Batch Descriptor Event 1 G Job Number 1 Y password Category No Action Apply Discard Figure B9f Totalisers TS Apply Discard Counters 9 _ Archive Mimers Event Buttons Section 4 3 7 Section 4 3 5 Compression Normal Figure B9g Connections Flash Size 96 25 Mb MERI OH ennon Number Mient Shortest Trend History Group 1 Descriptor Button 1 Buren UE Days Figure B9h Output Channels Latched v CSV include Values W Text Off Text a wiiee EE x CSV include Messages 4 on Text CSV include Header details These fields appear only Emails Require Si
533. re eite to 56 COPYING e irf eer etie itae bid 206 Full User Name emeret 195 Enable disable 69 E n 222 Entty A d 94 Passwotd 5 34 aki gusta 186 Example uiti eut uta italie 96 User 1D innert c ee TR 195 Inclusion in reports 179 User Screen key 238 239 JODS M 214 s o DRE Po Eee ee edet e es 213 Wood 24 30 383 No chart Dues 68 Operator entered 50 No Text uie 251 Up acdc ae evs 31 Nominal height Width 22 0 250 Serial GOMMS ro ER eret npe 146 ez EN 92 Inn 322 fetis adnata n testes 92 Min Max recording eese 66 Normal View ette eret eret 41 Minimum 5 250 Channel Descriptor 130 Number Height nre ev aee encre 250 Of Batch Messages 101 Password length 02 4 1421 191 Of col mns deett dte cet reete 250 PG requirements c rales ob eis 226 Of Fields hehe cote 179 323 250 OT TOWS eee nde ham ed 250 Miss
534. re Socket W Login Required amp Appears only if Profile slave type supports login security Username Username Password Appear only if Login Required is selected Apply Discard Detect All Slaves Figure 4 3 16a Master Comms configuration menu CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Priority intervals This allows three levels of update rate to be entered These rates are used in point configura tion to define how often a value is read In order to optimise the performance of the serial link it is recommended that the slowest rate consistent with requirements be selected The interval is entered in multiples of 1 8th second 0 125 seconds In some cases two update rates can be defined For example when reading a Process Value PV channel from a slave it is possible to set the reading frequency of the PV to the highest rate available but other less frequently changing values scale low high for example can be read at a slower rate Store Diagnostics If enabled diagnostics information is kept in non volatile memory and is thus retained during power cycling Slave A picklist of slaves initially called Remote Device N When the device is detected this name changes to the detected Instrument s Descriptor if any or a default tag The slave name can be edited in the Descriptor entry field below 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 151 100 180MM PAPER
535. re T from published tables User Guide HAO28910 Page 114 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ROOT MASS FLOW Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Figure 4 3 11e shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with Root Mass Flow function selected Maths Number 1 Math 1 Y Value 123 4567 Units Function Root Mass Flow Delta Pressure Channel 1 Y Temperature Channel2 Y Absolute Pressure Channel 3 Y Scale 0 Gas Constant o J kg K Z o Units Units Apply Discard Figure 4 3 1 1e Root mass flow menu Delta Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the differential pressure output from the orifice plate to be entered Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature Kelvins at the upstream tapping to be entered Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure kPa A to be entered Scale o p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units S Ma Full scale input range set for Flow channel in flowmeter units Gas Constant The relevant gas constant in J kg K Z The compressibility factor described above 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 115 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ROLLING AVERAGE This calculates the average value of the last R samples
536. re measuring units in use throughout the world The following table gives a multiplica tion factor for converting some common units to MPa MegaPascals to four significant figures Further conversion factors can be found at the websites given on the previous page Where the conversion is to Pascals not to MegaPascals the factors given have to be divided by 1 000 000 Multiplier for Multiplier for Atmospheres gt Newtons cm 0 01 Bar Newtons m 0 000 001 kg cm Pascals 0 000 001 2 kNewton m Tonnes m 0 009 807 Tons UK ft2 0 1 073 rere Tons US ft2 0 09 576 Lb in2 PSI 0 006 895 Water feet of 0 002 989 Mercury inches of 0 003 386 Water inches of 0 0 002 491 Mercury mm of 0 0 001 333 Water mm of 0 000 009 807 Table 4 3 11b Pressure unit conversion The table above shows multiplying factors to convert common pressure units to MPa This conversion is carried out as follows Example A pressure transducer connected to input channel 3 gives an output in the range 10 to 100 PSI The input to a steam equation in maths channel 1 requires the pressure units to be MPa To convert set up a further maths channel e g No 2 as shown below then use maths channel 2 as the source channel for the pressure input to the steam equa tion The suggested scale low high values are based on the resulting pressure range in MPa i e 0 06895 to 0 6895 Maths Number 2 Steam Pressure Y Value 0 0348 Units
537. re of the form DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start Automatic Batch recording cannot be stopped by Counter action MODBUS INITIATION In order to initiate batch recording via MODBUS TCP a Batch Start flag has to be set value 0001 For Scope Group the flag for the specified group must be set For Scope Instrument any group s Batch Start flag may be used The address of the flag for group 1 is decimal 42364 the address for group is 42364 629 N 1 For further details of the Modbus TCP option see section 8 If Batch mode Start Stop batches can also be stopped via MODBUS address for group 1 is 42365 the address for group is 42364 629 N 1 Again the value must be set to 0001 Modbus start messages are of the form DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start Modbus Stop messages are similar EVENT SOURCES As described in section 4 3 6 Batch Start Batch Running and Batch Stop can be selected as event sources If Scope Group in Configuration described above then the user can select which group s batch is to be used as the event source 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 105 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 Maths CONFIGURATION This feature allows a range of mathematical functions to be performed Figure 4 3 11a shows a typical configuration page the selected maths function determines which configuration fields actually appear Select maths M
538. re requests will be rejected Under such a circumstance the recorder will accept all valid write requests and ignore any invalid writes No error response is produced 8 2 4 Security The recorder has a local file in which are stored all users login information as set up in Security Access configuration section 4 4 it must then supply the correct Username and Password Should a host fail to login after three attempts the recorder will terminate the connection This MODBUS security function can be enabled disabled in the Operator Config Instrument menu section 4 3 1 Note Modbus Security must be disabled in order for Modbus communications to be established Once the Master is communicating with the Slave Modbus security can be re enabled providing that the master has the correct remote user name and password data for the relevant slave If this information is missing all read write requests will be ignored by the slave 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 263 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont The following code is intended for use in creating a suitable 16 bit encrypted register using an IP address and password FUNCTION MB Driver encrypt DESCRIPTION Create an encrypted value from a password string ARGUMENTS pswd Pointer to password from network file eKey Pointer to eKey usually address must be 4 bytes RETURN result A 16 bit value repres
539. rea 7 e g channel alarm symbol du Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Message Log Unlock Flap Batch Summary Group Mode 00 00 00 00 00 00 ed ba Click to highlight 0100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Batch running 00 00 00 00 00 00 d indicator 00 00 00 00 00 00 Ba d oup 00 00 00 00 00 00 Ba d Add p 00 00 00 20 00 00 Full Details Batch Control Batch start Elapsed Batch Field 1 Batch Field 1 Group names time and date time text values Sort ON Highlight OFF Exit Figure 3 1 4f Batch Summary page Group mode sort OFF highlighting Touching anywhere on a group row calls a pop up menu as shown above The functions of this menu are as follows User Guide 28910 22 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont BATCH SUMMARY Cont FULL DETAILS Touching this key calls the Batch Details page showing the group name batch status and batch field details BATCH CONTROL This calls a page similar to the Full Details page but including NEW key to allow the operator to start a new batch If the batch is configured as Start Stop a Stop key is also included allowing the user to stop the batch SORT If Sort is Off default the groups appear in Group number order with Group 1 at the top and group 12 at the bottom The key legend is
540. rea Limited Telephone 82 31 2738507 Fax 82 31 2738508 E mail info kr eurotherm com NETHERLANDS Alphen a d Rijn Eurotherm Telephone 31 172 411752 Fax 31 172 417260 E mail info ni eurotherm com NORWAY Oslo Eurotherm A S Telephone 47 67 592170 Fax 47 67 118301 E mail info no eurotherm com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z 0 0 Telephone 48 32 218 5100 Fax 48 32 217 7171 E mail info pl eurotherm com SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm Espafia SA Telephone 34 91 661 6001 Fax 34 91 661 9093 E mail info es eurotherm com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB Telephone 46 40 384500 Fax 46 40 384545 E mail info se eurotherm com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte Schweiz AG Telephone 41 44 787 1040 Fax 41 44 787 1044 E mail info ch eurotherm com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Eurotherm Limited Telephone 44 1903 268500 Fax 44 1903 265982 E mail info uk eurotherm com Web www eurotherm co uk U S A Leesburg VA Eurotherm Inc Telephone 1 703 443 0000 Fax 1 703 669 1300 E mail info us eurotherm com Web www eurotherm com ED52 Invensys EUROTHERM EUROTHERM LIMITED Faraday Close Durrington Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL Telephone 44 0 1903 268500 Facsimile 44 0 1903 265982 e mail info uk eurotherm com Website http www eurotherm co uk Specification subject to change without notice Eurotherm Limited HA028910 4 23473
541. recommended inter unit spacing Side clamps Top bottom clamps 15 0 6 inch x 10 mm 0 4 in y 10 mm 0 4 in y 15 mm 0 6 inch Y Panel clamping Maximum installed angle b 45 degrees max Figure 2 1a Mechanical installation details small frame unit 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 3 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 INSTALLATION Cont 260 90 mm a gt 292 211 i 28 34 B Safety Earth _ _ ____ uc E E E E N Side elevation Access Flap Y y v Panel thickness range 6 to 25 mm Optimum thickness depends on panel material Panel cutout 281mm x 281mm 1 0 or 11 07 x 11 07 inches 0 04 0 00 Minimum recommended inter unit spacing View on underside Side clamps Top bottom clamps x 25 mm 1 inch 12 5 mm 0 5 in y 12 5 mm 0 5 in y 25 mm 1 inch Vertical MAXIMUM INSTALLED ANGLE b 45 degrees max Panel mounting technique Figure 2 1b Mechanical installation details large frame unit User Guide HAO28910 Page 4 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 2 2 1 Signal wiring Figures
542. red rather than continuously In order to carry out a successful remote archive details of the remote host must be entered both in this Archive section of the Config menu and in Network configuration section 4 5 Further the current access level must have Connect from remote enabled in the Security Access menu section 4 4 1 Compression Normal W select Normal or High Flash Size 99 25 Mb Shortest Trend History Group 1 Duration 108 6 Days Show Local settings Media mediacard W Archive to Media Automatic Archiving Hourly lt q Appears only for Automatic Media file format Binary gt Select Binary and or CSV On Media Full Overwrite Select Overwrite or Stop Media Size 30 4746094 Mb Removable Media Capacity 33 18 Days Media Full event limit 100 Select Local or Remote settings gt Select Media card or USB port W Select archive frequency Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 5a Archive configuration menu Local settings Flash Size Shortest Trend History Duration Show Ftp File format Remote path Primary remote host Primary login name Primary password Retype password Secondary remote host Secondary login name Secondary password Retype password Compression Normal W Select Normal or High 99 25 Mb Group 1 108 06 Days Remote settings
543. red must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appropriate Overrides any entry in Back ground Colour Colours are entered by touching each required selection in turn The semicolon separators are entered automatically in front of each selection apart from the first Colour channel All channels Allows a channel to be defined to be used in percentile or quartile filling or as a source of channel thresholds or channel alarms as selected in Colour style below Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 1 of 6 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 247 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Colour foregrounds None Used only if Colour style Channel Alarms or Channel thresholds semicolon separated list of foreground colours for the component being configured The number of colours entered must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appropriate Overrides any entry in Fore ground Colour Colours are entered by touching each required selection in turn The semicolon separators are entered automatically in front of each selection apart from the first Colour style Channel thresholds Allows a number of semicolon separated values to be entered to act as colour change triggers for the component being configured The values are those of the source channel
544. removable media area Cut Copy 4 Move the storage device from the recorder to a pc and open the file in an appropriate program e g Notebook to reveal a key code Paste Refresh 5 This keycode can be kept in a secure area for re use in subsequent erase operations for Figure B8 1 this recorder Filer option menu B8 2 ERASING HISTORY 1 Enter the key code into the recorder s System Code area and operate the Apply button 2 Operate the Ok button in the dialogue box figure B8 2 This initiates the erasure of the recorder s history files after which the recorder restarts WARNING ALL HISTORY DATA WILL BE PERMANENTLY ERASED The instrument will restart after erasing history Are you ceratin you wish to proceed Cancel Figure 8 2 Confirmation dialogue box Note This operation erases only the recorder s history files the recorder s configuration remains unchanged The Save Restore New selection section 4 2 with all tickboxes ticked must be used to reset the configuration to default values if required User Guide HAO28910 Page 366 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE OOO OO Home Operator Selected Home page sa File Unlock Flap Trend display Section 4 System
545. rent group See Views configuration section 4 3 4 for enable disable details User Screen 3 Figure 3 2 1a Root menu with Goto View sub menu Group 1 Group 3 A Group 4 Figure 3 2 1b Root menu with Goto Group sub menu Groups which are not display enabled in Views configuration section 4 3 4 are greyed 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 29 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 2 1 KEY FUNCTIONS Cont ALARM SUMMARY The Root menu Goto View Alarm summary key calls the Alarm summary page for the current group to the screen Alternatively Alarm summary can be selected from the Alarm Message and Media menu but in this case the user must select an alarm summary group from a pop up Goto Group menu See section 3 1 4 for more details of the alarm summary page MESSAGE LOG The Root menu Goto View Message log key calls the Message Log page for the current group to the screen Alterna tively Message Log can be selected from the Alarm Message and Media menu but in this case the user must select a Group for the Message Log display from a pop up Goto Group menu See section 3 1 4 for full details of the message log User Guide HAO28910 Page 30 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 FIRST SWITCH ON When power is applied the recorder initialises and once this process is complete the home p
546. ring when the Enable or Disable key is operated 3 Ranges must be complete 1 is not acceptable 4 Each group may contain any or all points but for vertical and horizontal trend modes only the first 36 are displayed and for circular trend mode only the first twelve are traced 5 point number is entered which is greater than the number of that point type fitted then the selection is ignored For example if totalisers 1 60 are selected for deletion and only 12 are enabled then the range will be accepted and totalisers 1 to 12 deleted from the group s contents Alternatively a group s contents can be edited using the tick boxes to include the ticked items in or to exclude non ticked items from the group as required User Guide Page 70 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 Channel Alarm configuration Figure 4 3 3a below shows a typical configuration menu for an input channel For maths channels see section 4 3 11 The actual fields that appear depend on what input type is selected what linearisation type is selected and so on Channel Number 1 Channel 1 Select channel number Value 6 6893 14 09 05 15 10 53 Input Type Thermocouple y gt ee Ohms Lin Type Type K v Select Linearisation type e g Type K These fields vary according to Range Input Type
547. rior to this see the table in Previous instruments later in Annex A WARNING For portable case instruments only All connections must be Low Voltage maximum 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak or 70V dc unless the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I O is connected to the recorder 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 345 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Universal input board Cont Resistance inputs Temperature scale Types ranges and accuracies Influence of lead resistance Maximum source current Error Mismatch 11590 See tables values exclude influence of lead resistance Negligible 10 0 250 Instrument at 20 deg Maximum error Instrument at 20 deg C Worst case temperature performance 0 027 input 0 034 range 0 037 input 0 077 range 30ppm of input per deg C 0 027 input 0 035 range 0 037 input 0 057 range 30ppm of input per deg C 0 030 input 0 034 range 0 040 input 0 041 range 30ppm of input per deg Note The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above June 2007 For instruments prior to this see the table in Previous instruments later in Annex A RTD type Cu10 Cu53 JPT100 Ni100 Ni120 Pt100 Pt100A Pt1000 Overall range 20
548. risation is enabled then the button can be used only by those whose Can Authorize permission is enabled in the Ac cess menu described in section 4 4 1 When button operation is attempted a signature page figure 4 4 2b appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the change Notes 1 Require Signing and Require Authorisation appear only if the Auditor 21 11 option is fitted 2 Ifthe Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted a message appears on the chart after authorization and or signing are complete The example below shows the message when both Signing and Authorisation are enabled DD MM YY HH MM SS Button Descriptor Signed Engineer Authorised Engineer Note 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 93 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 8 Messages This feature allows messages to be sent by job action section 4 7 to the display to a specified group or to all groups Messages can also be included in e mails section 4 3 19 The messages are of the form Date Time Message The message can be just text up to 80 characters or it can include up to nine embedded items which are typed into the message as 1 to 9 The embedded values represented by 1 to 9 are selected from picklists If a Group destination message contains more characters than can be displayed on the screen depends on re
549. rity Network System Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure B9b B9c B9k 91 Instrument Groups Channels Views Archive Events Figure B9e Event Buttons Messages User Linearisations Batch Maths Figure B9f Totalisers C Views puntero Section 4 3 4 Timers Home Time out o Minutes Figure B9g Connections Home Group 1 Group 1 Master Comms Scope Group V Group 1 Group y Figure B9h Output Channels olestie socio Demand Writes Home Page Circular Trend Emails Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend Figure B9i Reports Circular Trend Options Vertical Bargraph Figure B9d Config menu structure sheet 1 Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page User Screen 1 User Screen 2 User Screen 3 ser Screen 4 Span Low 50 96 SpanHighA 100 Zone Low 0 Zone High 100 SpannedB _ ZoneLowBlo gt Zone High Boo gt PV Format Numeric y Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour A User Screenz3 User Screen 24 W Bridge User Screens 0 Apply H Discard Colour A 26 Alarm Number 1 Enable Unlatched Type Absolute Low Setpoint Source Constant Y Threshold75 gt Dwell s Job Number Y Category No Action vj Apply Discard Instrument Name Instrument Normal Display 100 Saver Display 50 Save After 30 Minutes Modbus Address Modbus Security Disabled vA Comms Chann
550. rizon tal Trend displays Display Descriptor Enable Disable For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom this selection determines whether or not the channel descriptor appears at the top of the display Display messages Enable Disable If selected displays a message bar for Horizontal Trend displays Display Pens Enable Disable If selected pen representations appear at the top or right edge of a trend chart Display Units Enable Disable For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom this selection determines whether or not the channel s units appear at the right edge of the display Faceplate Style Default Produces a channel display with the descriptor and alarm indicators on the top line and with the digital value and units on the bottom line Just value Shows only the channel value No alarms As default but without alarm display Value and Units Single line Faceplate Custom Produces a larger digital display of the channel value with units As default but all on a single line The Display Descriptor Display units and Display Alarms checkbox settings and the font selections for Value Units and Descriptor become active only if Custom is selected as Faceplate style Faceplates Location Dynamic N S E W Not available for group horizontal bargraph displays Allows the position of the faceplates to be dynamic appears at best pos
551. rom the SYSTEM menu Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default First Channel p Select first channel for adjust 1v Last Channel 6 W Select final channel for adjust Select Channels 1 Channel 1 Add Remove individual channels from adjustment list 5 Channel5 6 Channel 6 Initiate adjust ment procedure Adjust Channels Remove previ Remove Adjust ous adjustments 1 Channel 1 5 0001 23 05 07 12 11 55 2 Channel 2 5 0001 23 05 07 12 11 55 3 Channel 3 5 0001 23 05 07 12 11 55 v v 4 Channel 4 5 0001 23 05 07 12 11 55 6 Channel 6 4 998 Unadjusted Figure 4 6 4a Input adjust status page First channel Allows the user to select the lowest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted Last channel Allows the user to select the highest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted Select Channels Presents a list of all the channels from the First channel to the Last channel inclusive each of which can be removed from the adjustment list by unticking its check box The channels displayed in the status page reflect this selection Adjust channels Initiates the adjustment procedure to all the channels from the First channel to the Last channel inclusive unless the effectivity is modified using the Select Channels key Remove Adjust Returns the selected channels to factory calibra
552. roup data section 8 4 4 to see if its value is non zero This parameter contains the character count of the latest message to occur since the last poll If text length is non zero the host must access the parameter Read Text also in group data to read the message and it must also reset the Text Length parameter to zero This causes the recorder to look for any further messages in the queue and if there are it will load the latest message into the area accessed by Read Data and then set Text Length to the length of the new message If the host fails to set Text Length to zero after reading a message no new messages will be read If Text Length is zero no new messages have been generated since the last poll LONG MESSAGES messages are terminated with a null character Messages of up to 60 characters including the time and date and the terminating null can be read by the master de vice in a single transaction If the message contains more than 60 characters one or more continuation messages of up to 60 characters each are placed in Read Text as soon as the previous message has been confirmed as read The master can continue to read all these messages until it detects a null character Intelligent masters can then re assemble the characters into sin gle message Non intelligent masters can treat the continuation messages as separate messages sent at the same time as t
553. roups with Number of decades lt 5 FROM POINT This allows the chart grid to be aligned with the scale of a particular selected in the from field which appears if From Point is selected as Grid Five major divisions x A K Linear scale Two minor divisions Nine major divisions Linear scale mm Three minor divisions Three decades Figure 4 3 2c Typical chart grid definitions RECORDING ENABLE This tick box allows the logging of this group s data to the flash memory to be enabled disabled When disabled a recording speed interval fields are not editable and Trend History duration is set to zero b Display trends are present on the chart but are not preserved when changing Views Itis not possible to enter trace history if Recording Enable is not selected Notes 1 A blue line is drawn across the chart when recording is re enabled to indicate a time change in the trace 2 Ifa Recording enable job section 4 7 10 is set to act on a particular group then the group will be re corded only whilst the job is active and only if Recording is enabled for the group User Guide HAO28910 Page 68 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont RECORDING SPEED RECORDING INTERVAL If recording is enabled these fields are as for
554. rt 36 Chart Full operation 67 BootP timeout euet eee detec 196 Setlihigs oi dme gre nette 67 Break 2 4 4 4 000 0 76 Speed a een tee dons 67 Start AU iu das 67 Alarm acknowledgement 232 WONG tc EL ALT 40 Configuration dani uenia Ge 76 ACCOSS InIenU ob eet tete uere 229 cnncta eee RR LR 356 Options meris 228 46 183 218 Connection details 2 227 Clock Minimum PC requirements 2204 4222 226 ACCUIACY deo e eee teta eit epe 343 Operation ee it a eL d d en 232 Clock failure instrument alarm 16 Running the 230 Preset Software installation esee 228 Hours and minutes selection 64 Starbas 230 Job i eap e E 215 Brightness 63 EE 201 Bring archive up to date 53 cde ta bae ee Ae Rua 33 Button in eger epe terree 245 User Guide 028910 386 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE
555. ry host The secondary route is used only if the primary route fails CSV FILES This allows archive files to be transferred in comma separated values CSV format to a memory device or via FTP to a remote host computer Compression Normal Binary format only Flash Size 99 25 Mb Shortest Trend History Group 1 Duration 108 86 Days CSV include Values VW CSV include Messages CSV include Header details CSV include Column headings CSV Date Time format CSV use Tab delimiter Show Local settings W Archive to Media None Media format Binary and CSV V On Media Full Overwrite Media Size 30 4746094 Disk Archive Capacity 33 18 Days Media Full event limit 100 v v Text Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 5c CSV archive menu items MEDIA FILE FORMAT For Local Settings only this allows Binary CSV or both to be selected for file type when archiving Binary is the proprietary format used by the instrument and it requires other software e g Review Software to interpret the data before it can be presented spreadsheets shown as if on a chart etc Binary files have the extension uhh CSV format is a standard open file format for numeric data A simple ASCII based format it is readable by a wide range of PC applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial databases CSV files have the extension csv Note
556. s Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex NUL 0 00 Space 32 20 64 40 96 60 SOH 1 01 33 21 65 41 97 61 5 2 02 34 22 66 42 b 98 62 ETX 3 03 35 23 67 43 99 63 4 04 36 24 68 44 100 64 5 05 37 25 69 45 101 65 6 06 amp 38 26 70 46 f 102 66 BEL 7 07 i 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67 BS 8 08 40 28 H 72 48 104 68 9 09 41 29 1 73 49 1 105 69 LF 10 0A 42 2 74 4 106 6A VT 11 OB 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B FF 12 0C 44 2C L 76 4C 1 108 6 CR 13 OD 45 2D M 77 4 109 6D 50 14 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E SI 15 OF 47 2F 79 111 6F DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 112 70 DCI 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 114 72 DC3 19 13 3 51 33 5 83 53 S 115 73 DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 118 76 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 Ww 119 TT CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 120 78 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79 SUB 26 1 58 3A Z 90 5A Z 122 7A ESC 27 1B 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B FS 28 1C lt 60 3C 92 5C 124 7 GS 29 ID 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D RS 30 1 gt 62 94 5 126 TE US 31 1F 63 3F 95 SF Not printed 127 Notes 1 the above characters can be used as Start End of message characters entered in decimal 2 fcharacters to 31 00 to are used as messa
557. s A1 X 2 AA X ASQO A6 X9 A7 X7 8 5 where X is the value of the source channel and 0 to 8 are constants Figure 4 11 3b shows the configuration items for a third order fit with channel 2 used as the source X and A0 1 Al 22 A2 3 and A3 4 Maths Number 1 Math 1Y Value Units Function Polynomial Orders 3y Polynomial of Channel 2y 1 2 A23 4 Figure 4 11 3b Polynomial configuration fields 3rd order User Guide HAO28910 Page 110 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont FVALUE To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Temperature for temperatures below at and above Sterilizing Tempera ture both in dry Fx and steam Fo sterilizing environments using the following equation ma Target temp Fval Fval T x10 Where F value at time t minutes Fval value last iteration T Internal recorder iteration interval minutes Value of temperature measuring channel Target temp 121 1 C for Fo 170 C for 7 Temperature interval representing a factor of 10 reduction in killing efficiency 10 C for Fo 20 C for Fu User configuration consists of entering the channel which is measuring temperature the relevant sterilizing tempera ture and temperature interval Z value and a low cut off value if required Figure 4
558. s to Xn represent the inputs to the function to Yn represent the corresponding outputs from the function Notes 1 Each Y value must be unique i e there cannot be more than one X value with the same Y value assigned to it 2 Each X value other than the first must be greater than the previous one 3 Each Y value other than the first must be greater than the previous one 4 specify units other than temperature units the channel scaled facility must be used The scale low high values should be set to be the same as the range low high values and the required units entered The import export Linearisation tables feature described in Save Restore section 4 2 offers an alternative way of entering linearisation tables Figure 4 3 9a shows the default configuration page Figure 4 3 9b shows a simple table for relating water depth to wa ter volume for a cylindrical tank with a conical bottom User Linearisation 3 UserLin3V Descriptor UserLin3 Format Numerio Sect Numero Number of Points 2 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 Discard Figure 4 3 9a User linearisation configuration page CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS User Linearisation Descriptor Format Allows one of the four user linearisation tables to be selected for configuration Allows the user to enter a name of up to 20 characters including spaces for the table This allows the point pair values to be entered
559. s Each note is associated with the current display group and becomes a part of that group s history The notes appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays only although they can be entered in any display mode The note appears on the chart and in the Message Log preceded by the date time and current full user name as shown in the first example below If Audit Trail is enabled the note contains audit trail information as shown in the second example below See section 4 4 2 for details of the Auditor options 06 04 06 13 51 11 Frederick Bloggs New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A Tube 1 Date and time Full user name Message 06 04 06 13 51 11 Note Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A Tube 1 eee Date and time Audit trail information if enabled Message To enter a message 1 Press the Option key then the Note key 2 If necessary enter Signature and Authorization passwords Auditor 21CFR11 option only see section 4 4 2 3 Touch the note area of the resulting pop up display see note below 4 Enter the required text of up to 120 characters spaces are also counted as characters Press Ok when finished 5 View the note and a press the Ok button to enter the note OR b re touch the text area to edit the note OR c press the Cancel key to quit note entry T mE lt p Ecce d Option mp
560. s 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 301 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch7 span high Ch7 span low Ch7 Zone high Ch7 Zone low Ch7 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 8 Parameter Name Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display 2 Zone upper value 46 of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access DSBF 54719 D5C1 54721 D5C3 54723 5 5 54725 5 7 54727 D5C9 54729 DSCB 54731 DSCD 54733 DSCF 54735 Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch8 span high Ch8 span low Ch8 Zone high Ch8 Zone low Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch8
561. s In the above example the search is carried out for all devices with Modbus addresses in the range 1 to 2 inclusive associated with instruments which have IP addresses between 149 121 130 200 and 149 121 130 249 inclusive PARAMETERS AND KEYS Network Allows the user to select a network to search over Overwrite existing slaves Auto Detect results page see below lists all the instruments found within the search parameters along with a tick box for each one Each instrument whose tick box is enabled is assigned to the Remote Device list in the Master Comms configuration page If Overwrite existing slaves is enabled then newly found instruments will temporarily over write instru ments previously configured there The list becomes permanent when the Modbus configuration page Apply key is operated but any of the slaves can be edited if required prior to this Timeout The search for a slave is aborted if it does not respond within this time and the search moves on to the next slave From Node The start address for the search For nodes The number of contiguous addresses to be searched starting with the From Node address Modbus Address The lowest Modbus address for the search The search will seek all slaves whose Modbus Address lies between the value entered here and the value entered in the field below inclusive To The highest Modbus address to be included in the search Abort This key a
562. s a server the resolution is 1 msec 2 SNTP time is based on elapsed seconds since 00 00 hrs on 1st January 1900 The time is not affected by time zones or daylight saving adjustments 3 Ifthe instrument time differs from the SNTP time by less than 2 seconds the instrument time is updated gradually 1 msec 8 times a second to prevent time change events being recorded If the difference is greater than 2 seconds this is defined as change event the results of which are that the recorder time is immediately updated and a green line is drawn across the chart vertical trend history only to indicate the time change 4 If more than 5 time change events occur within 24 hours Time Synchronisation failure instrument alarm is set 24 hours after the first event Once synchronisation is re established the alarm self clears within 24 hours 5 SNTP server failure instrument alarm is flagged if the configured server cannot be accessed or if the year received from the server is less than 2001 or more than 2035 6 When the instrument is acting as a server and a Clock Failure instrument alarm is active the server time is set to 1 1 1900 which is ignored by clients 7 Servers such as Microsoft TimeServ cannot be used with this series of instruments because they not SNTP servers 8 Ifthe Simulation option is enabled and SNTP client enable is enabled then the recorder synchronises only on power up If SNTP
563. s a specific timer to be selected for configuration Allows the user to enable disable the selected timer This is a dynamic display showing the time remaining in hours minutes seconds format For repeat timers shows the time remaining before the repeat is initiated Display is 00 00 00 whilst timer is counting down Allows a running timer to be reset to 00 00 00 Allows the operator to initiate the timer Allows a descriptor to be entered for the timer If enabled this causes date and time selection fields to appear as shown in figure 4 3 14 above Date allows a day number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to N and Any where N is the maximum number of days in the selected month Month allows a month number to be entered from a picklist of 1 to 12 and Any Hour allows an hour number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to 23 Midnight and Any Minute allows a minutes number to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and Any Seconds allows a seconds value to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and Any Allows the user to enter a count down time period in seconds Allows the user to enter a repeat rate It should be noted that the repeat value includes the duration time For example to time down from 50 seconds every minute a Duration value of 50 seconds should be entered with a Repeat after value of 60 seconds not 10 seconds Note If Month Any and Day 31 then the
564. s are between 1 and 99 minutes HOME GROUP This picklist allows a particular group to be selected for display when the root menu Home key is pressed SCOPE The remaining items of Views configuration can be selected to act globally Instrument or to act on individual groups Group When Instrument is selected enabled display modes appear in all groups up down arrow scroll lists and are active in the Root Menu Goto View menu figure 4 3 4b When Group is selected each group can be set up with individual display mode lists For the particular group on display the up and down arrow keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes or a particular mode can be selected using the Goto View menu User Guide HAO28910 Page 82 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION Cont GROUP This field appears only if Scope is set to Group and allows each group to be selected for display configuration For other items of Group configuration see Section 4 3 2 DISPLAY ENABLE This field appears only if Scope is set to Group and allows the selected group to be enabled or disabled for display When enabled the group can be displayed either by using the Root menu Goto screens Group N selection figure 4 3 4b or can be scrolled to using the right left arrow keys When disabled the group is greyed in the Root menu Goto screens Group selection and is skipped w
565. s associated with the Security key Config Revision is printed on the chart at power up and if either Auditor option or if the Batch option is fitted Config Revision is included in the messages associated with these options Notes 1 Config Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels If such maths channel is in cluded in one or more groups the revision number can be determined for any time date when Trend His tory mode is invoked for the group s in question See section 4 3 11 for maths function details 2 Config Revision can be embedded in one or more messages as described in section 4 3 8 LAST UPDATED The time and date at which the configuration was last edited AT VERSION The version number at the time of the last configuration update CREATED ON Shows the type of instrument that the configuration was created on Normally this will be the same as Instrument Variant and will be different only if the configuration has been downloaded from a different instrument model HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 211 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 11 ABOUT Cont SECURITY REVISION Whenever a change is made to an item within the Security menus the Security revision is incremented Security Revi sion is printed on the chart at power up and if either of the Auditor options or if the Batch option is fitted Security Revision is included in the mess
566. s not editable The remaining 12 entries of up to 60 characters each are freely editable This is a different list from that entered for Op erator notes in Instrument configuration section 4 3 1 ENABLE Allows the batch function to be switched on or off BATCH MODE Allows batch mode to be selected as Continuous or Start Stop User Guide 28910 100 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH CONFIGURATION Cont BATCH FIELDS Allows the number of messages to be printed at batch start stop to be selected between one and six FIELD 1 This field is the first of up to six which can be used as headings for batch information Headings can be up to 20 char acters long including spaces In the example shown in Figure 4 3 10a Heading 1 Field 1 has the entry Batch Number When initiating the batch the operator has to enter a value to be associated with this heading see below unless Use Counter is selected in the following Batch Number field BATCH NUMBER This allows the Value entered for Field 1 s heading to be selected as Use Text or Use Counter USE TEXT When Text is selected the value for field 1 is entered by the operator on initiation of the batch USE COUNTER When Counter is selected a further field appears counter allowing a specific counter to be selected from a picklist The selected counter initiates a new batch whenever it changes value a
567. s on the chart to be enabled or disabled as re quired Acknowledge messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH MM SS ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE Alarms are acknowledged as described in section 3 1 4 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 69 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont POINT TYPE SELECTION The Point Type box together with the Selection box immediately below offers a quick way of editing the contents of a group as follows 1 Select the type of point Channel Maths Totaliser or Counter to be edited from the Point Type drop down menu 2 Enter the numbers of all the points of the selected type to be added or deleted in the Selection box See notes below for further details 3 Click on Enable to add the selected points to the group contents or on Disable to remove them 4 Repeat for other point types as required Notes 1 status of all points not included in the selection box remains unchanged 2 Point numbers are entered individually or as one or more ranges separated by commas if applicable For example an entry of 1 3 6 9 11 would cause points 1 2 3 6 9 10 and 11 to be added or removed from the group contents Only numeric characters commas and hyphens minus signs are accepted If any other character including space s is included in the list the edit will fail with a message Invalid Selection appea
568. s suspended the internal solenoid releases the catch to allow the flap to be opened and a pop up mes sage appears to remove archive media figure 2 4 1b 4 After approximately five seconds the solenoid returns the catch to the locked position The flap can be returned to the closed position whether or not the flap lock is engaged It is up to the user to ensure that the flap is properly closed and locked Touch Root menu key or Alarm area e g channel alarm symbol fo OOO Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Batch Summary Figure 2 4 1a Unlock Flap key locations OK to remove archive media Ok Figure 2 4 1b OK to remove archive media message User Guide HAO28910 Page 12 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 4 1 FLAP LOCK OPERATION Cont ARCHIVE ACTIVE 1 Touch the root menu key or alarm status area at the top of the screen 2 Touch the Unlock Flap key figure 2 4 1a 3 The flap unlocks for 5 seconds in the normal way to allow access to the stylus and the usbfront port but a warn ing message appears on the screen figure 2 4 1c a If the Cancel key is operated the message disappears Subsequently if this is a Demand Archive the mand archive finished message appears when the archive is complete Archiving is not suspen
569. s updated every 20 seconds The exception is the Trend page refresh rate which can be edited as shown in gigure C1 2 2a by typing in the new value and then either clicking on Set or using the computer Enter key Because of the processing time required it is not recommended that a value of less than 5 seconds be entered C1 2 1 Instrument This opens the instrument page a typical example of which is shown in figure C1 2 1 below Home Trends Message Logs History About Instrument Status at 12 04 06 14 53 24 Global Channel Alarm Healthy Figure C1 2 1 Instrument display INSTRUMENT ALARMS Either Healthy green background or a list of any active instrument alarm s red background GLOBAL CHANNEL ALARM Either Healthy green background if there are no point alarms or Active red background if there is one or more active point alarm 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 381 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C1 2 2 Trends Clicking on the Trends tab displays a screen allowing the user to select a refresh rate and one of Horizontal trend Ver tical Trend or Numeric as the display format Both the horizontal and vertical trend modes include the numeric display table Home Instrument Trends Horizontal Trend Vertical Trend Numeric Display Please select tren Select viewing mode by Edit refresh rate clicking on required heading then
570. screen can subsequently be imported either into this recorder or into a different recorder 4 2 7 Import User Linearisation User Linearisation 1 UserLin File Name userlin Import The Import Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables to be imported either from the Compact Flash SD card USB device or if Bridge Full software is fitted directly from the host PC Touching the User Linearisation field allows the user to select which of UserLinl to UserLin4 is to contain the im ported file Touching the File Name field calls a popup menu similar to that shown in figure 4 2b This allows the user to select the table to be imported The file must be comma separated ASCII as follows n XLYI X2 Y2 X3 Y3 Xn Yn where is the total number of XY pairs in the table and or each pair X is the input value and Y is the linearised value corresponding to X See section 4 3 9 for full details Note Imported linearisation tables will not become effective until after the next configuration Apply opera tion 4 2 8 Export User Linearisation Similar to Import user Linearisation above the Export Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables created in the recorder to be exported either via the Compact Flash SD card or if Bridge Full software is fitted directly to the host PC See section 4 3 9 for full details 4 2 9 Import printer driver Similar to Import user Linearisatio
571. selectable menu items Disabled Text This allows the user to choose a colour for the text associated with disabled items For exam ple key top legends on the Goto Group menu for groups that are not display enabled Title Bar background The colour of the title bar block at the top of the display screen Note that the text colour for the Trend Foreground title block is that defined in Fixed Text above The colour of the grid lines timestamps and messages on the real time trend display Trend Background The colour of the chart in the real time trend display History Foreground The colour of the grid lines timestamps and messages on the trend history display History Background The colour of the chart in the trend history display Font set Allows the user to select a size for the display font This also affects the size of the containing item i e push button keys etc also change size See FONT SIZE below Default Allows the user to return to the factory default settings HA028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 209 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 10 CUSTOMISE Cont FONT SIZE EXAMPLES The following figures give examples drawn to the same scale for all of the different font sizes available except Auto which picks a font size considered appropriate for the size of screen Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Very small
572. selected in Colour Channel described above The number of threshold values entered must match the number of colour values entered in Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds Channel Alarms Allows a number of semicolon separated values 1 to 4 to be entered to act as colour change triggers for the component being configured These values represent alarms 1 to 4 of the source channel selected in Colour Channel described above The number of alarms entered must match the number of colour values entered in Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds Point is displayed in the colour of the latest active alarm For example Alarms configured 1 2 Foreground colours configured 3 0 amber and red When alarm 1 goes active the component goes amber When alarm 2 goes active the component goes red When alarm two clears component reverts to Amber and so on Background quartile Background colour represents the value of the colour channel Colour 0 appears for values below 25 colour 1 for values between 25 and 50 colour 3 for values between 50 and 7546 and colour 4 for values above 75 Foreground colour is default 1 Foreground quartile As background quartile but for the foreground colour Background colour 15 default 1 Background decimal Background colour represents the value of the colour channel Colour 0 appears for values below 10 colour 1 for values between 10 and 20 colour 2 for values between 20 and 3096 and so on up to
573. selection Range Range Units Select Celsius Fahrenheit Kelvins or Rankine Scaled Scale Low0 V These fields appear only if Seale High t Scaled is selected Units V Offset o V Select None Linear Log Scale Type Linear Y og available only if Scaled is ticked le Divisions Major Seale i HE 8 10 Joe these fields vary with the type of scale selected Scale Divisions Minor Select None Filter None V 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 or 256 seconds Break Response None Y select None High or Low Cold Junction Type Internal V 3J Select Off Internal External Remote Descriptor Channel 1 Switching Allows Span A high low Span B high low Zone A high low Zone B high low and Colour A B values to be entered for use Spanned y by Trend jobs Low V These fields appear only if Span High t v Spanned is selected Zone Low o 96 Zone High 100 96 FormatNumeric Select Numeric or Scientific Max Decimal DigitsA Colour Alarm Number 1 Y Select Alarm number Enable Unlatched Type Absolute High Setpoint Source Constant M Threshold o V These fields vary according to HysteresisD V Alarm Type selection Dwell o 5 Job Number 1 Select Job number Category Drive Relay Relay Board 1 7 These fields vary according Relay Number 1 to the selec
574. splay as described in section 3 SETPOINT SOURCE Allows the user to choose either a fixed user defined value constant or the value of another point input channel maths channel totaliser etc to be chosen as the trigger point In the latter it is possible for example to trigger an alarm when one channel s value rises above falls below etc the value of a second channel User Guide HAO28910 Page 78 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont PARAMETERS Figures 4 3 3d e and f illustrate the following terms for the different alarm types Threshold Hysteresis Dwell Reference Deviation Amount Change Time Average time For Absolute alarms this defines the value in engineering units at which an alarm is triggered The alarm also returns to its non active state at this value unless a hysteresis value has been set If a dwell value is set the alarm does not become active until this dwell time has elapsed Defines a deadband in engineering units to eliminate spurious triggering if the signal value is hovering around the trigger point The deadband lies Below Absolute High thresholds Above Absolute Low thresholds Outside the deviation band for Deviation in alarms Inside the deviation band for Deviation out alarms Allows a dwell period to be entered in seconds The alarm does not take effect until this period has ex pired If a
575. ssure conditions and is give by the equation P x 1 T p where Z Compressibility factor P Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa A Absolute temperature of the gas Kelvins gas density at pressure P and temperature T from published tables CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Figure 4 3 11d shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with Linear Mass Flow function selected Maths Number 1 Math 1 Value 123 4567 Units Function Linear Mass Flow v Flow Channeli Y Temperature Channel2 Y Absolute Pressure Channel 3 Y Scale o p 00 0 Gas Constant 0 J kg K Figure 4 3 1 1d Linear mass flow menu Flow Allows the input channel measuring the flowmeter output to be entered Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature Kelvins to be entered Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure KPa A to be entered Scale o p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units S Ma Full scale input range set for Flow channel in flowmeter units Gas Constant the relevant gas constant in J kg K 7 compressibility factor described above 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 113 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ROOT MASS FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside
576. ster s address The unit will also communicate with third party instruments but in such a case the user has to define the required read write register addresses derived from data supplied by the manufacturer of the instrument Once the remote unit has been recognised by the master the master and slave units can be configured to carry out the following 1 By setting a master input channel to Type Master Comms selected parameters can be read by the master from a selected slave This master channel can then be included in display groups can have alarm setpoints run jobs etc independently of the original channel In a similar way maths functions can be read by setting a master Maths channel to Function Master Comms 2 Demand Write feature can write values to a selected parameter in a selected slave as one shot update Demand Writes can be initiated by operator action or they can be initiated by job action or if the User Screens option is fitted by Operator Key action 3 For slaves whose input and or maths channels can be set to Slave Comms or Serial Comms etc the master s Output channels feature can copy master input or maths channels to a selected slave as a continuous process Notes l Ifreading from or writing to more than one instrument it is recommended that some thought be given to instrument and point descriptors as confusion can easily arise This is particularly true if Br
577. strument alarms Channel Failure and Output channel failure are not self clearing Once the cause of the failure is rectified the recorder must be power cycled in order to clear the alarm User Guide Page 16 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 3 ALARM INDICATION INSTRUMENT ALARMS Cont Paper Low Paper Out Warning messages from the ASCII printer if fitted Printer not responding There is a fault in the serial comms link with the ASCII printer if fitted Recording failure message Message explains recording failure due to file error internal overflow etc Removable media failure This error is set if the archive storage device is corrupt wrongly formatted etc Becomes active only when an Archive is attempted Removable media full Archive storage device full Becomes active only when an Archive is in progress SNTP server failure This error is set if a the year received from the server is 2001 or 2035 or b the configured SNTP server cannot be accessed Time synchronisation failure Set if 5 or more Time change events are caused by the SNTP server within 24 hrs A Time change event occurs whenever the recorder time is found to be more than 2 seconds different from the server time The alarm does not appear until 24 hours have elapsed since the first of the five or more Time Change events occurred USB over current USB power fault too much current being d
578. sue 4 Aug 07 028910 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 199us pieosig Aiddy uonoy on 16quinN a uo eiqeu3 16quinN 92 ewo a pueosiq Kiddy euoN ed 001 euoz __ Aq sayy eureN 8 0 euoz pieosiq Aiddy AL mau uo suw ejeos on doys uo 0 81895 ueis uo RA a v eiqeu3 1081 104 Jojeedo pier 109 OWEN JOWOISND 2 v suBig 0 0 emau 1 10 5 Buizijieis euoN ed 25 esf play yeg Jeuueu jo 001 euoz ______ yeg Ple uoHnound euoz ar mod gess 295110101 suun aeos dojg Jels uoreg anen aseo suu moq ejeos
579. t muet 76 Generation eed ees 178 F 221 2 178 tes 176 EOCAllono sso cce 249 Earlier messages mette 26 Style e ct epo derepente eerie 249 Edit Failed to authenticate user name 233 240 eo e een 245 Paraimetet ete erento 245 UE E UM I MINIM 225 Elapsed time format 110 Identification table 297 Enable Locked i2 aet bu ias 225 Audit trail Field 1 to 6 101 rip E Field T on et 179 323 Demand Write File tet ee endete ree e HESS 222 Display modes itane ois iei tees 83 Formats archiving 88 89 Error Count B idcft nette erect 149 abt a choeur ae 28 Modbus SlaVE anarias oa iae 152 Let ERR 224 Gen 360 Transfer FTP 54 149 Filer Option meruere 222 End of message 148 ideo cree teste pee 245 Engineer Access level 31 185 Filter citer teret eei dta de qui not
580. t 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page v 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 28575 Connecti ns2 ret b ERI S RN aides 146 INTRODUCTION 525 ed SAGs roe ore t ETE e ER ceto t e reis st 146 IINSTALIATION o o beet t eri 146 TERMINATION AND BIASSING Not 232 146 CONEFIGURATION du retire sea 147 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 148 MESSAGING INFORMATION 149 M BDBUS ADDRESS ettet E torture edu ng 149 4 316 Ds EP EHE LO n Fe tated 150 INTRODUCTION tis 5 2 net eder i a etre 150 MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU 151 DETECT THIS SLAVE cnet err ere erede ate tps 152 DETECT ALU SLAVES fiie enfe eid eee ete y ter eu pr edere ie 153 SHARE SOCKET ciere tr e Oe PER 155 MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION 156 STATUS BITS ior eset es re bebo reden ium 162 MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION 164 MASTER CEIANINEL 1 SETUP eate tute ER 165 MASTER CHANNEL 2 SETUP 166 MASTER OUTPUT 1 SETUP 167 SLAVE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SETUP
581. t Compare the next byte with key2 if ibyte lt dataLen encryptedData ibyte key2 Now EXOR each byte to the next byte until no more are available if all goes well the last byte in the array should never change for ibyte 0 ibyte lt dataLen 1 ibyte encryptedData ibyte encryptedData ibyte encryptedData ibyte 1 Now add all the bytes together to get a 16 bit value result for ibyte 0 ibyte lt dataLen ibyte byteResult encryptedData ibyte Return the encrypted string as 16 bit value return byteResult Notes 1 If login is accepted a standard response is sent to the master 2 If three invalid logins are sent by the master then an illegal address exception code 2 is sent to the master 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 265 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST Request Figure 8 2 4a shows data transmission sequence for sending a login request using the Ethernet network connection Figure 8 2 4b is the same message for use with serial communications Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 00 00 00 00 00 13 00 10 30 00 06 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Start Start of regis No of reg identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes
582. t silver grey colour is used Repaints the component area in the screen background colour thus render ing the component invisible PV Error Colour Background Default Allows a colour to be selected for background use when the relevant PV is in an error state Overrides other selections PV Error Colour Foreground Default Allows a colour to be selected for foreground use when the relevant PV is in an error state Overrides other selections Reversed colour None Allows text to be displayed in the background colour against a background of foreground colour Scale Digits None For Horizontal trend displays Allows the chart area to be maximised by reducing the width of the vertical bar to the right of the chart Scales will be presented in scientific format or in N N format etc depending on the number of digits specified The number of digits is in addition to the decimal point Scale Divisions Major None For channel bargraphs allows the number of major scale divisions to be specified for the channel Overwrites the Scale Divisions Major setting in the Channel s configuration Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 4 of 6 User Guide Page 250 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Scale Divisions Minor None For channel bargraphs allows the
583. t 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare CHANNEL 2 Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr Register Name Dec Length Ch2 value Current process value PV Scaled See note 1 AIDC 41436 1 Ch2 status Channel status Enum Read only A1DD 41437 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Ch2 Alarms Alarm information Uintl6 AIDE 41438 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 2 Alarm 2 inactive 1 2 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit13 0 No Alarm 4
584. t Apply H Discard Specify the high output and then the high section 4 6 7 Successful Comms Tests 1 section 4 6 4 reading High Output 9 Initiate Comms Test High Reading 8 917 First Channel 1 W 3 Select first channel for adjust Last Channel 6 W Select final channel for adjust Host 149 121 131 78 Ping Status Host Reachable v Local Modbus Client 1 127 0 0 1 Local Modbus Client 2 Offline Reset Diagnostics When the values have been entered select Apply to complete the adjustment procedure Select Channels Apply Discard Initiate adjust ment procedure Adjust Channels Remove previ Remove Adjust ous adjustments Remote Modbus Client 1 149 12 1 130 242 Channel 1 v Sencie Modaus Chee 2 M 1 Channel 1 5 0001 18 04 05 11 58 38 Channel 3 2 2 5 0001 Y 18 04 05 11 58 38 Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline 3 Channel 3 50001 wH8 04 05 11 58 38 Remote Modbus Client 4 192 168 189 89 Channel 5 __ 4 Channel 4 5 0001 v 18 04 05 11 58 38 Channel 6 6 Channel 6 4 998 v Unadjusted Figure 891 System key menu structure sheet 1 User Guide HA0289 10 Page 378 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont
585. t appear in any of the alarm summary pages Touch Alarm area 77 e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Batch Summary Group 2 Group 1 Group 3 Group 4 Message Log Unlock Flap Group 6 Water temp 1b 30 0000 C 23 Water temp 1b 10 0000 C Touch alarm to Alarm setpoint PURI call Acknowledge 5 Transfer Absolute alarms only dialogue box Confirm acknowledge of alarm Channel no Channel alarm no descriptor Yes No Current process Alarm type value symbol Figure 3 1 4d Alarm Summary display User Guide HAO28910 Page 20 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Alarms can be acknowledged individually on a group basis or globally all alarms INDIVIDUAL ALARMS Individual alarms are acknowledged from the alarm summary page by touching the relevant item highlights yellow then touching Yes in the resulting pop up confirmation box Figure 3 1 3a above attempts to show this process GROUP ALARMS Alarms can be acknowledged on a group basis by calling the alarm summary page for the relevant group then pressing the Options key section 3 2 the Ack Group Alarms key and finally Yes in the resulting pop up confirmation box Figure 3 1 4e below attempts to show this process Alarm Summary Group 1 1 1 Water temp
586. t at 30 seconds past each hour Note Times not adjusted for Daylight Saving changes Thus if the timer is set to trigger on a daily weekly etc basis then during Summer Time the trigger will occur an hour late i e at 01 00 hrs instead of at mid night The full range of jobs is available as described in section 4 7 Timer Active is defined as an internal event trigger sec tion 4 3 6 CONFIGURATION Figure 4 3 14 shows a typical timer configuration display The page is accessed from the Root menu Operator Config menu Timer number 1 Timer 1 Y Select timer Enable v Remaining 00 00 00 Repeat in 00 00 00 Reset now Start now Descriptor 1 Self start W Date Month These fields appear Hour Midnight Y only if Self start is enabled Minute Any Y Second Duration 60 Seconds Repeat after 0 Seconds Job Number 1 Y Select Job number Select Job Category No Action V gt category Apply Discard Figure 4 3 14 Typical timer configuration page User Guide HAO28910 Page 144 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 14 TIMERS Cont Configurable parameters Timer number Enable Remaining Repeat in Reset now Start now Descriptor Self Start Duration Repeat after Allow
587. t be carried out within this period or password expiry will recur New Password Retype Password Apply Logout Centralised Security This checkbox occurs only if the Security Management option is fitted If this checkbox is enabled none of the other parameters in the Management menu can be edited at the recorder i e they become Read Only Changes can be made only by means of Security Management software At the recorder the following menu items also become read only or do not appear as menu items or are not selectable even if the checkbox appears Access level permissions section 4 1 1 Read Only Add User Remove User section 4 4 3 Do not appear as menu items Restore configuration Security data section 4 2 2 Not selectable New configuration Security data section 4 2 3 Not selectable The Security Revision previously Security Version is initially set to 1 when Centralised Security is enabled It will remain at this value until a successful download has been performed via Security Manager Software The Security Revision will then take the downloaded value e g 139 Any local security revision changes e g max number of logins exceeded cause the value to have a local change count starting at 001 appended to it e g 139 001 139 002 and so on The local change count is reset to 000 and no longer displayed when the next download occurs e g 140 Downloads can occur auto
588. t configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Other wise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 286 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 5 Parameter Name Description Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Ch5 value Ch5 status Current process value PV Channel status Scaled Enum See note 1 Read only ATES 41445 1 6 41446 1 1 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch5 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 1 7 41447 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bitll Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 2 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit15 Spare Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write
589. t output channels and the slave Comms channel It is assumed that a the master comms configuration has been completed with Remote devices 1 2 and 3 set up as Furn Control Furn1 Record and Furn2 control respectively b all recorders are of the type described in this manual Other types of slave may need more inputs or different in puts to be entered EXAMPLE see figure 4 3 16 to Read 1 PV from Controller 1 to Channel 1 of Recorder 1 the master Read Channel 1 from Recorder 2 to Channel 2 of the master Write Channel 2 of the Master to Channel 1 of Recorder 3 Controller 1 Slave 1 Furn1 Control Channel 1 2 Recorder 1 3 Slave 2 Master Slave 3 Furn1 Record Furn2 Record Fum1 Tempi Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Figure 4 3 16j Required setup User Guide HAO28910 Page 164 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER CHANNEL 1 SETUP Master channel setup to read the PV from Furn1 Control into channel 1 is shown in figure 4 3 16k below Note that for this example that a Span High of 100 and Descriptor Furnl 1 have been entered The span zero and span high values should match those of the PV being read Channel Number Value Input Type Slave Digital Parameter Loop Number Process Value PV Format Span Low Span High Zon
590. t replaceable If it is suspected that the fuse is faulty the manufacturer s local service centre should be contacted for advice 4 Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired the unit shall be made inoperative and secured against accidental operation The manufacturer s nearest service centre should be contacted for advice 5 Any adjustment maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage should be avoided as far as possi ble and if inevitable shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved 6 Where conductive pollution e g condensation carbon dust is likely adequate air conditioning filtering sealing etc must be installed in the recorder enclosure 7 Signaland supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another Where this is impractical shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring 8 Ifthe equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment might be impaired A full definition of Hazardous voltages appears under Hazardous live in BS EN61010 Briefly under normal op erating conditions hazardous voltages are defined as being 30V RMS 42 2V peak or 60V dc SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the recorder labelling Refer to the manual for instructions Protective earth This recorder for ac supply only This r
591. t should be 3 2 the rectangle width to produce a square The actual height width ratio is 535 800 0 669 for large frame units or 214 320 0 669 for small frame units Using pixels as the measuring units obviates this problem as pixels are square UserGuide 028910 256 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 16 Polyline series of points Similar to closed polygons described in section 7 4 17 below but the first and last points are not automatically joined and the drawn item cannot be filled and the line width cannot be specified it is always one pixel Note When working in percentage units it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only 2 3 the size of horizontal percentage units this affecting the appearance of the drawn item Example To draw an old fashioned electronic resistor icon Units Absolute pixels X position 400 Y position 236 Foreground colour 0 X points 0 10 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 90 100 Y points 0 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 Press Apply then Close to produce a red sawtooth outline as depicted in figure 7 4 16 below Point Point 12 0 0 100 0 Figure 7 4 16 Polyline example HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 257 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 17 Polygon closed area This allows a number of pairs of points to be entered which if vali
592. tage to be applied lies within the range specified on the serial number label at the rear of the recorder As shown in Figure 13 3 2a below the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the case A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder Minimum recommended conductor size is 16 0 2 0 5mm 20AWQ SIGNAL WIRING Signal wiring consists of wiring the thermocouples to the relevant plugs and plugging them and the pre wired pres sure transducer in Figure 13 3 2a shows the arrangement of the sockets at the rear of a six channel recorder 12 chan nel similar and of an 18 channel recorder Figure 13 3 2b shows the wiring of the thermocouple plugs Ethernet RJ45 USB Ports option USB Ports option Serial comms option Ethernet RJ45 Mains supply connection Coni Con2 Con3 Con4 5 Con6 T C type T colours BS4937 1993 IEC584 3 1989 51843 1952 Current Superseded Brown White White Blue Brown Blue Figure 13 3 2b Thermocouple plug wiring cover removed for clarity 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 335 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 3 2 WIRING Cont
593. td a tis ehe dte o e lee 347 linearisation Eion etc tr eie o Re ode etes e teed der ege 347 Cold junction compensation CJC error sse 347 Maximum error ERE 347 PREVIOUS IINSTRUMEBITS 212i too retro t x D AS A 348 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Relay output board 349 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Event input board 222 2 350 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Analogue output board 350 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ASCII Printer 350 Cont HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page xiii 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page Annex B REFERENCE Bi DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY Eo EROR ERE 351 B1 1 Main diagnostic dis play torti rete 351 B12 SREGIAL MODES tele eon e en ep 352 DISPLAY TEST aera cei e 352 BIA TOUCH CALIBRATION rct ter rrt 352 1 4 1 Touchscreen E 353 BT 4 2 Touch screen vefily i te 353 1 4537
594. te N Set output channel N to default values tA amp In all the above represents any number between 1 and the maximum number available for the relevant type of point Point is an umbrella term for input channel a maths channel a totaliser etc When the button is operated a confirmation page appears allowing for example the value of a constant to be edited before operating the Apply button Notes 1 Ifthe point being accessed is not suitably configured the confirmation page is blank For example if the Operator button is configured to change say the threshold SP of Alarm 2 on Channel 6 and either Channel 6 is Configured Off or alarm 2 is Off then the Confirmation page will not have a configurable area allowing the user to enter the required new value 2 Any signing or authorizing that normally applies to the item being edited also applies when changes are being made by means of the Operator button 7 4 11 Event Button This displays a pushbutton to be used as a source for an event The button name its action latching or unlatching and whether or not the operation of the button needs signing or authorizing are set up in Event Button configuration described in section 4 3 7 The actions taken when the button is operated are set up in Event configuration described in section 4 3 6 Signing and Authorizing are as described in section 4 4 2 Management
595. ted job category while Active M Apply Discard Figure 4 3 3a Channel alarm configuration menu typical Notes 1 Numeric values e g input low can be up to 10 characters including decimal point 2 Refer to section 3 3 1 for numeric and text entry techniques 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont Example A type J thermocouple is used to measure a temperature range of 100 to 200 degrees Celsius This thermo couple output is transmitted to the recorder by a 4 to 20 mA transmitter for display as an efficiency value between 0 and 10096 In such a case the following values would be set up Input type 2 milliamp Input low 4 0 Input high 20 0 Shunt 250 Ohms Lin Type Type J Range Low 100 Range High 200 Range Units Scaled W Scale low 0 0 Scale high 100 Scale units Note The following description shows all possible fields The recorder itself edits the list and shows only those fields appropriate to the setup so far For example the Shunt field appears only for mA input type CHANNEL NUMBER The current channel and its descriptor are displayed Touching the window area allows another channel to be selected for configuration Alternatively the right and left arrow keys at the bottom of the screen can be used to increment and decrement respectively the channel
596. teed not to lose data depends on the size of the Trend History Buffer Note Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes Thus if the archive is set to daily weekly or monthly then during Summer Time the archive will occur an hour late i e at 01 00 hrs instead of midnight REMOTE PATH For Remote setting only this specifies the route to a folder or directory on the remote host set up as a part of that host s FTP configuration The path name may be up to 103 characters in length 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 87 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont PRIMARY REMOTE HOST For Remote setting only If a Domain Name Server DNS is specified the Network key Name page fig 4 5 2 then the Primary Remote Host is the server name If DNS is not selected then the Primary Remote Host is the IP address of the remote host set up in the host s Control Panel Network PRIMARY LOGIN NAME PASSWORD For Remote setting only Login name and password of the remote host account assigned either by the Network administrator or in the Guest account of the remote host s FTP Server or User Manager configuration The password which must be of between eight and 20 characters must be entered twice to ensure integrity SECONDARY REMOTE HOST LOGIN PASSWORD For Remote setting only As for primary versions but for a seconda
597. teer 105 a aha aiet eia 76 Non operator initiation 8 105 Data ete a E 254 EEEE A ARTT 102 IM 76 Operator initiation 102 Fall te hoch ce hoc dt ets 16 Stait aee ehe 216 Instrument alarms een 16 Summary page dete terere dete 22 Max Min Average eeee me 109 Battery DRE 254 Backed RAM cleared 16 Run time data Backed RAM 343 32 bit 134 304 to 309 tree eec edes 355 Run time data MODBUS 285 to 290 ii eei 18 User screen 245 Low Event nnne 91 cette eta 182 epe tee entere 357 Character set Specification cnet eed 343 Keyboards cte piene Eee rte 33 Baud Rate Setial COMMS n need 364 Serial Pete esie 148 Chart Serial coms x xd eeu Ae T a a 322 Grid 68 Serial printer eee ipee 329 Speed Circular 200 000 67 Best Fit 247 Circular Chart Blue line across the cha
598. tegories is appropriate in order to bring the archive up to date The Last Archive window shows the time and date of the previous archive The Archive Transfer window shows archive status as Active or In active Config Security Network System Save Restore Last Archive 08 09 2005 12 00 00 Bring Archive Up To Date Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Archive Last 7 Days Archive Last 31 days Archive Cancel Archive Archive Transfer Inactive Figure 4 1 2 Remote archive strategy configuration Additionally a user on a remote PC has full viewing capabilities can extract recorder files at any time and can access those items of recorder configuration that are associated with the user s login For successful connection Connect from Remote must be enabled and the Remote user name and Remote password must be defined in one of the ac counts all in the Security access menu section 4 4 1 Notes In order to view history files when accessing the instrument remotely the recorder s address the Remote 1 user name and the Remote password must be supplied to an FTP client such as PC Review or Microsoft Internet Explorer When accessing files using Microsoft Internet Explorer the address URL field can be in one of two forms
599. ternal wiring 13 4 3 Specification Information additional to the general specification in Annex A Safety isolation DC to 65 Hz BS EN61010 Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak or 70V dc to earth 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak or 70V dc to earth Channel to channel Channel to ground 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 339 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE OPTION Some of the portable case options described in this manual can be ordered for use with 24V nom supply voltages In such cases the supply voltage part of the wiring diagrams is replaced with that shown in figure 13 5a unless otherwise stated The low voltage supply is terminated by a three pin plug as shown in figure 13 5b Note The polarity of the dc supply is not critical but the recorder operates more efficiently with the polarity shown below 20 to 54V dc DC 3 Brown 45 to 400 Hz RMS Fe Blue supply 1 Green Yellow Earth Chassis Ground Figure 13 5a Internal wiring for low voltage options Figure 13 5b Low supply voltage connector details 20 to 52Vdc or 20 to 42V RMS 24V _ Earth A Supply connector User Guide Page 340 HA028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER G
600. the MKT is to be measured Sample interval Enter the time period in seconds between samples At each sample interval the maximum and minimum temperatures reached by the input source since the last sample are entered into the equation Heat of Activation The default value is an average value based on many common organic reactions Allows the user to enter an alternative value if known EXAMPLE 1 To Produce a 4 weekly value of MKT taking samples every day Number of samples 28 Sample interval No of seconds in a day 24 x 60 x 60 86 400 EXAMPLE 2 To produce an annual value of MKT taking samples every week Number of sample 52 Sample interval No of seconds in a week 77 x 24 x 60 x 60 604 800 Notes 1 This function produces a rolling result I E when the final Nth sample has been taken the next sample N 1 th replaces Sample 1 the N 2th sample replaces Sample 2 and so on 2 During the first sample the current minimum and maximum values of temperature are entered into the equation at the recorder iteration rate i e SHz 3 number of readings over which the value can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM instanta neously available and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available see section 3 1 3 for details 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 117 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHI
601. the condensate liquid in kJ kg at temperature T2 Vin and AV are available from published tables note 2 but the recorder user needs only to enter values for measured flow either the temperature or the pressure of the steam and the temperature of the conden sate These values can be constants input channels or maths channels Figure 4 3 111 and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details Figure 4 3 11k is a simplified sketch of a typical installation showing where flow rate pressure and temperature read ings are taken a 72 P 6 Steam supply Inlet Inlet pressure flow or temperature Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Process 2 Process 1 Condensate temperature 5 Condensate Figure 4 3 11k Measurement transducer typical locations Notes The units of kg sec and m sec are used above for simplicity In fact any time unit can be used For exam ple if the measured flow is in m hour then the Mass flow will be in kg hour 2 ASME Steam tables 1999 from IAPWF IF97 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 121 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED Cont PARAMETERS Inlet Flow Use Inlet Temperature Inlet Pressure Inlet Dryness Return Temperature Maths Number 2 Math 2Y Value 987 6543 Units Func
602. the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equations solved is QM _ K Flow t RgxZ Temp where Mass flow in kg sec at time Scaling factor see below Specific gas constant in J kg K see below 7 Compressibility factor see below Flow Measured value from the flow meter at time t Absolute pressure of the fluid at time t in KPa A Temp Temperature of the fluid in Kelvins SCALING FACTOR This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known Flow AbsP and Temp The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale SPECIFIC GAS CONSTANT The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables For convenience the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4 3 11a below Air Ammonia Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane Nitrogen Oxygen Propane Steam Table 4 3 11a Common gas constants User Guide HAO28910 Page 112 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont LINEAR MASS FLOW Cont COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR Z FACTOR Compressibility factor is a density related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a perfect gas under any set of temperature and pre
603. ther than a single point For each sample period the maximum and minimum values reached by any point s within the specified group are saved and used as inputs to the Equation Maths Number 1 Math 1 Value 0 0000 Units Function Group MKT Source 1 Group 1 Y Number of samples 3 Sampleinterval 0 125 6 Heat of Activation 83 144 kJ mole Unit ni Discard Figure 4 3 1 1m Group MKT configuration page User Guide Page 122 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont RATE OF CHANGE The equation solved is dPV _ In In S dt P Where dPV dt Rate of change of PV with time In Input value this time p7 Input value last time i e this time P P Sample period i e this time last time in seconds Only periods that are a multiple of 0 125 seconds are accepted R Scaling factor Generally R is the number of seconds in the required per unit time value For example if R 1 the rate is per second if R 60 the rate is per minute if R 3600 the In rate is per hour Note For channels being read over Modbus the priority intervals set in the Modbus Master configuration menu section 4 3 16 may cause the readings to be inaccurate or to be continuously zero For this reason a minimum sample period of 1 second is recommended Ma
604. ther groups This happens because the recorder attempts to store as nearly as possible the same amount of history for all groups regardless of how many points there are in the groups For empty groups or if Recording is not enabled for a group the Trend History Duration is displayed as 0 Days ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE If recording is enabled these tick boxes allow the archiving of this group s data to removable mass storage media and or to a remote host FTP to be enabled or disabled If recording is disabled these fields cannot be edited Note When recording to floppy disk drives via a USB port it is recommended that only one group be set up with Archive to media enabled This is because history files are typically 400 in size and this limits the number of files which can be saved to a 1 4MB floppy disk to three If more than one group is set up to archive and if Overwrite strategy is selected then it is likely that all the data for one or more of the groups will be lost No warning is given ALARM MESSAGE This box allows the printing of alarm on and off messages on the chart to be enabled or disabled as required Alarm messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH MM SS Alarm ON n m and HH MM SS Alarm OFF n m where is the relevant channel number and m is the alarm number 1 or 2 ACK MESSAGE This tick box allows the printing of alarm acknowledgement message
605. threshold of 10 will not be triggered until the value exceeds 10 i e counter value 11 In order to trip the alarm at 10 a threshold lower than 10 must be entered e g threshold 9 5 A similar situation exists for absolute low and deviation alarms User Guide 028910 140 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 COUNTERS Cont COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option the table below gives addresses for counter 1 configuration data Generally Counter N parameter address counter 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal For full details of the Modbus implementation see section 8 COUNTER CONFIGURATION DATA COUNTER 1 Parameter Name Description Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A Type Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Span high Span low Zone high Zone low PV type Decimal places Colour Units Spare Open string Spare Close string Spare Descriptor Spare No of alarms PV format Spare Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Upper span value display full scale Lower span value displa
606. ths Number 1 Mathi Y Value 0 0000 Units Reset now Function Rate of change Rate of change of 1 Channel 1 Y Sample period 0 125 S Rate Scalar 0 125 Units Units Figure 4 3 11n Rate of change configuration menu HAO28910 User Guide Page 123 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont OXYGEN O2 CORRECTION This function carries out O correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring applications The equation calculated is 20 9 Specified 20 9 Measured x Measured Gas Correction where Specified O specified oxygen entered as a constant 5 digit value prescribed for the particular process Measured measured oxygen entered as a channel number gas analyser input See application note be low Measured the measured gas entered as a channel number gas analyser input APPLICATION NOTE Some Authorities allow Oxygen correction to be made ONLY if the Measured Oxygen value is above a limit specified by such Authorities For the oxygen correction function to conform with this requirement it is necessary to Filter the Measured Oxygen value using a High Select function with Measured Oxygen and the Specified Limit constant as its inputs The output from this function derived channel number is then used as the Measured oxygen value Maths Num
607. timer will not be triggered in February April June September or November Similarly if Day 30 the timer will not be triggered in February and so on Job configuration is as described in section 4 7 SELF START EXAMPLE To preset Totaliser number to zero daily at midnight In totaliser configuration enter 0 as the Preset value for Totaliser 1 In timer configuration select 1 Timer number Timer 1 2 Enable enabled 3 Self start enabled 4 Date Any 5 Month Any 6 Hour Midnight 7 Minute 0 8 Second 0 9 Duration 0 125 10 Repeat after 0 11 Job number 1 12 Job category Totaliser 13 Action Preset 14 Totaliser Totaliser 1 15 On Active HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 145 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 Connections INTRODUCTION ASCII INPUT Note See Section 12 for details of the ASCII Printer Output option This mode allows the recorder to receive simple ASCII messages from for example barcode readers Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs Global Positioning Systems GPSs NMEA 0183 protocol etc Messages are sent to as many groups as are set up to receive them and become a part of these groups histories and appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays in the following format 23 08 05 10 25 06 Serial Message of up to 85 characters ME Date and time Source Message MODBUS RTU This allows the recorder s serial commun
608. tion 1 Channel 1 etc A list of channels required to be susceptible to the adjustment procedure together with their current values and their adjustment status 1 e Unadjusted or the time date of the previous adjustment if any 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 203 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 4 INPUT ADJUST Cont ADJUST PROCEDURE Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low end adjust page as shown in figure 4 6 4b Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Specify the sensor low point and connect the corresponding input Low Point 0 When the values below have settled select Apply 1 Channel 1 0 0026 Unadjusted 2 Channel 2 0 0000 jUnadjusted 3 Channel 3 0 0002 4 4 0 0002 Unadjusted 6 Channel 6 0 0000 Unadjusted Apply Discard Figure 4 6 4b Typical low end input adjust page Low Point Usually 0 but a different value can be entered here if required Apply the Low point value to the relevant input channels and wait some minutes for the recorder readings to become stable When the readings are stable press the Apply key to call the High end page depicted in figure 4 6 4c below Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Specify the sensor high point
609. tion and the result of the function is the average of the remaining channels The lowest value of any of the channels in the source group For example in a group of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4 8 2 and 6 the group minimum is 2 The required source group is selected by picklist Should a channel return a non valid value it is excluded from the calculation and the result of the function is the minimum of the remaining channels The highest value of any of the channels in the source group For example in a group of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4 8 2 and 6 the group maximum is 8 The required source group is selected by picklist Should a channel return a non valid value it is excluded from the calculation and the result of the function is the maximum of the remaining channels Note If a maths channel with a Group function is contained within its own source group then it will act on itself as well as on the other group contents thus changing the calculation For example if Group 1 were to contain channel 1 channel 2 and maths channel 1 where maths channel had the function Group Maximum for Group 1 then the Group Maximum would become latching function showing the highest value ever reached by channel 1 channel 2 or maths channel 1 since the group was configured In order to trace the instantaneous highest value channel 1 and channel 2 would have to be contained in e g Group 1 and the gro
610. tion Saturated Steam Heat Consumed y Inlet Flow Channel 17 Use Pressure y Inlet Pressure Channel 27 Inlet Dryness 23 8 Return Temperature Channel 3Y Units Units Discard Figure 4 3 111 Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate If Constant se lected a further box allows the value for the constant to be entered Allows the user to select Temperature C or Pressure MPa for the calculation Appears only if Use Temperature Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be en tered Appears only if Use Pressure Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam pressure If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam 0 no vapour 100 liquid Select Constant the number of the channel supplying the condensate temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Note See Saturated Steam Mass Flow above for details of pressure unit conversion GROUP MKT Similar in operation to MKT described above except that the MKT is derived from a specified group of points ra
611. to 400 70 to 200 220 to 630 60 to 250 50 to 170 200 to 850 200 to 600 200 to 850 Standard General Electric Co RC21 4 1966 JIS 1604 1989 DIN43760 1987 DIN43760 1987 IEC751 Eurotherm Recorders SA IEC751 Max linearisation error 0 02 C lt 0 01 C 0 01 C 0 01 C 0 01 C 0 01 C 0 09 C 0 01 C Thermocouple data Temperature scale 11590 0 05nA Off internal external remote Bias current Cold junction compensation types Remote CJC source input or maths channel Internal CJC error 1 max with instrument at 25 Internal CJC rejection ratio 50 1 minimum Upscale downscale drive Types High low or selectable for each thermocouple channel Additional error Typically O 01 C depends on wiring Detect current 57 Types ranges and accuracies See table T C type Overall range Standard Max linearisation error 0 to 400 C 1 7 C 400 to 1820 C 0 03 C 0 12 C 0 08 C 0 03 C 0 07 C 0 02 C 0 04 C 0 02 C 0 04 C 0 04 C 0 04 C 0 02 C 0 08 C 0 06 C 0 02 C 0 14 C 0 07 C 0 to 1820 IEC584 1 0 to 2300 010 2495 270 10 1000 010 2315 210 10 1200 270 10 1372 200 10 900 270 10 1300 50 10 1768 50 10 1768 270 10 400 200 10 600 50 10 1410 010 1370 010 1406 1888 Hoskins Hoskins IEC584 1 Hoskins IEC584 1 IEC584 1 DIN43
612. to 100 characters to appear in the Subject part of the e mail header The field does not appear if SMS Body Only is selected as the Protocol Allows the entry of up to 240 characters to appear as the body of the e mail The field does not appear if SMS Subject Only is selected as the Protocol Also referred to as Body Text If this checkbox in enabled one of the messages in the Message Configuration area can be selected to appear below the body text in the e mail Notes 1 Domain Name Service DNS must be enabled in the recorder network configuration section 4 5 2 if a mail server name is to be used 2 general message is generated if there are any invalid recipients any list who would not receive e mails Such messages may be viewed in Message Log section 3 1 4 User Guide HAO28910 Page 176 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 EMAILS Cont E MAIL DETAILS Figure 4 3 19b depicts an e mail using fictitious entries E Cold store alarm Message Plain Text File Edit view Insert Format Tools fiction Heln Instrument s Local Host address Reply Al Forward 3j or IP address if fixed Andy136 46Mailserver co uk First valid recipient address Sent Fri 29 04 2005 09 29 To Anne other Mailaddress Header Yet another Mailaddress Further valid recipients Subject Cold store alarm Subject entry
613. tor Notes Note details Faceplates On Off Channel Cycling Off Enter History Figure 3 4 1a Option Menu Typical 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 35 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 1 VERTICAL TREND DISPLAY Cont TIME CHANGE RECORDS For vertical trend mode only a line is drawn across the width of the chart whenever a time discontinuity in the record occurs These lines are volatile in real time i e they disappear if the display mode is changed or if a configuration page is called etc Red line A red line is drawn on the trend history chart at power up Blue line A blue line indicates that recording has been disabled enabled in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 or by a recording job section 4 7 10 Blue lines are not drawn when the Simulation Option is active Greenline green line appears if there has been a time change as a result of a clock job section 4 7 6 an SNTP synchronisation or by the operator physically changing the recorder time Note Changes from standard time to daylight saving time and back again are not green lined in this way TREND HISTORY Trend history allows the user to view the history of the display group The maximum amount that can be reviewed depends on a number of factors including how many points are configured how rapidly the traces are changing and so on At a recording rate of 20 mm hour see group configuration section 4 3 2 with all channels con
614. tor option is fitted the new user s access per mission list is printed on the chart NEW USER ID This field allows a User ID of up to 20 characters to be entered for a new user This ID is used when logging in using ID password entry technique that is when Login by user list is disabled as described in section 4 4 2 above NEW FULL USER NAME This field allows User name of up to 25 characters to be entered This name appears the current access level pushbutton at the top left corner of the display screen in operator notes and so on NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD These fields allow a password to be entered and confirmed If the password does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management if fitted section 4 4 2 a warning message Invalid Password appears when the Apply key is operated and password entry must be repeated BASED ON This picklist allows another user or access level to be used as a permissions template to simplify the configuration if several operators are to have identical permissions New Useri New Full New Password Retype Password Based On Operator v Add Apply Discard Figure 4 4 3 Add User display page 4 4 4 Remove user Selecting Remove User from the SECURITY picklist allows users to be removed from the user list The Remove key and the Apply key must both be use
615. trally behind the flap If an SD card is already fitted it is removed by pressing on the card to unlatch it then pulling the card out of the slot If a Compact Flash card is already fitted it is removed by a double operation of the eject button See details in figures 2 3 2a and 2 3 2b below Caution Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the filing structure on the device rendering it unusable For this reason archiving should be suspended section 4 1 wait for the green section of the disk icon section 3 1 3 to go white before the device is removed It is strongly recom mended that the Remove Media facility described in section 3 1 4 Summary menu be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device For recorders fitted with a lockable flap see also section 2 4 SD card Eject button Compact Push in Push out Press twice Flash card Figure 2 3 2a SD card details Figure 2 3 2b Compact Flash card details LED INDICATORS Three LED indicators are located above the card slot as shown in figure 2 3 2c below Card activity LED yellow Power watchdog LED green USBFront Power LED yellow Card slot Figure 2 3 2c indicating LEDs SD card Compact Flash card similar 2 3 3 USB Front Port A type A USB socket is located to the right of the Compact Flash SD Card slot This port can be used to connect a mouse keyboard a barcode scanner a
616. tring at the cursor posi tion Ok Used to save the new text string and to return to the page from which the keyboard was called Cancel Causes a return to the page from which the keyboard was called without saving the new string Notes 1 The character on each display key is always a capital letter whether or not the actual character being entered is in capitals or lower case 2 cursor keys mimic the function of the left and right arrow Navigation keys 3 alternative text may be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port behind the access flap or if the relevant option is fitted one of the USB ports at the rear of the instrument section 2 2 1 Cursor keys Text string all for password Z X Tabs show active keyboard Alphabet Alphabet 2 Numeric Symbols tab positions vary E E Caps Lock Overprint shown active Figure 3 3 1b Alphabet 1 keyboard 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 33 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION Cont TEXT STRING ENTRY Cont Text String Wm zu 1 u T T The E key is used to enter exponents 1 E i Alphabet Alphabet2 Numeric
617. ts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uintl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 intl6 Double String_60 c dccdudcocc coc String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write AEAA 44714 AEAB 44715 AEAD 44717 AEAF 44719 9 44729 44739 44740 5 44741 6 44742 7 44743 AECS 44744 9 44745 44746 AECB 44747 44748 AECD 44749 44750 44751 44752 AEDI 42253 AED2 44754 AED3 4
618. ts should be configured as shown in figure 12 6b See SW1 SW2 details in the TSP600 User s guide for details Figure 12 6a DIP switch access Figure 12 6b DIP switch element configuration Figure 12 6c SW3 location Figure 12 6d SW3 settings The illustrated switch settings segments 4 5 and 6 Off all other segments On give the following parameter val ues Baud Rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity Even Handshake Xon Xoff Settings other than these may result in no communications or unreliable communications with the printer See the TSP600 User s guide for more details of SW3 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 329 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS Note Portable case options are available only for the small frame recorder The various options described below come provided in a rugged carrying case as depicted in figure 13 below Itis possible that input output circuits can carry high voltages and this might prove dangerous if the safety earth con nection to the recorder is not in place e g the plug is pulled out at any time whilst such hazardous voltages are present Therefore the following warning must be complied with WARNING For portable case instruments only I O connections must be Low Voltage i e maximum 33V ac RMS 46 7V ac peak 70V dc unless the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maint
619. tus put Figure B9h Config menu structure sheet 5 Demand Write Slave 1 Furn 1 Recorder y Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 Y Point Type Channel Y Point Number Descriptor Source Default Allow Constant Edits On Error Write Default Disable Retries Send On Power Up 1 Write 1 Channel 1 0 4 Discard Slave 1 Furn Recorder 24 Parameter Comms Channelv Scaling High Low Y Scale Low 0 Scaling items appear only Scale High 100 for some slave types Point Type Channel Point Number Process Value Descriptor Source Default On Error Write Default 1 Medium Priorityv Output 1 1 Channel 4v 2 Apply Discard Detect All Slaves User Guide Page 374 HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure B9b Figure B9d Figure B9e Figure B9f Figure B9g Figure B9h Fig B9j Figure Figure Instrument Groups Channels Views Archive Events Event Buttons Messages User Linearisations Batch Maths Totalisers Counters Timers Connections Master Comms Output Channels Demand Writes Emails Reports Options Options Section 4 3 21 Master Comms Devices 32 V
620. tware Use of the configuration editor is not permitted if traceability is to be maintained If fitted Event buttons section 4 3 7 are not included in the Require Signing Require Authorization re gime described above Instead each individual button can be configured to require signing or to require both signing and authorization If a large number of configuration changes are made with Audit trail enabled then the number of messages produced may result in the total amount of data generated exceeding the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available particularly if there are a large number of points config ured The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed and a message Recording failed internal overflow Slowing recording interval of fastest group s ap pears to draw the user s attention to the situation Password Change on Expiry If this check box is enabled then the first time a user tries to login after his or her password has expired a dialogue box appears asking the user to enter a new password Only when this new password has been entered and confirmed will the user be able to access the recorder configura tion Security Management Option The new password is not written to the Security Manager until the next deploy after which the expiry period configured for the user within Security Manage ment is restored The interim expiry period is set to 24 hours and the deploy mus
621. tween 1 and 247 to be set up for use when the instrument is acting as a Modbus slave MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED When using MODBUS it is possible by checking this field to allow a host computer to access the recorder without its first having to supply a valid User name and Password This box must be checked if this unit is acting as a Modbus slave in order for the unit to be detected Once communications have been established Modbus security can be ena bled providing that the Slave s Remote user name and password have been entered at the Master See also section 8 2 4 COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT Allows a number of seconds between 1 and 999 to be entered If none of the channels set to Comms is communi cated with within this period an event source Comms channel timeout is set and remains set until the next communi cation An entry of 0 disables the time out HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 63 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION Cont PRESET HOUR Enter an hours number between 0 and 23 for use with Clock Job Preset clock PRESET MINUTE Enter a minutes number between and 59 for use with Clock Job Preset clock Note See section 4 7 for a description of recorder jobs and section 4 5 1 for further details of time synchroni sation DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS Checking this box prevents instrument alarm messages from appearing on the screen SHOW OPERATO
622. two faceplates associated with this display mode one above the chart showing the current channel s de scriptor and its digital value the other to the right of the chart showing a bargraph representation of the current channel s value together with a scale showing the low and high range values for the channel Touching either of these faceplates causes the current channel number to increment To select a particular channel to be the current channel the relevant pen icon can be touched In either case the bargraph and the background colour of the channel descriptor take the colour of the new current channel There is no horizontal trend history function Touching the trace for a few seconds or using the Option key then Enter History calls the Vertical trend history page described in section 3 4 1 above Time and date are printed on the chart immediately to the right of grid lines and it is to these grid lines that the printed time and date relate User Guide HAO28910 Page 38 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 2 HORIZONTAL TREND MODE Cont Below the chart is a message bar containing the latest message If there is more than one message an arrow head icon appears near the right hand end of the message bar If this arrow head appears then touching the message bar calls a pop up box figure 3 4 2b which displays the latest messages If there are more messages than can be displayed in th
623. u sau RE eee eee eres 371 Adaptive 66 Control 4 4 4 4 4 187 Eiledormats x inire ree nde ge sat 88 89 Key PERS ott ee a T 238 239 Jobs PUPP eee eee eee eee eee eee eee reece eee eee 220 Maths function Sr PERSE EARN RS e 107 Key Pere eee eee eee eee eee eee reer eee ere eee eee eee eee eer 52 Add USEF eee een ema D 195 ME CMM 368 Configuration menu ene 376 2 52 Address To host 54 Allocation MODBUS 272 Period selection 86 AENEA EN EM REM 196 2 8 93 S Po MORIR SN IRR MEER SANE 196 354 To local memory device 69 Map MODBUS 270 Remote EE 87 Adjust eio em e Nat todo tun 69 TN NN 203 ES Rex UM ee NERA 146 UN Nee Ute eet 314 Codes 364 P eerte 314 Printer es 320 Advanced Configuration menu eese 373 Editilevel 240 Specification 0 350 Parameters 247 At Version 211 Alarm Audible WAININGS e 231 Acknowledgement e 21 Audit
624. ue changes by the specified amount or more within the specified time period more than 3 degrees in a minute in this example then the alarm becomes active The recorder uses its iteration rate of 125 msec 1 8th second as the time base for it calculations For our example 3 degrees per minute equates to 3 60 degrees per second or 3 60 x 8 0 00625 degrees per iteration If a change greater than this 1s detected then the alarm becomes active In order to reduce sensitivity an averaging period can be configured This means that an average of all the 1 8th sec ond samples is taken over the specified period and the alarm becomes active only if the average value exceeds the specified rate of change Configuring a dwell time can also reduce jitter because if during the specified dwell time any one sample is non ac tive then the elapsed dwell time is reset to zero The alarm becomes active only after the dwell time has elapsed i e only if the rate of change has been exceeded for every software cycle throughout the specified dwell time HAO28910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 79 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont Absolute high alarm definitions Absolute low alarm definitions Threshold Input signal Hysteresis 7 Hysteresis no Dwell 0 secs Hysteresis no Dwell 0 secs Hysteresis no Dwell D secs Hysteresis no Dwell D secs H
625. uired 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Description Uintl6 See note 1 Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access F8C3 63683 8 5 63685 F8C6 63686 Start Addr Hex Dec 2 1 Register Length Channel 2 value Channel 2 status Current process value PV Channel status See note 1 Read only F8C7 63687 F8C9 63689 2 1 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uint16 Read only Read only Read Write Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 2 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Channel 2 alarms F8CA 63690 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Re
626. umber 1 Mathi Y Value 0 0000 Units Function Relative Humidity Y Wet bulb temperature Channel 1 Dry bulb temperature Channel2 V Pressure Channel 3 Y Psychrometric Constant 6 66E 4 Units Units Figure 4 3 11q Relative humidity configuration menu 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 125 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE A zirconia oxygen probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia At elevated temperatures such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe temperature and to the log of the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends OXYGEN CONCENTRATION In order to measure oxygen concentrations one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be measured whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere For most applications air provides a suitable reference reference input 20 95 for air The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple The temperature effect on the thermocouple is such that for successful operation the probe temperature must be greater than 973K 700 C The equation solved by the maths function is ME uM 100 0496 xT 2 where 2 Partial pressure of oxygen in the sampled gas 96 partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere 46 20 95 for air Electromotive force emf
627. up 1 vertical trend display as depicted in figure 3 but this can be edited in Config Views to be any of the other available groups display modes Horizontal trend Vertical bargraph etc Causes the top level Operator page to appear The appearance of this display is dictated by the security level that the recorder is set to and by the access level of the user As despatched from the factory the recorder is in logged out mode and the Operator page contains only Archive Security and System keys Further details appear in Access to configuration below Allows the file system in that area of Flash memory that is accessible to the user and the file system on any bulk storage device fitted to be viewed See section 5 for details This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when it is safe to do so Touching the key results in either an to remove archive media DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media message as appropriate For more details see section 3 1 4 Unlock Flap Replaces Remove Media above for recorders fitted with the lockable flap option section 2 4 Go to View Allows the user to select the display mode for the current group as shown in figure 3 2 1a Display modes not enabled for this group in Config Views configuration page section 4 3 4 do not appear As an alter native display modes can be scrolled through using the up and down arrow navigation keys Goto Vie
628. up maximum channel contained in say Group 2 but with a source of Group 1 Slave Comms Stopwatch Allows a process value for the maths channel to be communicated over the Modbus link This causes the value of the maths channel to increment in milliseconds The value can be displayed in milliseconds PV format numeric or in HH MM SS PV format elapsed time The value can be held using a Disable job or set to zero either using a reset job or by the operation of the Reset now button in the maths configuration page See section 4 7 fora description of jobs The function value is retained during power off Note The scale low and high values are displayed in numeric format for both numeric and elapsed time display formats 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 107 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont Copy Polynomial Fvalue Switch Linear Mass Flow Root Mass Flow Rolling Average MKT 10 to the power Group Latched Minimum Group Latched Maximum Sample and Hold Square Root High Select Low Select Saturated Steam Mass Flow Saturated Steam Heat Flow Copies the value of a selected point to the maths channel being configured Allows extra alarms to be set up for the copied point Provides a polynomial curve fit for the specified point using up to 8 orders This function calculates equivalent time at sterilizing temperature
629. ure 3 2 Navigation keys 3 2 1 Key functions Page up Page down Left arrow Right arrow Option Root Used as appropriate to recall the previous higher level display page to call the previous display mode and to scroll through previous text entries Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Close folder key Used where appropriate to call a further lower level display page to call the next display mode and to scroll through previous text entries Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Open folder key Used a to select the previous group b to navigate backwards through a text string when editing or c to select the previous channel whilst in configuration Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Left cursor key Used a to select the next group b to navigate forwards through a text string when editing or c to select the next channel whilst in configuration Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Right cursor key Calls a pop up Options menu allowing the user to carry out functions such as entering quitting history turning channel cycling on and off etc according to context Calls the Root Menu as described below To quit the Root menu touch the root key again ROOT MENU KEYS Home Operator File Remove Media Causes a return to the Home page from any page in the recorder As delivered the Home page is the Gro
630. urotherm Limited to be a complete or up to date de scription of the product Invensys EUROTHERM Restriction of Hazardous Substances RoHS Product group 6100A 6180A 6100XIO 6180XIO Table listing restricted substances Chinese PR Bl ER LELIILELNTi 6100A 6180A 6100XIO PETTY ITER TT TET Te SJ T1 1363 2006 BO ESUEBSEREE GREAT 19 9 mis BUR SUT11363 2006 REMEBER Restricted Materials Table Product Toxic and hazardous substances and elements 6100A 6180A 6100 6180XIO PCBA Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Approval 7 _____ Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager Mu lo waa aa 15 2004 140294700670 CN23195 Issue 1 Feb 07 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF SECTIONS Section EFFECTIVITY INTRODUCTION pcie PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY SETTING UP THE RECORDER
631. used to select a particular batch record If Name files by Batch is enabled a separate history file is created for each batch For each batch start a start message is printed DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start User Full Name Where DD MM Y Y is the date HH MM SS is the time and User Full name is either the current user name the secu rity level e g Engineer or Automatic if the batch has been initiated by job or Modbus if triggered remotely A similar message is printed at Batch Stop There are no stop messages associated with continuous batch selection In addition to the above start stop messages up to six lines of text can if required be printed on the chart at the start of a batch and if required at the end of a batch messages are in two parts which for the sake of this document are called Headings and Values The Headings are entered in Fields 1 to 6 in Batch Configuration The Values asso ciated with these headings are entered by the operator at initiation AUDITOR MESSAGES If either Auditor option is fitted a Config Security Revision message appears immediately after the Batch Start mes sage DD MM YY HH MM SS Config Revision NNNNNN Security Revision SSSSSS DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start User Full Name BATCH SUMMARY A Batch Summary page can be displayed from the Summary menu described in section 3 1 4 above HAO28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 99 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPH
632. uthorize Perform Upgrades Event Permission 1 Event Permission 2 Event Permission 3 Event Permission 4 Event Permission 5 Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes Force Change of Password Enter Batch Data Allow web server Frederick Bloggs v Password functions do not appear for Logged out level of access Remote user fields appear only if Connect from remote is enabled Password functions do not appear for Logged out level of access These fields appear only if the relevant options are fitted y Enabled These fields appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is enabled Action Demand Writes appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted lt lt lt IX lt I ITIN lt lt lt lt lt S II TI XIX Apply Discard Figure 4 4 1 Access permissions menu 028910 Issue 4 Aug 07 User Guide Page 185 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont ACCESS WHEN Allows an access level or an individual user name to be selected from a pick list NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD For all levels except Logged Out these fields allow a new password to be entered for the selected access level or User The password must also be entered in the Re type Password field If the two differ a warning message Passwor
633. utput board connector location s and pinout Job Number 1 Y Category Drive Relay v Relay Board 1 v Relay Number m While Active Yl amp Select Active Inactive or Unacknowledged Select Relay Figure 4 7 2 Relay job menu layout 4 7 3 Totaliser category If the Totaliser option is fitted section 4 3 12 the following jobs become available Preset Loads the selected totaliser with the value set up in Preset in the totaliser s configuration menu Preset Group Loads all the totalisers in the specified group with their Preset values Disable Stops the specified totaliser accumulating Disable Group Stops all totalisers in the specified group Note If more than one job is set up to disable a particular totaliser then any of these jobs going active will disable the totaliser Job Number 17 Select Preset Disable Category Totaliser ren Group or Disable Group Action Preset Group Select Required Group Group 1 Group 1 vf Select Active Inactive On Acknowledgement 47 or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 3 Totaliser job menu layout group action 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 213 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 4 Message category One or more messages section 4 3 8 can be directed to the display to All groups or to a Specified Group The mes sages must be contiguous e g messages
634. via Bridge only users with Connect from Remote enabled appear in the user list See section 4 4 1 for details 2 Full Bridge requires some small amount of space on the PC disk The message There appears to be no free disk space on the client Create some space and run again appears if there is insufficient space 3 If an attempt is made to establish more than one Full Bridge connection between a PC and an instrument the message You are already running a Full Bridge session with this instrument The new session will run as Bridge Lite appears 4 If an attempt is made to establish a Full Bridge connection using the anonymous user name the follow ing message appears You are authenticating Full Bridge using the anonymous user name This provides guest read only cess To establish Full Bridge connection you must use a different user name Please change and try again 5 The maximum number of Bridge sessions that can be run simultaneously on one recorder is 10 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Jun 07 Page 225 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 1 1 Minimum PC requirements P90 running Windows NT 2000 XP Home XP Pro Server 2003 32MB RAM 50MB free hard disk space Graphics drive capable of displaying gt 256 colours recommended Sound card required for audible alarms feature section 6 5 amp WN SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION PDA not supported this issue of software
635. visible kn 252 Whilst active inactive unacknowledged 213 ll E ete needa tha 246 Wiring tne 320 Event INDUS oie er dere cp eve 8 laput board 7 262 Outputs Analogue t ete ete due 8 e 8 Serial COMMS et remote cto emen 9 146 ien 5 to 88 Max min wire sizes 5 Maximum 5 Supply 2 9 Transmitter power supply Isolated i neenon 319 With unapplied Changes 191 Worst case error calculation 347 Write Enable inne Redde Mase 172 1 emp RI IRR 173 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 397 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank User Guide HAO28910 Page 398 Issue 4 Aug 07 Inter Company sales and service locations AUSTRALIA Sydney Eurotherm Pty Ltd Telephone 61 2 9838 0099 Fax 61 2 9838 9288 E mail info au eurotherm com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH Telephone 43 1 7987601 Fax 43 1 7987605 E mail info at eurotherm com BELGIUM amp LUXEMBURG Eurotherm S A N V Telephone 432 85 274080 Fax 32 8
636. w also offers an alternative means of entry to the Alarm Summary page described in section 3 1 4 and also allows entry to the current group s Message Log pages described below User Guide 028910 28 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 2 1 KEY FUNCTIONS Cont ROOT MENU KEYS Cont Goto Group Allows a group to be selected for display Groups which are not display enabled in the Config Views page section 4 3 4 are greyed An alarm icon appears as shown for groups 1 and 4 in figure 3 2 1b be low for any group containing one or more points in alarm The icon flashes if any of the group s alarms have not been acknowledged Notes 1 If there is insufficient space on the display screen for all the enabled groups or views More keys ap pear as necessary to allow further items to be displayed for selection 2 Innormal operating e g trend displays the right arrow key can be used to scroll through groups in as cending group number order The left arrow key can be used to scroll through groups in descending group number order Goto Group Alarm Summary Message Log Vertical Trend Horizontal Tre Vertical Trend Horizontal mode appears only if it is enabled for the t Vertical Bargraj E User screen keys appear only if a User Screens Horizontal Bargraph option is fitted and the relevant screen is enabled for the cur
637. x A for details of stored data 1 Isolate the recorder from supply power and remove the recorder from the panel if fitted 2 Remove the recorder cover by removing the Four Torx headed screws A and the Pozidriv headed screw B and then lifting the cover up and out under the gasket C Large Frame Note Drawings are not to the same scale 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 357 100 180 MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B2 2 1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT Cont 3 With the cover removed the battery board is accessible allowing the exhausted battery to be slid out of its holder and the replacement battery to be inserted up Small Frame Battery type BR2330 EN Part Number PA261095 Disconnect connector for access to battery Large Frame Note drawings are not to the same scale User Guide 28910 358 Issue 4 Aug 07 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B2 3 FLAP RELEASE For recorders fitted with the lockable flap option section 2 4 it is possible to unlatch the flap from inside the recorder as follows 1 Remove the recorder cover as described in section 2 2 1 above 2 Press down on the solenoid actuator to release the flap Fig 2 3a Flap release small frame units Fig 2 3b Flap release large frame units Note drawings are not to the same scale 28910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 359 100 180
638. y Figure 4 3 15b Serial Communications configuration menu ASCII input Port Serial 1 Y Setect port Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Port Serial 1 V Select port Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Protocol Modbus Master Connection EIA232 Y Baud Rate 19200Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1Y Select 1 or 2 Parity None 5 None Odd or Even Timeout 1000 ms Enable error code B Enable Talk Through Protocol Modbus Slave v Connection EIA232 Y Baud Rate 192007 Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1 yj Select 1 or 2 Parity None V Select None Odd or Even Apply H Discard Apply Discard Figure 4 3 15c Figure 4 3 15d Serial Communications configuration menu Modbus slave Serial Communications configuration menu Modbus master HA028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 147 100 180MM PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 CONNECTIONS Cont CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS SERIAL PORT Allows the user to select the port to be used for serial communications LINK ERROR COUNT A Link error count is provided for every slave The count is incremented every time there is a framing error a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy check CRC error The Reset Error Count key is used to reset the count to zero PROTOCOL For the Serial communicati
639. y 7 Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for RGB definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uintl6 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uintl6 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only
640. y Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write A9CO 43456 43457 A9C3 43459 9 5 43461 A9CF 43471 A9D9 43481 42482 A9DB 42483 A9DC 42484 A9DD 42485 A9DE 42486 A9DF 42487 A9EO 42488 A9EI 42489 A9E2 42490 A9E3 42491 A9EA 42492 A9ES 42493 A9E6 42494 9 7 42495 A9ES 43496 A9E9 43497 43498 A9EE 43502 43532 AA2A 43562 48 43592 AA66 43622 67 43623 AA68 43624 AA69 43625 AA87 43655 5 43685 43715 AAEI 43745 AAFF 43775 43805 AB3B 43835 59 43865 77 43895 95 43925 ABB3 43955 43985 1 Bee eee 028910 Issue 4 Jun 07 User Guide Page 293 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 4 Parameter Name Description Access Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length Grp4 Trend type Grp4 Trend rate Grp4 Archive rate Grp4 Descriptor Spare Grp4 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp4 Text length Grp4 Text time stamp Grp4 Read text R
641. y setup section 4 4 3 below then the Full User Name is displayed instead of the access level 3 1 2 Page name Initially this shows the current group s descriptor The name changes according to context for example Operator or Config Archive If the Batch option is fitted this area contains batch information as well as the page name Touching the area calls the Batch Status page See section 4 3 10 for further Batch details 028910 User Guide Issue 4 Aug 07 Page 15 100 180 PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 3 Alarm indication This area of the display can contain a number of status icons Instrument alarm Channel alarm Battery change Disk status FTP in progress Configuration locked and so on Pressing this area of the screen calls the Summary menu section 3 1 4 allowing the user to view active instrument alarms to acknowledge all channel alarms to display the Alarm Summary or Message Log page Media removal strategy is also controlled from this pop up If the access flap option is fitted see also section 2 4 For channel alarm symbols refer to Current Trace Alarm Icons above INSTRUMENT ALARM This indicator appears flashing if any of the following errors are active The instrument alarm summary page de scribed in Section 3 1 4 allows the user to view such instrument alarms as are active Archive failed message Battery backed RAM cleared Clock failure Channel erro
642. ysteresis yes D Hysteresis yes Dwell 0 Secs Dwell 0 Secs i D Hysteresis yes Hysteresis yes Dwell D Secs Dwell D Secs alarm active D is in seconds up to 999999 Hysteresis is in engineering units alarm active D is in seconds up to 999999 Hysteresis is in engineering units Deviation out alarm definitions Hysteresis Deviation 7 Reference Reference Deviation Deviation 27 Deviation Hysteresis Hysteresis F Input signal Hysteresis Input signal Hysteresis no Hysteresis no Dwell 0 secs Dwell 0 secs Hysteresis no Hysteresis no Dwell D secs Dwell D secs Hysteresis yes j Hysteresis yes Dwell 0 Secs Dwell 0 Secs Hysteresis yes D Hysteresis yes Dwell D Secs Umi Dwell D Secs alarm active D is in seconds up to 999999 Hysteresis is in engineering units alarm active D is in seconds up to 999999 Hysteresis is in engineering units Figure 4 3 3e Deviation alarm definitions Rate of change alarm definitions Rise symbol 4 Fall symbol b Rate of change rise active d Rate of change fall active mi 1 Change Time units Present seconds minutes or hours time A rate of change alarm is active if the channel value changes by more than 1 amount unit in less than 1 time unit Dwell delays the alarm on time Averaging removes the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Stovax 5 Stove User Manual  s. & as ltd universal programmable scrolling lcd user`s manual  Honeywell HWBL1013B Use and Care Manual  Avvertenze ImportAntI conservAre sempre Queste IstruzIonI  SL-25652 - Emerson Network Power  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file